Manual Scriptcase9 En-Us PDF

1
General Overview
HOME › INTRODUCTION
What’s ScriptCase?
ScriptCase is a complete development tool. Having a friendly web interface, ScriptCase creates PHP applications extremely fast, with quality. Builded to save your time, reduce
your costs, gain productivity and integrating your development team. You’ll be able to create many types of applications like Grid, Chart, Form, Calendars and many other
applications that ScriptCase offers. Installing on a web server, ScriptCase can be accessed simultaneously by many developers through the browser, allowing remote and
collaborative development. The source code is in PHP and it works independently of the tool, allowing your deployment to work on any Web Server if it supports PHP.
How does ScriptCase work?

ScriptCase works generating web applications in PHP. Always relating the content with the most used databases on the market.
Which source code is generated?

ScriptCase generates (PHP, JavaScript, HTML and AJAX) source code. The generated code is totally independent from the tool and can be published on a web server with PHP
enabled. The PHP language is free (GNU) and can be used on a operating system (Windows, Linux or Mac), PHP processes are done on the Server.
1
Accessing Scriptcase
HOME › INTRODUCTION › ACCESSING SCRIPTCASE
When accessing ScriptCase you will be presented to the login screen where you will insert the username and password.
For your first access, the username and password is admin .
After validating the username and password you will be able to access all of Scriptcase available functions. The “Administrator” user has privileged access to all the ScriptCase
functionalities, he is also able to create new “Users”.
To proceed with the password recovery, it is necessary that has the SMTP server configured for a successful process. Look here how to realize this procedure.
1
General Overview
HOME › SCRIPTCASE INSTALLATION
ScriptCase installer comprises PHP 7.0, Apache 2.4 and Source Guardian Loader.
The installation process will be described according to the Operating System.
Instaling ScriptCase is pretty easy! Select your operating system, follow the tutorial descriptions and in a few steps you will get how to install and use ScriptCase.
1
Installer for Windows
HOME › SCRIPTCASE INSTALLATION › INSTALLER FOR WINDOWS
ScriptCase’s installer is an executable file for Windows. An application that automatically extracts the APACHE, PHP and SCRIPTCASE configuration to your operating system.
Supported Operational Systems:
Windows Server
2008 SP2
2008 R2 SP1
2012
2012 SP2
2016
Windows
7 SP1
Vista SP2
8.1
10
For Windows 7, it is required to have the modules below installed:
Microsoft Redistributable Visual C++ Packages (2008, 2012, 2013, 2015).
Service pack 1.
That is what will be installed automatically on your Operating System:
Apache Web Server 2.4.15
PHP 7.0 with the extensions mbstring, zip and gd enabled.
Source Guardian 11.0.6
Scriptcase 9
Before proceeding with the installation, it is recommended don’t have any other web environment (XAMP, Zend Server, etc.) installed on the operating system. We recommend
using the SQLite database for the ScriptCase installation.
This manual describes the ScriptCase installation in 2 steps:
1: Select the installer configurations.
2: Execute ScriptCase.
Selecting the configurations on the installer

1 - Selecting the language of the installation.
Language: We can select the language in which the content will be displayed in the installation process. This step doesn’t select the language for the ScriptCase interface, only for the
installation.
Click on Ok to continue.
2 - “Welcome” Message.
2
This window displays the installer “Welcome” message.
Click on Next to continue.
3 - License Agreement.
Do you accept this license? : You should accept the terms before continuing.
4 - Installation Directory.
The predetermined installation path is “C:\Program Files (x86)\NetMake\v9". Don’t change this path unless it is necessary.
Installation Directory : Define the installation path for ScriptCase.
: This button allows you to select a directory or create a new folder.
5 - Apache Configuration.
3
Port : This option will define on which port the Apache service will run. We recommend use the predetermined value.
Administrator Email: This email will be for the Apache administrator. It is an Apache configuration , not from ScriptCase.
Apache Domain: The Apache Domain should be defined here. We recommend use the predetermined value.
PHP Timezone: Select your Timezone.
6 - Ready to Install.
Click on Next to install ScriptCase.
Progress Bar : Displays the overall progress of installation.
7 - Allow the Apache to run in a private and public network (Firewall)

4
You should check the two options so that the execution of the ScriptCase’s Apache can work on your Operating System.
8 - Completing the Installation.
View “Readme” File : When clicking on finish, will be displayed the “Readme” file.
Open Scriptcase 9.0 : When clicking on finish, ScriptCase will start.
Click on “Finish” to complete the process.
Using Scriptcase
To access your ScriptCase, open the browser and inform the local IP and the port that you informed in the beggining of the installation ( Apache Configuration). Ex:
http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase
5
1
Installer for Linux
HOME › SCRIPTCASE INSTALLATION › INSTALLER FOR LINUX
ScriptCase’s installer is an executable file for Linux. An application that automatically extracts the APACHE, PHP and SCRIPTCASE configuration to your operating system.
Apache Web Server 2.4
SourceGuardian Loader
Scriptcase 9
Before proceeding with the installation, it is recommended don’t have any other web environment (XAMP, Zend Server, etc.) installed on the operating system. It is also
recommended that you know the basic shell commands to use the terminal(shell). We recommend use the SQLite database for the ScriptCase installation.
This manual describes the ScriptCase installation in 3 steps:
1: Execute the ScriptCase Installer.
Executing the ScriptCase Installer

1 - You can access the folder where the installer is stored using the command cd .
Ex: user@computer:~$ cd /folder/of/download
The installer requires permissions to make some changes to your system. You need to grant administrator permissions (also known as “root permission”) to the installer.
2 - Grant access to the root using sudo su and insert the password (if necessary).
Ex: user@computer:~/folder/of/download$ sudo su
3 - Give permissions to run the installation file.
Ex: user@computer:~/folder/of/downloads$ chmod 777 scriptcase_linux_installer_x86_64_en_us_v9.0.000.run
4 - Execute the installation file.
Ex: user@computer:~/folder/of/downloads$ ./scriptcase_linux_installer_x86_64_en_us_v9.0.000.run

1 - Selecting the installation language.
Language: We can select the language that will be displayed in the installation process. This step doesn’t select the language for the ScriptCase interface, only for the installation.
2
The predetermined installation path is “/opt/NetMake/v9/”. Don’t change this path unless it is necessary.
3
Progress Bar : Displays the overall installation progress.

4
Using ScriptCase
1
Installer for MacOS
HOME › SCRIPTCASE INSTALLATION › INSTALLER FOR MACOS
ScriptCase installer is an executable file for MacOS. An application that automatically extracts the APACHE, PHP and SCRIPTCASE configuration to your operating system.
Apache Web Server 2.4.15
Source Guardian 11.0.6
Scriptcase 9
Before proceeding with the installation, it is recommended don’t have any other web environment installed (XAMP, Zend Server, etc.) installed on the operating system. It is
also recommended that you know the basic shell commands to use the terminal(shell). We recommend using the SQLite database for the ScriptCase installation.
This manual describes the installation of ScriptCase in 2 steps:

1 - Selecting the installation language.
Language: We can select the language that will be displayed in the installation process. This step doesn’t select the language for the ScriptCase interface, only for the installation.
2
The predetermined installation path is “/Applications/NetMake/v9/”. Don’t change this path unless it is necessary.
3
Progress Bar : Displays the installation overall progress.
Using ScriptCase
4
1
Installing PHP 7.0 - Windows
HOME › SCRIPTCASE INSTALLATION › INSTALLING PHP 7.0 - WINDOWS
This Article will describe the PHP 7.0 and Apache 2.4 installation to ScriptCase use.
Supported Operating Systems:
Windows Server
2008 SP2
2008 R2 SP1
2012
2012 SP2
2016
Windows
7 SP1
Vista SP2
8.1
10
Necessary Files:
PHP 7.0: Click Here
Apache 2.4: Click Here
mod_Fcgi: Click Here
SourceGuardian Loader: Click Here
You should download PHP 7.0 NTS ( x86 or x64 ), Apache 2.4 ( x86 or x64 ) and mod_fcgi ( x86 or x64 ).
After downloading, extract the PHP and Apache files in your C: directory of your Operating System.
Rename the PHP folder to php and the Apache folder to Apache24.
Extract the modfcgi file, and copy the file mod_fcgid.so to the folder C:\Apache24\modules
Setting up Apache
Edit the file httpd.conf located in C:\Apache24\conf\
Add the content below after the last line #LoadModule
LoadModule fcgid_module modules/mod_fcgid.so FcgidInitialEnv PHPRC "c:/php" AddHandler fcgid-script .php FcgidWrapper "c:/php/php-cgi.exe" .php
Still in the httpd.conf search for #ServerName www.example.com:80 and change to #ServerName localhost:80
Change the content of the directive <IfModule dir_module> according to example below:
<IfModule dir_module> DirectoryIndex index.html index.php index.phtml </IfModule>
Add the text: Options ExecCGI on the directive Directory “c/:Apache24/htdocs”

2
Search for IfModule mime_module and add the content below: `<Directory “c:/php”> AllowOverride None Options None Require all granted
</Directory>`
Apache Installation
Access the command prompt with the Administrator privileges and run the command below:
c:\Apache24\bin\httpd.exe -k install
Important: If occours an error, you might be informed that the file msvcr110.dll is missing, so you could download the file clicking here. Extract and place the file in the
directory: C:\Windows\System and C:\Windows\System32. Run the command again in the command prompt.
Setting up PHP
Access the PHP folder in C:\ and rename the php.ini-development file to php.ini
Edit the php.ini file, search for extension_dir and assign this value “C:\php\ext”
Activate this extensions listed below (You just need to remove the (;) from the start of each line) extension=php_bz2.dll extension=php_curl.dll extension=php_gd2.dll extension=php_imap.dll
extension=php_interbase.dll extension=php_ldap.dll extension=php_mbstring.dll extension=php_exif.dll extension=php_mysql.dll extension=php_mysqli.dll extension=php_oci8.dll
extension=php_pdo_firebird.dll extension=php_pdo_mssql.dll extension=php_pdo_mysql.dll extension=php_pdo_oci.dll extension=php_pdo_odbc.dll extension=php_pdo_pgsql.dll
extension=php_pdo_sqlite.dll extension=php_pgsql.dll extension=php_pspell.dll extension=php_shmop.dll extension=php_sqlite.dll extension=php_sqlite3.dll extension=php_xmlrpc.dll
extension=php_xsl.dll extension=php_zip.dll
Important: By default some PHP functions are disabled, but they are important for ScriptCase. Access the php.ini file and change this item disable_functions according to the
example below: disable_functions= ““
3
Setup the TimeZone according to your region. You need to use the value available at the PHP documentation Click Here to view
Save all this modifications.
Restart the Apache service using the command (Use this command in a cmd with the Administrator privileges.):
c:\Apache24\bin\httpd.exe -k restart
Enabling SourceGuardian Loader

Extract the file downloaded.
Copy the ixed.7.0.win file to the folder c:\php\ext.
Edit the php.ini file, at the end place the content below:
[SourceGuardian] zend_extension=C:\php\ext\ixed.7.0.win
Restart the Apache service using this command (Use this command in a cmd with the Administrator privileges.): c:\Apache24\bin\httpd.exe -k restart
Scriptcase Manual Installation

Download ScriptCase with the extension zip at www.scriptcase.net and extract it on the root of your webserver.
After extracting, rename the folder to scriptcase.
Access Scriptcase from your browser using the url below:

http://127.0.0.1/scriptcase
By default, the selected language is English.
By default the selected language is English.
Verifying the necessary extensions for ScriptCase to work and the modules for the database connections.
4
Typical Installation
On this option, ScriptCase will be installed with the default settings.
Login Screen.
Login Screen.
Custom Installation
On this option, the user will choose the settings for the installation.
5
Verify the system’s directory permissions.
VVerify the system’s directory permissions.
We can choose the database that ScriptCase will use to store the data in.
We can
choose the database that ScriptCase will use to store the data in.
Displaying the ScriptCase’s tables creation.
Displaying the
ScriptCase’s tables creation.
Setting up the user to access ScriptCase.

6
Finishing the custom installation
Login Screen.
Login Screen.
1
Installing PHP 7.0 - Linux
HOME › SCRIPTCASE INSTALLATION › INSTALLING PHP 7.0 - LINUX
Ubuntu
Debian
CentOS\RHEL
OpenSuse
Necessary Files: SourceGuardian Loader: Click Here
Setting Up PHP
1 - Access the terminal (shell) and execute the command below to use the superuser (root):
sudo su
2 - Execute the command below to install PHP:
apt-get install php7.0 php7.0-dev php7.0-cli
3 - Accept the installation dependencies.
4 - Verify the PHP version by executing the command below:
php -v
Important: By default some PHP functions are disabled, but they are important for ScriptCase. Access the php.ini file ( /etc/php/7.0/apache2/php.ini ) and change this item
disable_functions according to the exemple below:
5 - Setup the TimeZone according to your region. You need to use the value available at the PHP documentation Click Here to view
Activating the Database’s Extensions:

PostgreSQL:
apt-get install php7.0-pgsql
MySQL:
apt-get install php7.0-mysql
SQLite:
apt-get install php7.0-sqlite
FireBird:
apt-get install php7.0-interbase
ODBC:
apt-get install php7.0-odbc
SyBase:
apt-get install php7.0-sybase
Activating the GD library
This library is necessary to render the images.
1 - Use the command below:
apt-get install php7.0-gd
2 - Accept the installation dependencies.

1 - Create a folder to place the file ixed.7.0.lin
2
sudo mkdir /etc/lib/php/7.0/sourceguardian
2 - Copy the file ixed.7.0.lin that was downloaded according to your architecture to the folder /etc/lib/php/7.0/sourceguardian
cp ixed.7.0.lin /etc/lib/php/7.0/sourceguardian
3 - Configure the permission to Total Control for this folder:
chmod 777 -R /etc/lib/php/7.0/sourceguardian
4 - Edit the php.ini file and add the content below to the end of the file:
[SourceGuardian] zend_extension=/etc/lib/php/7.0/sourceguardian/ixed.7.0.lin
5 - Restart the Apache service using the command below:
sudo /etc/init.d/apache2 restart


3
Login Screen.
Login Screen.
Custom Installation
4
We can
Displaying the
Login Screen.
5
Login Screen.
1
Installing PHP 7.0 - Mac
HOME › SCRIPTCASE INSTALLATION › INSTALLING PHP 7.0 - MAC
Mac
El Captain
Sierra
Necessary Files:
SourceGuardian Loader: Click Here
Setting up PHP
Access the terminal (shell) and execute the command below to use the superuser (root):
sudo su
Execute the command below to install PHP:

curl -s http://php-osx.liip.ch/install.sh | bash -s 7.0
Directory Installation
/usr/local/php7.0
Setting up Apache
Edit the file httpd.conf:
nano /etc/apache2/httpd.conf
Add the content below to the bottom of the module:

LoadModule php7_module /usr/local/php7.0/libphp7.so
Edit the file paths:

sudo nano /etc/paths
Add the content below to the top of the file:

/usr/local/php7.0/bin
In /Library/WebServer/Documents/ create a file called info.php with the content below:

<?php phpinfo(); ?>
Access it through the browser:

http://localhost/info.php

Copy the file ixed.7.0.dar that was downloaded according to your architecture to the folder /usr/local/zend/lib/php_extensions
cp ixed.7.0.dar /usr/local/zend/lib/php_extensions
Configure the file’s permission:

chmod 777 -R /usr/local/zend/lib/php_extensions/ixed.7.0.dar
Edit the php.ini file in /usr/local/zend/etc/ and add the content below to the file’s bottom:
[SourceGuardian] zend_extension=/usr/local/zend/lib/php_extensions/ixed.7.0.dar`
Restart the Apache service using the command below:

sudo /usr/sbin/apachectl stop
sudo /usr/sbin/apachectl start

2

Login Screen.
3
Login Screen.
Custom Installation
We can

4
Displaying the
Login Screen.
5
Login Screen.
1
ScriptCase Manual Installation
HOME › SCRIPTCASE INSTALLATION › SCRIPTCASE MANUAL INSTALLATION
Download ScriptCase 9 ZIP on www.scriptcase.net and extract it on the root of your webserver.
Access ScriptCase from your browser using the url below:

Login Screen.
2
Login Screen.
Custom Installation
On this option, the user will choose the installation settings.
On this option, the user will choose the installation settings.
Verify the permissions of the system directory
Verify the permissions of the system directory
We can choose the database that ScriptCase will use to store the data.
We can
choose the database that ScriptCase will use to store the data.
Displaying the ScriptCase tables creation.

3
Displaying the
ScriptCase tables creation.
Finishing the custom installation.
Finishing the custom installation.
Login Screen.
4
Login Screen.
1
General Overview
HOME › GETTING TO KNOW SCRIPTCASE
Main Menu
The main menu containing all Scriptcase main settings is available at the top of the page.
Toolbar
The toolbar is displayed right below the main menu where you can find the main functions used in the applications development.
Project List
On this session is displayed a list with all the Scriptcase projects.
Project Explorer
On this session you can find all the folders created to organize the applications. There’s also the folder that contains all the applications of the project in one place.
2
List of Applications
After opening the project you’ll see the page below on which you can view a list of the applications that are in the selected folder in the Project Explorer presented on the left
side.
Taskbar
This bar holds the tabs of all applications which were opened for editing.
1
Main Menu
HOME › GETTING TO KNOW SCRIPTCASE › MAIN MENU
On the main menu are displayed all the functionalities of the tools for the projects and the applications. These functionalities are organized into these items below:
Project
New Project : Enables you to create a blank project or import one of the sample systems.
Open Project : Lists the projects that the user is permitted to access.
Close Project : Closes the project in edit.
Properties: Allows you to edit some of the project properties such as themes and languages.
Default Values : Allows editing the default values of the current project.
Version History: Displays a list of project versions.
Increment Version : Enables versioning the current project.
Export Project : Allows to export one project at a time, taking all the project’s essential content for using in another Scriptcase of the same version.
Import Project : Allows to import a project exported by Scriptcase of the same version.
Generate Source Code : Generates the source code for all applications in the current project.
Deploy Applications : Opens the Publishing Wizard for publishing the applications of the current project.
Delete Project : This option is only available when a project is opened. This option deletes a project.
Reports:
Application List : Displays the project applications with details of its creation.
Developers Summary : Displays a summary of the applications and codes created by a developer.
Display Diagram : Displays a complete diagram of the project showing the relationship between the applications.
Application Search : It allows to perform a search for texts in all the project’s applications.
Database
New Connection : Allows you to create a connection in the current project.
Edit Connection : Allows you to edit existing connections in the current project.
Import ACCESS: Allows the conversion of an ACCESS data source into a structured database (MySQL, PostgreSQL, SQLite and SQL Server).
Import EXCEL: Allows the conversion of an EXCEL data source into a structured database (MySQL, PostgreSQL, SQLite and SQL Server).
Import CSV : Allows the conversion of a CSV data source into a structured database (MySQL, PostgreSQL, SQLite and SQL Server).
SQL Builder: Tool for creating and executing SQL commands.
Database Builder: Tool for rapdily creating and editing tables in the database.
ER Diagram : Tool that allows the visualization of the relationships between tables of the connected database.
Application
New Application : Create a new application.
Batch Applications: Allows simultaneous creation of Grids and Forms.
Restore Applications : Allows the restoration of applications, where is displayed a list of the last edited applications.
Save Application : Save changes made to the current application.
Generate Source: Generate the Source Code for all the applications in the current project.
Run Application: Saves and executes the current application.
Export Applications : Allows the export of one or more project applications.
Import Applications : Imports a backup file that contains an application from another or the same project.
Source Code : Allows you to visualize the generated source code of the application being edited.
Data in Session : All Scriptcase session variables are displayed, as well as those of the executed applications.
Tools
Data Dictionary: Allows the user to set defaults for tables (names, field types, etc.).
Express Edit : Simultaneous editing of project applications.
HelpCase: Enables the creation of documentation for the project.
External Libraries: It allows the creation of scripts in several languages that will be used throughout the project.
2
Internal Libraries: Allows the creation of PHP scripts that will be used throughout the project.
To-Do List : Enables you to create a task list.
Messages : Send messages among developers of the same Scriptcase installation.
Converters:
Version 5 : Converts your projects from ScriptCase version 5 to this current version.
Layout
CSS Applications (Themes) : This option allows you to create themes for the applications.
CSS Buttons : This option allows you to create button themes.
HTML Templates : This option allows you to modify several elements of HTML that your application will contain.
CSS Menus : This option allows you to change CSS of the menus.
Menu Icons: Allows you to change the icons of the menu application.
Image Manager : This option manages the existing images in the project also allowing you to add, delete and copy images.
Chart Themes : This option allows you to modify the themes used in the Chart applications.
HTML Editor Templates : Allows you to configure the functionalities present in the html editor field that the application will use.
Local
Application Language: Allows to define custom messages that will be used in different applications.
Regional Settings : Allows you to define some parameters of monetary units, date and numbers according to the Country or Region where your application will be used.
Modules
Security: This option allows you to implement access rules to your system, creating a complete system with access control in your project.
Log :
Create/Edit Log Module : Allows you to create and/or edit a log module.
Applications Related to the log : Allows you to reference which applications will use the log.
Create Query with Log Report : Allows you to create a Grid application that will display a log report.
Options
Settings: Access all the ScriptCase settings.
My ScriptCase : Allows you to customize the settings for the current user.
Change Password: Allows the current user to change their password.
My Toolbar : Allows you change the position of the icons on the toolbar.
Help
WebHelp : Allows you to access the manual.
Technical Support: Access to ScriptCase online support.
Diagnosis: Displays the settings of the Environment/Server where ScriptCase is installed.
Check Version : Verifies if the version is updated.
Update Version: Allows you to update ScriptCase to the latest version available.
License Registration : Access the page to register your ScriptCase.
About: Information about ScriptCase.

1
Toolbar
HOME › GETTING TO KNOW SCRIPTCASE › TOOLBAR
On the toolbar is displayed the main elements that can be used in the applications.
After the Help icon, you can view the current project’s name.
Home: Returns to the Project Explorer.
New Project : Starts the process to create a new project.
Open Project : List all the projects that the current user is permitted to access.
Close Project : Closes the current project.
New Connection : Displays the wizard to create a new connection for the current project.
Edit Connection : Allows the user to edit the connections of the current project.
SQL Builder: Tool that rapidly generates SELECT statements.
New Application : Opens the application wizard.
Batch Applications: Allows the user to create various applications simultaneously.
Save Application : Saves the current Application.
Generate Source Code : Generate the Source Code for the current Applications.
Run Application: Saves the current application, generates the source code and runs the applications.
Run Project : Runs the complete project. To do this, you must enter the property in the project properties.
Deploy Applications : Opens the wizard for the deployment procedure.
Data Dictionary: Allows the user to define standards for the tables (Names, Field Types, etc.).
Application Language: Allows the user to define custom messages that will be used in different applications.
Help : Allows the user to access the manual.

1
Project List
HOME › GETTING TO KNOW SCRIPTCASE › PROJECT LIST
In this area is displayed all the projects that the user is permitted to access.
There are two ways of visualizing projects. Gallery (default) or list.
Project Gallery
Project List
To start a new project click on Project > New Project.

1
Project Explorer
HOME › GETTING TO KNOW SCRIPTCASE › PROJECT EXPLORER
On this area, you can find all the folders created to organize the applications.
Create : Creates a new folder to organize the applications of the project.
Rename: Renames the selected folder.
Delete: Deletes the selected folder.
All Applications: Lists all applications from the folders and the existing subfolders.
My Applications : Lists all the applications from the folders and subfolders that the current user has created.
Recent: List of all the recent generated applications.
Search : Does the search of the applications names.

1
HOME › GETTING TO KNOW SCRIPTCASE › LIST OF
APPLICATIONS
All the applications are listed on this area, a. We can find some information about the applications.
The columns can be edited in My Scriptcase menu.
Application: Application’s Name.
Friendly URL : Friendly URL for the application.
Description: Application Description.
Creator: Application Creator.
Generation: Date of Source Code Generation.
Status: Status of the application (updated and outdated).
Options: Activity buttons:

Run: Runs an application;
Edit : Open the Application to edit;
Copy: Creates a copy of the selected application;
Rename: Renames the selected application.
Footer Options
The footer buttons are available when one or more application are selected.
Edit : Opens all the selected applications settings for editing.
Generate: Generates the source code of all selected applications.
Deploy : Opens the Publishing Wizard for all selected applications.
Delete: Delete all selected applications.
Copy: Copy the selected applications to another project.
Move : Moves the selected applications to another folder in the same project.
Export : Allows you to export the selected applications.

1
Taskbar
HOME › GETTING TO KNOW SCRIPTCASE › TASKBAR
This bar contains the tabs of all the applications that were opened for editing.
This bar is only displayed when at least one application has been opened.
The applications open in tabs in the taskbar where you can navigate among applications in a fast and easy way.
The “x” presented at the side of the Application name is used to close the application.
When you right-click on one of the tabs on the taskbar, you will see some tab closing options.
1
Keyboard Hotkeys
HOME › GETTING TO KNOW SCRIPTCASE › KEYBOARD HOTKEYS
Keyboard hotkeys are keys or key combinations that provides an alternate way of doing something that you would normally do with a mouse.
The keyboard hotkeys are available in all browsers compatible with Scriptcase.
Browsers compatible with Scriptcase
Chrome All versions
Firefox Version 4 or above
Edge All versions
Internet Explorer Version 11 or above
Opera Version 9 or above
Safari Version 5.2 or above
Scriptcase Hotkeys
Efficiency is crucial to software development and the Keyboard Hotkeys are important to achieve that efficienty. You can see all the hotkeys that are now available in Scriptcase
below:
Hotkeys Actions
F1 Opens the documentation of the tool
CTRL+H or ⌘+H or F4 Displays the project homepage
CTRL+S or ⌘+S or F7 Saves the changes made in the application
CTRL+B or ⌘+B or F8 Generates the source code of the current application
CTRL+E or ⌘+E or F9 Runs the current application
F2 Opens the application creation screen
CTRL+I or ⌘+I or F6 Acess to the SQL Builder
Alt+1~9 Accesses the selected tabs 1~9
Alt+Q Closes the current tab
Alt+PgDown Navigates back to the previous tab
Alt+PgUp Navigates to the next tab
Events Editor Hotkeys - PHP

Using Sublime shortcut patterns, Scriptcase provides a series of shortcuts to streamline its development.
2
Hotkeys Actions
Tab Indents the line or selection
Shift+Tab Removes line indentation or selection
Ctrl+Shift+K Deletes the current line
Ctrl+Left Moves the cursor to the next word
Ctrl+Right Moves the cursor to the previous word
Ctrl+L Selects the entire current line
Ctrl+Shift+L Adds the cursor to all selected lines
Ctrl+</span> Cancels multiple cursors and moves the cursor to the first instance
Ctrl+Enter Inserts a line after the current one
Ctrl+Shift+Enter Inserts a line before the current one
Ctrl+Shift+D Selects the next occurrence of selected text with the cursor
Ctrl+Shift+Space Selects the current scope (within parentheses, braces, brackets …)
Ctrl+Shift+M Selects the broader context (keys, brackets, parentheses, page)
Ctrl+M Moves the cursor to the closing or opening of the current context. (braces, brackets, parentheses, tags)
Ctrl+/ Comments or Uncomments line
Ctrl+J Groups the line or selection
Ctrl+D Duplicates line or selection
Ctrl+F9 Sorts the lines alphabetically, ignoring upper cases
Backspace Intelligent Backspace (Removes indentation with line)
Ctrl+K Ctrl+K Deletes text to the right
Ctrl+K Ctrl+U Capital letters in the selection or cursor
Ctrl+K Ctrl+L Lowercase letters in the selection or cursor
Ctrl+K Ctrl+C Scrolls the line to the center of view
Ctrl+K Ctrl+Backspace Deletes text to the left
Ctrl+Shift+Up Adds the cursor to the previous line
Ctrl+Shift+Down Adds the cursor to the next line
Ctrl+F3 Encontra a próxima ocorrência da seleção ou cursor
Ctrl+Shift+F3 Finds the next occurrence of the selection or cursor
Ctrl+Shift+[ Shows indented tag
Ctrl+Shift+] Shows Inline tag
Ctrl+Shift+F Activates search and replaces
Ctrl+F Activates search
F3 Finds the next occurrence of the search
Shift+F3 Finds the previous occurrence of the search
Ctrl+Alt+I Auto indentation of the selected code
Events Editor Hotkeys - HTML/CSS

Using Emmet’s shortcut patterns, Scriptcase provides a series of shortcuts to streamline its development. With this plugin it is possible to write HTML and CSS codes through CSS
selectors.
3
Click Here to view the list of selectors.
For example, just write ul> li.item $ {This is the item $} * 3 then press the “TAB” key and the following code will be generated.
<li class="item1">This is item 1</li>

</ul>
To use the EMMET hotkeys in Scriptcase events, you must close and open the event PHP. Example: ?> ul> li.item $ {This is the item $} * 3 <? PHP
Hotkeys Actions
Tab Enables EMMET abbreviations Ex. ul>li.item${item $}*3
Ctrl+Shift+A or ⌘+Shift+A Envelopes the selected text in an EMMET abbreviation. Select the text you want to envelop, then use the keys, and enter the tag.
Ctrl+Alt+Right or ⌘+Alt+Right Edit / selects the next node. Junction between tags, CSS blocks.
Ctrl+Alt+Left or ⌘+Alt+Left Edit / selects the previous node. Junction between tags, CSS blocks.
Ctrl+Shift+Y or ⌘+Shift+Y Validates and solves math expressions. Example: 2*8+4 .
Ctrl+Up or ⌘+Up Increments numeric value +1
Ctrl+Down or ⌘+Down Decrements numerical value –1
Ctrl+Shift+. or ⌘+Shift+. Edit / selects the next item. Attribute, tag name
Ctrl+Shift+, or ⌘+Shift+, Edit / selects the previous item. Attribute, tag name
Enter Inserts indented line break.

1
Scriptcase Variables
HOME › GETTING TO KNOW SCRIPTCASE › SCRIPTCASE VARIABLES
Field Variables
In Scriptcase the fields are internally treated as local variables php, however, at Scriptcase interface it’s necessary to inform these, using keys , so it’s possible to retrieve or assign
values to the application fields.
These fields can be used at Scriptcase events, but will not work from the onScriptInit event because only the events after that will have values in the fields.
In the examples below it’s possible to visualize the operation of the fields.
RETRIEVING FIELD VALUE:
To assign the field value to a local variable to be used within an event, we can perform the steps as below:
$var_local = {application_field};
To assign the field value to a local variable to be used within an event, we can perform the steps as below:
[variavel_global] = {application_field};
ASSIGNING VALUE TO FIELD:
To assign a value to the field, we can do assignment in the same way as done with the variables, and if possible, according to the field type:
Field type Text: {field_text} = “This is a sample text”;

Field type Number: {field_number} = 100;
Global Variables (Session Variables)

These are variables that are stored in the application session, these variables can be used to pass parameters through the applications in the project. These variables can be
used at any application event.
Unlike the local and field variables, Global variables can be used in the SQL of the applications that allows the manual to be changed, and in the WHERE Clause of the Form
application, thus enabling a dynamic use of the applications.
SQL Grid sample
Sample in the WHERE Clause of the Form
To define a global variable, you only have to enter it in between brackets, for example:
[global_variable].
ASSIGNING VALUE TO GLOBAL VARIABLE:
[text_variable] = “This global has a text stored in it”;

[number_variable] = “This global has a number stored in it”;
P A S S I N G V A L U E S B E T W E E N A P P L I C AT I O N S
To pass values between applications, it is necessary to define the same variable in the applications that will use them, however, in the source application the variable must be
defined as Output and in the destination application must be defined as Input.
To change the variable type, go to the menu Application> Global Variables .
After clicking on this menu will show the variables in the application and its settings.
2
In this configuration screen we have the following configuration options:
AT T R I B U T E :
In Attributes we can see the variables in our application.
VALUE:
In Value we can see some options and configurations of our variable.
Type : This option defines whether the variable will be input or output.
DESCRIPTION:
Reports where the variable was declared by the developer.
Local Variables
Local variables are basically PHP’s own variables. These variables must be set using a $ dollar sign at the beginning and the variable names are case-sensitive.
These variables will only work in events or methods, using a variable in an event it will make it only available in that event.
Variable names follow the same rules as other labels in PHP. A valid variable name begins with a letter or underscore, followed by any number of letters, numbers, or
underscores.
Below we can see some examples of local variables:
$text = “This variable stores a Text”;

$number = “This variable stores a number”;
For more information, visit the php variables.

1
EMMET Hotkeys
HOME › GETTING TO KNOW SCRIPTCASE › EMMET HOTKEYS
Below we have a list of EMMET CSS selectors in our event editor.
Remember that as they are CSS Selectors, to work as expected it is necessary to use inside the tag <style> @m </style>
CSS selectors To open
@i or @import url( );
@import
@m or @media screen { }
@media
@f @font-face {font-family: ; src:url(); }
@f+ @font-face {font-family: 'FontName'; src: url('FileName.eot'); src: url('FileName.eot?#iefix') format('embedded-opentype'), url('FileName.woff') format('woff'), url('FileName.ttf')
format('truetype'), url('FileName.svg#FontName') format('svg'); font-style: normal; font-weight: normal; }
anim animation: ;
anim- animation: name duration timing-function delay iteration-count direction fill-mode;
animdel animation-delay: time;
animdir or animation-direction: normal;

animdir:n
animdir:r animation-direction: reverse;
animdir:a animation-direction: alternate;
animdir:ar animation-direction: alternate-reverse;
animdur animation-duration: 0s;
animfm animation-fill-mode: both;
animfm:f animation-fill-mode: forwards;
animfm:b animation-fill-mode: backwards;
animfm:bt or animation-fill-mode: both;

animfm:bh
animic animation-iteration-count: 1;
animic:i animation-iteration-count: infinite;
animn animation-name: none;
animps animation-play-state: running;
animps:p animation-play-state: paused;
animps:r animation-play-state: running;
animtf animation-timing-function: linear;
animtf:e animation-timing-function:ease;
animtf:ei animation-timing-function:ease-in;
animtf:eo animation-timing-function:ease-out;
animtf:eio animation-timing-function:ease-in-out;
animtf:l animation-timing-function:linear;
animtf:cb animation-timing-function: cubic-bezier(0.1, 0.7, 0.1, 0.1);
ap appearance: none;
! !important"
pos or pos:r position: relative;
pos:s position:static;
pos:s position:static;
2
pos:a position:absolute;
pos:f position:fixed;
t top: ;
t:a top:auto;
r right: ;
r:a right:auto;
b bottom: ;
b:a bottom:auto;
l left: ;
l:a left:auto;
z z-index: ;
z:a z-index:auto;
fl or fl:l float: left;
fl:n float:none;
fl:r float:right;
cl or cl:b clear: both;
cl:n clear:none;
cl:l clear:left;
cl:r clear:right;
colm columns: ;
colmc column-count: ;
colmf column-fill: ;
colmg column-gap: ;
colmr column-rule: ;
colmrc column-rule-color: ;
colmrs column-rule-style: ;
colmrw column-rule-width: ;
colms column-span: ;
colmw column-width: ;
d or d:b display: block;
d:n display:none;
d:f display:flex;
d:if display:inline-flex;
d:i display:inline;
d:ib display:inline-block;
d:ib+ display: inline-block;\n*display: inline;\n*zoom: 1;
d:li display:list-item;
d:ri display:run-in;
d:cp display:compact;
d:tb display:table;
d:itb display:inline-table;
3
d:itb display:inline-table;
d:tbcp display:table-caption;
d:tbcl display:table-column;
d:tbclg display:table-column-group;
d:tbhg display:table-header-group;
d:tbfg display:table-footer-group;
d:tbr display:table-row;
d:tbrg display:table-row-group;
d:tbc display:table-cell;
d:rb display:ruby;
d:rbb display:ruby-base;
d:rbbg display:ruby-base-group;
d:rbt display:ruby-text;
d:rbtg display:ruby-text-group;
v or v:h visibility: hidden;
v:v visibility:visible;
v:c visibility:collapse;
ov or ov:h overflow: hidden;
ov:v overflow:visible;
ov:s overflow:scroll;
ov:a overflow:auto;
ovx or ovx:h overflow-x: hidden;
ovx:v overflow-x:visible;
ovx:s overflow-x:scroll;
ovx:a overflow-x:auto;
ovy overflow-y: hidden;
ovy:v overflow-y:visible;
ovy:h overflow-y:hidden;
ovy:s overflow-y:scroll;
ovy:a overflow-y:auto;
ovs or ovs:s overflow-style: scrollbar;
ovs:a overflow-style:auto;
ovs:p overflow-style:panner;
ovs:m overflow-style:move;
ovs:mq overflow-style:marquee;
zoo zoom:1;
zm zoom:1;
cp clip: ;
cp:a clip:auto;
cp:r clip: rect(top right bottom left);
bxz box-sizing: border-box;

4
bxz:cb box-sizing:content-box;
bxz:bb box-sizing:border-box;
bxsh box-shadow: inset hoff voff blur color;
bxsh:r box-shadow: inset hoff voff blur spread rgb(0, 0, 0);
bxsh:ra box-shadow: inset h v blur spread rgba(0, 0, 0, .5);
bxsh:n box-shadow:none;
m margin: ;
m:a margin:auto;
mt margin-top: ;
mt:a margin-top:auto;
mr margin-right: ;
mr:a margin-right:auto;
mb margin-bottom: ;
mb:a margin-bottom:auto;
ml margin-left: ;
ml:a margin-left:auto;
p padding: ;
pt padding-top: ;
pr padding-right: ;
pb padding-bottom: ;
pl padding-left: ;
w width: ;
w:a width:auto;
h height: ;
h:a height:auto;
maw max-width: ;
maw:n max-width:none;
mah max-height: ;
mah:n max-height:none;
miw min-width: ;
mih min-height: ;
mar max-resolution: res;
mir min-resolution: res;
ori orientation: ;
ori:l orientation:landscape;
ori:p orientation:portrait;
ol outline: ;
ol:n outline:none;
olo outline-offset: ;
olw outline-width: ;
olw:tn outline-width:thin;
5
olw:m
outline-width:medium;
olw:tc outline-width:thick;
ols outline-style: ;
ols:n outline-style:none;
ols:dt outline-style:dotted;
ols:ds outline-style:dashed;
ols:s outline-style:solid;
ols:db outline-style:double;
ols:g outline-style:groove;
ols:r outline-style:ridge;
ols:i outline-style:inset;
ols:o outline-style:outset;
olc outline-color: #000;
olc:i outline-color:invert;
bfv backface-visibility: ;
bfv:h backface-visibility:hidden;
bfv:v backface-visibility:visible;
bd border: ;
bd+ border: 1px solid #000;
bd:n border:none;
bdbk or border-break: close;

bdbk:c
bdcl border-collapse: ;
bdcl:c border-collapse:collapse;
bdcl:s border-collapse:separate;
bdc border-color: #000;
bdc:t border-color:transparent;
bdi border-image: url();
bdi:n border-image:none;
bdti border-top-image:url();
bdti:n border-top-image:none;
bdri border-right-image:url();
bdri:n border-right-image:none;
bdbi border-bottom-image:url();
bdbi:n border-bottom-image:none;
bdli border-left-image:url();
bdli:n border-left-image:none;
bdci border-corner-image:url();
bdci:n border-corner-image:none;
bdci:c border-corner-image:continue;
bdtli border-top-left-image:url();
bdtli:n border-top-left-image:none;
6
bdtli:n border-top-left-image:none;
bdtli:c border-top-left-image:continue;
bdtri border-top-right-image:url();
bdtri:n border-top-right-image:none;
bdtri:c border-top-right-image:continue;
bdbri border-bottom-right-image:url();
bdbri:n border-bottom-right-image:none;
bdbri:c border-bottom-right-image:continue;
bdbli border-bottom-left-image:url();
bdbli:n border-bottom-left-image:none;
bdbli:c border-bottom-left-image:continue;
bdf or bdf:r border-fit: repeat;
bdf:c border-fit:clip;
bdf:sc border-fit:scale;
bdf:st border-fit:stretch;
bdf:ow border-fit:overwrite;
bdf:of border-fit:overflow;
bdf:sp border-fit:space;
bdlen border-length: ;
bdlen:a border-length:auto;
bdsp border-spacing:|;
bds border-style: ;
bds:n border-style:none;
bds:h border-style:hidden;
bds:dt border-style:dotted;
bds:ds border-style:dashed;
bds:s border-style:solid;
bds:db border-style:double;
bds:dtds border-style:dot-dash;
bds:dtdtds border-style:dot-dot-dash;
bds:w border-style:wave;
bds:g border-style:groove;
bds:r border-style:ridge;
bds:i border-style:inset;
bds:o border-style:outset;
bdw border-width: ;
bdtw border-top-width: ;
bdrw border-right-width: ;
bdbw border-bottom-width: ;
bdlw border-left-width: ;
bdt or bt border-top: ;
7
bdt+ border-top: 1px solid #000;
bdt:n border-top:none;
bdts border-top-style: ;
bdts:n border-top-style:none;
bdtc border-top-color: #000;
bdtc:t border-top-color:transparent;
bdr or br border-right: ;
bdr+ border-right: 1px solid #000;
bdr:n border-right:none;
bdrst border-right-style: ;
bdrst:n border-right-style:none;
bdrc border-right-color: #000;
bdrc:t border-right-color:transparent;
bdb or bb border-bottom: ;
bdb+ border-bottom: 1px solid #000;
bdb:n border-bottom:none;
bdbs border-bottom-style: ;
bdbs:n border-bottom-style:none;
bdbc border-bottom-color: #000;
bdbc:t border-bottom-color:transparent;
bdl or bl border-left: ;
bdl+ border-left: 1px solid #000;
bdl:n border-left:none;
bdls border-left-style: ;
bdls:n border-left-style:none;
bdlc border-left-color: #000;
bdlc:t border-left-color:transparent;
bdrs border-radius: ;
bdtrrs border-top-right-radius: ;
bdtlrs border-top-left-radius: ;
bdbrrs border-bottom-right-radius: ;
bdblrs border-bottom-left-radius: ;
bg background: #000;
bg+ background: #fff url() 0 0 no-repeat;
bg:n background:none;
bg:ie filter:progid:DXImageTransform.Microsoft.AlphaImageLoader(src='x.png',sizingMethod='crop');
bgc background-color: #fff;
bgc:t background-color:transparent;
bgi background-image:url();
bgi:n background-image:none;
bgr background-repeat: ;
8
bgr:nselectors
CSS To open
background-repeat:no-repeat;
bgr:x background-repeat:repeat-x;
bgr:y background-repeat:repeat-y;
bgr:sp background-repeat:space;
bgr:rd background-repeat:round;
bga background-attachment: ;
bga:f background-attachment:fixed;
bga:s background-attachment:scroll;
bgp background-position: 0 0;
bgpx background-position-x: ;
bgpy background-position-y: ;
bgbk background-break: ;
bgbk:bb background-break:bounding-box;
bgbk:eb background-break:each-box;
bgbk:c background-break:continuous;
bgcp or background-clip: padding-box;

bgcp:pb
bgcp:bb background-clip:border-box;
bgcp:cb background-clip:content-box;
bgcp:nc background-clip:no-clip;
bgo background-origin: ;
bgo:pb background-origin:padding-box;
bgo:bb background-origin:border-box;
bgo:cb background-origin:content-box;
bgsz background-size: ;
bgsz:a background-size:auto;
bgsz:ct background-size:contain;
bgsz:cv background-size:cover;
c color: #000;
c:r color: rgb(0, 0, 0);
c:ra color: rgba(0, 0, 0, .5);
cm /* */
cnt content:' ';
cnt:n content:normal;
cnt:oq content:open-quote;
cnt:noq content:no-open-quote;
cnt:cq content:close-quote;
cnt:ncq content:no-close-quote;
cnt:a content:attr();
cnt:c content:counter();
cnt:cs content:counters();
tbl table-layout: ;
9
tbl table-layout: ;
tbl:a table-layout:auto;
tbl:f table-layout:fixed;
cps caption-side: ;
cps:t caption-side:top;
cps:b caption-side:bottom;
ec empty-cells: ;
ec:s empty-cells:show;
ec:h empty-cells:hide;
lis list-style: ;
lis:n list-style:none;
lisp list-style-position: ;
lisp:i list-style-position:inside;
lisp:o list-style-position:outside;
list list-style-type: ;
list:n list-style-type:none;
list:d list-style-type:disc;
list:c list-style-type:circle;
list:s list-style-type:square;
list:dc list-style-type:decimal;
list:dclz list-style-type:decimal-leading-zero;
list:lr list-style-type:lower-roman;
list:ur list-style-type:upper-roman;
lisi list-style-image: ;
lisi:n list-style-image:none;
q quotes: ;
q:n quotes:none;
q:ru quotes: '00AB' '00BB' '201E' '201C';
q:en quotes: '201C' '201D' '2018' '2019';
ct content: ;
ct:n content:normal;
ct:oq content:open-quote;
ct:noq content:no-open-quote;
ct:cq content:close-quote;
ct:ncq content:no-close-quote;
ct:a content:attr( );
ct:c content:counter( );
ct:cs content:counters( );
coi counter-increment: ;
cor counter-reset: ;
va or va:t vertical-align: top;

10
va:sup vertical-align:super;
va:tt vertical-align:text-top;
va:m vertical-align:middle;
va:bl vertical-align:baseline;
va:b vertical-align:bottom;
va:tb vertical-align:text-bottom;
va:sub vertical-align:sub;
ta or ta:l text-align: left;
ta:c text-align:center;
ta:r text-align:right;
ta:j text-align:justify;
ta-lst text-align-last: ;
tal:a text-align-last:auto;
tal:l text-align-last:left;
tal:c text-align-last:center;
tal:r text-align-last:right;
td or td:n text-decoration: none;
td:u text-decoration:underline;
td:o text-decoration:overline;
td:l text-decoration:line-through;
te text-emphasis: ;
te:n text-emphasis:none;
te:ac text-emphasis:accent;
te:dt text-emphasis:dot;
te:c text-emphasis:circle;
te:ds text-emphasis:disc;
te:b text-emphasis:before;
te:a text-emphasis:after;
th text-height: ;
th:a text-height:auto;
th:f text-height:font-size;
th:t text-height:text-size;
th:m text-height:max-size;
ti text-indent: ;
ti:- text-indent:-9999px;
tj text-justify: ;
tj:a text-justify:auto;
tj:iw text-justify:inter-word;
tj:ii text-justify:inter-ideograph;
tj:ic text-justify:inter-cluster;
tj:d text-justify:distribute;
11
tj:k selectors
CSS To open
text-justify:kashida;
tj:t text-justify:tibetan;
tov or tov:e text-overflow: ellipsis;
tov:c text-overflow:clip;
to text-outline: ;
to+ text-outline: 0 0 #000;
to:n text-outline:none;
tr text-replace: ;
tr:n text-replace:none;
tt text-transform: uppercase;
tt:n text-transform:none;
tt:c text-transform:capitalize;
tt:u text-transform:uppercase;
tt:l text-transform:lowercase;
tw text-wrap: ;
tw:n text-wrap:normal;
tw:no text-wrap:none;
tw:u text-wrap:unrestricted;
tw:s text-wrap:suppress;
tsh text-shadow: hoff voff blur #000;
tsh:r text-shadow: h v blur rgb(0, 0, 0);
tsh:ra text-shadow: h v blur rgba(0, 0, 0, .5);
tsh+ text-shadow: 0 0 0 #000;
tsh:n text-shadow:none;
trf transform: ;
trf:skx transform: skewX(angle);
trf:sky transform: skewY(angle);
trf:sc transform: scale(x, y);
trf:scx transform: scaleX(x);
trf:scy transform: scaleY(y);
trf:scz transform: scaleZ(z);
trf:sc3 transform: scale3d(x, y, z);
trf:r transform: rotate(angle);
trf:rx transform: rotateX(angle);
trf:ry transform: rotateY(angle);
trf:rz transform: rotateZ(angle);
trf:t transform: translate(x, y);
trf:tx transform: translateX(x);
trf:ty transform: translateY(y);
trf:tz transform: translateZ(z);
trf:t3 transform: translate3d(tx, ty, tz);

12
trfo transform-origin: ;
trfs transform-style: preserve-3d;
trs transition: prop time;
trsde transition-delay:time;
trsdu transition-duration:time;
trsp transition-property:prop;
trstf transition-timing-function:tfunc;
lh line-height: ;
whs white-space: ;
whs:n white-space: normal;
whs:p white-space: pre;
whs:nw white-space: nowrap;
whs:pw white-space: pre-wrap;
whs:pl white-space: pre-line;
whsc white-space-collapse: ;
whsc:n white-space-collapse:normal;
whsc:k white-space-collapse:keep-all;
whsc:l white-space-collapse:loose;
whsc:bs white-space-collapse:break-strict;
whsc:ba white-space-collapse:break-all;
wob word-break: ;
wob:n word-break:normal;
wob:k word-break:keep-all;
wob:ba word-break:break-all;
wos word-spacing: ;
wow word-wrap: ;
wow:nm word-wrap:normal;
wow:n word-wrap:none;
wow:u word-wrap:unrestricted;
wow:s word-wrap:suppress;
wow:b word-wrap:break-word;
wm or wm:lrt writing-mode:lr-tb;
wm:lrb writing-mode:lr-bt;
wm:rlt writing-mode:rl-tb;
wm:rlb writing-mode:rl-bt;
wm:tbr writing-mode:tb-rl;
wm:tbl writing-mode:tb-lr;
wm:btl writing-mode:bt-lr;
wm:btr writing-mode:bt-rl;
lts letter-spacing: ;
lts-n letter-spacing:normal;
lts-n letter-spacing:normal; 13
f font: ;
f+ font: 1em Arial,sans-serif;
fw font-weight: ;
fw:n font-weight:normal;
fw:b font-weight:bold;
fw:br font-weight:bolder;
fw:lr font-weight:lighter;
fs or fs:i font-style:italic;
fs:n font-style:normal;
fs:o font-style:oblique;
fv font-variant: ;
fv:n font-variant:normal;
fv:sc font-variant:small-caps;
fz font-size: ;
fza font-size-adjust: ;
fza:n font-size-adjust:none;
ff font-family: ;
ff:s font-family:serif;
ff:ss font-family:sans-serif;
ff:c font-family:cursive;
ff:f font-family:fantasy;
ff:m font-family:monospace;
ff:a font-family: Arial, "Helvetica Neue", Helvetica, sans-serif;
ff:t font-family: "Times New Roman", Times, Baskerville, Georgia, serif;
ff:v font-family: Verdana, Geneva, sans-serif;
fef font-effect: ;
fef:n font-effect:none;
fef:eg font-effect:engrave;
fef:eb font-effect:emboss;
fef:o font-effect:outline;
fem font-emphasize: ;
femp font-emphasize-position: ;
femp:b font-emphasize-position:before;
femp:a font-emphasize-position:after;
fems font-emphasize-style: ;
fems:n font-emphasize-style:none;
fems:ac font-emphasize-style:accent;
fems:dt font-emphasize-style:dot;
fems:c font-emphasize-style:circle;
fems:ds font-emphasize-style:disc;
fsm font-smooth: ;
fsm font-smooth: ;
14
fsm:a font-smooth:auto;
fsm:n font-smooth:never;
fsm:aw font-smooth:always;
fst font-stretch: ;
fst:n font-stretch:normal;
fst:uc font-stretch:ultra-condensed;
fst:ec font-stretch:extra-condensed;
fst:c font-stretch:condensed;
fst:sc font-stretch:semi-condensed;
fst:se font-stretch:semi-expanded;
fst:e font-stretch:expanded;
fst:ee font-stretch:extra-expanded;
fst:ue font-stretch:ultra-expanded;
op opacity: ;
op+ opacity: ; filter: alpha(opacity=);
op:ie filter:progid:DXImageTransform.Microsoft.Alpha(Opacity=100);
op:ms -ms-filter:'progid:DXImageTransform.Microsoft.Alpha(Opacity=100)';
rsz resize: ;
rsz:n resize:none;
rsz:b resize:both;
rsz:h resize:horizontal;
rsz:v resize:vertical;
cur cursor:pointer;
cur:a cursor:auto;
cur:d cursor:default;
cur:c cursor:crosshair;
cur:ha cursor:hand;
cur:he cursor:help;
cur:m cursor:move;
cur:p cursor:pointer;
cur:t cursor:text;
fxd flex-direction: ;
fxd:r flex-direction:row;
fxd:rr flex-direction:row-reverse;
fxd:c flex-direction:column;
fxd:cr flex-direction:column-reverse;
fxw flex-wrap: ;
fxw:n flex-wrap:nowrap;
fxw:w flex-wrap:wrap;
fxw:wr flex-wrap:wrap-reverse;
fxf flex-flow: ;
15
fxf flex-flow: ;
jc justify-content: ;
jc:fs justify-content:flex-start;
jc:fe justify-content:flex-end;
jc:c justify-content:center;
jc:sb justify-content:space-between;
jc:sa justify-content:space-around;
ai align-items: ;
ai:fs align-items:flex-start;
ai:fe align-items:flex-end;
ai:c align-items:center;
ai:b align-items:baseline;
ai:s align-items:stretch;
ac align-content: ;
ac:fs align-content:flex-start;
ac:fe align-content:flex-end;
ac:c align-content:center;
ac:sb align-content:space-between;
ac:sa align-content:space-around;
ac:s align-content:stretch;
ord order: ;
fxg flex-grow: ;
fxsh flex-shrink: ;
fxb flex-basis: ;
fx flex: ;
as align-self: ;
as:a align-self:auto;
as:fs align-self:flex-start;
as:fe align-self:flex-end;
as:c align-self:center;
as:b align-self:baseline;
as:s align-self:stretch;
pgbb page-break-before: ;
pgbb:au page-break-before:auto;
pgbb:al page-break-before:always;
pgbb:l page-break-before:left;
pgbb:r page-break-before:right;
pgbi page-break-inside: ;
pgbi:au page-break-inside:auto;
pgbi:av page-break-inside:avoid;
pgba page-break-after: ;
16
pgba:au page-break-after:auto;
pgba:al page-break-after:always;
pgba:l page-break-after:left;
pgba:r page-break-after:right;
orp orphans: ;
us user-select:none;
wid widows: ;
wfsm or -webkit-font-smoothing:antialiased;
wfsm:a
wfsm:s or -webkit-font-smoothing:subpixel-antialiased;
wfsm:sa
wfsm:n -webkit-font-smoothing:none;
HTML Selectors To open
!!! <!DOCTYPE html>
!!!4t <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/loose.dtd">
!!!4s <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/strict.dtd">
!!!xt <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd">
!!!xs <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
!!!xxs <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd">
c 
cc:ie6 
cc:ie 
cc:noie 
! Create an HTML5 structure
a <a href=""></a>
a:link <a href="http://"></a>
a:mail <a href="mailto:"></a>
abbr <abbr title=""></abbr>
acr or acronym <acronym title=""></acronym>
base <base href="">
basefont <basefont>
br <br>
frame <frame>
hr <hr>
bdo <bdo dir=""></bdo>
bdo:r <bdo dir="rtl"></bdo>
bdo:l <bdo dir="ltr"></bdo>
col <col>
link <link rel="stylesheet" href="">
link:css <link rel="stylesheet" href="style.css">
link:print <link rel="stylesheet" href="print.css" media="print">
link:favicon <link rel="shortcut icon" type="image/x-icon" href="favicon.ico">

link:favicon <link rel="shortcut icon" type="image/x-icon" href="favicon.ico">
17
link:touch <link rel="apple-touch-icon" href="favicon.png">
link:rss <link rel="alternate" type="application/rss+xml" title="RSS" href="rss.xml">
link:atom <link rel="alternate" type="application/atom+xml" title="Atom" href="atom.xml">
link:im or link:import <link rel="import" href="component.html">
meta <meta>
meta:utf <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=UTF-8">
meta:win <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=windows-1251">
meta:vp <meta name="viewport" content="width=device-width, user-scalable=no, initial-scale=1.0, maximum-scale=1.0, minimum-scale=1.0">
meta:compat <meta http-equiv="X-UA-Compatible" content="IE=7">
style <style>
script <script></script>
script:src <script src=""></script>
img <img src="" alt="">
img:s or img:srcset <img srcset="" src="" alt="">
img:z or img:sizes <img sizes="" srcset="" src="" alt="">
picture <picture>
src or source <source>
src:sc or source:src <source src="" type="">
src:s or source:srcset <source srcset="">
src:m or source:media <source media="(min-width: )" srcset="">
src:t or source:type <source srcset="" type="image/">
src:z or source:sizes <source sizes="" srcset="">
src:mt or source:media:type <source media="(min-width: )" srcset="" type="image/">
src:mz or source:media:sizes <source media="(min-width)" sizes="" srcset="">
src:zt or source:sizes:type <source sizes="" srcset="" type="image/">
iframe <iframe src="" frameborder="0">
embed <embed src="" type="">
object <object data="" type="">
param <param name="" value="">
map <map name="">
area <area shape="" coords="" href="" alt="">
area:d <area shape="default" href="" alt="">
area:c <area shape="circle" coords="" href="" alt="">
area:r <area shape="rect" coords="" href="" alt="">
area:p <area shape="poly" coords="" href="" alt="">
form <form action="">
form:get <form action="" method="get">
form:post <form action="" method="post">
label <label for="">
input <input type="text">
inp <input type="text" name="" id="">

18
inp <input type="text" name="" id="">
input:h or input:hidden <input type="hidden" name="">
input:t or input:text <input type="text" name="" id="">
input:search <input type="search" name="" id="">
input:email <input type="email" name="" id="">
input:url <input type="url" name="" id="">
input:p or input:password <input type="password" name="" id="">
input:datetime <input type="datetime" name="" id="">
input:date <input type="date" name="" id="">
input:datetime-local <input type="datetime-local" name="" id="">
input:month <input type="month" name="" id="">
input:week <input type="week" name="" id="">
input:time <input type="time" name="" id="">
input:tel <input type="tel" name="" id="">
input:number <input type="number" name="" id="">
input:color <input type="color" name="" id="">
input:c or input:checkbox <input type="checkbox" name="" id="">
input:r or input:radio <input type="radio" name="" id="">
input:range <input type="range" name="" id="">
input:f or input:file <input type="file" name="" id="">
input:s or input:submit <input type="submit" value="">
input:i or input:image <input type="image" src="" alt="">
input:b or input:button <input type="button" value="">
isindex <isindex>
input:reset <input type="reset" value="">
select <select name="" id=""></select>
select:d or select:disabled <select name="" id="" disabled></select>
opt or option <option value=""></option>
textarea <textarea name="" id="" cols="30" rows="10"></textarea>
marquee <marquee behavior="" direction=""></marquee>
menu:c or menu:context <menu type="context"></menu>
menu:t or menu:toolbar <menu type="toolbar"></menu>
video <video src=""></video>
audio <audio src=""></audio>
html:xml <html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"></html>
keygen or kg <keygen>
command or cmd <command>
btn:s <button type="submit"></button>
btn:r <button type="reset"></button>
btn:d <button disabled></button>
fst:d <fieldset disabled></fieldset>
bq <blockquote></blockquote>
19
bq <blockquote></blockquote>
fig <figure></figure>
figc <figcaption></figcaption>
pic <picture></picture>
ifr <iframe src="" frameborder="0"></iframe>
emb <embed src="" type="">
obj <object data="" type=""></object>
cap <caption></caption>
colg <colgroup></colgroup>
fst or fset <fieldset></fieldset>
btn <button></button>
optg <optgroup></optgroup>
tarea <textarea name="" id="" cols="30" rows="10"></textarea>
leg <legend></legend>
sect <section></section>
art <article></article>
hdr <header></header>
ftr <footer></footer>
adr <address></address>
dlg <dialog></dialog>
str <strong></strong>
prog <progress></progress>
mn <main></main>
tem <template></template>
datag <datagrid></datagrid>
datal <datalist></datalist>
out <output></output>
det <details></details>
doc Create an structure in HTML5 with the title "Documento"
doc4 Create an structure in HTML5 with the http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=UTF-8"
ri:d or ri:dpr <img srcset="" src="" alt="">
ri:v or ri:viewport <img sizes="" srcset="" src="" alt="">
ri:a or ri:art Create an structure with the following tags '<picture>', '<source media="(min-width: )" srcset="">' e '<img src="" alt="">'
ri:t or ri:type Create an structure with the following tags '<picture>', '<source srcset="" type="image/">' e '<img src="" alt="">'
html:4t Create an structure in HTML4 using 'loose.dtd'
html:4s Create an structure in HTML4 using 'strict.dtd'
html:xt Create an structure in HTML4 using 'xhtml1-transitional.dtd
html:xs Create an structure in HTML4 using 'xhtml1-strict.dtd'
html:xxs Create an structure in HTML4 using 'xhtml11.dtd'
html:5 Create an structure in HTML5
ol+ Create an structure with the following tags '<ol>' e '<li>'

20
ul+
HTML Selectors Create
To openan structure with the following tags '<ul>' e '<li>'
dl+ Create an structure with the following tags '<dl>', '<dt>' e '<dd>'
map+ Create an structure with the following tags '<map name="">' e '<area shape="" coords="" href="" alt="">'
table+ CCreate an structure with the following tags '<table>', '<tr>' e '<td>'
colgroup+ or colg+ Create an structure with the following tags '<colgroup>' e '<col>'
tr+ Create an structure with the following tags '<tr>' e '<td>'
select+ Create an structure with the following tags '<select name="" id="">' e '<option value=""></option>'
optgroup+ or optg+ Create an structure with the following tags '<optgroup>' e '<option value=""></option>'
pic+ Create an structure with the following tags '<picture>', '<source srcset="">' e '<img src="" alt="">'
1
General Overview
HOME › PROJECT
Scriptcase uses the concept of projects to manage the development of the applications. You will use the projects to organize your system development in a simple and practical
way.
In a project, it’s possible to define the applications development standards using the default values, work with project versioning, deploy all the applications or part of them,
create developers work flow reports, display application diagrams. Each project from Scriptcase can have 3 privilege levels for users or user groups. These privileges can be set
inside the menu options.
To create a Project on Scriptcase, it is necessary to have an interaction with a Database. This way you can create applications based on database tables and views.
It’s recommended to review your database tables and relationships to ensure that you have them correctly structured and organized. This will make your work on creating
applications easier and faster when performing fields lookups and etc. You can visualize ew the current database structure through the menu > Database > Diagram ER.
Click here to see the steps to create a project.
Related Links
Data Modeling and Project Creation
Scriptcase 9 Presentation
1
New Project
HOME › PROJECT › NEW PROJECT
The process of creating a project is very simple and intuitive, this process is divided in 5 steps that will be detailed below.
All projects created will be displayed within the option Project list. The project will be displayed according to the user’s permissions.
Start – Configuring the Project

Inside the project creation interface you have two options: Create a blank project or to import a project using a Template Project.
List of all the options to create a project.
In this tutorial you will see the steps to create a blank Project.
First, it is necessary to name the project, the project name must contain 1-32 alphanumeric characters, without space neither special characters. The other information, such as
description and image, are optional, they will just be displayed inside Scriptcase project list.
Project Details.
Project Icon - You can select a project icon for display purposes in the project list. This field is not required, and may be changed after creation inside project properties.
2
Project Name - The name of the project is required for its creation. The project name must contain 1-32 alphanumeric characters, without space neither special characters.
Project Description - This where you will give a brief description of the project and it’s not required, also able to inform after the creation of the project.
Additional Project Information - Sets additional information you want for the project. This field is not required and can be changed after creation in the properties in the project.
Language
In this step you should select the languages that will be available for the system development.
Scriptcase can easily create multilingual systems. You just need to add more than one language in this step of the project. All the languages you choose will be available to be
used within the project, you must to choose one as standard. You can also have the same language more than once using different regional settings.
Scriptcase will automatically translate and apply the regional settings to your project applications (for buttons and internal messages for example). You can also use another tool
from Scriptcase called Data dictionary to import and translate your database fields. You will be able to see, create or customize the messages inside the menu > Locales >
Application languages.
Language - List of languages that are used in the projects.
Regional Settings - Contains the standard regional settings for the selected language. Regional Settings allows you to define some parameters of monetary units, dates and numbers
according to the country or region where your application will be used.
Charset - Sets the character encoding format that will be used in the application. This encoding must be the same used in your database. By default, the charset is filled according to the
language, and may be changed after creation in project properties.
Default - Sets the project default language. Project applications will be performed and displayed using this default language, it can also be changed individually within the application settings.
Delete - Removes the language of the project. In this way the language removed will no longer be available. It may also be included or deleted after the project creation within the Menu >
Project > Properties.
After selecting the language, regional setting and charset, click “Add” and then “Save” to move forward.
Themes
Scriptcase offers some ready themes available for you to apply to your project applications. The themes are going to define the visual presentation (layout and CSS) of your
applications.
In the themes selection you can choose more than one theme for your project. You can also customize or create new themes inside the projects by accessing the menu
Layout > CSS Application (Themes).
3
All - Lists all the available themes for use in your project.
Scriptcase - Lists all Scriptcase standards themes.
Public - Lists all themes defined in the Public level.
Selected themes - Lists the themes selected for use in the project.
To add a theme to your project you only need to select it, then it is going to be listed inside the selected themes. You should select a theme to be used as default, for this click on
the “default” icon of the selected theme. The default theme will be the one selected every time you create a new application, you will be also able to select a different one
according to the options available within the selected themes.
Databases
During the connection creation Scriptcase will listed all database systems according to your license. If you’re evaluating Scriptcase will display all database systems available. You
have to select your database and proceed to the next step to inform the database connection details.
The information required to connect is different for each database. In this example we will be using MySQL. To learn more about other connections please access this link.
4
Database connection details.
Connection Name : Define the name of the connection. You will not be able to change this name in the future.
DBMS Driver : Defined as MySQL PDO. It can also be MySQLi.
Server/Host (Name or IP) : Enter the IP of the server where the database is located. If the database is on the same machine of Scriptcase you can use the IP 127.0.0.1 or localhost. If the
database is
Port : Define the port of the connection that will be used. By default, the port is 3306.
User : Inform the username that you will use to connect to your Database.
Password : Inform the password that you will use to connect to your Database.
Database Name : Click on the “List Database” and select the desired Database.
Test Connection : Displays the connection status if it succeeded or not.
End
The project has been created successfully with the basic settings, and now you can create the applications. Visit the Applications menu to learn more about each application and
to see the steps to create them.
Related Links
5
1
Open Project
HOME › PROJECT › OPEN PROJECT
This option redirects to the Project List page, without closing your current project. To return to the application list, just click on the home icon. If you access another project, your
current project is closed
Access Project > Open Project or click on the Open Project icon on the toolbar.
Next, you will visualize the project list. The current project appears on the upper right corner, as shown in image below:
1
Close Project
HOME › PROJECT › CLOSE PROJECT
Closes the current project redirecting to the the Project List.
Access Project > Close Project
Or simple click on the Close Project Icon on the toolbar.

1
Properties
HOME › PROJECT › PROPERTIES
This option is only available when accessing a project. It allows editing the project’s information.
Edit Project
We can edit some of the project information, like the description and the use of the index.
Project Name - The name of the project informed on its creation. The project name doesn’t allow special characters, and can’t be changed after its creation.
Project Description - Description informed on the project creation.
Choose the initial application - Allows you to define the initial application of the project, so that we can use the Run Project button.
Use Index Page - Allows the use of friendly URLs in the applications. This option is enabled by default.
Project Information - Detailed description of the project.
Locales
Define the languages that will be used in the project. The languages are selected as you create your project, but can more be added or removed.
2
Language - List of languages that are used in the projects.
Regional Settings - Contains the standard regional settings for the selected language. Regional Settings allows you to define some parameters of monetary units, dates and numbers
according to the country or region where your application will be used.
Charset - Defines the encoding used by the selected language.
Default - Defines the default a language for the project. All the applications created will be executed on the default selected language.
Trash Can - Removes the language from the project. The removed language won’t be available for changing dynamically in runtime.
Themes
Defines the available themes in the project and the default theme that will be used by the applications. To define a default theme for your project, select the name of the desired
theme and click on Set a default Theme, the “default” notation will appear beside the theme name. In this image the default theme is Sc9_Rhino.
All Themes - List of all the themes from ScriptCase.
Project Themes - List of available themes within the project.

1
Default Values
HOME › PROJECT › DEFAULT VALUES
With this configuration, it is possible to standardize the creation of the applications of the current project, increasing the productivity in development of the applications.
Common Settings
Logo - The favicon that is going to use with the project. Customize the project using the same favicon in all the application.
Records per page - Amount of records per page.
Display Line Number - Defines the display of the line number existing in each application.
Display Titles - Displays the title of the application in execution.
Show Summary - Displays the number of records in the page and the total of the records in the application. This option will execute only if the line option in the Grid toolbar is disabled.
Use the old quick search - Defines the use of the old quicksearch, where we can specify which field do we want it to search for.
Use old Chart theme palettes - Defines the use of the old scheme of colors on the charts
Initial sort fields - Defines the initial sorting of the fields types.
Grid
Table Width - Defines the length for the application table. this option is available to select Pixel or Percent in the table width unit.
Table Width Unit - The unit used to define the width of the application. Automatic (Width automatically defined according to the size of the fields); Pixel (Width defined by pixels, that should
be informed in the form: 800px); Percent (Width defined in percentage, and should be informed in the form: 80%)
Format Row Counter - Configuration of visualization of the display summary option of the Grid. The Display summary option will be displayed and executed only if the line option in the
toolbar isn’t enabled
Tab a Group By - Defines the left margin of the Group By.
Separates the Group - Defines the margin between two Group Bys.
Records per page - Available values in the Record button, on the toolbar
Templates - Defines the templates used by default on the Header and Footer. It’s possible to inform the values to the variables of the selected templates, clicking on the editing icon right
beside the field of the template selection.
Grid fields alignment - It’s possible to define the default alignment specifically for the fields that contain numbers and dates and the other types of fields.
Toolbar Buttons - Define the buttons that’ll be setup by default in the toolbar for the new applications. We can setup the toolbar for the Grid, detail and summary.
2
Form
Format Row Counter - Configuration of visualization of the display summary option of the Form on a horizontal orientation. The Display summary option will be displayed and executed only
if the line option in the toolbar isn’t enabled
Automatic tab - Enables the automatic tab when finishing to inform a field.
Highlight Text on Focus - Allows the content of the fields to be Highlighted when the field is focused.
Highlight Field with Error - When occurring an error on a field, being also required for example, the focus will be applied to this field.
Error Position on the field - Position of the field error.
Show the Error Title in the Application - Defines the display of the title of the application error.
Show the Error Title in the Field - Defines the display of the error Title for the field.
Error Title - Defines the error Title.
Display message - Defines the display for the message if the field is required.
Toolbar Buttons - Define the buttons that’ll be setup by default in the toolbar for the new applications.
Control
Highlight Text on Focus - Allows the content of the fields to be Highlighted when the field is focused.
Highlight Field with Error - When occurring an error on a field, being also required for example, the focus will be applied to this field.
Templates - Defines the templates used be default on the Header and Footer. It’s possible to inform the values to the variables of the selected templates, clicking on the editing icon right
3
Search
Empty Search - Defines hoe the search will treat the informed conditions. “AND” (Should satisfy all the conditions so that the search can return some results) “OR” (Should satisfy any
condition informed so that the search can return some results)
Horizontal Alignment - Horizontal Alignment of the search.
Display Condition - Displays the condition of the search, so that the user can do their choice. (“AND” or “OR”)
Keep Values - Keep the values of the previous searches done when accessing the search again.
Keep Columns and Order Selection - Preserve the position of the fields and the sorting of the previous search.
Use Iframe - Allows the use and the display of the application searched in the same page within an iframe.
Initial State - Defines how the application will be displayed at first when using the search with an iframe, if the application will be displayed at first or only the search will be displayed.
Iframe Height - Defines the height of the iframe in pixels.
Templates - Defines the templates used be default on the Header and Footer. It’s possible to inform the values to the variables of the selected templates, clicking on the editing icon right
Toolbar Buttons - Define the buttons that’ll be setup by default in the toolbar for the new applications.
Calendar
4
Toolbar Buttons - Define the buttons that will be setup by default in the toolbar for the new applications.
New Chart
Old Chart
5
Tab
Tab Alignment - Display alignment of the tabs in the application.
Menu
Horizontal Alignment of the Menu - Menu alignment.
Horizontal Alignment of the Items - Menu item alignment
Dashboard
HTML Editor
The HTML Editor has to options of configurations, depending on the option selected on Use template in the HTML Editor .
6
Use template in the HTML Editor - Selecting Yes (Image Below), you will be using the new templated of the HTML Editor field, these themes should be setup in Layout > HTML Editor
Templates .
HTML Editor template - Defines the template for editing of the field HTML Editor.
Field Preview - Default Text of the HTML Editor Fields.
Use template in the HTML Editor - Selecting No (Image Below), you won’t be using the new templated of the HTML Editor field, in this case the options should be setup in the field its self.
Properties - Defines the display properties.
Location - Defines the position of the items in the field. Top or Bottom
Buttons Alignment - Defines the alignment of the items in the field. Left, Center, Right.
Status bar - Position of the Status Bar.
Toolbar Count - Amount of the bars to organize the items.
Buttons’ Organization - Set the available items in the bars.
Internal Libraries
Define the libraries that will be use in the project.
Level - Access level of the library.
List of Libraries - List of all the libraries available for use in the project.
1
Version History
HOME › PROJECT › VERSION HISTORY
Lists all the versions of the current project. The Version History page manages the versions of the project, created in the option of version incrementation, here we can return to
earlier versions, open a previous version or delete created versions.
Version - Project Version.
Description - Project version description.
Creation - Date of the version creation.
Delete - Delete the selected version of the project and all its applications. Applications from the other versions are not affected.
Status - Defines if the version of the project is opened or closed.
Edit - Allows to edit the selected version of the project. This option is available for the version that have the status Open.
1
Version Incrementing
HOME › PROJECT › VERSION INCREMENTING
Allows the control over the project in development, separating it in versions. The versioning of the project allows you to protect the functionalities existing in the system, before
doing any important modifications, by creating a new version of the current project.
The version increment allows that only the latest version of the project to be increased.
Current Version - Informs the current version of the project.
New Version - Defines the number of the new version of the project.
Description - New project description.

1
Generating Source Code
HOME › PROJECT › GENERATING SOURCE CODE
Allows you to generate the source code for all the applications in the project, select the chosen application or generate the source code for the outdated ones.
All - Generates the source code for all the applications in the current project, when selecting this option, you will be redirected to the page where the code will be generated, where you can
also see the log.
Outdated Applications - Generates the source code only for the outdated applications (recently modified applications that weren’t generated yet), when selecting this option, you will be
redirected to the page where the code will be generated, where you can see the log.
Select Applications - This option allows you to select the applications that you want to generate the source code, when selecting this option you will be redirected to the application selection
page.
Selecting Applications
All the applications from the project are listed here, you should select the applications that you want the source code to be generated. The application can be listed in two ways,
using the filter to list by Application types or by folders, as shown below.
After selecting the application that will be generated, you will be redirected to the page where the code will be generated, where you can also see the log.
2
We can see in the highlighted folder of the image some filter options.
Open Folder Icon - Allows possible errors to be displayed when generating the code.
Closed Folder Icon - Allows to hide the possible errors when generating the code.
Document ok - Displays only the applications that haven’t had any problems generating the code.
Document error - Displays only the applications that has had any problems generating the code.
1
Export Project
HOME › PROJECT › EXPORT PROJECT
This option allows you to create a .zip file with all the applications from the current project and all its required files.
Access File > Export Project .
Next, select the project that you want to export.
When finishing the process, the file will be available for download.
1
Import Project
HOME › PROJECT › IMPORT PROJECT
Allows you to import a project exported by ScriptCase, with all the required files.
Access File > Import Project.
Next, we need to select the project file that we want to import.
After finishing the process, we should inform the name of the project that is being imported.
In case there is a project with the same name in your ScriptCase, the project that is being imported will overwrite the existing project.
After finishing the import, we can open the project.

1
Deleting a Project
HOME › PROJECT › DELETING A PROJECT
To delete a project, you need to have it opened. In the project, access Project > Delete Project . All the information relating to the project and the applications will be deleted.
The project exclusion process can’t be undone.

1
Reports
HOME › PROJECT › REPORTS
We offer two types of reports for projects: Application List and Developers Summary.
To generate the reports, access Project > Reports
Application List
Displays a list with all the existing applications in the current project and the SQL INSERT Queries of the tables. To generate the report, first you need to define which information
you want to be available.
Select Columns - Defines the columns that will be part of the report.
Sorting - Defines the fields and the sorting that will be available.
Order By - Defines the initial sorting for the report. It will use Ascendant by default if not informed.
Group By - Defines the grouping of the report, by type (application) or by folder (Project’s File Directory).
After finishing the configurations, click on Report .

2
Developers Summary
Generates a Summary with every action each developer had done, showing the total applications and their types and the total of code lines that the user wrote in the
applications.
This same report is available in Charts, with three types of visualization.
Applications - Total of applications in the project grouped by their type.
Developers - Total of application created by developer in the project.
Applications x Developers - A junction of the other two charts.

1
Showing Diagram
HOME › PROJECT › SHOWING DIAGRAM
Generates a diagram of relationships between applications in the project. On this diagram, you can see in a clear way which applications are related and which is the method
used to create the relationship.
On this example we’re showing the relationship of all the applications in the sc_album project.
There are some options that can help visualizing the diagram.
We can display a minimap of all the diagrams, to help with the display. In order to visualize it, click on the icon on the lower left side of the diagram.
There are other options of views, instead of the minimap, as shown below.
2
Diagram Format - Build the Diagram according to the ties positioning.
Reading Mode - Defines the perspective of reading for the diagram when it’s created.
Space - Defines the space between the columns(Horizontally) and the layers(Vertically).
1
Application Search
HOME › PROJECT › APPLICATION SEARCH
It performs a search in the project with all the content informed by the search itself.
The location on which the search will look for defined by a checkbox.
At least one of the options need to be selected.
All - Performs a search in all the options listed below.
SQL - Searches only in the SQL areas of the applications.
Field Name and label - Performs a search for the name and label of the field.
Links - Performs a search only for the name of the applications.
Lookup - Searches inky in the lookup area of the fields.
Themes - Searches only for theme names.
Template Name - Searches only for HTML templates names.
Libraries - Searches for internal libraries that contain this specific name.
Header and Footer - Searches only for the Application Titles.
Block Name and Label - Searches only for the name or label of the block informed.
The results will be disaplyed as shown below.
Application - Name of the applications found that satisfies the search.
Item - Location where the search criteria was found.
Values - Values found that satisfies the search.

1
Importing a template project.
HOME › PROJECT › IMPORTING A TEMPLATE PROJECT.
The process of creating the sample project is simple and intuitive, this process is divided into just two steps which are detailed below.
The projects created with access permission for the user, appear in Project List.
Start
During the first step of the project creation you will be able to create a Blank project or to Import a template according to the options below.
Our projects templates include some examples for most of the features from Scriptcase, you can preview them on the website. When you import a project template Scriptcase
will delivery some ready applications and also the database tables. Hereinafter you will see the steps to import one template project, the “Samples”.
First, you need to chose the project and customize the details. Description and image, are optional.
Project Icon - You can select a project icon for display purposes in the project list. This field is not required, and may be changed after creation inside project properties.
Project Name - The name of the project is required for its creation. The project name must contain 1-32 alphanumeric characters, without space neither special characters.
Project Description - This where you will give a brief description of the project and it’s not required, also able to inform after the creation of the project.
Additional Project information - Here you can add some additional information you want for the project. This field is not required, and may be changed after creation in properties in the
project.
Database
Our template projects are available for MySQL, Oracle, SQL Server, Postgres, Access, SQLite, Firebird.
You can choose to use the default connection or to configure a new connection to your own database.
Use default connection (SQLite)

By clicking on the option “Use default connection (SQLite)” Scriptcase undertakes to create a database, with the SQLite database, and insert all the information of tables and
records. The database file with the project tables and some dummy records will be stored within Scriptcase’s directory.
The project will be created and configured with all the basic information. Generate the source code to compile and applications and then “open project” and view all the
applications created or “Run” the project to open the initial application
Create a new connection to my database
After selecting the database you want to connect, enter the required data to perform the connection.
The information needed to create a connection vary according to the selected database. In the example below, we will show with MySQL connection. For more details on how to
connect your database click here.
Connection Name : Define the name of the connection. You will not be able to change this name in the future.
DBMS Driver : Defined as MySQL PDO. It can also be MySQLi.
Server/Host (Name or IP) : Enter the IP of the server where the database is located. If the database is on the same machine of Scriptcase you can use the IP 127.0.0.1 or localhost.
Port : Define the port of the connection that will be used. By default, the port is 3306.
User : Inform the user name that you will use to connect to your Database.
Password : Inform the password that you will use to connect to your Database.
Database Name : Click on the “List Database” and select the desired Database.
Test Connection : Displays the connection status if it succeeded or not.
If you don’t have a database created, click on the button “Create Database” and the window below will appear.
The option of Create Database is available for: MySQL/MariaDB, MSSQL Server and PostegreSQL
2
Enter a name for your database and click “OK”. After that the database created it will be displayed database list. To create a database directly from Scriptcase you need to have
the correct permissions within the database system itself, sometimes this permission is refused, specially when you have the database in another server. In this example we have
the database located on the same server, localhost.
After you finish, Scriptcase undertakes to create all the tables and insert all information to be used in applications.
All set! Now the project will be created and configured with all the basic information. Generate the source code to compile the applications and then open project and view all
the applications created.
Related Links
1
General Overview
HOME › CONNECTIONS
ScriptCase Available Connections
Access
IBM DB2
Firebird
Informix
Interbase
MySQL
Oracle
PostgreSQL
SQL Server
SQLite
Generic ODBC
1
Access
HOME › CONNECTIONS › ACCESS
1
Windows
HOME › CONNECTIONS › ACCESS › WINDOWS
Before proceeding with this tutorial check your PHP architecture in the phpinfo(). Accessing your ScriptCase’s phpinfo, for example http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase/info.php,
you’ll find the PHP architecture.
Architecture x86 = 32 bits
If you are using ScriptCase’s automatic installer the PHP architecture will be the same as the installer that you downloaded.
MS Access ODBC
Setting up Access connection via ODBC on Windows
Requirements
The Access Database (.mdb or .accdb files) needs to be stored on the same server as ScriptCase.
Have one or more tables created.
Microsoft Microsoft 2010 Access Database Engine Driver installed.
Enabling the extension

First we must download the 2010 Access Database Engine according to the architecture of your PHP.
To download the 64-bit engine click here
At the end of the download, follow the Access Database Engine installation wizard.
Installing the Access Database Engine.

2
Creating a Data Source (ODBC)

Go to Control Panel> Systems and Security> Administrative Tools> ODBC Data Sources (32 or 64 bits), according to your PHP architecture.
If you have a data source configured, proceed to Creating a Connection in ScriptCase .
Accessing and Configuring the ODBC Data Source.
Select the System DNS tab and click Add.

3
Choose one of the available drivers, you can choose from the following drivers:
Microsoft Access Driver ( .mdb).
Microsoft Access Driver ( .mdb, *.accdb )
Select the driver according to the file extension created by your Access database.
ODBC driver available.
After selecting the driver, the following screen will be displayed:

Two fields are required for data source configuration:
Data Source Name : Name of the data source that will be used when creating the connection in Scriptcase.
Database: Path pointing where the database is stored.
Creating the Data Source.
After entering the Data Source Name, click “Select” to select the database that will be used.
Select Database.
Drivers: List of computer drives (HD Partition) that will have your folders listed in Directories.
Directories: Computer Drives folder list (HD Partition) selected under Drivers.
Database Name : List of files in the folder selected in Directories (Files listed according to their extensions).
List Files of Type : Files extensions listed in Database Name.
After selecting the database, click OK to complete the configuration.
Returning to the ODBC Data Source Administrator screen, you can view the already configured connections.
4
MS Access ADO
Setting up ADO Access in Windows
Requirements
The Access Database (.mdb or .accdb files) needs to be stored on the same server as ScriptCase.
Microsoft Microsoft 2010 Access Database Driver installed.
Installing the 2010 Access Database Engine

At the end of the download, follow the Access Database Engine installation wizard.

5
Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase
After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”
Creating a new connection
After that, you will see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “MS Access” connection
Selecting a Windows
database connection
New connection : You will place the information of the connection to your database here:
6
Connecting with Windows
database
Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.
DBMS Driver : Defines the driver with ODBC.
ODBC Name : On the option ODBC Name, inform the data source (ODBC) name that was created in the Windows Control Panel.
Username : Inform the username for Windows database (Just in case you are in fact using one).
Password : Inform the password for Windows database (Just in case you are in fact using one).
Test Connection : Displays the connection status (Success or Failed).
Finalize: Save connection.
For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:
Advanced setup for
the Windows database
Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.
Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that do not close when finishing a script.
Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schema before the name of the tables.
Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:
Filtering the Windows
database
Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.
Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.
System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.
Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.
Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

7
Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.
Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.
Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
1
IBM DB2
HOME › CONNECTIONS › IBM DB2
1
Windows
HOME › CONNECTIONS › IBM DB2 › WINDOWS
The automatic installation already comes with the IBM DB2 preconfigured, only needing to install the client to make the connection.
If you’re using your own environment preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the IBM DB2 extension in PHP.
DB2
Setting up DB2 on Windows
Pre-Requirements
Have the database installed and setup on a server or locally.
Have at least one table created.
Have the Instant Client installed on the same machine as ScriptCase.
If all the requirements are met, the DB2 extension will be enabled, in this case you can proceed to Creating a Connection with Scriptcase.
In case it is not enabled, follow the steps below to enable the DB2 extension:
Enabling the Extension

Download the instant client compatible with the architecture of your operating system, x64 or x86 bits:
DsDriver Windows ( x86 )
After downloading, follow the wizard of the installation and click to advance to maintain the default values of the installer.
Setting up DB2 DsDriver.
Accept the terms and advance with the installation.

2
Click on Advance, to maintain the default values of the installer
Click on Install, to start the installation procedure
Click on Finish, to Finish the installation.
DB2 Native ODBC

Setting up DB2 Native ODBC on Windows
Pre-Requirements
3


4
DB2 Generic ODBC

Setting up DB2 Generic ODBC on Windows
Pre-Requirements
5


6
DB2 Generic ODBC 6 or Lower

Setting up DB2 Generic ODBC 6 or Lower on Windows
Pre-Requirements
7


8
DB2 PDO
Setting up DB2 PDO on Windows
Pre-Requirements
9


10

11
After that, you will see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “DB2” connection
Selecting a Windows
database connection
Connecting with
Windows database
DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: DB2 Generic ODBC, DB2 Generic ODBC 6 or lower, DB2, DB2 Native ODBC.
Server/Host (Name or IP) : Insert the name or IP of the server where the Windows database is located.
Database Name : Inform the database name.
Schema : You can inform the Schema (It is optional), in case you want to use the tables that are part of a Schema.
Username : Inform the user to access the Windows database.
Password : Inform the password to access the Windows database.
Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.
Advanced setup for the Windows database

12
autocommit - Enables or disables the auto commit functionality.
i5_lib - A value of characters that indicates the default library that will be used to solve unqualified file references. This is not valid if the the connection is using the system nomination mode.
i5_naming - Enables or disables the system nomination mode of the DB2 UDB CLI iSeries. The files are qualified when using dash (/) delimiter. Unqualified files are solved using the list of
libraries to work.
i5_commit - Select the desired option treating the date of the IBM DB2.
Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.
database

1
Linux
HOME › CONNECTIONS › IBM DB2 › LINUX
The automatic installation already comes with the IBM DB2 preconfigured, only needing to install the client to make the connection.
If you’re using your own environment preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the IBM DB2 extension in PHP.
DB2
Setting up DB2 on Linux
The automatic installation already comes with the IBM DB2 preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.
Install the dependencies below:
UBUNTU\DEBIAN CENTOS\RHEL
- sudo apt-get update - sudo yum update
- sudo apt-get install libaio1 - sudo yum install libaio-devel
- sudo apt-get install libncurses5 - sudo yum install libaio
- sudo apt-get install alien - sudo yum install glibc
- sudo apt-get install gcc-multilib g++-multilib - sudo yum install compat-libstdc++-33
- sudo apt-get install libpam0g - sudo yum install glibc-devel
- sudo apt-get install ksh - sudo yum install libstdc++
- sudo apt-get install unixodbc-dev unixodbc - sudo yum install libstdc++
- sudo yum install pam
- sudo yum install ncurses-devel
- sudo yum install unixODBC
- sudo wget ftp://195.220.108.108/linux/centos/6.7/os/i386/Packages/ksh-20120801-28.el6.i686.rpm
- sudo yum install ksh-20120801-28.el6.i686.rpm
- sudo yum install nano
Download the instant client compatible with the architecture of your operating system, x64 or x86 bits.
DsDriver Linux ( x86 )
Installing DsDriver IBM DB2

Architecture x86 Architecture x64
sudo mkdir -p /opt/IBM/Db2 sudo mkdir -p /opt/IBM/x64/db2
sudo cp sudo cp x86_v10.5fp8_linuxia32_dsdriver.tar.gz /opt/IBM/Db2 sudo cp x64_v10.5fp8_linuxx64_dsdriver.tar.gz /opt/IBM/x64/db2
sudo tar -zxf /opt/IBM/Db2/x86_v10.5fp8_linuxia32_dsdriver.tar.gz sudo tar -zxf /opt/IBM/x64/db2/x64_v10.5fp8_linuxx64_dsdriver.tar.gz
sudo ksh /opt/IBM/Db2/dsdriver/installDSDriver sudo ksh /opt/IBM/x64/db2/dsdriver/installDSDriver
sudo source /opt/IBM/x64/db2/dsdriver/db2profile
Restart the Apache Server: sudo /etc/init.d/apachesc9 restart
DB2 Native ODBC

Setting up DB2 Native ODBC on Linux

2
UBUNTU\DEBIAN - sudo yum install nano
CENTOS\RHEL

DB2 Generic ODBC

Setting up DB2 Generic ODBC on Linux
Download the instant client compatible with the architecture of your operating system, x64 or x86 bits

DB2 Generic ODBC 6 or Lower

Setting up DB2 Generic ODBC 6 or Lower on Linux

3
- sudo apt-get install gcc-multilib g++-multilib CENTOS\RHEL
UBUNTU\DEBIAN - sudo yum install compat-libstdc++-33

DB2 PDO
Setting up DB2 PDO on Linux


4
After that, you will see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “DB2” connection
Selecting a Linux
database connection
Connecting with Linux
database
DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: DB2 Generic ODBC, DB2 Generic ODBC 6 or lower, DB2, DB2 Native ODBC.
Server/Host (Name or IP) : Insert the name or IP of the server where the Linux database is located.
Database Name : Inform the database name.
Schema : You can inform the Schema (It is optional), in case you want to use the tables that are part of a Schema.
Username : Inform the user to access the Linux database.
Password : Inform the password to access the Linux database.
Advanced setup for the Linux database

5
autocommit - Enables or disables the auto commit functionality.
i5_lib - A value of characters that indicates the default library that will be used to solve unqualified file references. This is not valid if the the connection is using the system nomination mode.
i5_naming - Enables or disables the system nomination mode of the DB2 UDB CLI iSeries. The files are qualified when using dash (/) delimiter. Unqualified files are solved using the list of
libraries to work.
i5_commit - Select the desired option treating the date of the IBM DB2.
Filtering the Linux
database

1
Firebird
HOME › CONNECTIONS › FIREBIRD
1
Windows
HOME › CONNECTIONS › FIREBIRD › WINDOWS
The automatic installation already comes with the Firebird preconfigured, only needing to install the client to make the connection.
If you’re using your own environment preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the Firebird extension in PHP.
Firebird
Setting up FireBird on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the FireBird driver, only needing to connect with the database in the ScriptCase.
Firebird PDO
Setting up FireBird PDO on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the FireBird PDO driver, only needing to connect with the database in the ScriptCase.

After that, you will see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “FireBird” connection
Selecting a Windows
database connection
2
database
DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the FireBird drivers.
Database Name : Inform the Database name.
Advanced setup for
database

3
1
Linux
HOME › CONNECTIONS › FIREBIRD › LINUX
Firebird
Setting up FireBird on Linux
Firebird PDO
Setting up FireBird PDO on Linux

Selecting a Linux
database connection
2
database
Advanced setup for
the Linux database
Filtering the Linux
database

3
1
Mac OS X
HOME › CONNECTIONS › FIREBIRD › MAC OS X
Firebird
Setting up FireBird on MAC
The automatic installation already comes with the FireBird preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.
Pre-Requirements
Download the installation: Client FireBird
Install the client.
Restart the Apache Server.
Firebird PDO
Setting up FireBird PDO on MAC
Pre-Requirements
Download the installation: Client InterBase
Restart the Apache Server:
/Applications/NetMake/v9/components/xamppfiles/xampp restart

Selecting a Mac OS X
database connection
2
Connecting with Mac OS X
database
Server/Host (Name or IP) : Insert the name or IP of the server where the Mac OS X database is located.
Username : Inform the user to access the Mac OS X database.
Password : Inform the password to access the Mac OS X database.
Advanced setup for
the Mac OS X database
Filtering the Mac OS X
database

3
1
Informix
HOME › CONNECTIONS › INFORMIX
1
Windows
HOME › CONNECTIONS › INFORMIX › WINDOWS
Currently ScriptCase offers the connection to the Informix through the SDK. The Informix extension comes disabled in the installer.
If you are using your own preconfigured environment, you will need to enable the Informix extension in PHP.
Informix PDO
Setting up Informix on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the PDO Informix preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.
ClienteSDK Windows ( x86 )
ClienteSDK Windows ( x64 )
Installing ClienteSDK Informix

Unzip the file into any folder. e.g.: client informix
Unzipping the file.
Access the CMD from your windows by searching for a command prompt in Windows Search or by pricing ctrl + r and typing cmd in the search.
Accessing Windows Command Prompt.
When starting the CMD , access the folder where the file was saved after the download using the cd command and informing the path. Example:
2
Accessing the client folder.
Then run the .exe file with the -i and GUI parameters. Example: installclientsdk.exe -i GUI__
Running the installer.
Follow the client installation wizard, clicking next, to maintain the default installation values. Pay attention to the Security Features step.
Installation Wizard.
At this point you can choose whether or not to use a password to access the Informix Administration Application (OTA)
OTA Definition.
Set your login and password, if you have checked the OAT password protection
OTA password Definition.
Select NO and proceed with the installation normally.

3
Installation Wizard.
Proceed with the installation by clicking Done and wait for the process to end.
Finish the Installation.

After that, you will see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “Informix” connection
Selecting a Windows
database connection
4
Connecting with
Windows database
DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the Informix PDO drivers.
Database Name : Inform name of the database.
Advanced setup for
database

5
1
Linux
HOME › CONNECTIONS › INFORMIX › LINUX
Informix PDO
Setting up Informix on Linux
ClienteSDK Linux ( x86 )
ClienteSDK Linux ( x64 )
Installing ClienteSDK Informix

sudo tar -xf x86_clientsdk.3.70.UC8DE.LINUX.tar sudo tar -xf x64_clientsdk.4.10.FC6DE.LINUX.tar
Nota: O diretório de instalação do client Informix deve ser: /opt/IBM/ifx Nota: O diretório de instalação do client Informix deve ser: /opt/IBM/x64/informix
sudo ./installclientsdk sudo ./installclientsdk
Selecione 1 para aceitar os termos. Selecione 1 para aceitar os termos.
Selecione as opções: 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17 Selecione as opções: 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17
Prossiga com a instalação. Prossiga com a instalação.
sudo /etc/init.d/apachesc9 restart

2
Selecting a Linux
database connection
database
Advanced setup for
the Linux database
3
Filtering the Linux
database

1
Mac OS X
HOME › CONNECTIONS › INFORMIX › MAC OS X
Informix PDO
Setting up Informix on MAC
Download the instant client
ClienteSDK Mac OS X
Extract the .tar file
Do the installation through the terminal, accessing the extracted folder and executing the command below:
sudo ./installclientsdk
Install in the default directory ( /Applications/IBM/informix )
Choose options from 1 to 17
Restart the web server.

database connection
2
Connecting with Mac OS
X database
Advanced setup for
database

3
1
Interbase
HOME › CONNECTIONS › INTERBASE
1
Windows
HOME › CONNECTIONS › INTERBASE › WINDOWS
The automatic installation already comes with the InterBase extension only needing to connect with the database.
If you are using your own preconfigured environment, you will need to enable the InterBase extension in PHP.
InterBase 6.5 or Higher

Setting up InterBase 6 or Higher on Windows
InterBase
Setting up InterBase on Windows

After that, you will see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “InterBase” connection
Selecting a Windows
database connection
2
Connecting with
Windows database
DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the Interbase 6.5 or higher drivers.
IP:PATH : Inform the IP and path of the server to the location of the Windows database.
PATH : Path of the Windows database.
Advanced setup for
database

3
1
Linux
HOME › CONNECTIONS › INTERBASE › LINUX

Setting up InterBase 6 or Higher on Linux
InterBase
Setting up InterBase on Linux

Selecting a Linux
database connection
2
database
IP:PATH : Inform the IP and path of the server to the location of the Linux database.
PATH : Path of the Linux database.
Advanced setup for
the Linux database
Filtering the Linux
database

3
1
Mac OS X
HOME › CONNECTIONS › INTERBASE › MAC OS X

Setting up InterBase 6 or Higher on MAC
The automatic installation already comes with the Interbase preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.
Pre-Requirements
InterBase
Setting up InterBase on MAC
Pre-Requirements

database connection
2
X database
IP:PATH : Inform the IP and path of the server to the location of the Mac OS X database.
PATH : Path of the Mac OS X database.
Advanced setup for
database

3
1
MySQL
HOME › CONNECTIONS › MYSQL
1
Windows
HOME › CONNECTIONS › MYSQL › WINDOWS
The automatic installation already comes with the MySQL extension only needing to connect with the database.
If you are using your own preconfigured environment, you will need to enable the MySQL extension in PHP.
Server sent charset unknown to the client

If you are using MySQL 8, due to the PHP 7 bug, an error occurs when trying to connect to the Scriptcase.
Click here and see how to work around this error.
MySQL PDO
Setting up MySQL PDO on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the MySQL driver, only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.
MySQLi
Setting up MySQLi on Windows

After that, you will see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “MySQL” connection
Selecting a Windows
database connection
2
Connecting with
Windows database
DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: MySQL PDO.
Port : Define the port used for the connection. By default it is 3306.
Database Name : Select the database.
Setting up security with
Windows
Use SSL : Activates or deactivates the use of secure connections with Windows.
Client Key : Path to the client’s private identification key in the format PEM.
Client Certificate : Path to the client’s public certificate key.
AC Path : Path to the directory that contains the Authority Certification (AC) in the format PEM, if used, it should specify the same certificate used by the server.
AC Certificate : Path to the Authority Certificate (AC) in the format PEM. This option, if used, should specify the same certificate as the server.
Specific Chipper : A list of permitted numbers to use with the cryptography of the connection. If one of the numbers is not supported, the SSL connection won’t work.
For more details, consult: Setting up MySQL to use secure connections

3
Advanced setup for the
Windows database
client_encoding : Database Encoding.
database

1
Linux
HOME › CONNECTIONS › MYSQL › LINUX

MySQL PDO
Setting up MySQL PDO on Linux
MySQLi
Setting up MySQLi on Linux

Selecting a Linux
database connection
2
database
Linux
Use SSL : Activates or deactivates the use of secure connections with Linux.

3
Linux database
Filtering the Linux
database

1
Mac OS X
HOME › CONNECTIONS › MYSQL › MAC OS X

MySQL PDO
Setting up MySQL PDO on MAC
MySQLi
Setting up MySQLi on MAC

database connection
2
X database
Mac OS X
Use SSL : Activates or deactivates the use of secure connections with Mac OS X.

3
Mac OS X database
database

1
Oracle
HOME › CONNECTIONS › ORACLE
1
Windows
HOME › CONNECTIONS › ORACLE › WINDOWS
The automatic installation already comes with the Oracle extension only needing to connect with the database.
If you are using your own preconfigured environment, you will need to enable the Oracle extension in PHP.
Oracle PDO
Setting up Oracle PDO on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the Oracle PDO preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.
*Enter Oracle’s website (www.oracle.com) and download Instant Client Basic according to the architecture of your operating system (x64 or x86)
Note: PHP 7.0 is only compatible with instant client 11 or higher
Download Instant Client 12.
Extract the instant client basic package from your computer (e.g.: C:\instantclient_12_1).
We should put in the folder PHP(NetMake/v9/components/php/) the following DLLs:

Copy the dll oraociei12.dll (it is inside the folder of the instant client (e.g.: C: \ instantclient_12_1)).
Add to the system PATH the path of this folder:

Go to Control Panel> System> Advanced System Settings.
On the Advanced tab> Click Environment Variables. Advanced Settings.

2
Add the path as shown below: Adding client path.
Restart the web server
Oracle 8.0.5 or Higher

Setting up Oracle 8.0.5 or Higher on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the Oracle preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.


3
Oracle ODBC
Setting up Oracle ODBC on Windows

4
Extract the instant client odbc package inside the instant client basic folder ( e.g.: C:\instantclient_12_1).


Oracle 8
Setting up Oracle 8 on Windows

5


Oracle 7 or Lower
Setting up Oracle 7 or Lower on Windows
6



7

After that, you will see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “Oracle” connection
Selecting a Windows
database connection
database
DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: Oracle 8.0.5 or Higher.
TSNAME : Insert the name or IP of the server where the Windows database is located with the Service Name created in the Windows installation.

8
Windows database
Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.
database

1
Linux
HOME › CONNECTIONS › ORACLE › LINUX
Oracle PDO
Setting up Oracle PDO on Linux
- sudo yum install libstdc++
Client basic Linux ( x86 )
Client devel Linux ( x86 )
Installing Oracle Client

UBUNTU\DEBIAN
sudo alien oracle-instantclient12.1-devel-12.1.0.2.0-1.i386.rpm sudo alien oracle-instantclient12.1-devel-12.1.0.2.0-1.x86_64.rpm
sudo alien oracle-instantclient12.1-basic-12.1.0.2.0-1.i386.rpm sudo alien oracle-instantclient12.1-basic-12.1.0.2.0-1.x86_64.rpm
sudo dpkg -i oracle-instantclient12.1-basic_12.1.0.2.0-2_i386.deb sudo dpkg -i oracle-instantclient12.1-basic_12.1.0.2.0-2_amd64.deb
sudo dpkg -i oracle-instantclient12.1-devel_12.1.0.2.0-2_i386.deb sudo dpkg -i oracle-instantclient12.1-devel_12.1.0.2.0-2_amd64.deb
CENTOS\RHEL
sudo yum install oracle-instantclient12.1-devel-12.1.0.2.0-1.i386.rpm sudo yum install oracle-instantclient12.1-devel-12.1.0.2.0-1.x86_64.rpm
sudo yum install oracle-instantclient12.1-basic-12.1.0.2.0-1.i386.rpm sudo yum install oracle-instantclient12.1-basic-12.1.0.2.0-1.x86_64.rpm

Setting up Oracle 8.0.5 or Higher on Linux
2
UBUNTU\DEBIAN - sudo yum install pam
CENTOS\RHEL

UBUNTU\DEBIAN
CENTOS\RHEL
Oracle ODBC
Setting up Oracle ODBC on Linux

UBUNTU\DEBIAN
sudo alien oracle-instantclient12.1-odbc-12.1.0.2.0-1.i386.rpm sudo alien oracle-instantclient12.1-odbc-12.1.0.2.0-1.x86_64.rpm
sudo dpkg -i oracle-instantclient12.1-odbc-12.1.0.2.0-2_i386.deb sudo dpkg -i oracle-instantclient12.1-odbc-12.1.0.2.0-2_amd64.deb
CENTOS\RHEL
3
CENTOS\RHEL
sudo yum install oracle-instantclient12.1-odbc-12.1.0.2.0-1.i386.rpm sudo yum install oracle-instantclient12.1-odbc-12.1.0.2.0-1.x86_64.rpm
Oracle 8
Setting up Oracle 8 on Linux

UBUNTU\DEBIAN
CENTOS\RHEL
Oracle 7 or Lower
Setting up Oracle 7 or Lower on Linux
4
UBUNTU\DEBIAN - sudo yum install ncurses-devel
CENTOS\RHEL

UBUNTU\DEBIAN
CENTOS\RHEL

Selecting a Linux
database connection
5
database
TSNAME : Insert the name or IP of the server where the Linux database is located with the Service Name created in the Linux installation.
Linux database
Filtering the Linux
database
6

1
Mac OS X
HOME › CONNECTIONS › ORACLE › MAC OS X
Oracle PDO
Setting up Oracle PDO on MAC
Download the Oracle Instant Client
Client Oracle 12 Mac OS X
Create the folder /usr/local/instantclient/12.1.0.2/
Extract all content from the downloaded file into /usr/local/instantclient/12.1.0.2/

Setting up Oracle 8.0.5 or Higher on MAC
Oracle ODBC
Setting up Oracle ODBC on MAC
Oracle 8
Setting up Oracle 8 on MAC

2
Oracle 7 or Lower
Setting up Oracle 7 or Lower on MAC

database connection
Connecting with Mac OS X
database
TSNAME : Insert the name or IP of the server where the Mac OS X database is located with the Service Name created in the Mac OS X installation.

3
Mac OS X database
database

1
PostgreSQL
HOME › CONNECTIONS › POSTGRESQL
1
Windows
HOME › CONNECTIONS › POSTGRESQL › WINDOWS
The automatic installation already comes with the PostgreSQL extension only needing to connect with the database.
If you are using your own preconfigured environment, you will need to enable the PostgreSQL extension in PHP.
PostgreSQL 7 or Higher
Setting up PostgreSQL 7 or Higher on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the PostgreSQL only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.
PostgreSQL PDO
Setting up PostgreSQL PDO on Windows
PostgreSQL 6.4 or Higher

Setting up PostgreSQL 6.4 or Higher on Windows
PostgreSQL 6.3 or Lower

Setting up PostgreSQL 6.3 or Lower on Windows

After that, you will see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “PostgreSQL” connection
Selecting a Windows
database connection
2
Connecting with
Windows database
DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: PostgreSQL PDO.
Windows database
3
database

1
Linux
HOME › CONNECTIONS › POSTGRESQL › LINUX
Setting up PostgreSQL 7 or Higher on Linux
PostgreSQL PDO
Setting up PostgreSQL PDO on Linux

Setting up PostgreSQL 6.4 or Higher on Linux

Setting up PostgreSQL 6.3 or Lower on Linux

Selecting a Linux
database connection
2
database
Linux database
3
Filtering the Linux
database

1
Mac OS X
HOME › CONNECTIONS › POSTGRESQL › MAC OS X
Setting up PostgreSQL 7 or Higher on MAC
PostgreSQL PDO
Setting up PostgreSQL PDO on MAC

Setting up PostgreSQL 6.4 or Higher on MAC

Setting up PostgreSQL 6.3 or Lower on MAC

database connection
2
X database
Mac OS X database
3
database

1
MSSQL Server
HOME › CONNECTIONS › MSSQL SERVER
1
Windows
HOME › CONNECTIONS › SQL SERVER › WINDOWS
See below the compatibility table of the drivers available in Scriptcase with Windows.
Compatibility Table
Server 2016 Server 2012 /R2 Windows 10 Windows 8 / 8.1 Server 2008 SP2 / R2 SP1 Windows 7 SP1 Windows Vista SP2
Native SRV PDO
Native SRV
ODBC
Server ADO
if you need to use Database Identifiers in or tables, we recommend using the double quotation marks( “ ) instead of the brackets( [ ] ) because of the conflict with the
Global Variables syntax of Scriptcase. Using the brackets as database identifiers may lead to problems in the Scriptcase applications.
MSSQL Server Native SRV

Setting up MSSQL Server Native SRV on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the MSSQL Server preconfigured, only needing to install the Microsoft ODBC Driver 11 for SQL Server so that you can do the
connection.
Supported Operating Systems: Windows Server (from the 2008 SP2 version) and Windows (from the 7 SP1 version).
Installing Microsoft ODBC Driver 11 for SQL Server

Download the Microsoft ODBC Driver 11 for SQL Server according to the operating system architecture:
ODBC Driver 11 64 bits
After downloading the file, run the installer and follow the steps below:
Installation wizard.
Accept the terms of the license agreement and click next.

2
In this option leave the option “Client components” checked.
Check the “ODBC Driver for SQL Server SDK” option, because the components we are going to need are also in this option.
Click Install to begin the client installation.
The features of the program you selected are being installed.
3
Click Finish to exit.
MSSQL Server Native SRV PDO

Setting up MSSQL Server Native SRV on Windows
connection.

4
5
MSSQL Server ODBC
Setting up MSSQL Server ODBC on Windows
connection.

6
Configurando fonte de dados

To connect to MS SQL Server ODBC you will need to create a system data source on the same Scriptcase server.
To do so, go to: Control Panel > System and Security > Administrative Tools> ODBC Data Sources
After creating the system data source, you just need to create an MS SQL Server ODBC connection in the Scriptcase.
MSSQL Server ADO

Setting up MSSQL Server ADO on Windows
Important: This connection causes problems in nchar and nvarchar data recovery with SQL Server databases from the 2008 release. Therefore, we do not recommend using
this connection for the most up-to-date SQL Server databases.
The automatic installation already comes with the MSSQL Server ADO driver, only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.
7
After that, you will see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “MSSQL Server” connection
Selecting a Windows
database connection
Connecting with
Windows database
DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: Native SRV PDO, Native SRV or ODBC.
Server/Host (Name or IP) : Insert the name or IP\INSTANCE of the server where the Windows database is located.

8
Advanced setup for
Unicode Converter - Select if there is going to be conversion of characters to Unicode.
database

1
Linux
HOME › CONNECTIONS › SQL SERVER › LINUX
The automatic installation already comes with the MSSQL Server extension preconfigured, only needing to connect with the database. If you are using your own preconfigured
environment, you will need to enable the MSSQL Server extension in PHP.
If you are using a Microsoft Azure server, see more configuration details click here.
PDO DBLIB
Configurando DBLIB Server no Linux
The automatic installation already comes with the PDO BDLIB preconfigured, only needing to install the FreeTDS and unixODBC so that you can do the connection.
Be certified that you already have the PHP extension for PDO DBLIB enabled.
You can install the extension with this command on terminal: sudo apt-get install php7.0-pdo-dblib
Access the shell(terminal) with root and install the packages below:
Distribution: Debian
sudo apt-get install unixODBC unixODBC-dev gcc nano wget make
Distribution: Ubuntu
sudo apt-get install unixodbc unixodbc-dev gcc nano wget make
Distribution: RHEL\CentOS
sudo yum install unixODBC unixODBC-devel gcc nano wget make
Distribution: Suse\OpenSuse
sudo zypper install unixODBC unixODBC-devel gcc nano wget make
Download FreeTDS:
wget http://cdn1.netmake.com.br/download/freetds-0.95.95.tar.gz
Descompact the FreeTDS:
tar -zxf freetds-0.95.95.tar.gz
Enter in the FreeTDS folder:
cd freetds-0.95.95
Run the command below to compile and install the FreeTDS :
sudo ./configure --with-tdsver=7.4 --with-unixodbc=/usr --disable-libiconv --disable-static --disable-threadsafe --enable-msdblib --disable-sspi --with-gnu-ld --enable-sybase-compat && make
&& make install
Edit the FreeTDS configuration file:
Distribution: Debian\Ubuntu
sudo nano /usr/local/etc/freetds.conf
Distribution: RHEL\CentOS
sudo nano /usr/local/freetds/freetds.conf
Distribution: Suse\OpenSuse
sudo nano /usr/local/freetds/freetds.conf
Sample settings:
[MSSQLServer] host = 192.168.254.171 instance = SQLEXPRESS port = 1433 tds version = 8.0
You need to use the name “MSSQLServer” ( it’s the DNS from FreeTDS ) in the option “Server/Host (Name or IP)” to do the connection with your SQLServer database.

2
Selecting a Linux
database connection
database
Server/Host (Name or IP) : Insert the name or IP\INSTANCE of the server where the Linux database is located.

3
Advanced setup for
the Linux database
Filtering the Linux
database

1
Mac OS X
HOME › CONNECTIONS › SQL SERVER › MAC OS X
The automatic installation already comes with the MSSQL Server extension preconfigured, only needing to connect with the database.
If you are using your own preconfigured environment, you will need to enable the MSSQL Server extension in PHP.
If you are using a Microsoft Azure server, see more configuration details click here.
PDO DBLIB
Setting up PDO DBLIB on Mac OS X
The automatic installation already comes with the PDO DBLIB driver, only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

database connection
X database
2
Server/Host (Name or IP) : Insert the name or IP\INSTANCE of the server where the Mac OS X database is located.
Advanced setup for
database

1
SQLite
HOME › CONNECTIONS › SQLITE
1
Windows
HOME › CONNECTIONS › SQLITE › WINDOWS
The automatic installation already comes with the SQLite extension only needing to connect with the database.
If you are using your own preconfigured environment, you will need to enable the SQLite extension in PHP.
SQLite PDO
Setting up SQLite on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the SQLite driver only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

After that, you will see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “SQLite” connection
Selecting a Windows
database connection
Connecting with
Windows database
DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: SQLite PDO.
PATH : Inform the complete path to the SQLite file.
2
Advanced setup for
database

1
Linux
HOME › CONNECTIONS › SQLITE › LINUX
SQLite PDO
Setting up SQLite on Linux
The automatic installation already comes with the SQLite driver, only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

Selecting a Linux
database connection
database
2
Advanced setup for
the Linux database
Filtering the Linux
database

1
Mac OS X
HOME › CONNECTIONS › SQLITE › MAC OS X
SQLite PDO
Setting up SQLite on MAC
The automatic installation already comes with the SQLite driver, only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

database connection
Connecting with Mac
OS X database
2
Advanced setup for
database

1
ODBC
HOME › CONNECTIONS › ODBC
1
Windows
HOME › CONNECTIONS › GENERIC ODBC › WINDOWS
The ODBC Generic connection is normally used to create connections with the databases: dBase (.dbf), Dataflex, Paradox, Visual FoxPro, etc.
You only need have the corresponding ODBC driver with the database installed.
I F Y O U A R E U S I N G Y O U R O W N P R E C O N F I G U R E D E N V I R O N M E N T, Y O U W I L L N E E D T O E N A B L E T H E O D B C E X T E N S I O N I N P H P.
Generic ODBC
Setting up ODBC on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the ODBC only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

After that, you will see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “ODBC” connection
Selecting a Windows
database connection
Connecting with
Windows database
DBMS Driver : Select the Generic ODBC.

2
Specific driver : Defined as Generic ODBC, allows you to connect to specific Data Sources: DBF, FileMaker, Progress or Visual FoxPro.
ODBC Name : On this option, you will inform the name of the Data Source that you have created.
Username : Inform the username of the Windows database, only if there are any.
Password : Inform the password of the Windows database, only if there are any.
Advanced setup for
database

1
Linux
HOME › CONNECTIONS › GENERIC ODBC › LINUX
Generic ODBC
Setting up ODBC on Linux
The automatic installation already comes with the ODBC only needing to install the UnixODBC driver so that you can do the connection.
UBUNTU\DEBIAN x86_64 CENTOS\RHEL x86_64

- sudo apt-get install unixodbc-dev unixodbc - sudo yum install unixODBC
UBUNTU\DEBIAN i386 ( x86 ) CENTOS\RHEL i686 ( x86 )

- sudo apt-get install unixodbc-dev unixodbc - sudo yum install unixODBC

Selecting a Linux
database connection
2
database
Username : Inform the username of the Linux database, only if there are any.
Password : Inform the password of the Linux database, only if there are any.
Advanced setup for
the Linux database
Filtering the Linux
database

3
1
Mac OS X
HOME › CONNECTIONS › GENERIC ODBC › MAC OS X
Generic ODBC
Settin gup ODBC on MAC
The automatic installation already comes with the ODBC driver, only needing to create the data source to connect with the database with ScriptCase.
The path of odbc.ini is: /Applications/Scriptcase/components/apache/bin/unixODBC/etc/

database connection
X database

2
Username : Inform the username of the Mac OS X database, only if there are any.
Password : Inform the password of the Mac OS X database, only if there are any.
Advanced setup for
database

1
Progress
HOME › CONNECTIONS › PROGRESS
1
Windows
HOME › CONNECTIONS › WINDOWS
Before proceeding with this tutorial check the architecture of your PHP within the phpinfo (). Accessing the phpinfo of your scriptcase, for example
http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase/info.php, you will find the PHP architecture.
If you are using Scriptcase automatic installer the PHP architecture will be the same as the installer you downloaded.
Progress OpenEdge ODBC

Setting up Progress connection using ODBC on Windows
Requirements
The Progress Database needs to be installed.
Driver Progress® OpenEdge® ODBC Connector for Windows installed.
Enabling the extension

First we must download the Progress® OpenEdge® ODBC Connector for Windows according to the architecture of your PHP.
At the end of the download, follow the Progress OpenEdge ODBC Connector installation wizard.
Installing the Progress OpenEdge ODBC Connector.
Creating a Data Source (ODBC)

Go to Control Panel> Systems and Security> Administrative Tools> ODBC Data Sources (32 or 64 bits), according to your PHP architecture.
If you have a data source configured, proceed to Creating a Connection in ScriptCase .
Select the System DNS tab and click Add.
Chose the following driver:

Progress OpenEdge 11.7 Driver
After selecting the driver, the following screen will be displayed:

Six fields are required for data source configuration:
Data Source Name : Name of the data source that will be used when creating the connection in Scriptcase;
Descriptioin: A description for your driver;
Host Name : Ip de where the database is installed;
Port Number : Port Number;
Data Base Name : Database name that will be used in the connection;
User ID : User name;

2
After selecting the database, click OK to complete the configuration.
Returning to the ODBC Data Source Administrator screen you can view the already configured connections.

After that, you will see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “” connection
Selecting a Windows database connection
Connecting with Windows database
Advanced setup for the Windows database
database

1
Visão Geral
HOME › APPLICATIONS
Scriptcase Applications
The Scriptcase offers a wide range of applications that allows the developer to create a complete system. The Scriptcase also allows the integration of the applications with
external libraries, boosting its power in the systems development.
See below the available types of applications.
GRID
Application used to display data, this application serves as a report where we can do exports to PDF, XLS, XML, and other formats.
PROCEDURE
Similar to the grid application, this application is available for few databases (MSSQL Server, Oracle and Db2) when selecting the connection, in case the user have a procedure
that returns information it will be displayed in this special application.
FORM
Application used to insert and update data, there are four different types of orientations.
TA B S
This application allows the creation of tabs where we can put up other applications like grids and forms.
CONTROL
This application is used to create controls in a system, it is not linked to a table, and it needs the creation of one or more fields to its operation. A example of using is in the
creation of a login screen.
MENU
It is used to create a hierarchical structure to navigate through the system’s applications. There are two types of menu available in Scriptcase, Horizontal Menu and Tree Menu,
that differs only in the preview of its items.
SEARCH
Application used to create searchs exclusively to forms.
REPORT PDF
Application used to generate reports using pre set formats, where we can position the data in the report.
DASHBOARD
Allows the developer to display applications inserted in widgets.
BLANK
This application allows the insert of PHP code / HTML and displays the result of its processing. The advantage of using this application is the possibility of using macros and the
native integrations with the other applications.
CALENDAR
Application where we can maintain an event schedule that can be synchronized to the google calendar.
Batch Applications Creation

With this tool, it is possible to create multiple applications (Form and Grid).
When creating grids and forms using the same table, the applications are created with an application link between them, allowing to edit the record from the Grid application.
To start the process of creating the application, you need to select a connection so that the tables can be listed.
Next, you need to select the tables that are going to be used to create the applications. When selecting the tables, you can define which applications (Forms and Grids) are going
to be created.
2
For last, you need to define the name, description and type, in case for the Forms.
Name - Name of the application that is going to be created.
Description - Application Description.
Type - This option is only available for Forms, defines the type of form that is going to be created (Single Record, Multiple Rows, Editable Grid and Editable Grid “View”).
Generate Source - Selecting this option all the applications to be created will have their source code generated.
To edit - Selecting this option all the applications created will be open for modifications right after creation.
Restore Applications
This feature allows to restore the project’s applications that has been modified recently. When saving the application, ScriptCase stores automatically a limited number (defined
in Settings > System Settings on the option Number of automatic application copies) of copies of the application, so that they can be restored. First, we need to select the
application that you want to restore.
Previously, you need to select the restore point that you desire and also define a name for the restored application.
Save Applications
This option saves the application opened in the edition mode. This option can be found inside the applications menu or in the default toolbar, also being possible to use the
shortcut CTRL+S.
3
Generate Source
Different from the generate source code found in Project, this option saves and only generate the source code of the opened application in edition mode. This option can be
found inside the menu Applications or in the default toolbar, and it is also possible to use the shortcut F8.
Execute Application
Saves and execute the application that is opened in the edition mode. This option can be found inside the Application menu of in the default toolbar, and it is also possible use
the shortcut F9.
Export Applications
Every application of a project or some applications can be exported. In this export, not only the application but also the needed archives to its operation of the selected
applications are exported.
This option can be found inside the menu Application.
Firstly you need to select if you want to export all applications or if you want to select some applications.
When select all applications, it will be displayed with the export log and the link to donwload the generated file.
In this example, we choose to “ Select Applications ”, in this case the applications are listed according to the type or folder.
To proceed, select the desired applications and clieck in export. After this it will be displayed a log of the exported files and a link to download the generated file.
4
Import Applications
Allows the developer to import applications created in the same version of Scriptcase. This option can be found inside the menu Application.
After the import application screen is displayed, select the file you want to import.
The options are:
Overwrite - Overwrites the project’s files by the files that are being imported. Don’t overwrite – Keeps the project’s files, ignoring the files that are being imported. Rename – Keep
the project’s and import the files selected with the defined names.
In the next step, show a summary that will be restored.
Source code
In this option is possible to see the application’s source code after it generates.
Session data
In this option, it is possible to see every session variable available in the development environment, it is the session tree that Scriptcase stores.
1
Grid Modules
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › GRID MODULES
Initial Module
Allows you to set in which mode the application will start when executed.
Grid Application Modules
Filter : Application will be started by the Filter view, so you can filter the records before the next application, that can be a Grid, PDF, Summary… you can configure these options within the
Filter’s settings.
Grid : Application will be started by the Grid itself, this is the default option.
Summary : Application will be started by the Summary. To use the Summary as initial application it’s mandatory to create at least one Group, using the Static Group By settings.
Chart : Application will be started by the Chart. To use the Chart as initial application it’s mandatory to create at least one Group, using the Static Group By settings.
Print : Application will be started by the print mode, according to the select command.
PDF : Application will be started with the option to view or download a PDF file.
Word : Application will be started with the option to view or download a Word file( .doc or .docx ).
Excel : Application will be started with the option to view or download an Excel file ( .xls or .xls ).
RTF : Application will be started with the option to view or download a RTF file ( .tft ).
XML : Application will be started with the option to view or download a XML file.
CSV : Application will be started with the option to view or download a CSV file.
Filter
Grid Filter Settings

2
Filter Module : This option configures which application will be called after the Filter.
Use Iframe : This option configures the filter to be displayed within an Iframe (displaying the Filter itself and the search results on the same page). This option is available only when the initial
module is set to be the Filter.
Hide Grid Header : Hide the Grid’s header when using the Search in the iframe.
Show Results : Display the search results on the same page when loading the application for the first time when the “Use Iframe” option is set as “Yes”, otherwise, the results will be displayed
only after the search.
Iframe Height : Iframe height, in pixels, used to display the search results.
Search Modal : This option configures the Filter Application to open in a modal window.
Search Modal Height : Search Modal box height (in pixels). Option available only when the Search Modal box is enabled.
Search Modal Width : Search Modal box Width (in pixels). Option available only when the Search Modal box is enabled
Table Width : Filter application table width. This value can be in percent, pixel or automatic (set by Scriptcase). If you change the value you will also need to set the “Table Width Unit”
Table Width Unit : This option configures the unit for the table width (percent, pixel or automatic). The value itself must to be set within the option “Table Width”.
Grid
Grid Settings
Orientation : This option configures the Grid records’ orientation (Horizontal, Vertical, Slide or User Defined). When using the “User Defined” option you can design the HTML manually inside
the option “Layout » HTML templates” and select within the Layout settings.
Fixed Label : This option will fix the columns’ label at the top of the page (it is only available when the Grud records’ orientation is set as Horizontal).
Pagination : This option sets the Grid paging type: Partial (pagination according to the amount of records set per page), Total (displays all records) or Infinite Scroll (automatic srolling acording
to the increment)
Lines Per Page : This option sets the amount of records per page for the Grid
Infinite Scroll Increment : This option sets the number of rows displayed on each increment of new records. It is available only when paging is configured with Infinite Scroll.
Open windows using modal : For Grids apps with the Infinite Scroll paging enabled, this option will set the links between applications and details of the Grid, that are configured to open in
iframe, to open using a modal instead.
Maintain records : It configures if the amount of records displayed will be preserved when the application navigates to another window and go back.
Grid height : Defines a altura da consulta em pixels. Caso esteja vazio
Table Width : Grid application table width. This value can be in percent, pixel or automatic (set by Scriptcase). If you change the value you will also need to set the “Table Width Unit”
Table Width Unit : This option configures the unit for the Grid table width (percent, pixel or automatic). The value itself must to be set within the option “Table Width”.
Detail
3
Grid Detail settings
Display Detail : Allows you to set where the detail will open within the Grid Application * Beside the Grid : Displays the Grid Details to the right of the record, in the same
window where Grid is being displayed. * Below the Grid : Displays the Grid Details below the Grid records, in the same window where Grid is being displayed. * In another
page : Displays the Grid Details in another page, replacing the Grid view. * In another window : Displays the Grid Details in a separated browser window. * Modal : Opens a
pop-up window to the display of the Grid Detail.
Alignment : Using this option you can set an alignment (center, right or left) for the Grid Detail when it’s using the “Display Detail” setting as “Beside the Grid” or “Below the Grid”.
Detail Width : This option sets the Grid Detail width when it’s using the “Display Detail” setting as “Beside the Grid”, “Below the Grid”, “In another page” or “In another window”.
Width of the modal : Allows you to customize the Grid Detail width when it’s using the “Display Detail” option as “Modal”.
Height of the modal : Allows you to customize the Grid Detail height when it’s using the “Display Detail” option as “Modal”.
Detail Width Unit : This option configures the unit for the “Detail Width” (percent, pixel or automatic).
Summary
Grid Summary
Settings
Summary Display : Sets the Grid Summary display option ( On another page, On the last page, On every page). The Summary Application Module is only available when a group is created in
the Group By settings.
Chart
4
Grid Chart settings
Charts display mode : Sets the Chart Summary display option ( New window, Same page, Other page ).The Chart Application Module is only available when a group is created in the Group By
settings.
Display before summary : Sets whether the Chart is displayed above or below the Summary. Available when the Charts display mode is configured in the Same page.
Number of columns : Sets the Chart number of columns per line (one in each column). Available when Charts display mode is configured in the Same page.
Margin : Sets the Charts horizontal margin. Available when Charts display mode is configures in the Same page.
Horizontal alignment : Sets the Charts horizontal position (Left, Right, Center). Available when Charts display mode is configures in the Same page.
Vertical alignment : Sets the Charts vertical position (Top, Center, Bottom). Available when Charts display mode is configured in the Same page.
View settings in the chart window : Sets the chart settings display on the same page. Available when the Char display mode is configured on Other page or new window.
Related videos
Advanced Reports
Initial Modules of a Grid

1
Settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › SETTINGS
Grid application advanced settings
Friendly URL : This field allows you to change the URL that will be called by the application. Allowed characters are the same available on URLs: a-z, A-Z, 0-9, -_. This option can also be
changed on the home screen, on the “Friendly URL” column at the applications list.
Display Line Number : This option sets whether to display or not the sequence number of each Grid row.
Display Titles : This option sets if the column title (column label) will be displayed or not.
Line break in title : This option sets if the column line title will break or not.
Margins : Sets the application margins in pixels (up, down, right and left).
Alignment : Allows you to set the fields alignment for when the Grid orientation is set to Vertical or Slide.
Table Columns : Sets the column widths type: Provides (It will assume the informed width values at field level in the configuration of the visualization), Calculated (Calculate size according to
type and the field size) and Automatic (The alignment will be according to the browser criteria).
Refresh Interval : Allows you to set a reload interval for the page, in seconds. When is set as zero, there will be no page reload.
1
Edit Fields
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › EDIT FIELDS
Fields :Allows to access the configuration of the field (icon on the left) and dragging the fields can change the field position and choose weather or not the field will be displayed.
Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.
SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.
Line Break: Allows the Line Break in the records.
Line Break PDF: Allows the line break in the PDF records.
Title Horizontal Alignment : Defines the horizontal alignment of the field.
Text Alignment : Defines the alignment from the text of the field.
Font Color : Allows configure the text color.

1
Fields Positioning
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › FIELDS POSITIONING
Allows to set the order that the fields will be displayed.
Field Positioning
The box to the left represents the fields that are not displayed in the application.
The box to the right represents the fields that are displayed in the application.
1
Toolbar
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › TOOLBAR
The application toolbar is divided into two parts: Top and Bottom, in a way that is possible to define which buttons will be displayed for both locations. Selecting the buttons for
the Top and Bottom toolbars will work independently, allowing buttons being in both toolbars at once for example.
It’s also possible to separate which buttons will be displayed in an application that’s opened in a mobile device, and their respective positions in the toolbar.
Like the image below, there’s the following layout:
Toolbar
DESKTOP
Location where you should inform the configurations for the toolbar in “Classic Web Version” view mode, so that the configuration can be used in the application when accessed
from a Desktop environment.
MOBILE
Location where you should inform the configurations for the toolbar in “Mobile Version” view mode, so that the configuration can be used in the application when accessed from
a Mobile environment.
N A V I G AT I O N :
Groups the options relative to the navigation buttons that can be displayed in the application.
Next Groups the options relative to the navigation buttons that can be displayed in the application.
Previous Returns to the previous page (Record or list of Records) of the application.
First Redirects to the First page (Record or list of Records) of the application.
Last Redirects to the Last page (Record or list of Records) of the application.
Exit Quit the application
Navigation by page Displays a “page-number based” navigation bar. Example: 1 2 3 4 5
EXPORT:
Groups the options relative to the generated exports. Scriptcase generates the following export formats:
2
PDF Offers a complete Report, containing all the data of the application in a PDF format.
WORD Offers a complete Report, containing all the data of the application in a WORD format.
XLS Offers a complete Report, containing all the data of the application in a EXCEL format.
XML Offers a complete Report, containing all the data of the application in a XML format.
CSV Offers a complete Report, containing all the data of the application in a CSV format.
RTF Offers a complete Report, containing all the data of the application in a RTF format.
Impression Creates a HTML format of the application for printing.
EXPORT BY EMAIL:
Groups the options relative to the emails exports. Scriptcase generates the following export formats:
PDF (Email) Sends by Email a complete report, containing all the data of the application in a PDF format.
WORD (Email) Sends by Email a complete report, containing all the data of the application in a WORD format.
XLS (Email) Sends by Email a complete report, containing all the data of the application in a EXCEL format.
XML (Email) Sends by Email a complete report, containing all the data of the application in a XML format.
CSV (Email) Sends by Email a complete report, containing all the data of the application in a CSV format.
RTF (Email) Sends by Email a complete report, containing all the data of the application in a RTF format.
OTHERS:
Groups a diversity of options relative to the application.
Jump to Defines the record page by the informed number.
Rows Limit It is a combox that defines the amount of rows displayed per page.
Search When clicked, it redirects to the Search’s Form to filter the records.
Dynamic Search When clicked, it displays the search fields to filter the records.
Columns Allows to define the columns that’ll be displayed during the application runtime.
Sorting Options Allows to select the order of the records based on the field.
Group By Allows to select a Group By rule. (Created previously in the application).
Save Grid Allows to save the current state of the application. For example, in the advanced search you can save the search data for further use.
Quick Search Allows to do a rapid search in the records of the application.
Gantt When clicked, displays a gantt chart.
Summary When clicked, displays a summary with the set of data from the records.
Form Buttons Displays the Form Buttons, when there’s an Application Link created previously.
Languages Displays a combobox with the names available, defined in the project properties.
Themes Displays a combobox with the themes available, defined in the project properties.
Rows Counter Allows to define the amount of lines displayed in the application.
HelpCase Displays a button to redirect to the help page.
S E P A R AT O R :
———————— Dispays a line separating the buttons, when used the Group Buttons.
Toolbar Mobile
3
Contains the same options as the Desktop version, adding only the item “Copy from Desktop”, on which, when clicked, it copies the items from the Desktop toolbar to the
Mobile toolbar.
Buttons Group
The Group allows to create group buttons.
Add Add a group of buttons.
Edit Edit a group of buttons.
Delete Delete a group of buttons.

4
Name Allows to define a name for the button group.
Label Allows to define a name for the button group that’s going to be displayed for the user.
Hint\Title Allows to define a hint for the group of buttons that’s going to be displayed to the user.
Button Type Allows to define a display format for the button group (Button, Image, Link).
Image Allows to define an image for the button if its display format is and Image.
Display Defines if the button will display only the Text, only the image or both.
Display Position Defines the position of the Text or Image (Text to the right, Image to the right).
After creating a button group, it is necessary to position the buttons below the Button Group and to the right. Like the image below:
Button Settings
BUTTON:
Displays the availables buttons in the application.
LABEL:
Allows defining the buttons name that will be displayed in the runtime application.
HINT:
Allows defining the buttons hint that will be displayed in the runtime application.
Application Hotkeys
Use hotkeys : Defines if the application will use hotkeys. When you enable this option, the old shortcut keys settings will be disabled.
Hotkeys template : Select the hotkey template from previously created.
Action : Selects the action that will be made when press the selected keybind.
Keybinding : Selects the keybinds that will be responsible for execute the chosen action.
Add “+” : Adds a new action in the keybind list.
Clear : Clears the selected hotkeys preference.

5
Options
D I S P L AY S U M M A R Y :
Allows defining if the summary button will be displayed.
F O R M AT R O W C O U N T E R :
Allows defining the format of the row which will be displayed.
Example: (1 to 10 of 200)
T H E N U M B E R O F L I N K S D I S P L AY E D :
Defines the amount of links per page , when the navigation option is disabled.
JUMP TO:
Defines the record page by the informed number.
RECORDS BY PAGE:
Allows defining the number of records to be exhibited for each page. To show all records use the option “all”.
Example: 10,20,30, all
TOOLBAR BUTTONS:
Defines the type of view for the Toolbar buttons (A DIV below the toolbar , Modal).
1
Export Settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › EXPORT SETTINGS
PDF Settings
PDF General Settings
CONFIGURABLE PDF
This optins allows the user to choose the parameters for PDF Creation during the application execution.
EXPORT MODULES OF GRID
This option allows the developer to choose which modules are available in the grid export. The options are marked for export, however the user can change the modules at run
time.
Example:
Disabling the Summary option:
In the execution the option of Summary is disabled:
SUMMARY EXPORT MODULES
This option allows the developer to choose which modules are available in the summary export. The options are marked for export, however the user can change the modules at
run time.
Example:
EXPORT WITH PASSWORD
This option allows the developer to set a password that will be used to export the file. Enabling this option shows a new field in the settings to enter a password:
PASSWORD
Allows the developer to set a password that will be requested when the file is exported.
Runtime Example:
SELECT COLUMNS
It allows the user has the option to choose which columns will be part of the export at runtime.
OPEN PDF DIRECTLY
Open the generated PDF file without creating an intermediary page with a link to it. Option available only when the option “Create Charts” is disabled.
PDF CHART DEPTH OUTPUT SELECTION
This option allows the user to decide to what depth of the group by charts will be generated in the PDF
SELECTING PAGE BREAK PER LEVEL

2
This option allows the end user to set up what grouping level will jump page in PDF generated.
PDF Settings
P D F O R I E N TAT I O N
Allows you to set whether to print in Portrait or Landscape orientation.
P D F F O R M AT
Allows you to define the type of form in which the PDF will be printed (letter, A4, etc).
PRINT TYPE
Allows you to set whether the print mode will be colored or economical.
RECORDS PER PAGE
Applies only to horizontally aligned Grids. It allows you to define the number of records that will be printed per page.
RECORDS PER PAGE IN THE SUMMARY
Lets you define the number of records that will be printed per page in the summary pdf.
COMPLETE LINES UNTIL FOOTER
Complete with (empty) lines until the footer.
Enable one option in the exportation settings in execution time that allow the user to decide the depth of the group by that will be generated from the exportation.
Allows the end user to define until break level will skip page in the generated PDF.
CONFIGURABLE PDF
Allows the user to configure the PDF creation parameters during the execution of the application.
G E N E R AT E P D F D I R E C T L Y
Opens the generated PDF file without the need to display an intermediate page with a link to the file.
G E N E R AT E B O O K M A R K S
Generate bookmarks automatically, bookmarks will be generated relative to the Groupby.
P A G E N U M B E R I N G F O R M AT
3
Numbering format of the page will be simple (1,2,3,4,5, …), Full (1 / n, 2 / n, 3 / n, …) or not use numbering.
PAGE NUMBERING HEIGHT
Allows you to align the numbering vertically, at the top or bottom of the page.
H O R I Z O N TA L P O S I T I O N O F P A G E N U M B E R I N G
Allows horizontal alignment of page numbering (Left, Center, Right).
MARGIN
The value in millimeters to be applied in the PDF margins (Up, Down, Right, Left) must be filled in.
PRINT BACKGROUND
Allows you to print a background in the PDF file.
JS RUNTIME
Maximum time (in seconds) of server waiting when running JS.
T I M E O U T F O R C H A R T ’ S I M A G E C R E AT I O N
Allows you to define whether the Charts of the application will be displayed in the PDF.
D I S P L AY S T I T L E B E L O W E A C H G R O U P I N G
The title of the group will be displayed always in the begin of each grouping.
D I S P L AY H E A D E R I N A L L P A G E S
Allow that the header be displayed even if is not enabled in the grid.
D I S P L AY T H E T I T L E O N A L L P A G E S
Allow to display the title in all the PDF pages.
WORD Settings
WORD General Settings
WORD CONFIGURABLE
Allows the user to configure the creation parameters of the document during the execution of the application.
time.
Example:
run time.
Example:

4
PASSWORD
Runtime Example:
SELECT COLUMNS
OPEN WORD DIRECTLY
This option open the generated WORD file without creating an intermediary page with a link to it.
WORD Settings
PRINT TYPE
Allows you to set the file’s print mode (Both, Black and White, Colored).
LINES PER PAGE IN GRID
Allows you to set the number of lines per page of the Grid that will be displayed in the file.
LINES PER PAGE IN SUMMARY
Allows you to set the number of lines per page of the Summary that will be displayed in the file.
CSV Settings
General Settings do CSV
CONFIGURABLE CSV
Allows the user to configure the parameters for creating the CSV during the execution of the application.
time.
Example:

5
run time.
Example:
PASSWORD
Runtime Example:
SELECT COLUMNS
OPEN CSV DIRECTLY
This option open the generated CSV file without creating an intermediary page with a link to it.
CSV Settings
L I N E S E P A R AT O R
Allows you to define the line separator character
C O L U M N S E P A R AT O R
Allows you to define the separator character of columns and records.
TEXT DELIMITER
Allows you to define the character used to delimit the text of the columns.
ADD LABEL
Allows you to define whether the label of the columns will be added to the file.
XLS Settings
General Settings do XLS
6
XLS CONFIGURABLE
Allows the user to configure the parameters of creation of XLS during the execution of the application.
time.
Example:
run time.
Example:
PASSWORD
Runtime Example:
SELECT COLUMNS
OPEN XLS DIRECTLY
This option open the generated XLS file without creating an intermediary page with a link to it.
XLS Settings
F O R M AT
Allows defining the XLS format of the generated document ( xls or xls ).
7
XML Settings
XML General Settings
CONFIGURABLE XML
Allows the user to configure the XML creation parameters during the execution of the application.
time.
Example:
run time.
Example:
PASSWORD
Runtime Example:
SELECT COLUMNS
OPEN XML DIRECTLY
This option open the generated XML file without creating an intermediary page with a link to it.
XML Settings
U S E L A B E L O N T H E TA G
Allows the user to use the field label in the Tag or attribute of the XML
X M L F O R M AT
8
Determines whether the XML file will fill valies in attributes or new elements. ( Attr ou Tag ).
Print Settings
Print General Settings
CONFIGURABLE PRINT HTML
Allows the user to configure the printing HTML creation parameters during the execution of the application.
time.
Example:
run time.
Example:
PASSWORD
Runtime Example:
SELECT COLUMNS
Print Settings
9
PRINT MODE
Allows to choose what content will be printed. ( Current Page or Full Report ).
PRINT TYPE
Define the file print mode. (Black & White or Color).
ROWS PER PAGE
Allows define the Grid rows per page quantity that will be showed in the file.
ROWS PER PAGE IN SUMMARY
Allows define the Summary rows per page quantity that will be showed in the file.
PRINT BACKGROUND
Allows to display the background in a HTML form.
RTF Settings
SELECT COLUMNS
This option enables an option in the application generated to allow if the user can choose the fields that will be exported.
OPEN RTF DIRECTLY
This option open the generated RTF file without creating an intermediary page with a link to it.
1
SQL
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › SQL
SQL Settings
Grid SQL
configuration
SQL Select Statement Allows you to define the main SQL of the application. You can edit this SQL to add or delete fields.
Limit Lets you limit the amount of records that will be retrieved by SQL for the view in the query.
SQL Preparation You can enter SQL commands or procedure names that should be executed before the main select of the application.
Connection Displays the name of the connection used. This connection can be changed to another connection that has the same table.
Use Customized Message Lets you define whether the “no records” message is displayed.
No Records Message Allows you to set the message to be displayed if the query does not return any records.
Font Lets you set the font for the message, click the icon next to it field and choose the font. Available when “Use Customized Message” is enabled.
Font Size Allows you to set the font size. Available when “Use Customized Message” is enabled.
Font Color Allows you to set the font color. Available when “Use Customized Message” is enabled.
Variable for Table These fields informed with value, allows part of the table name defined in the select to be changed before the execution of the command by a content of a variable.
The first field must be filled with the name of the variable. The second field must be filled with the part of the name of the table to be replaced.
Fields Variables Lets you exchange the name of a select field with the contents of a variable. This switch occurs before the command is executed.
The first field must contain the name of the variable, in the second field should be selected the name of the field to be replaced.
Case sensitive Allows you to configure whether the connection will be case sensitive or not. (Differentiating case).
Creating Parameters for Applications Links

Parameters are used to pass values between applications. When the target application is a query, we recommend adding a global variable in the WHERE clause to filter the
records that meet a specific condition.
To configure the parameter, in the destination application, access the SQL option in the left side menu.
We must edit the SQL of the grid application, adding the WHERE clause and the field that receive the value through a global variable(as shown in the image below).
after edition, we must generate the source code of the application clicking on the button - - or using the hotkey F8.
1
Columns
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › COLUMNS
You can display or hide fields dynamically inside the Grid application using the button “Columns”. This option is used to select the fields/columns that will be part of this dynamic
fields selection.
Grid columns’ settings
The box in the left represents the fields that are NOT being displayed within the dynamic fields selection.
The box in the right represents the fields that are being displayed within the dynamic fields selection.
1
Sorting Settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › SORTING SETTINGS
Field Settings
This property has the objective to define the fields that allow sorting. The sorting of a field of the application is done in runtime, just by clicking on the column (field) that you
want to sort by. By default, the GroupBy are respected while sorting the fields. Also by default, the first six fields are already marked (presenting an asterisk beside the field), so
that they can be sorted without the user worrying about this detail.
Sort Fields
Define the configuration of the sorting for each field of the application, being “Ascendant” or “Descendant”.
Advanced Sorting
Define the fields that are available when clicking on the “Sorting” of the Grid.
2
Use displayed fields : Defines that all the fields are available when clicking on “Sorting” button of the application.
Use columns : Defines that all the fields, configured in the “Columns” option of ScriptCase, will be available when clicking on the “Sorting” button of the Grid.
Define Columns : Allows to select the fields freely:

1
Group Label
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › GROUP LABEL
With this option, you can insert the one or more titles for the columns in the applications, allowing to modify its size, color, font and position.
If you have fields with a dynamic display, the Group Label won’t work.
Editing Group Label cell properties
Attributes
Title Allows to define a title that’ll be displayed in your Group Label.

Font Allows to define the group label title’s font.
Font Size Defines the font size for the group label title.
Horizontal Alignment Allows to define the horizontal alignment of the group label title. Being Left, Center or Right.
Vertical Alignment Allows to define the vertical alignment of the group label title. Being Middle, Bottom or Top.
Font Color Allows to define the font color for the group label title.
Background Color Allows to define to color of the background for the group label title.
1
Security
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › SECURITY
Application Security Configuration
When enabled, the application will only be accessible when using the macro sc_apl_status or using the security module. Applications with this option on, display a message
Use Security
informing “User not Authorized” when accessed directly.
Url output of the
Defines the application to which the user will be redirected to when the warning “User not Authorized” is displayed.
security
Use Password When this option is enabled, the application will require you to define a password to access the application.
Request password
Request the password once per session, not needing to inform the password every time you access the application.
just once
Enable direct call by
Allows to call the application directly from the URL in the browsers.
URL
In the development environment you can suppress the effects above for testing, evading that every time you run the application it blocking you and requiring to login into the
system. To disable the security and the requirement of the password in development mode access Options > My ScriptCase and uncheck the options: Enable Use of Security,
Enable Use of Password.
1
Log
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › LOG
Application Log configuration
Schema Allows to select which log schema will be used in the application.
All fields Allows to define if it’ll be used for all the fields.
Events Allows to define which events will be saved in the log.
1
Gantt Chart
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › GANTT CHART
Gantt Chart settings
A Gantt chart is a type of bar chart that illustrates a project schedule. Gantt charts illustrate the start and end dates of the terminal elements and summary elements of a project.
Terminal elements and summary elements comprise the work breakdown structure of the project.
Output Format Output format, you can choose of HTML or HTML5 (the default option is HTML5)
Field label Field containing the record label of the Gantt chart. You can choose which field will appear within the left column to describe the tasks.
Width Gantt chart width. The default unit for this width is pixels, however you can also apply it in percent by adding the “%” sign after the number (i.e: 100%).
Height Gantt chart height. The default unit for this width is pixels, however you can also apply it in percent by adding the “%” sign after the number (i.e: 100%).
Months Allows you to set the number of months that will be displayed in the Gantt chart.
Start Date Using this combo box you can choose the field that stores the start date, you need to have this record within the connected table.
End Date Using this combo box you can choose field that stores the end date, you need to have this record within the connected table.
Display format Allows you to set the display format of the fields date type.
Percent Using this combo box you can choose the field that stores the information regarding the task completion (percentage), you need to have this record within the connected
Completed table.
Resource Field containing the name of the resource allocated to the task.
1
Save Grid
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › SAVE GRID
This feature allows the user to save the current filter state of the Grid application.
In this option the user can create rules so that the current filter can be used in other Grid applications. This way you can configure different filters without the need to filter
again.
Enable Public Displays the Save button within the Grid application
Use Rules Using this option you can enable more rules for the save button
1
1. Home
2. Applications
General Overview
In the application’s field, will be displayed to set only the previously selected fields in the menuFields positioning and the virtual fields previously created in the application.
Example:
Virtual field
They are fields created with the creating field interface, to attend the developer’s needs making a lot of functionalities possible to the developed application.
The virtual fields are not inserted in the database after its creation.
Creating a New Field

To create a new field in the application, you just need to access the menu ‘Fields’ and click in the item‘New Field’. Every field created through this process are considered by
Scriptcase as Virtual Fields.
As the image demonstrates:
After that, the initial screen will be displayed, where it will be possible to define the quantity of fields that will be created in the application.
Quantity:
In this option, you can define the quantity of fields that will be created. Turning the process of creating fields way more dynamic and saving time in the creation of them.
Example:
Field’s inclusion
The field’s inclusion allows the developer to set immediately the type, name and label from the fields. In this way, you can create diverse types of fields at once.
Type Informs the type of the field that will be created in the application. Only the supported types are listed by the application.
Name Allows you to define the name of the field in the application.
Defines the title that will be displayed in the field when the application is executed. The terminology used in the interface is fundamental to the system have a good usability,
Label
we should use names and familiar terms to the final user of the application, instead of using terms from the system.
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Grid
4. Text
Text
General Settings
This type of field allows the developer to create quickly fields to display data from the database, where the final user can see the data in the way it was set by the developer.
Type of Data
Defines the type of the field in the application. In this case we should selectText.
Label
Defines the title that will be displayed in the field when the application is executed. The terminology used in the interface is fundamental to the system have a good usability, whe
should use names and familiar terms to the final user of the application, instead of using terms from the system.
For example, this text field that has the name customerid, the client would have a much better understanding of the functionality of the field when we define the label as
Customer Name.
Not only a fixed text, the Label atribute allows the use of langs to define the field’s title, making it possible to use your application in a multilanguage project.
Case Settings
This option allows the developer to inform how the text will be displayed in runtime.
The options available are:
Lower Case: Every letter in the text will be converted to lower case.
Upper Case: Every letter of the text will be converted to upper case.
Capitalize first word: The first letter of the first world will be converted to upper case.
Capitalize all words: The first letter of every words will be converted to upper case.
Show HTML Content
When this option is active every HTML, CSS and JavaScript content that are in the database will be displayed with the main value.
Field Mask
Defines the field mask. There are two types of mask described in the table below:
Character Description
It is overridden by any characters returned by the database. Filled is required and the value will be completed with leading zeros when there are fewer characters than
X
the size of the mask.
It is overridden by any characters returned by the database. Its filling is optional and when there are fewer characters than the mask size, nothing will be done about the
Z characters that are missing. In addition the leading zeros will be suppressed. When used in conjunction with the X necessarily the use of this character is to the left of
the mask.
9 It represents any numeric character (from 0-9)
A It represents an alpha numeric character (A-Z,a-z)
* It represents any alpha-numeric character (A-Z,a-z,0-9)entered by the user.
For example, it is possible to set the mast to display a telephone number:
It will be show with this format on runtime:
It is also possible to set the field mask like those examples:
Field mask examples:
Telephone number
Field Mask Input Typed Value Formatted Value

Phone Number +99 99 9999 - 9999 123456789012 +12 34 5678 - 9012
Phone Number (xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
Phone Number (zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Software Key (Letters only) AAAA-AAAA-AAAA-AAAA QWERTYUIASDFGHJK QWER-TYUI-ASDF-GHJK
Software Key (Letters and numbers) xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx Q1W2E3R4T5Y6U7I8 Q1W2-E3R4-T5Y6-U7I8
License Plate AAA - 9999 QWE1234 QWE - 1234
Scriptcase Serial Key A999A999A999-** D111H111G111DG2P D111H111G111-DG2P
Multiple masks (Phone Number) 9999-9999;(99)9999-9999; 9999 999 9999 +99 99 9999-9999
Repeat Value:
When this option is active the value of the field will be repeated if the previous database register is the same.
Example:
2
SQL Type
Informs the type of the field in the database.
Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be presented
like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.
Lookup Methods
You will have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).
Lookup Method - Automatic
SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that will recover the values that will be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure
SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field} .
The Grid field needs to be refrenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.
Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.
Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).
Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).
Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.
Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command does not return any values.
Display original and lookup value : When selected No, its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it will be displayed the original value of the field
and the value returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.
Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It is only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.
Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.
Lookup Method - Manual
This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that will be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the database does
not have a table that contains this information.
Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :
It will be displayed only one value for the field. And it will replace the stored value from the table with the one defined on the item label.
Label : Text that will be displayed in the item list of the select field.
Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that is stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man.
Múltiplos Valores (Delimitador)
It can be displayed various values for the selected field. The values should be separated by a delimitador that will be informed. It is done a replacment on the parts of the field,
separated by the delimitador, with the values contained in the list.
Man.
Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).
Multiple Values (position)
Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial position and the number of
bytes that each information occupies on a string.
For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.
The example below:
Label Value Start Size

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Example: Of you choose Man, Single and Read, in database would be stored the following value MSRD.
Label : Text that will be displayed in the Grid.

Man.
Start : Starting position of the string that is going to be stored. The first position is always 1.
Size : Amount of bytes that is going to occupy in the string.
3
Multiple Values (binary)
Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.
In this example uses the following list (although it is not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to the order):
Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
To store the data, it is done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.
Example 1: If the options Sports and Culture were selected, the number stored in the table would be 3.

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = 3
Example 2: If the options Sports, Pleasure and Reading were selected, the number stored in the table would be 13.

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = 13

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.
Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.
Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.
Clear Button : Clear the Fields.
Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.
Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It will be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by
the user.
Use lookup in :
Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to define the CSS values individually for each field. For each Display schema of scriptcase, there are the same attributes available in Interface.
Display Settings configuration Interface.
Field Settings
Font Style : Allows to select the font family, that will be applied to the application field.
Font Size : Allows to choose the font size, that will be applied to the application field.
Italic Text : Formatting the Text to be Italic.
Bold Text : Formatting the Text to be Bold.
Don’t truncate : Do not truncate by the amount of bytes or by the Grid columns.
Number of characters : Amount of characters in bytes to display.
Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (left right, center and justify).
Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).
Background Image : Background Image of the field.
Line Break : Allows the Line Break.
Font Color : Allows to apply a color to the font by choosing a color from the color palette.
Background Color : Allows to apply a color to the field background by choosing a color from the color palette.
Width : Allows to define a width to the field.
Height : Allows to define a height to the field.
Title Horizontal Alignment : Define the Title Horizontal Alignment of the field.
Title Vertical Alignment : Define the Title Vertical Alignment of the field.
Bold : Applies the bold type font to the field.
PDF Configuration
Line Break
This option allows breaking the line in the PDF file when exported.
4
Chart Settings
By using this option, you will see an icon on the Field Title, this icon displays a chart relating to the field.
On this type option you need to choose two columns to build the chart. The first one is the field its self that you are working with, and the second one is the you chose and is called
“Column for Label”.
Bar Chart Interface.
Group by Label : Groups the values of the column by the label. Similar to the effect of the group by of the a Selec.
Summary Function : Function that summerizes the data applied to the column. The functions that can be used on the field are the following: Count, Sum, Max, Min and Avg.
Configurable Chart : Allows the user to setup the parameters of the chart creation when the application is running.
Display Values : Displays the values of the generated chart.
Column for Label : Selecting the column that will be the label for the field.
Chart Width : Width of the chart, in pixels.
Chart Height : Height of the chart, in pixels.
Chart Layout
Chart layout settings interface.
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Grid
4. Multiple Lines Text
Multiple Lines Text

General Settings
Multiple Lines Text field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it is defined as a Multiple Lines Text, it accepts letters, numbers and special characters in multiple lines.
Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it will be more clear for the comprehension of the
user if the name would be “Client Name”.
Case Settings : Convert the letter from the field when losing focus. The options are:
Upper case : All in Upper Case
Lower case : All in Lower case
Capitalize first word : Capitalizes the first letter of the first word
Capitalize all words : Capitalizes the first letter of all the the words
Show HTML content : Determines if the html contained in the field will be displayed or not. If enabled, the html will be displayed, otherwise the html will be interpreted by the
browser.
Grid Mask : Defines the mask for the field display.There are two typed of masks described below:
Placeholder to any character. Replaced by any character. If number of characters entered are less then the mask size, the field value is completed with zeros (Filling full
X
size field entry is required).
Replaced by any character retrieved from database. Suppress zeros at field left (Complete field filling is optional). When used combined with the mask character X it
Z
should be placed at the mask left.
Mask Examples
Mask Field Value Formatted Value

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Do Not Repeat Value : Do not repeat the value of the field in case it is the same as the previous record.
Run content in Javascript : If enabled, the javascript will be interpreted by the browser, otherwise the javascript will be displayed.
Display Settings
Field Settings
PDF Configuration
Line Break
Chart Settings
2
Chart Layout
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Grid
4. Integer
Integer
On this page, you will learn how you can configure settings related to the Number field. From the use of specific symbols display to the mode in which they are displayed. And thus,
boost the application.
Data type:
It sets the application field type. When the field is set as Number, it is permissible to define formatting rules of integers.
Label:
It sets the title that will be displayed in the field when you run the application. The terminology used in the interface is fundamental for your system has a good usability. In this case,
we recomend you to use names and terms familiar to the end user of the application, instead of using terms originated in the system.
Field Mask Input:
It sets the mask input for the field. There are two types of mask as described in the table below:
X
the mask.
Mask Input Examples:

Phone Number +99 99 9999 - 9999 123456789012 +12 34 5678 - 9012
Repeat value:
This option when enabled will allows you to repeat the field value if it is equal to the value of the previous record in the database.
Example:
Tipo SQL:
Informa o tipo SQL do campo tal como ele está configurado no banco de dados.
Use regional settings:
It allows you to apply regional settings to the number fields formating. When this option is not selected it will be displayed the attributes group, minus sign and negative number
format.
Groupping:
It allows you to define which character is used to separate thousands. This option is only available when the option to use regional settings is disabled.
Negative sign:
It allows you to define which character will be used for the display of negative numbers. This option is only available when the option to use regional settings is disabled.
Negative number format:
It allows you to define the placement of the negative sign in relation to value. This option is only available when the option to use regional settings is disabled.
Color for the negative values:
It allows you to define a color when the value is negative, improving the understanding of the end user about that kind of value.
Example:
c
2
Display the value in words:
The value of the field will be displayed in full on application. This feature can facilitate the comprehension and understanding of the user.
Example:
Line size:
Maximum size in characters to be displayed in the value cell, in full. When this value is exceeded the line will break within the cell.
Lookup Settings
The Lookup is a way used to provide the end user a list of values description/name where the items can be selected and used in the application. For example, for a field sex that in
the database is represented with M or F values can be presented as male or female dynamically with the lookup. So you will be able to retrieve these values from a database table or
manually, if the reference table does not exist.
Example:
Lookup Methods
There are two lookup methods available:
Mannual: To use this method it is necessary to inform the selection conditions manually to the Lookup.
Automatic: To use this method it is necessary to use a lookup query from the database to access the reference table.
Editing-automatic lookup:
Select Command:
It sets the SQL command that will retrieve the value to display inside the Grid field. The command must have the following format ‘SELECT field_to_be_diplayed FROM table WHERE
key_field = {grid_field} ‘.
The Grid field must be always referenced between curly braces {}, So at run time, the field braces will be replaced by its value in the table.
Multiple Options:
When the Select command informed return multiple values, the option must be selected.
Delimiter:
It sets the tab of values returned by the Select command, this option should be filled when the “Yes” option is checked in the multiple attribute options.
Use the lookup in:
Grid: It applies the lookup in all Grid modules (HTML, PDF, XML, CSV, and RTF).
Summary: It applies the lookup only to the Summary (HTML and PDF).
Both This is equivalent to check Grud and Summary options.
Default Value:
Defines a default value, used in cases where the stored value does not match any value from the list.
Display original value and lookup:
When selected No, is only displayed the value returned by the Select command. Otherwise, it returns the original value of the field and the value that is returned by the Select
command separated by character set in separated by.
Separated By:
Sets the character(s) that will be used to separate the orignal value of the field and the value that is returned by the Select command. This option should be filled when is checked
Yes in the Show’s original value and lookup.
Use a specific connection:
This option allows you to select another existing connection in the project, other than the current connection, to select the values for the lookup.
Edit Lookup - Mannual:
Lookup used to modify the display of the field with predefined values.
Lookup Types
It sets the operating mode of the lookup can be: single value, multiple values (delimiter), multiple values (position) and multiple values (binary).
Single value: it will be displayed only one value for the field. There is a direct replacement of the value stored in the Bank for a label defined in a list.
Label: Text that will be displayed in the Grid.
Value: Attribute that matches the value stored in the table. For example, the value of “M” will be replaced by “Male”.
Multiple Values (Delimiter):

3
By using this option it will be displayed multiple values for the selected field. The values must be separated by a delimiter to be informed. A replacement of parts from a string stored
in the field, separated by a delimiter for values contained in a list.
Value: Attribute that matches the value stored in the table. For example, the value S;M will be replaced by Sports and Movies.
Delimiter: Character used to separate the values within the same string.
Multiple Values (Position)
Allows you to recover information stored in a single string of the selected field. In order for this information to be retrieved must be informed, in addition to the label, the starting
position and the number of bytes that each information occupies within the string.
As an example we will use a string to store Sex, Marital status and Hobby respectively. Sex occupies one byte, Status one byte and Hobby two bytes .
For this purpose we define the list as:

Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married M 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study ST 3 2
Sportes SP 3 2
Reading LE 3 2
Example: the string MMST would be presented in the query as: Male Married Study

Value: Attribute that matches the value stored in the table. For example, the value M will be replaced by Male.
Start: : Starting position in the string where the information is recorded. The first position is always 1.
Size : Number of bytes that the information occupies in the string.
Multiple values (binary):
It allows you to retrieve several information stored in decimal form of the selected field.
As examples we will use the following list (although not informed in the interface of inclusion of values in the list, each item has a value assigned automatically according to the
order):
Assigned value Description in Lookup

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Leisure
8 Reading
16 Music
To display the data, a decomposition of the decimal number stored in the bank is performed. For example, numbers 11 and 12 (written in the database) would be decomposed as
follows:
11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports - Culture - Reading)

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Leisure
8 Reading
16 Music
12 = 4 + 8 = ( Leisure - Reading)

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Leisure
8 Reading
16 Music
Label:
Text that will be displayed in the Grid.
Include Button:
Includes in the list the values populated in the Label and value fields.
Alter Button:
It changes the attributes of the selected item.
Delete Button:
Deletes the selected item.

4
Clean Button:
It cleans the fiels
Save Button:
Allows the user to save the entire list, for later use using the Load Lookup definition option.
Load Lookup definition:
Allows you to load a predefined value list for use as a lookup.
Use the lookup in:
Default Value:
Separated By:
Display Settings
Field Settings
Line Chart
Using this guide, you can define ac chart for each line.
Line Chart Type : There are two types of charts that can be used. Below you can see their description:
Bar Chart : This option allows to display a bar chart relating to the column that you are working with. The size of the bars is done by math relating to the Grand Total of the
column. The value informed in the width of the chart defines the size of the images that will be displayed.
In the example shown above, the width of the Chart is 200px.
Line Chart : This option allows to display a Line Chart relating to the column that you are working with . The amount of lines are done by dividing the value of a column by the
value informed to the number of icons.
In the example above, the field Number of Icons, it was informed the value 1000, so the number of stars besides, it determined by dividing the displayed value by
1000.
Display Value : It will display the value and the chart at the same time, the value being on the left or right side of the bar or lines.
Number of Icons : Determines the amount of icons (figures) that will appear for each value on this field. This value will be presented by the dividing the value of the column
by the Number of Icons.
Chart width : Width of the chart in pixels. This field is used by the option Bar Chart. In case it is not informed, the value used is 200px.
Chart height : Height of the chart in pixels. This field is used by the option Bar Chart.
Margin : Charts margin. This option is only used by the bar chart.
Image / Positive Color : The way that it is informed will variate depending on the options below:
Bar Chart : Inform a color for the field that will be used to form the chart image. Click the icon beside to choose the color.
Line Chart : Inform an image name for the field that will be used like an icon. Click the icon beside to choose the image “Icon”.
Image / Negative Color : The information passed to this field follows the same criteria as the Image / Positive Color field. This parameter will be used in the case the value is
negative.
PDF Configuration
5
Line Break
Charts Settings
Chart Layout
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Grid
4. Decimal
Decimal
General Settings
Decimal field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it is defined as a Decimal, it is allowed to define the format of a decimal number.
Accumulated : When enables, define that the field will be accumulated with the values of another field. This option is only available on virtual fields.
Accumulator field : Only available when the option “Accumulated” is enabled. This configuration defines which field will be used to accumulate the values. The chosen fields
needs to be Integer, Currency or Decimal.
X
Z
Mask Examples

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Values format
Format of Values with Regional Settings.
Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the fields. When not enabled, you will view attributes grouped, Negative Symbol and
negative number format.
Digit Grouping Separator : Defines the character that will be used to separate the thousand.
Decimal Separator : Defines the character that will be used to separate the decimal.
Negative sign : Defines the chatacter that will be used to display negative numbers.
Negative number format : Defines the position of the Negative sign em relation to the value.
Color of Negative : Defines a color for the field when the value is nagative.
Decimal Precision : Number of decimal places. This value is part of the field size.
Complete with Zeros : Defines the decimal places that will or not be completed zeros to the right. Example: The value is 125,50, but the decimal precision is 3. If the option is
enabled, then the value will 125,500.
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
2
Single Value :
Man.
Man.
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2

Man.

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

3

the user.
Use lookup in :
Display Settings
Field Settings
Line Chart
1000.
negative.
PDF Configuration
Line Break
Chart Settings
4
Chart Layout
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Grid
4. Percent
Percent
General Settings
Percentage field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it is defined as a Percentage, it is allowed to define the format of a percentage.
X
Z
Mask Examples

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Do Not Repeat Value : Don’t repeat the value of the field in case it is the same as the previous record.
Values Format
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
2
Single Value :
Man.
Man.
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2

Man.

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

3

the user.
Use lookup in :
Display Settings
Field Settings
Line Chart
1000.
negative.
PDF Configuration
Line Break
Chart Settings
4
Chart Layout
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Grid
4. Currency
Currency
General Settings
Currency field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it is defined as a Currency, it is allowed to define the format of a currency.
X
Z
Mask Examples

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Values Format
Interface of Values Format.
Currency Format : Defines the content of the field that if it will be presented with the currency format.
Currency Symbol : Defines the character that represents the Currency Symbol.
Negative sign : Defines the character that will be used to display negative numbers.
Color of Negative : Defines a color for the field when the value is negative.
Display value in full : The value will be displayed in full. Example: 2018(Two thousand eighteen).
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
2
Single Value :
Man.
Man.
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2

Man.

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
3
8
Attribute Reading Description
Value Lookup
16 Music

the user.
Use lookup in :
Display Settings
Field Settings
Line Chart
1000.
negative.
PDF Configuration
Line Break
4
Chart Settings
Chart Layout
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Grid
4. Percent (Calculated)
Percent (Calculated)
General Settings
X
Z
Mask Examples

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Values Format
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
2
Single Value :
Man.
Man.
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2

Man.

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

3

the user.
Use lookup in :
Display Settings
Field Settings
Line Chart
1000.
negative.
PDF Configuration
Line Break
Chart Settings
4
Chart Layout
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Grid
4. HTML Image
HTML Image
General Settings
HTML Image field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it is defined as HTML Image, it allows to place an image to the field.
Image : Defines an image that will be displayed. The icon “Select Image”, lists all the standard images from scriptcase and also the image that you have uploaded to
scriptcase. The icon “Upload an image” allows the developer to send an image to the server which is from another machine.
Border : Border size for the image in Pixels.
Width : Define the width of the image in Pixels.
Height : Define the height of the image in Pixels.
Display Settings
Field Settings
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Grid
4. Credit Card Number
Credit Card Number

General Settings
Credit Card Number Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it is defined as a Credit Card Number, it is allowed to define some rules for the display format of the Credit Card.
Display Settings
Field Settings
PDF Configuration
Line Break
Chart Settings
Chart Layout
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Grid
4. E-mail
E-mail
General Settings
Email field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it is defined as an Email, when you click on the field you be offered a choice for your email client and send an
email to that specific email.
SQL Type : Informs the data type of field in the database.
Display Settings
Field Settings
PDF Configuration
Line Break
Chart Settings
Chart Layout
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Grid
4. URL
URL
General Settings
URL field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it is defined as a URL, it sets the value as a clickable link (Only if it contains a valid path).
Display Settings
Field Settings
PDF Configuration
Line Break
Chart Settings
Chart Layout
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Grid
4. YouTube
YouTube
General Settings
YouTube field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it is defined as a YouTube, it allows to display a video from youtube on the field.
Display Mode : Defines how the you video will display in the application.
Width : Width of the video in pixels.
Height : Height of the video in pixels.
Link Type : The display settings of the link, if it is going to be a Text or a Button.
Link text : A text that will link to the video.
Display Settings
Field Settings
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Grid
4. Google Maps
Google Maps
General Settings
Google Maps field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it is defined as Google Maps, it will use the Google Maps API to display the map in the Grid Applications
Home : Defines what type of parameters will be used in the API.
Home Configuration Interface.
Display Mode : Indicates the display of the map. It can be opened in a Modal or in a new Window.
Width : Defines the width of the map that is going to be displayed.
Height : Defines the height of the map that is going to be displayed.
Zoom : Defines the initial Zoom (available from the Google API) of the Map location.
API Key : API Key for authorization to use Google Maps in the Application. (Required only for the versions 2 or earlier of the Google API.)
The API Key is a unique key, composed by a string(text) alphanumeric, which is the license to use the service. When you subscribe to use the service, the key is tied to the
domain and the directory of the server. All the pages that use the API needs to be in the same directory that was used for the subscription. In case you have a web server
on your local machine, you just need to possess a key for testing, and to do this you only need to place http://localhost in the domain of the subscription.
To get your API Key access the site by clicking here
Link Type : Defines how the link will be displayed.

Text Link : Text to call the Map.
Marker Description : Displays the description for each marker displayed on the map.
Display Settings
Field Settings
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Grid
4. Date
Date
General Settings
Date field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When iti s defined as a Date and Time, it is allowed to define the format of the date.
Values Format
Format of Values without Regional Settings.
Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, it will be displayed the date separater attribute (Check the
Regional Settings).
Display : Offers a series of formats predefined for displaying dates.
Detail Mask : Define the format of the field in the Grid, following the standards the PHP function Date.
d-m-Y 25-09-2009
F/Y September/2009
j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A 25/9/2001 as 14:30:11 PM
l, d \d\e F \d\e
Thursday, 25 of January of 2009
Y
h:i:s 11:33:20
123:43:27 (accumulating the
#h:i:s
hours)
Format Table
Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different fromDate. You need to use the characters Y, M and D that correspond to Year, Month
and Day.
Example 1 : Date stored in a SQL field of the type char(8) where the positions 1 to 4 represents the year, the positions 5 and 6 is the month and the position 7 and 8 is
the day, define the internal format like: YYYYMMDD
Example 2 : Date stored in a SQL field of the type char(6) where the positions 1 and 2 represents the month and the positions 3 to 6 is the year, define the internal
format like: MMYYYY
Display Settings
Field Settings
PDF Configuration
Line Break
Chart Settings
2
Chart Layout
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Grid
4. Time
Time
General Settings
Time field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it is defined as Time, it is possible to define a Time Format.
Values Format
Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, it will be displayed the date separator attribute (Check the
Regional Settings).
d-m-Y 25-09-2009
F/Y September/2009
j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A 25/9/2001 as 14:30:11 PM
l, d \d\e F \d\e
Y
h:i:s 11:33:20
#h:i:s
hours)
Format Table
Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different fromDate. You need to use the characters A, M and D that correspond to Year, Month
and Day.
format like: MMYYYY
Display Settings
Field Settings
PDF Configuration
Line Break
Chart Settings
2
Chart Layout
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Grid
4. Date and time
Date and time

General Settings
Date and Time field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it is defined as a Time, it is allowed to define the format of the time.
Values Format
Regional Settings).
d-m-Y 25-09-2009
F/Y September/2009
j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A 25/9/2001 as 14:30:11 PM
l, d \d\e F \d\e
Y
h:i:s 11:33:20
#h:i:s
hours)
Format Table
and Day.
format like: MMYYYY
Display Settings
Field Settings
PDF Configuration
Line Break
Chart Settings
2
Chart Layout
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Grid
4. Image (Database)
Image (Database)
General Settings
Upload field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it is defined as an Image ( Database), all the Images files are stored and loaded directly from the Database.
Image Border : Width of the Image border. Value in Pixels.
Image Height : Image height size. Value in Pixels.
Image Width : Image width size. Value in Pixels.
Maintain Aspect : Maintains the original aspect ratio of the image when resizing it.
Open in Another Window : Allows to open the image in another window.
Display Settings
Field Settings
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Grid
4. Image (File Name)
Image (File Name)

General Settings
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it is defined as an Image (File Name), all the images files are stored and loaded in a directory of the server (Only
the image name is stored in the database).
Display Settings
Field Settings
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Grid
4. Document (Database)
Document (Database)
General Settings
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it is defined as a Document ( Database), all the document files are stored and loaded directly from the Database.
Icon : Displays an icon beside the field to identify the type of document.
File Name : Defines the field that contains the name of the document stored in the database ( the field that contains this information also needs to be stored in the database).
Display Settings
Field Settings
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Grid
4. Document (File Name)
Document (File Name)

General Settings
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it is defined as a Document (File Name), all the document files are stored and loaded in a directory of the server
(Only the document name is stored in the database).
Subfolder : Subfolder’s name that the files are stored.
File Name : Defines the field that contains the name of the document stored in the server ( the field that contains this information also needs to be stored in the database).
Display Settings
Field Settings
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Grid
4. Bar code
Bar code
General Settings
Configuration Interface of the Barcode Field.
Data Type : DataType of the field for the application.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the
SQL Type : Database field type.
Values Format
Type : Type of Barcode.
Text : Barcode Text for illustration purposes.
There are 18 types of barcodes, that are listed below:
Barcode configuratio interface.
Display Settings
Field Settings
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Grid
4. QRCode
QRCode
General Settings
QRCODE field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it is defined as a QRCODE, allows you to set values into a QRCODE.
Values Format
Level of error correction : Codewords are 8 bits long and use the Reed–Solomon error correction algorithm with four error correction levels. The higher the error correction
level, the less storage capacity.
Image Size : Size of the QRCODE.
Margin : Margin of the QRCODE.
Display Settings
Field Settings
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Grid
4. Signature
Signature
General Settings
Configuration Interface of the Signature Field.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it is defined as a text, it accepts letters, numbers and special characters.
Background color : Allows to apply a color to the field background by choosing a color from the color palette.
Pen color:
Subtitle : Allows to define the subtitle that will be displayed beside the field.
Initial Value : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.
Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be
saved in the session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.
Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that will receive the field value.
Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.
HTML Type : HTML Object that will be used to display the field in the form.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.
Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.
Font Color : Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.
Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.
Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.
Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.
Border style : Allows to choose a style for the border.
Collapse : Allows to define the collapse for the border.
Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.
Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.
Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).
Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).
Width : To define a width for the title of the field.
Height : To define a height for the title of the field.
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Grid
4. Rating
Rating
This field allows the developer to create a rate field to display the data previously added usgin stars (or any other image).
Description of the attributes availables for configuration.
Data type
Define the type of the field in the application. In this case we must select the typeRating.
Label
Define the application title that will be showed when the application is executed. The terminology used in the interface of your application is very important for the usability, and we
need to use familiar terms for the final user, instead of use terms from the system.
Example, this field “rating” that is named cmp_rating however, the customer would have a better understanding if the label uses Product Rating.
Besides use a fixed text, the Label attribute allows the use of Langs to define the field title, allowing the internationalization of your application.
Subtitle
Define the subtitle that will be shown in the field below the ratings.Example: “Thank you for your feedback!”.
As in the Label, the subtitle attribute also allows the use of Langs for internationalization of your application.
Amount of icons
Define the number of icons that will be displayed in the field. The value set in this attribute must be according to the way the evaluation will be realized.
To evaluate using Stars normally it is used five stars, so , we must to inform 5 in this attribute. After we set the images that will be displayed in the attributes
Enabled icon and
Disabled icon the result will be the same as in the example:
To use Like/Dislike for example we must inform 1 in the amount of icons, so only one image will be displayed and will change according to the click. In this case, the storage in the
database will be 1 for like (enabled icon) and 0 for dislike (disabled icon). You can see the field configured below as like/dislike:
Enabled icon
Define the icon that will be shown for the amount selected. Following the like/dislike example, in this option, we must insert the Like image . We must do the same for a star
evaluation, where for default we must insert the stars filled .
Disabled icon
Define the icon that will be shown for the not selected icons. In this attribute, we set an image to represent the opposite of the previous images set in the
Enabled icon.
Still referring the example of the Like/Dislike, in this attribute we must set the Dislike .
As in the stars example, we must insert the image with the empty stars .
SQL Type
Inform the type of the field in the database.
Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
CSS of the Title

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.
CSS of the Field
Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.
Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.
Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.
Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.
Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).
2
Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).
Width : To define a width for the field.
Height : To define a height for the field.
CSS of the Input Object
Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc
Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.
Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.
Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.
Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).
Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).
Width : To define a width for the Input Object.
Height : To define a height for the Input Object.
Help Settings
Allow the developer to set up instructions and hints about the field’s use, allowing the developer to help the users about the system usage.
Description of the settings attributes.
Help Description
In this area, you can set up a text that will be shown in the application according to the type of help selected below.
Help Type
Pop-up - Display a default icon ! beside the field. To display the message just click in the icon that a Pop-up will be displayed with the help text.
Hint - Display a default icon ! beside the field. When the mouse is above the icon a help text will be displayed.
The icon displayed when selecting the types Hint or Popup vary according to the theme that is being used in the application. This icon can be modified in the CSS
Buttons.
Text - Display a text inside of a <span></span> beside the field.
Help button position
Allow to set up where the help button will be displayed in the field, there are two options:
Beside: The help icon will be displayed beside the field.

Column: The help icon will be displayed beside the label of the field.
1
Layout
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › LAYOUT
Blocks
Conceptually a block is a “container” where you can position the fields of the Applications: Form, Control or Grid with Slide orientation.
By default, the applications created in ScriptCase are built with a only one block, with the same name as the application. You can add the amount of blocks that you want to
organize in a more convenient way. The page below, observe that theirs a column Organization, and that is where you’ll define if the next block will be set beside or below the
current one.
Application Block configuration
On the left side of each block there are two icons, first has the function to edit all the information relative to the block and the second is to delete the block.
Organizing the position of the Blocks

See below how to modify the display order of the Blocks in one Page.
Click and drag the block that you desire to modify to its new position.
Application Block Display configuration
See how to remove a block from display
Click on the block desired and drag it to the item “Blocks not Shown”. This way, you can also drag the block to another page if desired. See the images below.
Attributes
Block
Name : Name of the Block.
Label : Title of the block that’ll be displayed in the application.
Title
Display : Flag that controls the title display of the block.
Label
Display : Flag that controls id the label of the fields will be displayed in the block.
Position : Options to display label :

Above : The label will be displayed above the field.
Beside : The label will be displayed beside the field.
Below : The label will be displayed below the field.
Fields
2
Columns : Amount of columns that are displayed side by side in the block.
Position : The way that the fields are displayed in the block :
Below : The fields are displayed one below the other respecting the amount of columns.
Beside : The fields are displayed one beside the other respecting the amount of columns.
Line : The fields are displayed one beside the other without the tabulation.
Organization
Next : The way that the blocks are displayed in the page:
Below : Indicates that the next block will be placed below the current one.
Beside : Indicates that the next block will be placed beside the current one.
Tabs : Indicates that the next block will be placed in a different tab then the current one.
Width : Specifies the width that block will occupy in pixels or percentage, in case the value is in percentage, inform the (%).
Collapse : Enables the option to close the block.
Create New Block
To include new blocks in an Application, click on the button . Next, you’ll see the following interface to define the name and label of the block. At the end
click on Create.
Creating application blocks configuration
Attributes
Edit Blocks
To edit a block just click on the icon , that is on the left side of the block. Next, you’ll see the following interface to define the parameters of the blocks. At the end click on
save.
Application Block editing interface
Attributes
Name : Name of the block.
Title : Block title for display.
Display Title : This option, when active, allows to display the block title.
Title Font : Font applied to the block title.
Font Size : Size of the font applied to the block title.

3
Font Color : Font color for the block title.
Background Color : Background Color of the block title.
Background image : Background image for the block title.
Title Height : Height in pixels of the block title line.
Horizontal Alignment : Horizontal Alignment of the block title (Left, Center and Right).
Vertical Alignment : Vertical Alignment the block title (Top, Middle and Bottom).
Display Label : Display the labels of the fields in the block.
Columns : Amount of field columns in a block.
Columns Width : How the width of the block is defined.
Label Color : Color of the field labels.
Fields Organization : How the fields are organized in the block.
Label Position : Position of the field labels relating to the data.
Next Block : Position of the next block relating to the current block.
Border Color : Border color for the block.
Border Width : Border Width for the block.
Block Width : Width for the block.
Block Height : Height for the block.
Cell Spacing : Cell Spacing in the block.
On this module are available the features of editing, attributes and display of the application, in a way that you can apply display themes, organize blocks, define values and the
format of the Header/Footer and etc.
Layout Settings
On this interface, you can define the theme for display of a specific application, this being because ScriptCase uses a Standard Definition of Values per project, that besides the
Display Theme, allows to define values for other attributes on a Project level.
Application Display Theme
Configuration
Display Configuration
Header Template : Allows to choose the template that’s going to be used as the Header of the application.
Footer Template : Allows to choose the template that’s going to be used as the Footer of the application.
Button : Allows to choose the button theme for the application.

4
Themes : Choose one of the existing themes, it’ll load the display mode (colors ,fonts, etc.) that’ll be part of the application.
Header & Footer

Header
In this block, it’s the definition of the variables content that’ll be part of the header.
Application Header Configuration
This page may change depending on the header format chosen in the Layout Settings.
Display Header : This option determines if the header will display.
Title : Allows to inform the title displayed in the application.
Header Variables : The field variables can be informed with anyone of displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, it’ll be necessary to associate the content with the field. Below
there are the types of content:
Field : When you choose the option “ Field”, it’ll open a Combo box beside to choose the field you want. Selecting the desired field, it’ll associate the value of the field with the header.
Title : This option when selected it’ll display in the header the value informed in the “ Application Title ”.
Date : When selected the “ Date” type, it’ll display the system’s date in the header. There are a diversity of formats using the date and time of the server. The format can be informed in
the text field that appears beside the field. To access the existing formats, click on the icon and you’ll view a page display the formats.
Image : When selecting the image type, it displays a field to inform the name of the existing image in the server. To locate the images existing and selecting one, click the icon “ Choose
Image ” and to upload new images click on the button “ Upload ” .
Value : When selecting the type “ Value ”, the content informed in the text field that appears beside, it’ll be displayed in the header, you can inform texts and “ Global Variables ”. e.g.
“Employee Name: [v_name]”.
Depending on the Application, you may have more than one title option.
Footer
Application Footer Configuration
This page may change depending on the footer format chosen in the Layout Settings.
Display Footer : This option determines if the footer will display.
Footer Variables : The field variables can be informed with anyone of displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, it’ll be necessary to associate the content with the field. Below
Field : When you choose the option “ Field”, it’ll open a Combo box beside to choose the field you want. Selecting the desired field, it’ll associate the value of the field with the footer.
Date : When selected the “ Date” type, it’ll display the system’s date in the footer. There are a diversity of formats using the date and time of the server. The format can be informed in
Value : When selecting the type “ Value ”, the content informed in the text field that appears beside, it’ll be displayed in the footer, you can inform texts and “ Global Variables ”. e.g.
1
Events
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › EVENTS
Scriptcase has Events to allow the developers to customize the application code. By using the events, the developers can program custom actions at a specific execution time
(e.g. After a record is inserted, when it is loaded, upon submitting a Form, …) and for a specific application type. In the events area you can use global and local variables,
JavaScript, CSS, HTML, PHP codes and also Scriptcase macros.
onApplicationInit
This event occurs only once, when the application is loaded and before the application executes the SQL. It can be used for data processing or checking variables.
Example: if ([glo_var_dept] != ‘financial’){ sc_redir(app_x.php); }
onNavigate
This event occurs when navigating between the application pages.
OnScriptInit
This event occurs when the application scripts are started. It runs before the OnLoad events(when present), however, it will always be executed when running, reloading or
navigating the application.
onRecord
This event is executed at the moment the record line is loading. The OnRecord event is a loop that loads the records by each row.
onHeader
This event runs when the header of the application is loaded.
onFooter
This event runs when the footer of the application is loaded.
Code Editor
Scriptcase code editor is used within events and has a series of shortcuts to help in the applications development.
At the top section of the editor, there are some options that allows us to change the editor theme or expand it, for example. These options can also be activated using the
hotkeys.
- Increases the area occupied by your code editor.
- Expand the sides of the code editor.
- Activates the search in the code editor.
- Enables replace in the code editor.
- Defines the code editor theme.
The hotkeys are available in all browsers compatible with Scriptcase.
Click Here to view the Scriptcase hotkeys documentation.

1
Ajax Events
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › AJAX
EVENTS
OnClick
The ajax event OnClick is executed when the field that it’s based on is clicked.
Creating a new ajax event
Selecting a field
Selecting a field of the ajax event
Choose a field to create an event To define in which field the event will be add to.
Choose an event that run the ajax Defines which event will be added to the field.
1
Buttons
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › BUTTONS
In addition to the buttons that comes automatically with the applications, you can also create your own buttons. All the buttons are displayed within the application toolbar.
New buttons creation settings
Creating a new button

To create a new button, click on the “New Button” option and enter a name and a button type.
The button Types are: JavaScript, PHP, Link and Run.
Grid buttons type
Deleting a button
To delete a button click on Delete icon (represented by a recycle bin image) in the right of the button name, at the application menu under the Buttons option.
Deleting a button
JavaScript
D I S P L AY M O D E
You can configure the display mode of the javascript button in Image, Button or Link.
Button
Setting up Javascript Button.
Display Mode You can select the display mode for the javascript button in this option.
Label Text of the button that will be display in the application while executing.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this is not informed, no message will appear.
Type Description of the created button.
2
Image
Icon Allows you to inform the icon that will be displayed on the button while the execution of the application.
Link
Display Mode You can select the display mode for the ajax button in this option.
CSS Style Name of the CSS class, style created in the layout editor.
Code Block
Javascript button coding block.
In this block, only JavaScript is accepted.
PHP
You can configure the display mode of the PHP button in Image, Button or Link.
Button
Setting up PHP Button.
Display Mode You can select the display mode for the link button in this option.
Reload quantity of records This option is used to update the amount of records in the application.
Target Defines the window destination where the code will run (Open in the same Window, Open in another Window, Modal).
3
Image
Link
Code Block
*Ajax button coding block. *
In this block, you can use macros, PHP code and JavaScript.
Link Button
You can configure the display mode of the link button in Image, Button or Link.
Button
Setting up Link Button.
4
Image
Link
Setting up link Button.
Setting up the Link

Selecting the applications
Choosing the application for the button link.
You should select an application to be called from the button link.
Link Parameters
5
Choosing the parameters for the button link.
Field Allows you to use an existing field from the current application as a parameter for the link.
Variable Allows you to use a global variable from the current application as a parameter for the link.
Fixed Allows you to inform a fixed value as a parameter for the link.
Empty No value will be passed as a parameter for the link.
Link Properties ( Grid )
Configuring the properties for the link button when the
destined application is a Grid.
Link Operation Mode How the link will open (Open in the same Window, Open in another Window, Modal ).
Exit URL for the target application URL or an application that be redirect to when exiting the Grid application.
Initial Mode Allows you to define the initial mode of the grid application ( Search or Grid ).
Number of Lines Allows you to define the amount of lines displayed in the Grid.
Number of Columns Allows you to define the amount of columns displayed in the Grid.
Paging Enable the paging in the Grid.
Display Header Enable the Grid Header.
Active Navigation Buttons Enable the navigation button (First, Back, Next and Last) in the Grid.
Link Properties ( Form )
destined application is a Form.
Exit URL for the target application URL or an application that be redirect to when exiting the Form application.
Enable insert button on target application Enable the “New” button in the Form Application.
Enable update button on target application Enable the “Update” button in the Form Application.
Enable delete button on target application Enable the “Delete” button in the Form Application.
Enable navigation button on target application Enable the navigation button (First, Back, Next and Last) in the Form.
Enable button to edit a grid record Enable the buttons that allow you to edit the records of a Grid
RUN
D I S P L AY O P T I O N S
We can configure “Run” button display as Link, Image or Button:
Button
6
Grid’s Run Button settings - Button type
Display Mode Combo box to select the button display option, you can choose button, image or link.
Label Application button title (text that will be displayed for the button within the application)
Hint Using this option you can set a message for the button hint
Confirmation
Using this option you can set a confirmation message that will be displayed when the button is pressed. Leave it empty if you don’t need to display any message.
Message
CSS for the the button, if you do not change this option Scriptcase will apply the default application/project CSS. You can customize the buttons’ CSS using the option within
CSS Style
the main menu “Layout » CSS Buttons”
Reload quantity of
Option used to update the amount of application records.
records
Type Button type description.
Target This option allows you to set the target window where you will run the button code (the same window, other window, modal)
Image
Grid’s Run Button settings - Image type
Display Mode Combo box to select the button display option, you can choose image, button or link.
Icon Button display icon. You can use this option to select an image (from Scriptcase images or from you computer) to represents the button within the application toolbar.
Confirmation Message Using this option you can set a confirmation message that will be displayed when the button is pressed. Leave it empty if you don’t need to display any message.
Reload quantity of records Option used to update the amount of application records.
Tipo Button type description.
Link
Grid’s Run Button settings - Link type
Display Mode Combo box to select the button display option, you can choose link, button or image.
Label Text that will be displayed on the button (on running application).
Hint Application button title (text that will be displayed for the button within the application)
Confirmation Message By using this option you can set a confirmation message that will be displayed when the button is pressed. Leave it empty if you don’t need to display any message.
CSS Style CSS class name, style created in the theme buttons editor .
Coding Area
Grid’s Run Button settings - Coding area

7
There are two types of events in the Run button
OnRecord : Runs after processing on each record selected.
OnFinish : Runs after processing all records selected.
In this coding area you can use Scriptcase macros, PHP and JavaScript.
imagem_ligacao_geral_consulta
1
Detail Module
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › DETAIL MODULE
The Grid Detail Module allows you to organize the information displayed according to its significance. It’s a complementary application that displays the data in a detailed Form.
In order to see the Grid Detail within the Grid the final user needs to click on that is displayed for each record.
To enable the Grid Detail Module, access the “Grid Modules” and enable the check box, it uses to come enabled by default:
Detail Settings
In this section, the user can define how the detail of a particular record should be displayed when it’s selected and which registry information should be displayed in this detail.
Attributes
Fields selection for the detail page. : Allows you to select the desired fields. Just click the field and then click the “On/Off” button to enable/disable the fields.
Detail Keys
Through this interface you can chose the fields that will be part of the “WHERE” clause, it will return the corrected information according to the selected record. ScriptCase uses to
identifies the table primary keys, that is being used within the application SQL, automatically. However, sometimes it is necessary to set the primary key manually, especially in
cases where the application has a SQL JOIN, involving more than one table.
Select here the fields that are keys to the Detail. The application will execute another select command, and you can configure which fields will be passed for this “WHERE” clause:
On/Off : Select the field to be displayed in detail. The selected field (On) gets an asterisk.
All : Check “On” to all fields.
None : Check “Off” to all fields.
Desktop Toolbar
The application toolbar is divided in two parts: superior and inferior. It is possible to select the buttons for each part independently. A button can even be part of both parts
simultaneously.
2
Attributes
Navigation : Navigation Buttons
Exit : Ends or return to the previous application depending on how the “Display Detail” is configured. You can change the label within the “Button Settings”.
Exports : Sets the formats for printing generation:

Print : Creates a complete report with all Grid Detail data within a HTML printable page.
PDF : Creates a complete report with all Grid Detail data within a PDF file type.
Othes
Separator : Creates a separation line between the buttons for better display, specially for grouped buttons.
Application Hotkeys
Mobile Toolbar
It has the same options of Desktop version, by adding only the item “copy of the desktop”, in which, when clicked, performs a copy of toolbar items from Desktop to Mobile.
3
Button Settings
Button Displays the buttons available in the application.

Allows you to customize the buttons name from current application. You can also use the option “Application Language” (placed within the main menu “Locales”) to change the button
Label
labels for the whole project.
Hint Allows you to set a hint for the buttons. The hint will help the user to understand the button’s action.
Shortcut Allows you to set a shortcut key to run the button action. Important note: Each browser has its own shortcut combinations and reserved words, you need to check it before
key implementing this option.
Header
In this section is where the content variables that will be part of the header is set.
This screen will change depending on the format chosen header within.
Display Header : This flag determines whether the header is displayed.
Detail Title : Using this option you can set a title for the application, it uses bring a value from the Grid application as default. However it can be customized.
Header Variables : Variable fields can be filled with any of the types displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, you must associate a content. Below we describe the existing types:
Field : When the “__Category” type option is chosen, it will open a Combobox next to the fields that are part of the “Select”. By choosing one of these fields, you are associating the value
of the field to display in the header.
Title : When this option is selected, it will display the value filled in “ Detail Title ” to the header.
Date : When you select the “ Date” type, the system date in the format dd/mm/yyyy will be displayed in the header. There are several display formats using server date and time. The
format can be reported in the text field that appears next. Click in the question mark to check out the available formats.
Image : When the image type field is selected, a field for filling in the image name on the server will appear. To locate the existing images and select one, click on the “ Choose Image ”
icon and to make new images available on the server click on “Download an image !” Configuração do rodapé da aplicação] cabecalho_up_img.
Value : When “ Value ” type is selected, the content filled in the text field next to that will be displayed in the header, texts and “__ Global variables__” can be entered. Ex: “Name of the
Employee: [v_name]”.
1
Nested Grid
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › NESTED GRID
Nested grids are used when you need to display hierarchical data, such as customers and their respective applications.
The main Grid encapsulates other Grids, showing in each of its NestedGrids additional data records. Note the image below in which for each customer is displayed a Nested Grid
with its applications.
Settings
In the application menu, by clicking on the folder NestedGrid > Settings, the general attributes of the NestedGrids can be changed.
Title in the same line : This attribute enables you to configure the Nested Grid title display. If it is displayed on the same line, the Nested Grid table will be incorporated into the main Grid.
![Example using Nested Grid title on the same line][nestedgrid_settings_title_same_line]
PDF : This option allows you to enable/disable the Nested Grid display in PDF reports.
XLS : This option allows you to enable / disable the Nested Grid display in the XLS and XLSX reports.
XML : This option allows you to enable/disable the Nested Grid display in XML reports.
Enable TreeView : This option enables an option to hide/display the Nested Grid within the main Grid records. By choosing “Yes”, the option “Title in the same line” will be automatically
disabled.
2
Position : This option allows you to configure the Nested Grid placement in the main Grid. This option is not available if you enable “Title in the same line”. You will be able to
position the Nested Grid within the records. The options are:
In one column
Below the record
Alignment : Allows you to set the Nested Grid alignment in the main Grid interface when “Position” is set set as Below the record. The options are: left, right and Center.
Set individually
This is one of the values available for the attributes of the Nested Grid Settings
When selecting this option, the settings of attributes must be performed individually on each of the existing Nested Grid.
Links
To create a Nested Grid link, just click on the “New link” within the Link folder.
Creating a new Nested Grid
Adding a new Nested Grid : Enter the name and the label for the link that will be created.
Adding a new Nested Grid
Application list : Have three options for list the applications: All, by folder or by type.
All - List all applications of the current project;
by Folder - List all applications of current project, but the applications are separated respecting the project folder structure.
by type - List all applications of current project, but separated by type.
You can also search by application name in the search field.

3
For an application to be used as a Nested Grid, it must have within its SQL command (Grid > SQL) a WHERE clause with a global variable to receive the parameters from the main Grid.
Parameters setting : Setting the value that will be passed to the variable(s) of the Nested Grid SQL statement.
In the screen above, on the left side, it is displayed the Nested Grid input parameters (global variables created within the Nested Grid WHERE clause), on the right side, you must
select the parameter option. The options are:
Attributes
Field : Used to assign a Grid field value as a parameter.
Fix : Used to assign a fixed value as a parameter.
Empty : By selecting this option, no value will be assigned as parameter.
Editing an existing Nested Grid link

All Nested Grid links created will be placed within its menu options, within the “Links” folder. By clicking on the Nested Grid name there will be an interface for settings editing.
Set individually
This is one of the values available for the attributes of the Nested Grid Settings If this value was set for some attribute in the Nested Grid settings, the settings will be made in the
Nested Grid itself.
General settings
4
Nested Grid general settings
This interface can be used to edit the following Nested Grid attributes:
Label : Title for the Nested Grid application.
Link : In this attribute are displayed the current Nested Grid connection data, showing the application and parameters used. To change any link attribute just click to edit Link.
Display : Defines which items of the embedded application will be shown in the main application, that if the nested application uses some or any of these resources.
Header : Allows to display field labels.
Sequential : Allows to display sequential display(number line).
Total : Allows to display the Totals.
Visualization : When marked it sets that the Nested Grid view will be equal to that of the main Grid.
Display settings
This settings will only display if all the following conditions are true.
Conditions of display for the Display Settings
Attribute Value
Title in the same line No
Enable Tree view No
Position In one column
Horizontal Alignment : This option sets the Nested Grid horizontal alignment. It can be aligned left, right or Center.
Vertical Alignment : This option sets the Nested Grid vertical alignment. It can be aligned to the top, middle, or End.
Background color : Here you can set the background color. If it is not filled it will get the Grid default background color.
Title horizontal alignment : This option sets the Nested Grid label horizontal alignment. It can be aligned Left, Right or Center.
Title vertical alignment : This option sets the Nested Grid label vertical alignment. It can be aligned to the top, middle, or End.
Bold : This option sets the Nested Grid title (label) in bold.
1
Sorting Rules
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › SORTING RULES
Attributes
Sorting rules sorting : Allows you to change the sort display of the sorting rules. To configure this option, an icon is displayed (set up ordering) that when clicked, allows to select the
field and your display order ascending (ASC) or descending (DESC) .
Integrate sorting rules : This option allows you to set whether to use the sorting rules together with the regular sorting options or not. You can choose the display options between:
Sorting Fields/Rules(default) : This option allows you to apply the rules that have been created together with the regular fields sorting (descending or ascending)
Sorting Fields : This option allows you to apply the fields sorting only, discarding the sorting rules (descending or ascending)
Sorting Rules : This option allows you to apply the sorting only according to the rules that have been created, discarding the fields sorting.
Creating a Sorting Rule
Attribute
Name : Field to inform the new rule name.
Label : Field to inform the name that will be displayed in the application.
Setting up a sorting Rule
Attributes
Label : This option allows you to enter a name that will be displayed when the application is executed.
Select the fields for a sorting rule : Allows you to select through the selection bar which fields will be displayed (fields that are in the frame at the right side) and the fields will not be
displayed (fields that are in the left side frame). To sort the fields the way you want, use the sort bar located on the right side of the frame. To apply the sorting type to the field, simply
select the straight side frame field and select the Ascending mode, where displays a “+” or a “-“ by the field side to indicate if the sort order is Descending.
1
Refined Search
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › REFINED SEARCH
The refined search is a feature where you can integrate a search interface, next to the Grid, limiting values according to a universe that exists in the connected database.
Grid application running with refined search activated
Settings
Refined search settings
Attributes
Move searched above : When you filter by a field, this field will be moved to the top of the refined search stack.
Show quantity : Alongside the values of the fields, you will see the existing amount. Ex.: Brazil (1547)
Start mode : This option sets whether the fields select options will start open or closed.
Minimum width : This option sets the minimum width for the refined search fields, value in pixels.
Maximum width : This option sets the maximum width for the refined search fields, value in pixels.
Minimum height : This option sets the minimum height for the refined search fields results, value in pixels.
Maximum height : This option sets the maximum height for the refined search fields results, value in pixels.
Select fields
Refined Search fields
The refined search is automatically added to the Grid application when one or more Grid fields are selected in the tab “select fields”.
2
Selecting fields of refined search
Edit fields
In the tab “Edit fields”, you can configure each field according to what you need to display within the application.
Refined Search fields editing
Attributes
Fields : Listing of selected fields in the tab “select fields”.
Range : This option activate a slider with intervals between the smallest and largest value.
Increment : When using the range this option will set an integer value to increase the range.
Show value : When checked, displays the range values in the slider.
Multi select : Enables multiple selection values to perform the filter.
Start opened : This option sets the initial mode for fields selection display in refined search.
See more : When checked, enables the option to “see more” for the filter records. This is recommended when the selected field has a big amount of records. You will be able to click to
“see more” or “see less”
Quantity : This option sets the initial amount of records to be displayed for each field selected.
Date : This option sets the date format that is displayed in the date fields inside the filter.
Sorting : This option sets the records sorting for each selected field
Message for empty fields : This option sets a message to be displayed when the field has empty values. You can also use a variable from Scriptcase language system.
1
Group By
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › GROUP BY
Group By Settings
These are the general settings of the “Group By” in the Grid, independently of it’s type, static or dynamic. Here we can define some Group By viewing options, such as the use of
Treeview, for example.
The option Enable TreeView isn’t available in the Infinite Scroll.
Enable TreeView : Defines the use of TreeView in “Group By”, which allows you to expand or collapse the records displayed in Group by.
Group By Line : Sets the positioning of group by in relation to group records. The options are Before the records or After the records.
Group By Header : Lets you display the Group By header on all pages.
Group By sorting : It allows to order the fields respecting the Group By.
Display Titles : Allows the label display of the fields within the groups.
Record count title : Sets a title for the records quantity column.
Value Separator : Define the separator between the title and the field value in the GROUP BY.
Tab a Group By : Sets the left margin of Group By. The value must be informed in pixel.
Separates the Group By : Sets the spacing between two Group By. The value must be informed in pixel.
Dynamic Group By
In this screen we define the fields available in Dynamic Group By and will be summarized in Grid and Summary when the Dynamic Group By is used.
Select Fields
In this screen we define the fields available in the Dynamic Group By and will be summed in the Grid and Summary when the dynamic Group By is used.
This Group By works independently from any other Group By configuration or Totals already performed, that is, the fields defined to be summarized in the Grid or Summary in
the Dynamic Group will be visible only when the Dynamic Group is used.
We will be able to see all available fields for the Group By configuration and totals in the Grid Fields.
The Use Dynamic Group By option enables the Group By in the run-time application.
Fields used when using the Grid must be configured to be displayed on the Grid.
2
Grid Fields : List of all the fields of the application.
Group By Fields : Defines the fields that are part of the Group By.
Grid Totals : Defines the fields that are part of the Grid Totals.
Summary Totals : Defines the fields that are part of the Summary Totals.
Group By Fields
We must drag and drop the fields that will be part of the Group By in Group By Fields .
Each field can only be added once to the Group By Fields , except for the date and datetime fields.
D AT E A N D D AT E T I M E F I E L D S
For date and datetime fields, some display intervals have been added, so these fields can be added two or more times to the Group By.
3
All Grid fields can be added to the “totalizer”, the only difference being the functions available. Numeric fields can use all the available summarization functions, since the non-
numeric fields can use only the count and the different count.
The fields configured in this totals can be edited in Grid > Totals > Fields > Dynamic Group By
Summary Totals
The fields added to the Summary totals will only be visible in Summary at the time Dynamic Group By is used.
4
The fields configured in this totals can be edited in Summary > Fields > Dynamic Group By
Fields
The fields added to the Grid Fields will be listed within the Fields folder so that they can be edited individually.
General Settings
C AT E G O R I E S : T E X T A N D B A R C O D E
Data Type: Defines the datatype of the field in the HTML.
Group by label : Defines a label of the fields displayed in the Group By.
Case Settings: Converts the text according to the selected option.

Upper Case: Transforms the text in upper case.
Lower Case : Transforms the text in lower case.
Capitalize first word : It transforms the first word in the upper case or lower case, according to the text retrieved, that is, if the text retrieved by the application is in lower case, this
option will make upper case only the first word.
Capitalize all words : Transforms all words in the upper case or lower case, according to the text retrieved, that is, if the text retrieved by the application is in lower case, this option will
transform upper case into all words.
Field Mask : On this field you will configure the display mask according to the table informed in Applications > Grid > Fields > Text.
SQL Type: Informs the data type of the field in the database.
C AT E G O R I E S : N U M B E R A N D C A L C U L AT E D
C AT E G O R I E S : S P E C I A L A N D D AT E / T I M E

5
Lookup Settings
This option is available in the fields of the categories: Text, Number, Calculated, Special and Barcode.
On this option, it’s possible to setup the display lookup for the fields cited above. For more information about using the Grid Lookup, access Application > Grid > Fields > Text.
Values Format
NUMBER TYPE
Regional Settings : When active, you can apply the Regional Settings to this field. To modify the setting, access Locales > Regional Settings in the Scriptcase Menu.
Color of Negative : In this field you’ll inform the color value in hexadecimal. (Example: #000000)
CURRENCY TYPE
Currency Symbol: When this option is activated, the application will display the currency symbol according to the Regional Settings.
Decimal Precision : Amount of decimal that your field will be displaying.
Complete with Zeros : Activating this option will allow the application to complete the value after the coma with zeros.
D AT E T Y P E
Display: In this field you will select how will the field will display itself.
Group By Settings
Attributes
Field Position : Defines how the information contained in the Group By line will be displayed and organized.
Columns : Defines the amount of columns information contained in the Group By line will displayed and organized.
Display Label : Defines if the field label will be displayed.
Line break : Displays or not the Group By line with the value divided in another line.
Records amount : Defines whether the Group By row will display the number of group records.
Break PDF Page (Grid) : Defines if the PDF file, generated by the GRID, will contain each group by printed in a new page.
Ex. In a report you can have some orders where they can be displayed on different pages.
Break PDF Page (Summary) : Defines if the Summary PDF file, generated by the GRID will contain each Group By printed in a new page.
Ex. In a report you can have some orders where they can be displayed on different pages. .
Break HTML Page (Grid) : Displays each Grid Group By in a different HTML page.
Break HTML Page (Summary) : Displays each Summary Group By in a different HTML page.
Start TreeView : Defines the inital state of the TreeView.
Sorting : If this option is set to “Yes”, the selected fields will sorted without the need to be clicked on, the sorting will be done respecting the criterias of the Group By.
Fields : Defines which fields are going to displayed in the Group By row. It’s also possible to define if it’s going to be displayed in the Totals or in the Summary of this field by selecting
Value or Sum, before clicking on the button “On/Off”.
6
Group By Line Layout (Label)
Layout configuration of the Group By Label.
Attributes
Font Style : Defines the font that’s going to be used in the Label.
Font Size : Defines the size of the font used in the Group By Label.
Font Color : Font color for the Group By Label.
Background Color : Group By background Color.
Bold Text : Defines if the label will have a Bold Text.
Group By Line Layout (Value)

Layout configuration of the Group By Value.
Attributes
Font Style : Defines the font that is going to be used in the Value.
Font Size : Defines the size of the font used in the Group By Value.
Font Color : Font color for the Group By Value.
Bold Text : Defines if the value will have a Bold Text.
Static Group By
This type of Group By is configured by the developer, where the end user can select one of the predefined Group By available in the application.
Settings
These configurations affects the Static Group By.
Static Group By Settings
Use empty Group By : Configuration used when you want the Grid to be initialized without any Group By.
Title of the empty Group By : Defines a title for the empty Group By option. (Available only when the previous option is enabled)
Initial Group By : Defines the Group By used when running the generated application.
Sorting Groups Settings
Defines the order that the Group By’s will be displayed in the Grid.
New Group By
Interface to create the static Group By.
7
Name: Defines the internal name of the Group By, used by ScriptCase.
Label: Defines the displayed name of the Group By, that will be displayed in the application.
Grid Fields : List of all the fields of the application.
Group By Fields : Defines the fields that are part of the Group By.
Grid Totals : Defines the fields that are part of the Grid Totals.
Summary Totals : Defines the fields that are part of the Summary Totals.
Group By Fields
You need to drag and drop the fields that’ll be part of the Group By in the Group By Fields .
Each field can only be added once to the Group By Fields , except for the date and datetime fields.
D AT E A N D D AT E T I M E F I E L D S
For date and datetime fields, some display intervals have been added, so these fields can be added two or more times to the Group By.
8
Grid Totals
The fields added in this total will be visible only in the Grid (if the total field is visible in the Grid) at the time that the group by is used.
The fields configured in this totals can be edited in Grid > Totals > Fields > Dynamic Group By
Summary Totals
The fields added to the Summary totals will only be visible in Summary at the time Dynamic Group By is used.
9
The fields configured in this totals can be edited in Summary > Fields > Dynamic Group By
Edit Group By
After the creation steps, all the Group By will be listed in the Static Group By folder, below the Settings item.
Expanding the Group By Folder, you will see the settings icon, where you can edit the entire Group By.
You can also view the fields used in the Group By, that can be edited independently from the Grid Layout, see the following:
Fields
The fields added to the Grid Fields will be listed within the Fields folder so that they can be edited individually.
General Settings
C AT E G O R I E S : T E X T A N D B A R C O D E
Case Settings: Converts the text according to the selected option.

Upper Case: Transforms the text in upper case.
10
Lower Case : Transforms the text in lower case.
Capitalize first word : It transforms the first word in the upper case or lower case, according to the text retrieved, that is, if the text retrieved by the application is in lower case, this
option will make upper case only the first word.
Capitalize all words : Transforms all words in the upper case or lower case, according to the text retrieved, that is, if the text retrieved by the application is in lower case, this option will
transform upper case into all words.
C AT E G O R I E S : N U M B E R A N D C A L C U L AT E D
C AT E G O R I E S : S P E C I A L A N D D AT E / T I M E
Lookup Settings
This option is available in the fields of the categories: Text, Number, Calculated, Special and Barcode.
On this option, it’s possible to setup the display lookup for the fields cited above. For more information about using the Grid Lookup, access Application > Grid > Fields > Text.
Values Format
NUMBER TYPE
CURRENCY TYPE
Currency Symbol: When this option is activated, the application will display the currency symbol according to the Regional Settings.
11
Decimal Precision : Amount of decimal that your field will be displaying.
Complete with Zeros : Activating this option will allow the application to complete the value after the coma with zeros.
D AT E T Y P E
Display: In this field you will select how will the field will display itself.
Group By Settings
Attributes
Field Position : Defines how the information contained in the Group By line will be displayed and organized.
Columns : Defines the amount of columns information contained in the Group By line will displayed and organized.
Display Label : Defines if the field label will be displayed.
Line break : Displays or not the Group By line with the value divided in another line.
Records amount : Defines whether the Group By row will display the number of group records.
Break PDF Page (Grid) : Defines if the PDF file, generated by the GRID, will contain each group by printed in a new page.
Ex. In a report you can have some orders where they can be displayed on different pages.
Break PDF Page (Summary) : Defines if the Summary PDF file, generated by the GRID will contain each Group By printed in a new page.
Ex. In a report you can have some orders where they can be displayed on different pages. .
Break HTML Page (Grid) : Displays each Grid Group By in a different HTML page.
Break HTML Page (Summary) : Displays each Summary Group By in a different HTML page.
Start TreeView : Defines the inital state of the TreeView.
Sorting : If this option is set to “Yes”, the selected fields will sorted without the need to be clicked on, the sorting will be done respecting the criterias of the Group By.
Fields : Defines which fields are going to displayed in the Group By row. It’s also possible to define if it’s going to be displayed in the Totals or in the Summary of this field by selecting
Value or Sum, before clicking on the button “On/Off”.
Group By Line Layout (Label)
Layout configuration of the Group By Label.
Attributes
Font Style : Defines the font that’s going to be used in the Label.
Font Size : Defines the size of the font used in the Group By Label.
Font Color : Font color for the Group By Label.
Background Color : Group By background Color.
Bold Text : Defines if the label will have a Bold Text.
Group By Line Layout (Value)
Layout configuration of the Group By Value.
Attributes
Font Style : Defines the font that is going to be used in the Value.
Font Size : Defines the size of the font used in the Group By Value.
Font Color : Font color for the Group By Value.
Bold Text : Defines if the value will have a Bold Text.
Events
These events are only available for static Group By.
The OnGroupByAll event occurs after running the Group By, that allows you to manipulate the totals variables.
Total variables are created based on the fields selected for group by and totals.
The following is an example of the available variables:

12
Assuming that an application has a Group By state and city and two summarization per parcel and balance, the following summarization variables are available:
{count_ger} Contains the total number of records.

{sum_parcel} Contains the general sum of the parcel field.
{sum_balance} Contains the overall sum of the balance field.
{count_state} Contains the total amount of records, from the state group by being processed.
{sum_parcel_state} Contains the general sum of the ‘state’ field and the ‘parcel’ field that are being processed.
{sum_balance_state} Contains the general sum of the ‘balance’ field and the ‘parcel’ field that are being processed.
{count_city} Contains the total number of records, of the city group by being processed.
{sum_parcel_city} Contains the general sum of the ‘parcel’ and ‘city’ field that are being processed.
{sum_balance_city} Contains the general sum of the ‘balance’ and ‘city’ fields that are being processed.
To access the summarization variables by group, simply replace the Group By name with Group By . Example: {sum_balance_city} for {sum_quebra_balance}
{count_quebra} The total number of records in the Group By that is being processed.
{sum_quebra_parcel} Contains the general sum of the parcel field, of the Group By that is being processed.
{sum_quebra_balance} Contains the sum total of the balance field, of Group By that is being processed.
Example:
In an application that has Group By by state and city and totals a balance field in Group By totals, we want to display the average in place of the balance. A method is created in
the OnGroupByAll event, with the following content:
{sum_quebra_balance} = {sum_quebra_balance} / {count_quebra};

1
Grid totals
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › GRID TOTALS
General View
The total fields will be displayed only when the Grid application is using at least one Group By.
Settings
The settings below can be applied for the Grid totals only.
Results in a single line. : This option sets the display of the General Total title and its results in a single line.
Example for this option Enabled :
Example for this option Disabled:
Display Total : This option indicates in which pages the General Totals will be displayed. The options are: On every page , On the last page or Do not display . * Group Subtotal : This option
defines where the subtotal of group by will be displayed.
Record Count : This option allows you to view the amount of records by the General Total title.
Example for this option Enabled : * Example for this option Disabled:
Layout settings
Display settings of the group subtotal.
Label - This field sets the Label for the Group Subtotal .
Display - This option sets if the Group Subtotal will be displayed.
Select fields
Using the select fields area you can set the total fields ant the total options for each field. The same field can be used more than once in the Grid totals area, just if they are using
different summaries types.
To define the fields that will be used for totals, drag them to the area, Grid Totals .
2
Note: The total fields will only be displayed if they are also selected to be displayed within the Grid application module.
When positioning the fields, you must define what summarization will be used, to select that you must click in the combo box and select one of the available options, that will be
according to the data type (integer, date, text…).
The summarization options available are:
Sum : Sets a sum of the values for the selected field.
Maximum : Displays the highest value identified in the selected field.
Minimum : Displays the lowest value identified in the selected field.
Average (Avg) : Calculates the arithmetic mean of the values for the selected field.
Variance : Calculates the dispersion of the values related to the average.
Standard Deviation : Measures the variability of values around the average, the minimum value of the standard deviation is 0 indicating that there is variability, i.e. that all values are equal to
the mean.
Weighted mean (WAvg) : Calculates the weighted average for the selected field. To set the weight used in the calculation of the average access field settings selected in Totals > Fields (select
the field where you are using the Weighted mean) > Weighted average weight.
Weighted average weight : Field that will be used as weighted average weight. In calculating the weighted average, each set value is multiplied by its “weight”, that is its relative
importance.
Count : Displays the total number of records for the selected field.
Distinct Count : Displays the total number of records for the selected field, distinguishing the values.
Important note: The fields in the Grid totals are displayed only on Grids with no Group by or with empty Group by.
Positioning - Default
Defines the positioning and the label used by Grid totals. There are three display formats,, Default, Grouped or By field
To add the same field two or more times in the Totals or use different types of summaries in selected fields, this option will not be displayed.
The option Default returns the result below the column being summarized. When you use the total for more than one column of the Grid, using the same type of summarization,
the results are displayed on the same line.
The line with General Total displaying the Sales.

3
ALIGNMENT
This option is available for display formats Default and Grouped .
Defines the placement of the label selected within the Setting > Display total option. The alignment can be in the Center, Left e Right:
Left :
Right :
Center :
LABEL SETTINGS (DEFAULT)
This option allows you to customize the total labels.
As default we are going to display Grant totals
Positioning - Grouped
The option Grouped returns the total result, separating each type per line.
It is possible to position the total lines by dragging to the desired position.
In this example, we are displaying the sum, average, maximum and minimum of column Sales.
4
ALIGNMENT
Left :
Right :
Center :
LABEL SETTINGS (GROUPED)
Positioning - By field
This option displays the values in the left corner by positioning the results next to each other.
LINE BREAK PER FIELD
This option sets the total fields display. If selected, it will show the fields in the same row or divided by line.
Separated by line:
5
Displayed on the same line:
LABEL SETTINGS (BY FIELD)
Fields
This option allows you to configure the display of values and labels of the selected fields in the Grid totals.
General Settings
Allows you to change the label displayed in the totals.
Visual configuration for the Grid totals

Sets the formatting of the fields displayed in the subtotal for the group.
Font family : Sets the font used.
Font size : Sets the font size.
Text color : Sets the text color
Background color : Sets the background color.
Bold : Format text in bold.
Example of formatting the subtotal for the Group:
Fields Settings - General Total Visual setting

Sets the formatting of the fields displayed in the General total.
6
Example of formatting the Grid General Total

1
Summary
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › SUMMARY
Settings
Summary General Settings.
SUMMARY SETTINGS
Title : Defines a title for the Summary, if not informed the default title will be “Summary”. For no title to be displayed, enter the HTML tag .
Quantity Title : Title Amount of Record.
Horizontal Total: Show horizontal total for Summaries of matrix type.
Vertical Total: Display vertical total for Summaries of matrix type.
The chart icon positioning : Chart icon positioning (left or right).
Positioning of the Total icon : Total icon positioning (left or right).
Page Width : Width value for the Summary page.
Width unit : Unit of measure used for width. Auto (width value is ignored), pixels and percentage.
Display SubTotal label : Displays the Total label or the Value itself.
Display line number : Display the sequence number of the record in the Summary.
Display the hover on the Summary lines : Apply the hover attribute by hovering the mouse cursor over the Summary lines.
Short value : Displays the value abbreviated in the summary.
Display icon only on mouseover : Displays the sorting icon only when the mouse is on the field label.
Fixed Label : Establishes the column label in the screen top during the page scrolling.
L AY O U T S E T T I N G S
You can define the layout of the Summary for each type of Group By.
Group By Field : Group By fields selected in the Grid.
Position : Defines whether to use the x-axis or y-axis position.
Sorting: Sets the sorting by the database value or by the display value.
Fill Empty Labels : Defines whether the empty labels will be filled.
Link Grid : Creates a link in the selected field.
Alignment : Sets the layout alignment type to center, left, or right.
Tabular format: Sets the Summary to the tabular format.
Toolbar
2
The toolbar is divided into two parts, top and bottom, so you can define which buttons will be displayed in both places. Button selection works independently.
You can also define which buttons will be displayed when the application is accessed by a mobile device, just access the Mobile tab.
For more information about the toolbar, access Application > Grid > Toolbar.
Application Hotkeys
Group Label
Click on Add Row, so that the group label can be added.
With this option, you can enter one or more titles for the columns of your applications.
If you have dynamic display fields, Group Label will not work.
To merge two or more cells, click the icon positioned between them.
To add a title, click the pencil icon to add a title.

3
Title Sets the title that will be displayed in your Group Label.
Font Sets the font type of the title of your group label.
Font Size Sets the font size of the title of your group label.
Horizontal alignment Sets the horizontal alignment of the title of your group label. Being left, center or right.
Vertical alignment Sets the horizontal alignment of the title of your group label. Being middle, low or top.
Font Color Sets the color of the title text of your group label.
Background Color Sets the background color of the space where the title of your group label will be displayed.
Sorting
You can define the fields in which you wish to allow the sorting, when running the application.
This configuration must be performed in each of the application group by.
Fields : Select the fields that you want to allow sorting.
Default sorting column : Select a field for initial sorting in the Summary.
Sorting Order : Choose whether the sort will be ascending or descending.
Sorting from the Group By : Select one of the Group By for initial sorting.
Limit
Lets you limit the amount of records to be retrieved from SQL and displayed in the Summary.
This option is only available for static group by.
Field: Defines the field that will be used to perform the limit.
Summarization: Defines the summarization function in which the limit will be performed.
Limit type: Sets the sorting that the limit will be applied, DESC or ASC.
Quantity: Sets the amount of records that will be returned.

4
Charts
One of the modules of the Grid application is the charts, which in turn are generated based on Grid summary information.
Scriptcase charts are generated in HTML5.
Chart Settings
In the settings screen, you can edit the settings of all available charts.
To edit the specific settings for each Chart, select the Chart you want to edit.
To define the available charts when running the application, check the box next to the name of the Charts.
Below you will detail the specific settings of each of the Charts.
Bars
Font Size : Sets the font size in the Chart. Enter only the font size, for example: 15.
Abbreviated value : Defines whether or not the values displayed in the Chart should be abbreviated.
Subtitled : Sets the subtitled position of the Chart.
Bar - Orientation: Orientation of the vertical or horizontal bars on the Chart.
Bar - width (between 20 and 70) : You can set the width from 20 to 70.
Bar - Value orientation : The orientation of the Chart is defined and can be placed vertically.
Bar - Value position : You can choose where the value will position itself.
Bar - Dimension: Bar Dimension (2D or 3D) on the chart.
Bar - Stacking : Stack the Bars in a single Bar (In series).
Bar - Series group : Group the Bar chart in series.
Pie
Pie - Format : Pie or Donut format.
Pie - Dimension: Dimension of the Pie Chart.
Pie - Sorting: Ordering the Pie Chart.
Pie - Values format : Formatting the displayed data.
Line
Line - Shape : Line Format
Line - Series group : Line grouping type.

5
Area
Area - Shape : Format of the area displayed on the Chart.
Area - Stacking : Stack the areas on the Chart.
Area - Series group : Group the Chart in series.
Gauge
Gauge - Shape : Display format of the Chart.
Radar
Funnel
Funnel - Dimension : Funnel dimension (2D or 3D) on the chart.
Pyramid
Subtitled : Sets the subtitled position of the Chart. Pyramid - Dimension : Dimension (2D or 3D) on the Chart. Pyramid - Values format : Formatting the displayed data. Pyramid - Sliced : Display
format of the Chart.
Below are the settings common to all Chart types.
Summary chart type : Defines how the Charts will be generated: analytical, synthetic, or both.
Synthetic They should restrict themselves to the first Group By the condition and allow the user to use the links to see details of the next set of criteria, increasing the level of detail.
Analytical They appear with the whole Group By criteria, creating a complete detailed Chart that does not allow the linking of other detailed Charts.
Create link on the chart : Allows the Charts to have a link in their elements for detailed Grid applications or Charts. The data shown will be relative to the value clicked on the Chart.
Display Values : Displays the values of the generated Chart.
Axis of Chart General Total : Option to display the Chart of the grand total as column or row.
Display Y-Axis With Zero. : Force display of the zero value on the Y axis.
Label orientation on the x-axis : Sets the orientation of the labels on the X axis to vertical or horizontal. If the horizontal option is chosen and there are many values to be displayed so that
they do not fit in the scale, the orientation will be automatically changed to vertical. This option is only available for Charts of type: Column, line and area.
Chart Width : Width in pixels of the generated Charts.
Chart Height : Height in pixels of the Charts generated.
Values sorting : Sort the values of the Charts.
Column Charts
You can define the display of the column Charts as well as the label for the Chart and the axes. These settings are set individually for each Group By.
If the user sets up more than one field, the analytical chart will only generate with the first two.
6
Line charts (totals)
The use of line Chart (totalization) configuration is only available when you have a Group By with at least two fields.
To configure this option, go to the “Group By” menu and create a static Group By some fields or add fields to dynamic Group By.
Layout
The Chart theme tool enables you to fully edit Chart themes.
These themes can be set only for the current application, when changed in the application itself or for all Charts when these settings are performed in the Charts editor.
For more information, access Layout > Chart Themes.
Fields
All fields added in the Summary totals, in the dynamic Group By or in the static Group By, will be listed here separated by the Group By name.
General Settings
General settings of totalized fields in the Summary.
Data Type: Defines the data type for the field.
Label: Defines the label for the displayed field in the Summary.
Values Formatting
INTEGER TYPE
Regional Settings : When you activate it you apply the regional settings for this field. To configure them, click on the menu Locales > Regional Settings.
Color of Negative: In this field you can enter a color in hexadecimal. (Example: # 000000)
DECIMAL TYPE
Color of Negative : In this field you can enter a color in hexadecimal. (Example: # 000000)
Decimal Precision : Number of decimal places your field will have on display.
Complete with Zeros : Enables the field value to be filled with zeros.
CURRENCY TYPE
7
Currency Format : When you enable this option the application will display the currency symbol according to the regional setting.
Color of Negative : In this field you can enter a color in hexadecimal. (Example: # 000000)
Decimal Precision : Number of decimal places your field will have on display.
Complete with Zeros : Enables the field value to be filled with zeros.
V I S U A L S E T T I N G S O F T O TA L I Z AT I O N I N G R O U P B Y
Font : Allows you to define the font used in the Group By label.
Font Size : Allows you to set the font size used in the Group By label.
Font Color : Label color in Group By.
Background Color : Group By background color.
Bold Text : Enables or disables the Group By label text in bold.
Text Alignment : Sets the horizontal positioning of text.
Vertical text alignment : Sets the vertical positioning of text.
V I S U A L S E T T I N G S O F T H E G E N E R A L T O TA L
Font : Allows you to define the font used in the Group By label.
Font Size : Allows you to set the font size used in the Group By label.
Font Color : Label color in Group By.
Background Color : Group By background color.
Bold Text : Enables or disables the Group By label text in bold.
Text Alignment : Sets the horizontal positioning of text.
Vertical text alignment : Sets the vertical positioning of text.
Layout
HEADER
In this configuration, you can define the information that will be displayed in the header and footer of the Summary.
This screen may vary depending on the header format you choose within the Display folder.
Display Header : This flag determines whether the header will be displayed.
Summary Title: Lets you enter a title to be displayed in the application.
Variables : Variable fields can be filled with any of the types displayed in the Combobox, depending on the type you need to associate a content with the required one. Below you describe the
existing types:
Field: When the “ Field” option is chosen, it will open a Combobox next to the fields that are part of the “Select”. By choosing one of these fields, you are associating the value of the field
to display in the Header or Footer.
Date : When “ Date” type is selected, the system date in mm/dd/yyyy format will be displayed in the Application Header or Footer. There are several display formats using the date
and time of the server. The format can be entered in the text field next to it. To access existing formats click on and an explanatory window will appear.
Image : When the image type field is selected, a field for filling in the image name on the server appears. To locate the existing images and select one, click on the “ Choose Image ”
icon and to make new images available on the server click on “Upload ” .
Value : When “ Value ” type is selected, the content that is filled in the text field next to option, appears in the Header or Footer. You can enter texts and “ Global variables ”. Ex:
FOOTER
8
This screen may vary depending on the Footer format you choose within the Display folder.
Display Footer: This flag determines whether the Footer will be displayed in the application.
Variables: Variable fields can be filled with any of the types displayed in the Combobox, depending on the type you need to associate a content with the required one. Below
you describe the existing types:
Field: When the “ Field” option is chosen, it will open a Combobox next to the fields that are part of the “Select”. By choosing one of these fields, you are associating the value of the field
to display in the Header or Footer.
Date : When “ Date” type is selected, the system date in mm/dd/yyyy format will be displayed in the Application Header or Footer. There are several display formats using the date
and time of the server. The format can be entered in the text field next to it. To access existing formats click on and an explanatory window will appear.
Image : When the image type field is selected, a field for filling in the image name on the server appears. To locate the existing images and select one, click on the “ Choose Image ”
icon and to make new images available on the server click on “Upload ” .
Value : When “ Value ” type is selected, the content that is filled in the text field next to option, appears in the Header or Footer. You can enter texts and “ Global variables ”. Ex:
Search
Settings
Display combobox quantity : Allow to display the quantity of existence records in the table net to the value in search combo.
Settings of search fields
To define the fields that will be used in the Summary search, use drag-and-drop to position the fields within Search Fields.
The order of the fields, within Search Fields, will be the display order in the generated application.
This search works only in Grid summary.
Editing Fields
The same field can be added more than once to the Search, these fields will be visible in the generated application since it uses distinct settings, if they are using the same
configuration only one of the fields will be displayed.
The display settings of the fields are performed individually, and can be accessed by adding the field in the search and clicking edit.
you will separate the explanation of the display settings from the fields according to the types.
Types: Text/Special
Configuration interface for text and special fields.
Choose Component
You must define how the field will be used in the Search. Each field type, text, number, and date have different configuration options.
Search field label : Defines the label of the field that will be displayed in the Search.
Choose component type : It defines the format of use of the fields in the Search, for text fields you have the Select Box and the Multiselect box.
Choose values
9
The default value field allow us to define a default value to the summary search in the initial application charge.
Lookup
In this tab, you can configure the display lookup in the Search field. For more information on creating a view lookup, access Application > Grid > Fields > Text.
Types: Date/Time
Configuration interface for date and date time fields.
Choose Component
Choose component type : Defines the format of use of the fields in the Search, for fields date and datetime, you will have the following options: Date Range, Actual Period, Relative Period and
Seasonal Period.
C H O O S E V A L U E S - D AT E R A N G E
For datetime fields, you must enable the option Include Time so that the hours can be included in the search
CHOOSE VALUES - ACTUAL PERIOD
You must define the period that will be used in the search. When running the application, you will have a select with the dates displayed according to the selected period.
C H O O S E V A L U E S - R E L AT I V E P E R I O D
You must define which periods are available for use in the search.
10
CHOOSING VALUES - SEASONAL PERIOD
The available values are separated by tabs:
Quarter: Defines the quarters used in the search.
Month: Defines the usage of the months of the year.
Week : Defines the usage of the weeks of the year.
Week Day : Defines the use of the days of the week.
Day: Defines the usage of the days of the month.
Only Time: Defines the use of the day time (Available only in the datetime field)
Types: Number
Configuration interface for numeric fields.
Choose Component
Choose function to apply : Defines the function that will be used in the search for setting the value. For example, when choosing sum, the range is the range between the lowest and the result
of the sum greater.
Actual Values : This option sets the display of the actual value of the field, saved in the database, without the use of any of the aggregate functions. When using this option, two types of
searches, select box and Multiselect box usage are added, as well as enabling lookup settings for numeric fields.
Choose component type : Defines the format used for the fields in the search, for numeric fields, you have the Range and selecting Actual Values will be displayed Select Box and Multiselect
box.
Lookup
For numeric fields, this option is available only when you use the Actual Values option and the way the field is used in the search is Select box or Multiselect box .
In this tab, you can create a display lookup in the search field. For more information about creating view lookup, go to Application > Grid > Fields > Integer.
1
Search options
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › SEARCH OPTIONS
Settings
In the area below you can define all the options that’ll be part of the of the Search Form.
Search configuration Interface.
Attributes
Search Criteria : Allows to select the SQL command AND or OR to define the criteria of the search used;
Display Condition : Displays the condition of the search for the user to choose. In this case “AND” or “OR” will display in the search form, so that the user can choose the desired option.
Use auto-complete in the fields : The field turns into an autocomplete automatically according to the existing values in the database, If the user chooses Yes, the autocomplete will enable
automatically in all the fields that contain a relationship. If the user chooses No no autocompletes will be displayed. In the case the option selected is Defined in the field it’ll respect the
configuration individually for each field.
Search Criteria
In this interface, you can configure the conditions for each field of the Search form when filtering the SQL, on the left combo is displayed the field. The combo on the right are
listed the options for filtering the selected field, to select the options just click on them (Equal to, Beginning with, Contains and etc.) and the button On/Off. The arrows on the
right allows to alter the order of the fields.
For the Date type fields, you can define special conditions for the search, accessing the field configurations and editing the Special Conditions Settings.
Below the list are the buttons to enable the selected options:
On/Off : Enables or disables the field or the selected option.
All : Marks all fields or options.
None : Un marks all the fields or options.
Advanced Search
Settings
Through the table below we set all the options that will be part of the application Grid Search.
2
Horizontal Alignment : Allows you to define the positioning by aligning horizontally the Search Form.
Margins : Allows to position the margins of the Search Form.
Keep Values : When enabled, the values from the search is maintained when the user returns to the search form.
Keep Columns and Order Selection : allows you to determine whether, at each filter, the values selected for the query and sort fields must be preserved, that is, at each filter, these values
return to the original condition.
Use Enter to : Allows you to define the action that the Enter Key will have on the Search screen. Tabulate allows you to navigate between fields and Submit performs the search(activates the
Search button).
Display Tags : Allows to display the Searches used for the Grid in the form of tags.
Display after filtering : When enabling, tags will be displayed after performing an advanced search, if disabled, tags will always be displayed regardless of performing an advanced search.
Unify results : Sets the number of characters to group the result of the tags. This option should be used when the field type is multiple-select.
Treeview in the Tags : Sets the use of Treeview for tags.
Initial status of the Treeview : This option works only if the Treeview is being used and it sets the initial state of the Treeview.
Start open : Displaying the tags
Start close : Showing full description as text .
Select fields
Required
Defines which fields of application will be required for the search.
Required fields interface.
The application generated will be displayed a bullet (*) next to the field and an error message is generated if not assigned no value.
Marker position : Marker’s position relative to the field.
Display message : Displays whether or not the validation error message.

3
Toobar
Desktop
The Search toolbar is divided in two parts: Top and Bottom, in a way that is possible to define the buttons that will be displayed in both bars. The selection of buttons in the top
and bottom toolbar works independently, allowing the buttons to be displayed in both bars at the same time.
Toolbar Interface.
N A V I G AT I O N : G R O U P S T H E O P T I O N S R E L AT I V E T O T H E N A V I G AT I O N B U T T O N S T H AT C A N B E D I S P L AY E D I N T H E A P P L I C AT I O N .
Search : Execute the search.
Clean: Clean the all the search fields.
Edit: Enable the Save Tag option.
Exit: Exit the application.
O T H E R S : G R O U P S A D I V E R S I T Y O F O P T I O N S R E L AT I V E T O T H E A P P L I C AT I O N .
Languages: Displays a combobox with the names available, defined in the project properties.
Themes: Displays a combobox with the themes available, defined in the project properties.
HelpCase: Displays a button to redirect to the help page.
S E P A R AT O R
—————–: Dispays a line separating the buttons, when used the Group Buttons.
USE IN-LINE BUTTONS: ALLOWS THE ALIGNMENT OF THE FILTER BUTTONS NEXT TO THE FIELDS.
__ Inline buttons__: Allows you to select which buttons will be displayed next to the field, and you can sort them according to your wishes. This option is available by enabling Use Online
Buttons in the button settings.
BUTTON SETTINGS
Button Settings Interface.
Hotkey: Allows you to set keyboard hotkeys to a button.
Use Inline Buttons : Allows alignment of the filter buttons next to the fields.
Position of the in-line buttons : Sets the positioning of the buttons to the right or left of the fields.
Column Quantity: Sets the number of display columns of the buttons, allowing you to configure whether they will be displayed side-by-side or distributed in columns.
OPTIONS
Options Interface.
Button Position(Top/Bottom) Positioning the buttons of the toolbar Top/Bottom.
Save Search
4
This feature allows to organize search profiles, it creates an option Save Filter in a Search application, this way it is possible to save the search done previously. You can add some
rules. With these details you can save a search done by the user login.
Save Filter Interface.
Events
In events, blocks can be used with global variables, local, JavaScript code, CSS codes and Scriptcase macros.
ONSCRIPTINIT
ONREFRESH
This event runs when the refresh option of the application is enabled.
ONSAVE
This event runs when the application saves the record.
O N V A L I D AT E
This event runs when validating the information of the fields, when submitting the form.
Layout
BLOCKS
current one.
On the left side of each block there are two icons, first has the function to edit all the information relative to the block and the second
is to delete the block.

5
Attributes
Block
Title
Label

Fields
Organization
Create New Block
click on Create.
Attributes

6
Edit Blocks
To edit a block just click on the icon , that is on the left side of the block. Next, you’ll see the following interface to define the
parameters of the blocks. At the end click on save.
Attributes
7
Configuration
HEADER & FOOTER
Header
8
Footer
Dynamic Search
This feature allows the user to search records the application without leaving the current screen, the developer needs to indicate which fields will be available.
Settings
Dynamic Search configuration Interface
Use the ENTER key to : Use the Enter key to tabulate from one field to the other, or to submit the search.
Select Fields
Dynamic Search Field Selection.
QuickSearch
Quick Search is an option that allows to search data in various fields of the application, by using the text box in the toolbar.
9
Application running QuickSearch.
QuickSearch Settings
In the quicksearch settings are the following options:
QuickSearch Configuration Interface.
Button within the search - An option to inform if the search button will be in the text area of the box. Quicksearch show combo box - Displays a combo box if there is only one
option in the quicksearch. Quicksearch Watermark - Displays a Placeholder in the quicksearch. Quicksearch width - Defines the width of the Quicksearch field. Display the Quick
search old format - Displays in the old format with the selection of the fields in the Quick search. Search anywhere - If enabled, QuickSearch will search each part of the String for
the data informed in the field.
Select Fields
You need to define the fields that are part of the search in the Quicksearch Settings .
QuickSearch selecting fields Interface.
And you can select various criteria of the search.

10
QuickSearch search criteria configuration Interface.
You need to add the QuickSearch button in the toolbar in order to use it.
Fields
This is a list of fields available for use in the filter. Click on the desired field to access the configuration instructions.
Text Field Field Select
Integer Field Field Duplo Select
Decimal Field Field Checkbox
Currency Field Field Radio
Date Field Field Texto Auto-Complete
Field Hora Field Número Auto-Complete
Field Data e Hora

1
Application
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › APPLICATION
Settings
On this configuration, you can set the common attributes of the applications created by ScriptCase.
Application Configuration Interface
Application Code : Code of the application that’s determined at the moment the creation of the application, this code can be renamed in the List of Applications.
Description : This field is reserved for a brief description of the objectives of the application.
Documents Path : The absolute path to the documents directory of the application.
Image Directory : Base directory of where the application images are stored.
Application images : Allows to import images into the application and using them in the application routines, disregarding the macro sc_image.
Language : Language of the generated application. All the hints and messages are displayed in the selected language.
Share Location Variable : Shares the Location settings with other applications based on the value of the session variable.
Charset : Defines the specific charset used in the application.
Share Theme Variable : Shares the Theme settings with other applications based on the value of the session variable.
Folder : Folder where the application’s stored in the work group.
Edit by Project : Allows for the other users of the group to edit the application.
Timeout : Time of the runtime timeout in seconds. If the value is Zero, it assumes the default timeout of the PHP.
HelpCase Link : Associate the files of the HelpCase with the application.
Error Settings
Error Settings Interface.
Attributes
Script Error : Allows to display the information of the Script Line where the error occurred.
SQL Error : Allows to display the SQL where the error occurred.
Debug Mode : Runs the application in Debug mode, displaying the SQL commands the moment that they are executed.
Ajax Error Output : Open a window of debug with the output of the Ajax.
2
Navigation
Defines the attributes of the navigation of one application to another.
Navigation Interface.
Attributes
Exit URL : URL on which the user will be redirected when exiting the application.
Close on Exit : When exiting the application, close the browser window.
Redirect URL : URL to redirect in case there isn’t any global variables available.
Redirect Variable : Name of the variable that’ll be stored the URL of a real application.
Global Variables
This screen shows the global variables in the application.
The global variable is an external parameter required for running the application. The application can include global variables in the WHERE clause, field definitions and names,
event programming, and so on.
Global variables are defined in brackets ([variable]). These variables must be passed to the application being implemented through one of the methods: Session, Post, and Get
Global variables Interface.
Example:
Select CustomerID, CustomerName from Customers WHERE CustomerID = '[v_customerid]'
We do not recommend using session variables (global variables) with the same name as the table fields.
In this case, the variable v_customerid appears in the global variables configuration.
Global variables configuration Interface.
S H O W S A L L G L O B A L V A R I A B L E S U S E D I N T H E A P P L I C AT I O N
Attribute : name of the variable in the application.
Value : Defines the behavior of the variables, this content is divided in three blocks, they are:
Scope : Defines how the variable is received by the application. If a variable has been defined that it’s received by a POST method and has been approved by the GET method, the
content is not accepted. Methods of passing variable values:
Session : In this option, the variable must be created as a PHP session variable by another application.
GET : Defines that the variable must be passed by the URL, that is, visible by the browser.
POST : Defines that the variable must be passed through the POST method of a HTML form.
Settings : Does not validate (check) the variable at runtime.
Type (In / Out) : Defines whether the variable is input or output.

3
Description : Indicates where the variable is being used.
1
1. Home
2. Applications
General Overview
Allows to create link between applications that are in the same project, the link option incorporates various functionalities like above.
New Link
To create a new link you just need to access the option Link between Applications located in the menu at the left side.
When clicking in New Link the screen below will be display:
When clicking in New Link the screen to choose the type of link that will be created will be displayed.
Edit Link:
Allows to edit registers of the grid using a form.
Capture Link:
Allows to create a link specifically to the filter’s fields, capturing data from other grid.
Field Link:
Allows to create a link represented through a link, from a grid’s column to any application from the project.
Button Link:
Allows to create a link through grids buttons to any application from the project.
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Grid
4. Edit Link
Edit Link
Creating a Application Link
This type of link allows the developer to create a link from a grid to a form with the objective of editing the register of a grid’s row.
In the link options, we will choose theApplication Link. When we choose this option, edit a register from a Grid will be possible.
Applications list
After we select this option, will be displayed the applications list to what you want to create the link.
This screen can be viewed from the following ways:
All:
In which is possible to see all the project’s applications.Example:
By folder:
In which is possible to see the applications according to the folders in which each of them are.
By type:
In which is possible to see the applications grouped by its respective types.
Definition of Parameters
In this setting we are going to define the type of parameter that will be passed to the next application.
We have two options at Type of Parameters, they are:
Fixed value:
This option allows the user to define a fixed value that will be used to the call of the next application.
No value:
This option allows to create the link without the need to send any parameter to the next application.
It is also possible to see a refresh button at its right side.
This button should be used when a new parameter is added to the target application, so the new parameter can be loaded in the current application to make the link.
Link properties
In this screen we will set the application display mode that will be called in the link.
There are five display options, they are:
Open in the same window:
When we use this option the target application will be displayed in the same window of the application, and the target application will have a back button so we can return to the
previous application.
Open in another window:
When we use this option the target application will be displayed in other browser window, and the target application will have a exit button so we can close this window.
Open in an iframe:
When we use this option the target application will be displayed in the same window of our application, however it will be displayed in a iframe in one of the four options available in
the iframe’s settings.
Open in a parent:
When we use this option the target application will be displayed in the same window of our application, and the target application will have a back button so we can return to the
Modal:
When we use this option the target application will be displayed in the same window of our application, however it will be displayed in a small window above the current application.
Open in the same window.

2
When we select this option, we can set these following options:
Display the button new in the grid:
When we select the option Yes, the button New is created in the grid to insert new registers.
Also, when we select the option Yes, it is displayed two new options Label to the New button and Hint to the New button:
Label to the New button:
In this option we will inform a name for the button that will be displayed in the Grid.
Hint to the New button:
In this option we will inform a message that will be displayed when the mouse cursor is over theNew button.
Shortcut key to the New button:
Indicates the shortcut key to the button add new register.
Exit URL for the target application:
Exit URL to the called form. If any value is defined, the return address (back button) will be the exit URL of the called form.
Open in another window

When we use this option the target application will be displayed in another browser window.
When we select this option, we can set the following options:
Display the button New in the grid:
Indicates the shortcut key to the button add New Register.
Close the form after an update:
Choosing the option Yes, the window will be closed after doing the update of a register.
Close the form after an insert:
Choosing the option Yes, the window will be closed after doing the insert of a register.
Open the application in a tab inside the menu:
Choosing the option Yes, the application will be open in amenu tab, when executed from a menu application, instead of opened in another browser window.
Also when the option Yes is selected, it is displayed two new options in Display the button New in the grid:
Open in an iframe.
Iframe’s properties
In this settings, we can define some iframe’s details that will display the target application.
3
Display the target application’s header:
When the option Yes is selected, the header of the target application is also displayed in the iframe.
Iframe’s position in relation to the main application:
In this option, we will define in which position in relation to the main application the iframe will be displayed, there are four options:
Below: The iframe will be displayed below the main application.

Above: The iframe will be displayed above the main application.
Right: The iframe will be displayed on the right of the main application.
Left: The iframe will be displayed on the left the main application.
Action after an insert:
In this option, we will define what will happen after a register insert, there are two options:
Reload the grid: The current page will be refreshed after the insert.
Move to the end of the grid: After the insert will be displayed the last page of the grid will the last register inserted.
Iframe’s height:
Allows to set the iframe’s height.
Iframe’s width:
Allows to set the iframe’s width.
Modal
When we use this option the target application will be displayed in the same window of the application, however she will be displayed in a small window above the current
application.
Height:
Allows to set the Modal’s height.
Width:
Allows to set the Modal’s width.
Form Properties
In those settings, we can define which buttons will be available in the target form application. Initially we have five options, that are:
Enable Insert button:
In this option we can define if the New button will be available in the target application.
Enable Update button:
In this option we can define if the Save button will be available in the target application.
Enable Delete button:

4
In this option we can define if the Delete button will be available in the target application.
Enable Navigation buttons:
In this option we can define if the buttons first, previous, next and last will be available in the target application.
Enable register editing button in the grid:
In this option we can define if the edit register button, which is thepencil in the grid, will be available.
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Grid
4. Field Link
Field Link
Creating a field link
Allows to create a link, represented through a link, from a grid’s column to any project’s existing application. All the links are displayed in a dropdown if there are more than one link
to the same field.
In the types of link option, we will choose the Field link.
Applications list
All:
By folder:
By type:
Fixed value:
No value:
Link properties
Modal:
Open in the same window

2
Hint for the link:
In this option we will inform a message that will be displayed when the mouse cursor is over the button with the link.

Hint for the link:
Open in an iframe
Hint for the link:

Iframe’s height:
Iframe’s width:
Modal
application.
Height:
Width:

3
Hint for the link:
Form Properties
Enabling the option Enable navigation buttons, one more option will be displayed:
Keep the WHERE clause in the target application:
Enabling this option, the WHERE clause of the grid application will be kept to the target application.
Grid’s Properties
In those settings we can define how our target grid will be displayed. We inicially have six options, that are:
Initial module:
We can define how our application will be executed in those two options:
Grid: The application will be executed as a grid.

Search: The application will be executed as a search.
Quantity of rows:
In this option we can define the quantity of rows that will be displayed in the target application.
Quantity of Columns:
In this option we can define the quantity of columns that will be displayed in the target application.
Pagination:
In this option we can define if the target application’s pagination will be total or partial, in case partial is the selected option the quantity of rows will be the informed previously.
Enable header:
In this option we can define if the target application’s header will be displayed.
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Grid
4. Capture Link
Capture Link
Creating a Capture Link
The capture link is used to return a value from a Grid to a Form field.
In the types of links options, we will choose the Capture Link. After selection this option, we should also choose which field we want to return the value of.
Applications list
All:
By folder:
By type:
Fixed value:
No value:
Application with no parameters
However, when the target application does not have any defined parameters, the following screen is displayed:
Clicking in the button, you will be taken to the target application to create a parameter, so you can use the update button in theparameters definitions to refresh them.
Link properties
In this type of link there is only one display option:
Modal:
Modal
application.
Modal:
In this option we are going to define if the target application will be opened in a Modal.
Yes: This option will make the target application be opened in a modal. No: This option will make the target application be opened in a new window.
2
If Yes is selected in the previous option, the Modal’s Height and Width will be available.
Height:
Width:
If No is selected in the previous option, only those options will be available.
Allows to modify manually in the update:
Allows to modify manually in the insert:
Indicates which shortcut key to the button add new register.
Allows to modify automatically in the update:
Allows to modify automatically in the insert:
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Grid
4. Button Link
Button Link
Creating a Button Link
Allows the developer to create a link where the call to the other application will be done through a button.
In the type of links options, we will choose theButton Link. Choosing this option it will be possible to create a link to any other application.
List of applications
After selecting this option, The list of applications to what you want to create a link will be displayed.
This screen can be viewed in the following ways:
All:
By folder:
By type:
![Definicao de parametros][ligacao_parametros]
Fixed value:
No value:
Link properties
Modal:

Hint for the link:

2

Hint for the link:
Choosing the option Yes, there are also some other settings to be displayed:
Title to the tab:
This option allows the developer to set a title to the tab that will be opened when used in a Menu application.
Hint to the tab:
This option allows the developer to set a message to be displayed when the mouse cursor is over the tab Menu.
Active tab icon:
This option allows the developer to set an icon to be displayed in the tab when used in a menu application.
Modal
application.
Height:
Width:
Hint for the link:
Form Properties

3
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Grid
4. Editando Ligações
Editando Ligações
Editando Ligações
In the Link Folder of the Application Menu (Image Below) are displayed the links existing in the application and also the item New Link. When clicking on the existing link it is
displayed the screen below that allows to manage the links.
Editing Links.
Actions
Properties Change the link’s behavior, position, and how the link opens.
Change the application that’s being called in the link their
Link
parameters.
Delete Remove the existing link.
1
Programming
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › PROGRAMMING
In this version of ScriptCase is incorporated with the concept of programming with the use of attributes, methods, resources and libraries. In the previous versions it was already
possible to create business rules in applications using this concept, but the big difference now is that this can be done in a more organized and dynamic way, facilitating both the
development as the understanding of the rule by another developer.
Attributes
The attributes are variables that has the global scope declared in the application. An attribute that can be referenced in all the methods and the application’s events.
Attributes configuration Interface.
Attributes
Attribute Name : This field allows to inform the attribute’s name, after typing the name just click on include. In case you want to update click on the attribute’s name (located on the
buttons’ right side), do the necessary modifications and click on update. In case it is necessary to delete an attribute, it is necessary to do same process as the update, but when
selecting the attribute, it is necessary to click on the delete button. The clear button, as the name suggests, it clears the list of all the attributes listed on the right.
Internal Libraries
To use the internal libraries just select the correspondent ( Project Libraries for example). This process allows the methods existing in the library, to be visible in all the
application’s Events and Methods. See how to manage the libraries by clicking here.
Internal Libraries managment Interface
PHP Methods
Methods are function or procedures declared by the developer, that helps when appling the routines. Using methods in the applications allows to reuse your code throughout
the application, optimizing the development experience.
Creating a new method
PHP method creation Interface
Define a name for the method and click on Create. Like the image below.
Include Method.
Methods can receive parameters.

2
Add the amount of variables: PHP method parameter definition
Defining the variables: Defining the variables
Name : Type in the variable’s name.
Type : Selecting the type of variables: For Value or For Refference.
Value Standard : The parameter’s value used to initialize when calling the method.
Refferences allows to create a second name for a variable that you can use to read and modify the variable’s original information.
Editing a parameter:
: Checking all the parameters in the parameter list.
: Unchecking all the parameters in the parameter list.
: Edit the selected parameter of the list.
: Deletes the selected variable of the list.

1
Email Export
HOME › APPLICATIONS › EMAIL
EXPORT
Allows you to send the generated export file of the applications by email. The sending of this email may be using SMTP or through integrations with Mandrill and SES.
For more information about Mandrill click here
For more information about Amazon SES click here
Sending Options
We must configure how to send the email or select an API already configured in Tools> API. Click Here and see how to configure.
SMTP
SMTP is the standard protocol for sending e-mails over the Internet, each provider has its own SMTP.
For more information about SMTP settings click here
API: Allows you to select an API that is already configured in Tools> API or set a new one here by selecting - custom -. In this case you will see some options according to the selected
Gateway.
SMTP Server : SMTP server address for the provider being used.
Port SMTP : Port used by the mail server. Use port 465 for security with SSL, port 587 for security with TLS, or port 25 as port without security. By omitting the value the Scriptcase will default
to: 25
User SMTP : SMTP server user.
Enter SMTP : SMTP server user password.
Protocol SMTP : Defines the security protocol that will be used. If the value is omitted, the Scriptcase defaults to the default value.
E-mail : Sets the origin email, which will send the emails.
Name: Name that will be displayed in the sent email.
Mandrill
Mandrill is a transactional email API for MailChimp users, ideal for sending data-driven emails.
Gateway.
API KEY: Enter the key you obtained when setting up your API.
Amazon SES
Amazon Simple Email Service (Amazon SES) is an email sending service designed to assist in sending marketing emails, notifications, and transactional messages.
Gateway.
API Secret: Enter the secret access key of your account.
Region: Amazon SES has endpoints in several regions, in order to reduce network latency, inform the region of the endpoint closest to your application. See the regions .
Export Settings
In these settings, we define the settings of the email sending interface when exporting, and we can define a default email subject and body.
2
To : Enter the default destination email.
Use Copy (CC) : Defines whether or not to display the ‘copy’ field within the export options.
No : There will be no possibility to send email with copies.
Yes: The field will be displayed within the export options and we can define a default email for copying. The end user can view this email.
Hidden: The field will not be displayed within export options and we can set a default email for copying.
Copy (CC) : Enter the default e-mail for the copy field. This option can also be empty or you can use a global variable containing an email list.
Using Hidden Copy (BCC) : Sets whether or not to display the ‘hidden copy’ field within the export options.
Copy (BCC): Enter the default e-mail for the hidden copy field. This option can also be empty or you can use a global variable containing an email list.
Subject: Default e-mail subject text. You can change the lang variable or add fixed text. The text can be changed in the subject field within the export options
Color: Default body text for the email. You can change the lang variable or add fixed text. The text can be changed in the body field within the export options.
1
Creating a New Application
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CREATING A NEW APPLICATION
New Application
The creation process of one application is simple enough and intuitive.
You just need to select which application you want to generate in the applications available in Scriptcase, That it will be generated automatically.
Application Data
When the application is selected, the following screen will be displayed below.
In this table you need to select the connection that will be used in the application. The tables will be loaded and displayed in the field Table when the connection is selected.
It is possible to select more than one table in the application creation.
After selecting the table and fields that should be part of the application, the name of the application will be formed by the type of application + name of the table. Ex:
grid_orders However it is possible to change the application’s name to any other desired name.
Connection - It defines the used connection to create the application. All the project’s application will be displayed.
Tables - It defines the used tables in the application. (Form and Calendar can only use one table).
Fields - It defines the fields that will be part of the applications.
SQL Select Statement - Display the select statement created after selecting the tables and fields. This field allows also to insert a previously created SQL, if the used tables
are available in the database selected in the connection.
Name - Application’s name that is being created, It can not contain special characters.
Localization - Application’s Language. The project’s default language will be automatically selected.
Relationship
When select two or more tables, the tab “Relationship” will be displayed. In this tab we can see the relationship created between the tables, where we can edit the related fields.
2
When we click in a link, in the screen above, it will displayed the related field’s edition form, as you can see in the image below.
Edit Fields
In this tab will be displayed the fields that are going to be created in the application, also its labels and datatypes. We can make define some settings here like changing its labels
and datatypes.
Fields - Name of fields stored in the database.
Label - Name of fields displayed in the generated application.
Datatype - Field’s Datatype.
Grid - It defines the available fields in the grid.
Search - It defines the available fields in the search.
Theme
In this screen you select the theme that the application will use. The default project’s theme, that can be checked and changed in Project > Properties, will be selected
automatically.
Theme - List of available themes in the project.
After all the settings are done, click in the button Create. In the next screen the settings of the created application will be displayed.
1
Charts
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CHART › CHARTS
This application is designed for creating dynamic charts based on SQL or Procedures.
Inside the Scriptcase Charts can be created also within the Grid application, however the application Chart has more settings options to the end user within the application
generated. The idea is to apply the concept of Business Intelligence so the final system users can apply their own settings within the generated charts.
The settings within the development area uses Drag and Drop for the charts creation. You can apply dimensions and metrics dynamically using different date periods and totals.
Dimensions
Dimensions are used to group the data into categories. You can choose more than one field as a dimension, each new field as a subcategory of the previous field.
To select a field, click on its name in the “Chart Fields” area and drag it to the “Dimensions” column.
Once selected the fields, you can sort them using the drag and drop to arrange the dimensions’ final display. You can choose different periods to date fields and use the same
date field more than once, with different periods. All the dimensions listed in “Dimensions” can be used by the system final user within the Chart application. You can also define
whether dimensions will be displayed or not when you start the application by selecting the checkbox.
Chart
dimensions. Field settings
Metrics
The metric is used to quantitatively view the data grouped by dimensions. Choose the fields for the chart’s metrics.
To select a field, click on its name in the “Chart Fields” area and drag it to the “Metrics” column. Once selected the fields, you can sort them using the drag and drop to arrange the
metrics’ final display, you can also chose the total function according to the field data type.
All the dimensions listed in “Metrics” can be used by the system final user within the Chart application. You can also define whether metrics will be displayed or not when you
start the application by selecting the checkbox.
The checked field value is used to set the default field just when you are not using a combination or stacked chart types, that use more than one field. If you choose more then
one field Scriptcase automatically sets a value multiple chart type (Combination). You can change the initial chart inside the option “Charts’ type” within the “Settings”. When you
check a single value (bar, line, Spline, step, Area, pie, pyramid, funnel, Radar and Gauge) you have to click and choose only one field to appear as initial value during the first
generation.
2
Chart
Metrics.
Sorting
You can select which chart value will be ordered to start the application, and if the sort will be “ascending” or “descending”.
Chart sorting.
Initial sorting : Using this option you can set the default sorting (ascending or descending). The system final user will also be able to customize it within the generated application.
Dimension : Application starts with dimension fields sorting (ascending or descending according to the “Initial sorting”).
Metric : Application starts with metric fields sorting (ascending or descending according to the “Initial sorting”).
Search
In the “Search” option you can choose the fields that will be used as static search on the chart, the application data will be initially filtered according to the settings you apply. The
search values are chosen for each selected field during development, the final user will not be able to change that.
You are also able to apply other search options such as the Dynamic Search using the option “Search > Dynamic Search” (located on the left menu) and the “refined” search using
the option “Chart > Search”. These two types are dynamic, it means that the end user will be able to manipulate them within the generated application.
3
Static search.
Chart options
In the tab “Chart” the developer sets other default options for the chart that will be generated such as chart type, color, theme and others. Find more details below.
Chart options.
Atributes
Graph Type: Allows you to set the type of chart to be displayed by “Default” if the Configurable Chart option is active, or the type of chart to be displayed if the option is disabled.
Size Size: Font size of the values, if you leave the field blank, size 12 will be assumed.
Short value : Value displayed in the chart should be abbreviated.
View Values : Starts already displaying the values of the generated graph.
Exception for Display: Chart types that will not display chart values, even when marked to display. In these types we do not recommend that the values are displayed, for aesthetic
reasons, in the meanwhile, it is up to the developer.
Graph Width : Default Width in pixels of generated graphs.

4
__ Graph Height__: Default height in pixels of the generated graphs.
Ordenation of values : Sorts the values of the graphs.
Multi-series or Drill down : Defines whether the dimensions of the graph will be generated by grouping by multi-series or by drill down navigation.
Total General : If you want to group all the values in one, check the Total General option. This option is typically used in Gauge type graphics.
__ Trendline__: Defines a line or area for the trend line of the chart.
Trend line type : Trend line type.
__ Initial line value__: Defines the initial value of the trend line.
Value line end : Sets the end value of the trend line.
__Barras - Width (between 20 and 70) __: Width of the chart bar.
Barras - Value Orientation : Orientation of the value displayed in the graph (Horizontal or Vertical.
Barras - Positioning of the value : Positioning of the value in the graph (Above or Inside).
Barras - Stacking : Stacks the bars in a single (By series).
Pizza - Value format : Format of the data in pie charts.
Data Range : Use data range with different colors.
Pirâmide - Values format : Format that will display the value in the chart.
1
Settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CHART › SETTINGS
Chart settings
In the chart Setup screen the user can change some application viewing options, which charts will be displayed, the labels, margins and alignments. Below detailing each of the
available attributes
Chart settings interface
Attributes
Responsive Desktop : By checking this option the Chart will automatically adapt itself to the user’s screen according to the size of the browser.
Chart title : This option allows you to set a title for the chart.
Available chart types : List of available chart types for user’s choice within the final application via the button “Chart Types”. The graphics checked will be available, if the developer does
not want to display a chart type must do not check them in this interface.
Label for quantity : Label the y-axis for generic values of the record count.
Label for summarization : Label the y-axis for generic values of the summary functions - sum, average, weighted average, maximum and minimum.
Horizontal Alignment : This option allows you to set the horizontal alignment of the application on page-centered, left or right
1
Toolbar
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CHART › TOOLBAR
Toolbar
DESKTOP
MOBILE
EXPORT:
2
EXPORT BY EMAIL:
OTHERS:
S E P A R AT O R :
Toolbar Mobile
3
Mobile toolbar.
Bottons Group

4
Application Hotkeys

1
Export
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CHART › EXPORT
PDF Settings
P D F F O R M AT
PRINT TYPE
Enable one option in the exportation settings in execution time that allow the user to decide the depth of the group by that will be generated from the exportation.
Allows the end user to define until break level will skip page in the generated PDF.
CONFIGURABLE PDF
G E N E R AT E B O O K M A R K S
Generate bookmarks automatically, bookmarks will be generated relative to the Groupby.
P A G E N U M B E R I N G F O R M AT
Numbering format of the page will be simple (1,2,3,4,5, …), Full (1 / n, 2 / n, 3 / n, …) or not use numbering.
PAGE NUMBERING HEIGHT
Allows you to align the numbering vertically, at the top or bottom of the page.
H O R I Z O N TA L P O S I T I O N O F P A G E N U M B E R I N G
Allows horizontal alignment of page numbering (Left, Center, Right).
PRINT BACKGROUND
JS RUNTIME
T I M E O U T F O R C H A R T ’ S I M A G E C R E AT I O N
Allows you to define whether the Charts of the application will be displayed in the PDF.
WORD Settings
WORD CONFIGURABLE
time.
2
Example:
run time.
Example:
PASSWORD
Runtime Example:
SELECT COLUMNS
OPEN WORD DIRECTLY
WORD Settings
PRINT TYPE
Allows you to set the file’s print mode (Both, Black and White, Colored).
CSV Settings
CONFIGURABLE CSV
time.
3
Example:
run time.
Example:
PASSWORD
Runtime Example:
SELECT COLUMNS
OPEN CSV DIRECTLY
CSV Settings
TEXT DELIMITER
4
ADD LABEL
XLS Settings
XLS CONFIGURABLE
time.
Example:
run time.
Example:
PASSWORD
Runtime Example:
SELECT COLUMNS
OPEN XLS DIRECTLY
XLS Settings
5
F O R M AT
XML Settings
CONFIGURABLE XML
time.
Example:
run time.
Example:
PASSWORD
Runtime Example:
SELECT COLUMNS
OPEN XML DIRECTLY

6
XML Settings
X M L F O R M AT
Print Settings
time.
Example:
run time.
Example:
PASSWORD
Runtime Example:
SELECT COLUMNS
7
PRINT MODE
Allows to choose what content will be printed. ( Current Page or Full Report ).
PRINT BACKGROUND
Allows to display the background in a HTML form.
RTF Settings
SELECT COLUMNS
OPEN RTF DIRECTLY
1
SQL
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CHART › SQL
SQL Settings
Grid SQL
configuration
1
Security
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CHART › SECURITY
Use Security
Url output of the
security
Request password
just once
URL
1
Log
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CHART › LOG
1
1. Home
2. Applications
General Overview
Example:
Virtual field

Quantity:
Example:
Field’s inclusion
Label
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Text
Text
General Settings
This type of field allows the developer to create quickly inputs to insert and update data, where the final user can inform its data to be allocated in its database.
Type of Data
Label
Customer Name.
SQL Type
Lookup Settings {id-02}

Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
Man.
Man.
2
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2

Man.

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

the user.
Use lookup in :
1
1. Home
2. Applications
Multiple Lines Text

General Settings
Multiple Lines Text field configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Multiple Lines Text , you can inform a Text value to the field in multiple lines.
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
Man.
Man.
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
2
Single
Label S
Value 2 1
Start Size
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2

Man.

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

the user.
Use lookup in :
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Integer
Integer
General Settings
Data type:
Label:
Field Mask Input:
X
the mask.

Phone Number +99 99 9999 - 9999 123456789012 +12 34 5678 - 9012
Repeat value:
Example:
Tipo SQL:
Values Format
format.
Digit grouping:
It allows you to define if the field displays the digit grouping separator.
Maximum Size:
It allows you to define the maximum size that will be used in the field of the application.
Minimum Value:
It allows you to define the minimum value that will be used in the field of the application.
Maximum Value:
It allows you to define the maximum value that will be used in the field of the application.
Groupping:
2
Negative sign:
Accept:
It allows to define if the field accept only negative values, positive-only or both.
Display Calculator:
This option when enabled will display a calculator to assist the end user to perform calculations.
Use Spin:
This option applies a Spin component to the number field. So the end user can increase or encrease the numbers using it. You will also be able to set a minor or major range for the
spin.
Smaller increment for the Spin::
Sets the minimum range of the Spin component.
Greater increment for the Spin:
Sets the maximum range of the Spin.
Lookup Settings
Example:
Lookup Methods
Select Command:
Multiple Options:
Delimiter:
Use the lookup in:
Default Value:
Separated By:

3
Lookup Types

Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married M 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study ST 3 2
Sportes SP 3 2
Reading LE 3 2

order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Leisure
8 Reading
16 Music
follows:

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Leisure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Leisure
8 Reading
16 Music
4
Label:
Include Button:
Alter Button:
Delete Button:
Clean Button:
It cleans the fiels
Save Button:
Use the lookup in:
Default Value:
Separated By:
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Decimal
Decimal
General Settings
Decimal field configuration Interface.
Values Format
format.
Digit grouping:
Maximum Size:
Minimum Value:
Maximum Value:
Groupping:
Negative sign:
Accept:
Display Calculator:
Use Spin:
spin.
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
2
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
Man.
Man.
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2

Man.

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
3
4
Attribute Value Lookup
Pleasure Description
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

the user.
Use lookup in :
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Percent
Percent
General Settings
Percentage field configuration Interface.
Values Format
format.
Digit grouping:
Maximum Size:
Minimum Value:
Maximum Value:
Groupping:
Negative sign:
Accept:
Display Calculator:
Use Spin:
spin.
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
2
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
Man.
Man.
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2

Man.

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
3
4
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

the user.
Use lookup in :
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Currency
Currency
General Settings
Currency field configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it is defined as a Decimal, it is allowed to define the format of a currency number.
Values Format
format.
Digit grouping:
Maximum Size:
Minimum Value:
Maximum Value:
Groupping:
Negative sign:
Accept:
Display Calculator:
Use Spin:
spin.
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
2
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
Man.
Man.
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2

Man.

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
3
4
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

the user.
Use lookup in :
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Percent(Calculated)
Percent(Calculated)
General Settings
Percentage field configuration Interface.
Values Format
format.
Digit grouping:
Maximum Size:
Minimum Value:
Maximum Value:
Groupping:
Negative sign:
Accept:
Display Calculator:
Use Spin:
spin.
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
2
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
Man.
Man.
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2

Man.

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
3
4
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

the user.
Use lookup in :
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Date
Date
General Settings
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it is defined as a Date and Time, it is allowed to define the format of the date.
Date format : Format the dates used for the Group By.
Values Format
format.
Digit grouping:
Maximum Size:
Minimum Value:
Maximum Value:
Groupping:
Negative sign:
Accept:
Display Calculator:
Use Spin:
spin.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Time
Time
General Settings
Values Format
format.
Digit grouping:
Maximum Size:
Minimum Value:
Maximum Value:
Groupping:
Negative sign:
Accept:
Display Calculator:
Use Spin:
spin.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Date and Time
Date and Time

General Settings
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it is defined as a Date and Time, it is allowed to define the format of the date.
Date format : Format the dates used for the Group By.
Values Format
format.
Digit grouping:
Maximum Size:
Minimum Value:
Maximum Value:
Groupping:
Negative sign:
Accept:
Display Calculator:
Use Spin:
spin.

1
Layout
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CHART › LAYOUT
Layout Settings
Configuration
Header & Footer

Header
2
Footer
1
Events
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CHART › EVENTS
Scriptcase uses the events to enable the developer to customize the application code. Using the events you can program custom actions at a specific execution time (e.g. After a
record is inserted, when it is loaded, upon submitting a form, …) and for a specific application type. In the event areas you can use global and local variables, JavaScript, CSS,
HTML, PHP codes and also Scriptcase macros.
onApplicationInit
OnScriptInit
onHeader
onFooter
1
Search
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CHART › SEARCH
Settings
Attributes
Condições do Filtro
Advanced Search
Settings
Through these attributes you can define some general Search settings, such as alignment, width, search conditions, etc.
2
Search button).
Select fields
Required
This interface has the options for you to select and set the Search form required fields.
Within the generated application will be displayed a marker(*) next to the field and an error message will also pops up if there’s no value assigned to the mandatory fields. You
will be able to set some options for the market using the options below.
Marker position : Marker’s position relative to the field (options are right, left or Do not display).
Toolbar
Desktop
3
Toolbar Interface.
S E P A R AT O R
BUTTON SETTINGS
OPTIONS
Options Interface.
Save Search
4
Events
record is inserted, when it is loaded, upon submitting a Form, …) and for a specific application type. In the event areas you can use global and local variables, JavaScript, CSS,
ONSCRIPTINIT
ONREFRESH
ONSAVE
O N V A L I D AT E
Layout
BLOCKS
current one.

5
Attributes
Block
Title
Label

Fields
Organization
Create New Block
click on Create.
Attributes

6
Edit Blocks
Attributes
7
Configuration
HEADER & FOOTER
Header
8
Footer
Dynamic Search
Settings
Select Fields
Fields
9
Field Data e Hora

1
Application
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CHART › APPLICATION
Settings
Error Settings
Attributes
2
Navigation
Attributes
Global Variables
Example:

3
1
Programming
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CHART › PROGRAMMING
In this version of ScriptCase is incorporated the concept of programming, with the use of attributes, methods, resources and libraries. In the previous version it was already
possible to create business rules in applications using this concept the big difference now is that this can be done in a more organized, facilitating both the development as the
understanding of the rule by another developer.
Attributes
Attributes
Internal Libraries
PHP Methods
Include Method.

2

1
Theme
HOME › APPLICATIONS › THEME
Preview
In this area you can customize the chart themes, you will be able to preview how it will look like according to each chart type.
If you customize the theme using this area, it will available only for the current application only. If you need to customize the theme and apply to other application, project and
users, then you will need to use the “Chart themes” option within the main menu “Layout > Chart themes”. There you will find the same interface with the option to save the
changes as “user level, project level or Scriptcase level”
Themes preview
Border
Activate this function to add a border around the chart area.
Border.
Border use : Not informed, use or do not use.

Not informed: This option will use the default option of the theme.
Use : Select the border as active, you will need to set the width.
Do not use : to remove or do not use the border.

2
Color : Select the border color, and may report a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.
Width : Sets the border width in pixels.
Opacity: Sets the border transparency.
Background
Options to configure the background color of the chart.
Background
Color : Select the background color, and may report a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.
New color : Adds a new color for the background.
Opacity : Select background transparency.
Canvas
Options to configure the chart canvas.
Canvas
Background color : Selects the color of the canvas, and may report a value hexadecimal or choose picker.
New color : Adds a new color option.
Background alpha : Selects the background transparency.
Border use : Not informed, use or do not use.

Not informed: This option will use the default option of the theme.
3
Use : Selects the border as active, you will need to set the width.
Do not use : To remove or to do not use the border.
Color : Selects the canvas color, and may report a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.
Width : Sets the border width in pixels.
Opacity: Sets the canvas transparency.
Title
Options to configure the formatting of the title.
Title
Title font : Selects the font, size, color, and formatting of the title.
Subtitle font : Selects the font, size, color and format of the subtitle to left, center or right.
Alignment : Selects the position of the title and subtitle.
Show on top : If this option is selected the title and the subtitle will be positioned above the chart, otherwise will be positioned below.
Axes
This option configures the formatting of the texts of the x and y axis
Axes
Font : Selects the font, size, color, and formatting of the axis.
Background color : Selects the background color, and may report a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.
4
Background alpha : Selects the transparency of the background color of the axis.
Border Color : Selects the color, and may report a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.
Border width : Sets the width in pixels.
Border alpha: Sets the transparency.
Border dashed: If this option is selected, the border is dashed, this option is only valid if the option “Display” is checked.
Data
Options to set the chart’s data (bank records).
Data
Use gradient : Enables the data gradient.
Gradient color : Selects the gradient color, and may add a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.
Gradient angle : Selects the angle of the gradient.
Gradient alpha : Selects the gradient transparency.
Show border : If this option is selected is activated the border in the data.
Border dashed : If this option is selected, the border is dashed, this option is only valid if the option “Display” is checked.
Use rounded border : This option leaves the rounded border.
Palette
Options to choose the colors of each chart palette.
5
palette
Colors palette : Select the color of each chart palette.
Data title
Options to configure title formatting of data.
Data title
Display mode : Selects the display mode to “automatic”, “rotated”, “line break”, “in levels” and “None”, if the Automatic option is selected, select the default option.
Slant labels : Selects the number of levels to the data.
Font : Selects the font, and your formatting such as bold, italic, size and color of data.
Font alpha : Selects the transparency of data title font.
Background color : Select the background color, and may add a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.
Background alpha : Selects the transparency of the background color of the title of data.
Border width : Sets the width in pixels.
Border alpha: Sets the transparency.
Border dashed: If this option is selected, the border is dashed, this option is only valid if the option “Display” is checked.
6
Data values
Options to configure the formatting of data values.
Data values
Font : Selects the font, and your formatting such as bold, italic, size and color of the data values.
Font alpha : Select the transparency of the source of the data values.
Background color : Select the background color, and may add a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.
Background alpha : Selects the transparency of the background color of the title of data.
Border Color : Selects the border color for the data values.
Border width : Selects the border width for the data values.
Border alpha : Selects the transparency of the color of the border of the data values.
Border dashed : If this option is selected, the border is dashed, this option is only valid if the option “Display” is checked.
Div Lines and Grids

Options to configure the Division of horizontal and vertical lines on the graph.
Div Lines and Grids
Amount of horizontal lines : Selects the amount of horizontal lines that will be shown in the chart.
Horizontal line color : Selects the horizontal line color.
Horizontal line thickness : Selects the thicker horizontal line.
Horizontal line alpha : Selects transparency horizontal line

7
Horizontal line dashed : If this option is selected will horizontal line plot.
Color horizontal stripes : If this option is selected you can choose the horizontal line color.
Horizontal stripes color : Selects the color you wish to case “Coloring horizontal Ribbon” is checked.
Horizontal stripes alpha : Selects transparency horizontal ribbon.
Amount of vertical lines : Amount of vertical lines
Vertical line color : Selects the color of the vertical line.
Vertical line thickness : Selects the vertical line thicker.
Vertical line alpha : Select the transparency of the vertical track.
Vertical line dashed : If this option is selected will draw the vertical line.
Color vertical stripes : If this option is selected the developer can choose the color of the vertical line.
Vertical stripes color : Selects the color you wish to case “Color vertical stripes” is checked.
Vertical stripes alpha : Select the transparency of the vertical stripes.
Anchors
Options to configure anchors on the chart.
Anchors
Show anchors : Enables the anchors in the chart.
Anchor sides : Select the width of the anchor.
Anchor radius : Selects the size of anchor beam.
Background color : Select the color, and may add a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.
Background alpha : Selects the transparency of the anchor.
Border Color : Select the anchors border color, and may add a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.
Border width : Select the border width of the anchor.
Tooltip
Options to configure the tooltips in the chart.
8
Tooltip
Background color : Select the tooltip color, and may add a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.
Background alpha : Select the transparency of the background of the tooltip.
Border Color : Select the tooltip border color, and may add a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker..
Shadow : Enable the shadow in the tooltip.
Tick marks
Option to the configure chart marks, this option is only possible for the “Gauge” charts.
Tick marks
Show tick marks : Enables the tick marks on the chart.
Place ticks inside : If this option is checked the marks of the chart will tile chart poker.
Show tick values : Show tick values
Show limits : If this option is selected will show the chart limits.
9
Place values inside : If this option is selected will show the values in the chart
Major tick color : Major tick color.
Major tick alpha : Major tick transparency
Major tick thickness : Major tick thickness.
Major tick height : Select a height for the major tick.
Minor tick color : Select a color for the minor tick
Minor tick alpha : Select the transparency for the minor tick
Minor tick thickness : Minor tick thickness.
Minor tick height : Select a height for the minor tick.
Legend
Options to configure the chart legend.
Legend
Position : Selects the position of the legend, “beside” or “Below”..

Beside : Positions the legend beside the chart.
Below : Positions the legend below the chart.
Allow drag : If this option is selected it will be possible to drag the chart legend to the desired position.
Scroll background color : Selects the color of the scroll bar.
Title font : Select the font, and your formatting such as bold, italic, size and color of the legend.
Background color : Selects the background color of the legend.
Background alpha : Selects the transparency of the legend.
Border Color : Select the legend border color, and may add a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker..
Border width : Selects the Border width of the legend.
Border alpha : Selects the border transparency of the legend.

1
Limit
HOME › APPLICATIONS › LIMIT
In the limit option, the user can choose the maximum limit that will be displayed in the chart.
Chart limit Interface
Limit Settings
Field : Field that will realize the filter in the desired limit.
Summarization : In which summarization function will be done in the limit can be “Sum”, “Maximum”, “Minimum”, “Average”, “Variance”, “Standard deviation”, “Count” and “Distinct count”.
Limit type : Defines if the limit will be realized by the firsts or by the last records.
Quantity : Quantity of records that will be applied in the limit.
Generated application
1
Email Export
EXPORT
Sending Options
SMTP
Gateway.
to: 25
Mandrill
Gateway.
Amazon SES
Gateway.
Export Settings
2
1
New Application
Application Data
SQL Select Statement - Display the select statement created after selecting the tables and fields. This field allows also to insert a previously created SQL, if the used tables
are available in the database selected in the connection.
Relationship
2
Edit Fields
and datatypes.
Datatype - Field’s Datatype.
Theme
automatically.
1
Form Orientation
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › FORM ORIENTATION
Orientation models for the Form application, it can be: Single record, Multiple records, Editable grid and Editable grid view.
Single record
This form orientation allows you to edit only one table record at a time. You will be able to page the form to navigate record by record.
Multiple records
Form orientation with various editable records per page. Update or delete processes will run on selected records via check box. You can set as many records per page as needed
to update, to delete or to add new records.
Pagination : Paging type for the multiple records form, you can choose if it is going to be partial or total.
Lines Per Page : Quantity of rows of records per page, this option is available only when the pagination is set as “Partial”.
Records for insert : You can set here the quantity of rows of records per page in the insert mode in order to add multiple records at a time.
Editable grid
Form orientation with various editable records per page. Each record has the update and delete controls available in its own line.
2
Editable grid view

Form orientation with various editable records per page. All records come with its data displayed in a read-only format. These data are only available for update by selecting the
Edit option in the record itself.
Use modal form to edit : Use a modal form to edit the records when you click to edit the record.
Related videos
Types of Forms
Ajax Processing
Default Values
Auto Complete
1
Settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › SETTINGS
Interface de configuração.
Friendly URL : Allows to define a name for the URL that’s going to be called by the application. The characters allowed in the URL are(a-z, A-Z, 0-9, -_). The Friendly URL can be informed on the
initial screen of the project, where the applications are listed, on the “Friendly URL” column.
Line break in title : Allows to break a link on the field titles.
Horizontal Alignment : Permite definir o alinhamento da aplicação na página.
Margins : Allows to organize the display of the application according to the values of the margins (Right , Left, Up and Down) in pixels.
Table Width : Value of the application table. The applications generated by ScriptCase are generated in Plain HTML, and are organized in tablesm lines and cells.
Table Width Unit : Measurment unit for the table width defined in the previous option, being: percentage, pixel or automatic.
Table Columns : This parameter defines the column (fields) width of the table (application).
Labels width : When the previous option is set to “Provided”, this one appears and here you can inform the width of the labels.
Layout and Behavior
Layout and Behavior configuration Interface.
Automatic tab : Changes the focus to next field when the amount of chacteres reaches its defined limit.
Highlight Text on Focus : Highlights the field when selected.
Use Enter to : Allows to use the “Enter” key to pass the focus to the next field.
Field with Initial Focus : Determines which field will contain the initial focus when accessing the application. This option doesn’t work with fields that contain watermark.
Highlight Field with Error : Focus the field with error when submitting the form.
Use a template from the HTML Editor : Allows to use the TinyMCE editor. You can edit and create your own HTML Templates.
1
Edit fields
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › EDIT FIELDS
This configuration allows the user to organize and edit the fields.
Fields Configuration
Edit Fields Configuration.
Fields
This column is used to display the field name.
Label
Column to edit the display name of the field in an application.
Datatype
Allows to change the field type.
New
Defines if the field will be available when inserting new records.
Update
Defines if the field will be available when updating new records.
Read-Only
Defines the field will be a label.
Required
Defines if the field has to contain a value.
PK
Defines which fields are the Primary Keys.
DB value (Insert)
Defines if the filed will receive internal values when inserting a new record, like an auto increment, date, datetime and IP.
DB value (Update)
Defines if the filed will receive internal values when updating a record, like the date, datetime and IP.
Page
Indicate the Pages in the application.
Blocks
Indicates the Blocks in the application.
2
Page Fields Not Shown
Contains all the fields that aren’t going to be displayed in the application.
Observe that all the lines can be dragged to the desired position, blocks and page. NOTE: Fields are grouped in Blocks and the Blocks are grouped in Pages.
Display
Display Interface.
Attributes
Markers positioning : Indicates the position of the maker that’ll displayed next to the field that’s required.
Display message : Allows to display a custom message when validating the custom fields.
1
Fields Positioning
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › FIELDS POSITIONING
Field Positioning
1
Unique key
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › UNIQUE KEY
With this module you can inform the fields that are unique. To inform more than one field that are unique (is a unique key at database level), select the fields by holding the CTRL
of your keyboard and then click on the add button. The fields informed will receive an identification for example: UK2.
Unique key configuration Interface.

1
Toolbar
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › TOOLBAR
Toolbar
DESKTOP
MOBILE
EXPORT:
U P D AT E :
Groups the options relative to the updating buttons displayed in the application.
Insert Inserts the informed record in the form.
Update Saves the modifications made in the record.
Delete Deletes the selected record.
Cancel Cancel the modifications made in the record before the insertion.
OTHERS:

2
Jump To Defines the record page by the informed number.
Copy Allows to copy the record data from a record to another.
Quick Search Allows to do a quick search in the records of the application.
S E P A R AT O R :
Toolbar Mobile
Mobile toolbar.
Bottons Group
3
Buttons Settings
4
BUTTON:
LABEL:
HINT:
Application Hotkeys
Options
HELP BY BLOCK:
Indicates if the helps messages from relatives fields are grouped by block. In each field, we can define a help text. With this option activated, will show up an icon in the block title
bar to call the help page.
GENERAL HELP:
The General Help “consolides” all the fields help pages in a single page, putting an icon in the toolbar to call the help page.
TOOLBAR BUTTONS:
1
Export Settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › EXPORT SETTINGS
PDF Settings
P D F F O R M AT
PRINT TYPE
CONFIGURABLE PDF
PRINT BACKGROUND
JS RUNTIME
Print Settings
PRINT MODE
Allows you to set the contents of the print file (Both, Current Page, Full Report).
PRINT BACKGROUND
Lets you set whether the background will be displayed on the printout.
1
SQL
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › SQL
In this module the attributes related to the connection to the table in which the Form was created are defined. We can define the Primary Key, Filters, Sorts for the created form.
SQL configuration Interface.
Select primary key fields : On this function it is displayed an Combo box with a “ * “ beside, that indicates which fields are the Compound keys or Primary Key of the SQL
table. In most cases, ScriptCase already identifies the Keys, in case that does not happen the user can manually inform the key using the button beside the list to select the
keys. See how the buttons work:
On/Off : Adds or Removes the attribute that defines the primary key for the field. The field defined as the primary key will have an asterisk beside its name.
All : Defines that all the fields are Primary Keys. The field defined as the primary key will have an asterisk beside its name.
None : Unchecks all the fields. It removes the definition of the primary key for all fields.
Sorting Button : These are the arrows on the right side of the Combo box. It allows to order the fields of the Primary Key, placing it in the desired order. To order click on the field and
use the arrows to make the move.
Where clause : An optional space that allows the user to place a Where clause with the objective to filter the SQL records.
Order By : Optional space for the user to write the ORDER BY clause that will determine the order in which the records will be displayed, when the navigation bar is used by default, the order
is determined by the Primary Key.
Connection : Displays the connection name (database) that the application is using for its execution, this connection can be changed by another one that contains the same
tables (SQL).
Table Name : Name of the table that is being used in the Form.
Variable for Table : These fields informed with value, allows part of the table name defined in the select to be changed before the execution of the command by a content of a variable.
Variable for Table Configuration.
Case Sensitive : Allows you to configure whether the connection will be case sensitive or not. (Differentiating case).
1
Sorting
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › SORTING
Field Settings
This property has the objective to define the fields that allow sorting. The sorting of a field of the application is done in runtime, just by clicking on the column (field) that you
want to sort by. By default, the GroupBy are respected while sorting the fields. Also by default, the first six fields are already marked (presenting an asterisk beside the field), so
that they can be sorted without the user worrying about this detail.
Sort Fields
Define the configuration of the sorting for each field of the application, being “Ascendant” or “Descendant”.
Advanced Sorting
Define the fields that are available when clicking on the “Sorting” of the Grid.
2
Use displayed fields : Defines that all the fields are available when clicking on “Sorting” button of the application.
Use columns : Defines that all the fields, configured in the “Columns” option of ScriptCase, will be available when clicking on the “Sorting” button of the Grid.
Define Columns : Allows to select the fields freely:

1
Group Label
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › GROUP LABEL
With this option, you can insert the one or more titles for the columns in the applications, allowing to modify its size, color, font and position.
If you have fields with a dynamic display, the Group Label won’t work.
Editing Group Label cell properties
Attributes
Title Allows to define a title that’ll be displayed in your Group Label.

Font Allows to define the group label title’s font.
Font Size Defines the font size for the group label title.
Horizontal Alignment Allows to define the horizontal alignment of the group label title. Being Left, Center or Right.
Vertical Alignment Allows to define the vertical alignment of the group label title. Being Middle, Bottom or Top.
Font Color Allows to define the font color for the group label title.
Background Color Allows to define to color of the background for the group label title.
1
Procedures
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › PROCEDURES
In this module, you can configure a Form application so that it can use Stored Procedures (defined in the Database) in the Insert, Update and Delete operations. It is not
necessary to use the three options simultaneously, in a way that the options that are not configured to use Procedures continue to work as ScriptCase’s default that are the
commands INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE.
See below, the step-by-step to implement a Stored Procedure to insert into the Database.
Form Stored Procedures Interface.
Let check the first option: “Enable INSERT Procedure”. Next inform the Name of the Procedure the number of parameters.
Defining parameters for the Procedure.
Now define the fields that will reference each parameter of the Stored Procedure, as the type of parameter (Input or Output). Next click on the button save to finish the process.
Passing value to the Stored Procedure Parameters.

1
JavaScript
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › JAVASCRIPT
The concept of editing JavaScript in Scriptcase is associated with the fields of the form and JavaScript events, so for each field edited in the JavaScript option, they will be
associated to a specific event.
Edit JavaScript Interface.
Attributes
Select the object : In this Combo box will be displayed the fields that are part of the form application, also the Form its self as an object.
Select the event : In this Combo box you need to associate the event with the selected field, that you are going to apply the JS code. View the events available:
onclick : Runs when the field is clicked.
onblur : Runs when the object loses focus.
onChange : Runs when the object loses focus and its value is modified.
onFocus : Runs when the object receives focus.
onMouseOver : Runs when the mouse pointer hovers the object.
onMouseOut : Runs when the mouse pointer is removed from above the object.
Events related to the Form : The events below are associated directly with the form.
OnLoad : This events runs when the page is loaded, also when navigating between records and clicking on the buttons (Next, Previous, etc.).
onSubmit: This event runs when clicking on the buttons “New”, “Save” and “Delete”.
Edit JavaScript
After selecting the object and the event and clicking on the button (Edit), it’ll open the page to edit the JavaScript routine, that’ll run the moment that the selected event is triggered.
On this page you can inform custom JavaScript routines or use the standard ScriptCase events, e.g. nm_recarga_form(); that refreshes the form.
Edit JavaScript Interface
After saving the JavaScript Routines by clicking on (save), it’ll conclude the work.
The JavaScript language won’t always have the same behavior in all Browsers available in the market. Always when necessary to write a block more elaborated or complex in this
language, it’s important to do the necessary tests in the browsers that the application will run.
OnClick Example
When clicking on a field of type radio, you can enable or disable a series of fields of the form according to the value selected.
if(document.F1.gender[0].checked){
document.F1.maternity.disabled = false;
document.F1.maternity.style.background='FFFFFF'
}
document.F1.maternity.disabled = true;
document.F1.maternity.style.background='FCEEBC'
}
To access a radio type field, you need to use the index.
OnBlur Example
You can define a warning around the field “weekly_work_time” when it loses the focus.
2
if (document.F1.tp_point[0].checked && document.F1.weekly_work_time.value > '20')
{
alert("The work time exceeds the limit allowed");
document.F1.weekly_work_time.value = "";
document.F1.weekly_work_time.focus();
}
OnChange Example
By modifying the “Salary” of and employee and exiting the field, at this moment we’ll check if the “position” is “gardener”.
if (document.F1.salary.value > 2000.00 && document.F1.position.value == 'gardener'){
alert('When I grow up, I want to be a gardener);

}
OnFocus
After informing the purchase value and selecting the payment method in a Select type object “Select: pay_method”, the JavaScript code below calculates the value of
the purchase.
if (document.F1.pay_method[document.F1.pay_method.selectedIndex].text == 'Money')
{
document.F1.total.value = document.F1.pauchase_value.value;
}
OnMouseOver Example
You can change the style (background color, font etc.) when the mouse hovers the field.
document.F1.field_name.style.bgColor = "0FFCCA"
onMouseOut Example
Sets the background color when the mouse exists the hover of the field.
document.F1.field_name.style.bgColor = "FFFFFF"
1
Dependencies
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › DEPENDENCIES
This feature allows to link the tables that contain relationships, being the tables that contain dependencies, like the tables orders and order_details. This way it’s possible to
delete a record in the table orders, all the details for that order will be deleted as well. Below you’ll see a practical example on this feature.
Firstly, you’ll define a new dependency. In this example, we’ll create a dependency between the orders (Dependent Table) with the order_details (Current Application). Click on the button
New Dependency to start.
Creating a new Dependency.
Selecting a the dependent table you’ll inform the amount of fields that are related between the both tables. In this example, only one field will be related to the orders id.
Dependency Table configuration.
Next, select the fields that link the Keys: order_details->Orderid - orders->Orderid.
Dependency Key Fields Configurations.
Creating a Dependency relationship, you only need to set the rules that the application will use. To do this, just click on the button Generate Scripts to define the Dependency Rule.
Configurando as regras da dependência.

1
Security
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › SECURITY
Use Security
Url output of the
security
Request password
just once
URL
Captcha
Use Captcha : Defines if the application will have Captcha support.
Number of Characters : Amount of characters in the Captcha image.
Character List : List of characters used in the Captcha.
Label : Message displayed for the Captcha.
Error message : Captcha error message.
Height : Height of the image generated by the Captcha ( in pixels ).
Width : Width of the image generated by the Captcha ( in pixels ).
Font Size : Size of the font used in the image generated by the Captcha (in pixels).
Reload: Display the refresh button in the Captcha.
Select one layout : Offers various layouts (of positioning) for the Captcha display.
reCAPTCHA
ReCAPTCHA is a tool used through the API provided by Google for sending forms adding security at the time of form confirmation (preventing automation for submission).
reCAPTCHA sample:
First we have to request an API Key to activate reCAPTCHA in the Scriptcase application by following the steps below:
To get a Site key and Secret Key go to the link: https://www.google.com/recaptcha/admin#list. The page below will be showed:
Label: Project name which will be created to contains the reCAPTCHA keys.
Choose the type of reCaptcha : We need to choose the option reCAPTCHA V2 .
Domains : We can insert any domains (on per line ) to limit the API uses.
After that, we need to accept the Terms of Service ( “Accept the reCAPTCHA Terms of Service” ).
When click in Register the page will be reloaded showing the integration reCAPTCHA informations. In this screen we can get the Site Key and Secret Key:
2
Now, we can setting the scriptcase application security:
Site Key : Key generated by google after reCAPTCHA project creation.
Secret Key : Key generated by google after reCAPTCHA project creation.
Theme : Defines the color which the reCAPTCHA will be displayed. We have two options:
Light :
Dark :
Type: Defines the initial type which the reCAPTCHA will be displayed. We have two options:
Audio:
Image :
Tamanho : Defines the size of reCAPTCHA. We have two options:

Normal :
Compact:
Position : Defines the reCAPTCHA component position in relation with the width of the application:
Left : Position the reCAPTCHA component at left.
Center: Position the reCAPTCHA component at center.
Rigth : Position the reCAPTCHA component at right.

1
Log
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › LOG
1
1. Home
2. Applications
General Overview
Example:
Virtual field

Quantity:
Example:
Field’s inclusion
Label
Sincronizar Tabela
It is possible to synchronize your database’s table in a existent application to add new fields that were created inside the database. That way every field creation and inclusion in the
application is done dynamically. That can be done through the submenu Sincronize Table inside the Form’s application menu.
Example:
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. Text
Text
General Settings
Type of Data
Label
Customer Name.
Watermark
Informing a text to the Watermark it will be displayed in the input a text as an example that can be informed in the field. The result after set will be this:
Inicial Value(type)
Allows the initial definition to the field when the form is in insert mode. It is possible to choose between two options:
Defined Value: When this option is selected, the Initial Value attribute will be available, where we should inform the field’s initial value. For example, my initial value isArlindo,
when a new register is inserted, the field Nome do Vendedor will be initialized as Arlindo.
System Data: When this option is selected, the initial value will be the actual date of your computer’s system.
Ammount of Characters
Allows to set the width of the text field’s input that varies with the ammount of characters informed. Although, if the ammount of characters typed are greater than the setting, the
text will be pushed to the left, to keep the maximum ammount of characters as defined.
Show HTML Content
Validation Image
When this option is active, a image will be displayed next to the informed field if the field is according to the settings defined by the developer.
In the example below, the field was set to receive at least 5 characters, see what happens when informed only 4 characters:
However if informed 5 or more characters the field will be displayed as:
Password Field
When this option is active, the text field will be converted to the format used in password fields. For example:
Save Variable
Allows to save a session variable(global variable) with the field’s value, to be used in others applications.
For example, in the login form the username can be saved in session and displayed on the header of others applications.
Variable Name
In this attribute we should define the name of the session variable, actived in the previous item, that will receive the field’s value.
We should inform only the variable’s name, - var_rating.
The method to use its value is global variable.
Field Mask
X
the mask.

2
Telephone number

Phone Number +99 99 9999 - 9999 123456789012 +12 34 5678 - 9012
Validate with mask
When this option is active it is possible to insert the data with the mask set in theField Mask option.
Complete to the left
When this option is used, the value defined will be added on the left of the information iserted in the field if the value is lower than the maximum set in the
Maximum Size option.
Field size in database
Defines the field’s size related to the size set in the database. This value is already set automatically by default when the application is generated.
Hidden Field
When this option is active, the field will be hidden in the application on runtime.
Label Field
When this option is active, the field will be altered to only a label where the info will be displayed, where updates or inserts will not be possible.
Save HTML tags
When this option is active, it allows to HTML tags in the field to be inserted with the data, instead of being interpreted.
Text input in Javascript
When this option is active, it will be show every Javascript content inserted in the database with its main value.
This option can only be used using the Editable grid view.
Disable Field
Allows the developer to disable the field, so the user can not type a value according with the option defined by the developer.
The available options are: No - Initial value of the attribute, this option does not disable the field.
Update Mode - This option only disables the field when editing existing registers.
Insert Mode - This option only disables the field when inserting new registers.
Insert / Update Mode - This option disables the field when edting exsting registers or when inserting new registers.
HTML Type
HTML object used to display the field in the form.
SQL Type
Values Format
Format of Values Interface
Case Settings : Allows to convert the letters of the field when losing the focus. The options are:
Upper Case : All in Upper Case.
Lower Case : All in Lower Case.
Capitalize first word : Capitalizes the first letter of the word.
Capitalize all words : Capitalizes the first letter of all the words.
Minimum Size : Allows to define the minimum amount of characters accepted for the field.
Maximum Size : Allows to define the maximum amount of characters accepted for the field.
Allowed Characters : Allows to select a set of characters that can be typed into the field. The options are:
All : Allows any type of character to be typed into the field
Selected : Defines a set of characters allowed. Using the configuration below, will be allowed to type letters, numbers and other characters (defined in the attribute More). The
letters a, b and c (defined in the Less Attribute) are not allowed.
Database Value
Allows to define a value to be saved to the database.
Database Values configuration Interface.
Defined Value : Allows to specify the fixed value associated to global variables.
3
Defined Value configuration Interface.
Auto Increment (automatic) : Allows to use the increment generated by the database. Used only when the field of the database is the type AUTO INCREMENT or similar. For
the databases that use sequence like Oracle, PostGres and Firebird, it is necessary to inform the name of the sequence.
Auto Increment configuration Interface.
Auto Increment (manual) : The application generated simulates an auto increment on the field. To include a value to the field it will automatically calculate the next id.
Date of Insertion : When inserting a record, the field will contain the server date as a value.
Data of Update : When updating a record, the value of the field will be the date of the server.
User IP : The field will receive the IP of the machine that the application is be accessed by.
Calculated by the database : The value of the field will be applied by the database. The field will not be used in update processes. For example: it will be updated by a
Trigger.
Null : The field will be informed the value null.
Lookup Settings
Method used to place a description next to the field.
Use lookup to display the field description. : When enabled, the lookup settings is enabled and opens more settings.
SQL Command : Defines the SQL command that is going to recover the vales from the database. To build a SQL command, it is possible to use the SQL Builder tool. The SQL
format needs to have the following format:
SELECT Field_displayed FROM table WHERE Key_Field = '{Form_Field}'
The Form field needs to be referenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.
Font : Defines the font used to display the lookup.

Font Color : Defines the color in HEX for the lookup display.
Font Size : Defines the font’s size in the lookup display.
EOF Message : Defines a message that will be displayed if there is not any results for the record.
Use in validation : When enabled, it will generate an automatic validation based on the lookup, in case there is not any records found, the message will display as a warning
(when Updating or Including a record).
Ajax Processing
Ajax Processing configuration Interface.
Allows to define the field that will be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.
For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
4
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
Multiple Lines Text

General Settings
Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.
Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
System Date : The field will receive the current server date.
If you select the System Date, then it is not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.
Initial Value : you will inform the Defined Value here.
Initial Value Configuration Interface.
Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.
Validation Image : Allows to display an image next to the field when it is being validated.
Lines : Allows to define the amount of lines that the field will have at start.
Field size in database : Determines the field size in bytes. it is used to determine the max size of characters that is allowed to type in.
Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through JavaScript or PHP.
Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.
Label Configuration Interface.
Save HTML tags : This option allows to save the HTML content of the field to the database.
Text input in Javascript : Allows to save javascript code informed in the field to the database.
Values Format
Database Value
Trigger.
Lookup Settings
2

Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

3

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. Integer
Integer
General Settings
Data type:
Label:
Watermark
Informing a text for the watermark it will be displayed on the input text with an example of what can be reported in the field. The result after that will be configured:
Initial value (type)
Allows setting an initial value for the field when the application is in inclusion. You can choose between two options:
Pre-set value: When you select this option, the Initial Value attribute will be made available in the place where we inform the initial value of the field.
For example, my initial value is Arlindo when inserting a new record the seller_name field will start with Arlindo.
System date: When you select this option, the initial value will be the current system date of your computer.
If you select the type system date, it will be not necessary to fill in the initial value attribute.
Amount of characters
It allows you to set the width of the input text field according to the amount of characters. However, if the quantity entered is greater than the set for the characters, the text will be
pushed to the left, in order to ensure the maximum amount of characters set in the option of Values formatting.
Validation Image
When you enable this option, an image will be shown next to the field informing whether the field is in accordance with the settings ofminimum size and Maximum size (as you can
see in the images below) defined in the Formatting value option.
In the example below, the field was set to receive at least 5 characters, see what happens with the image when it receives only 4 characters:
However, if the value inserted has 5 or more characters the the image will change according to example bellow:
Use slider:
It displays a slider component in the field. So you can increase or decrease the value sliding the cursor. You can also customize the increment value, if it incremends the value 1 by
1, 2, 5, 10… N.
Field Mask Input:
X
the mask.

Phone Number +99 99 9999 - 9999 123456789012 +12 34 5678 - 9012
Validate with Mask

2
By enabling this option you will be able to enter data according to the mask that was configured in the optionField Mask and Scriptcase will validate it.
Record Variable
Allows you to record a session variable with the value of the field ([global variable] [var_glob]), to be used in other applications.
Example, no formulário de login o nome do usuário pode ser salvo em sessão e exibido no cabeçalho de outras aplicações.
Variable Name
In this option you must set the session variable name, enabled in the previous item, which will receive the value of the field.
You need to inform only the variable name, for example: var_seller.
The recovery of the value is made as [Global Variable][var_glob]{:target=’blank’}.
Field size in Database
This option sets the size of the field relative to the size that is configured in the database. By default this value is already configured automatically when the application is generated.
Hidden Field
This option when enabled will hide the field inside the application at the time of execution.
Label Field
By enabling this option, the field will be changed to only one label where the information will be displayed, so it is not possible to make changes or inserts in the field configured as
label.
Disable field
Allows you to disable the field, making it impossible for the user to enter a value according to the developer-defined option.
The available options are:
No - initial value of the attribute, this option does not disable the field. Update mode - This option disables the field only when editing the records. Insert mode - This option
disables the field only inserting new records. Update/Insert mode - This option disables the field in both editing and inserting new records.
HTML Type
HTML object used to display the field in the application.
Tipo SQL:
Values Format
format.
Digit grouping:
Maximum Size:
Minimum Value:
Maximum Value:
Groupping:
Negative sign:
Accept:
Display Calculator:
Use Spin:
3
spin.
Database Value
It allows you to define how the value to be written to the database.
Pre-set value:
It allows you to specify a fixed value or associate it to global variables created inside the project and save it automatically to the database field.
Auto increment (automatic):
It allows you to use the increase generated automatically by the database to fill the field. It is used only when the database field is of type AUTO INCREMENT or similar. For the
databases that use string, such as Oracle, PostGres and Firebird, you must inform the name of the string.
Auto increment (mannual):
The application itself will simulate an auto increment in the field. So the value of the field will be calculated automatically by the application.
Date of inclusion:
The field will be populated automatically with server date during the inclusion.
Date of update:
The field will be populated automatically with server date during the update.
User IP:
The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application.
Calculated by the database:
The field value is assigned by the database itself. The field will not be used in the process of updating. For example: it will be updated via a Trigger.
Null:
The field will be automatically filled with null.
Lookup Settings
Example:
Lookup Methods
Select Command:
Multiple Options:
Delimiter:
Use the lookup in:

4
Default Value:
Separated By:
Lookup Types

Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married M 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study ST 3 2
Sportes SP 3 2
Reading LE 3 2

order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Leisure
8 Reading
5
16
Assigned Music
value Description in Lookup
follows:

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Leisure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Leisure
8 Reading
16 Music
Label:
Include Button:
Alter Button:
Delete Button:
Clean Button:
It cleans the fiels
Save Button:
Use the lookup in:
Default Value:
Separated By:
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

6
CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. Decimal
Decimal
General Settings
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Decimal, you can inform decimal values to the field.
Initial Value : You will inform the Defined Value here.
Validation Image : Allows to display an image next to the field when it’s being validated.
Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.
Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through Javascript or PHP.
Values Format
Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the field. When not enabled, the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator,
Negative sign and Negative number format.
Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.
Maximum Size : Determines the max size of the field.
Minimum Value : Determines the min value of the field.
Maximum Value : Determines the max value of the field.
Decimal Precision : Defines the amount of decimal places for the field.
Digit Grouping Separator : Defines the character that is used to seperate the thousand.
Decimal Separator : Defines the decimal separator.
Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.
Show a calculator : Displays an icon next to the field, which alles the user to calculate a value for the field.
Auto-complete with zeros : If enabled, it automatically informs the decimal places when not specified. If disabled, the user needs to always inform the decimal value.
Database Value
Trigger.
Lookup Settings

2

Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.
3
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. Currency
Currency
General Settings
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Currency, you can currency values to the field.
Values Format
Currency symbol usage : Defines if the field will display the Currency Symbol of the Regional Settings.
Digit Grouping Separator : Defines the character that is used to separate the thousand.
Show a calculator : Displays an icon next to the field, which aids the user to calculate a value for the field.
Database Value
Trigger.
Lookup Settings
2

Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

3

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. Date
Date
General Settings
Date field configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Date, you can inform a date.
Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it is value to be processed through Javascript or PHP.
Values Format
Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, it will be displayed the date separator attribute.
Date separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the date.
First Day : Define the first day of the week.
Display : Select the format of the day for display.
and Day.
Use Combo-box : Allows you to select the date using a combo-box.
Minimum Date :
Fixed Date : Inform the minimum date allowed presented in the selected date format.
Current Date : Clicking on the icon next to the text field, ScriptCase offers the following options:
Actual date : It will place the current date as the max allowed date.
Actual date with increment : The minimum date will be the current date (+) the days or months or years that you want to increment.
Actual date with decrement : The minimum date will be the current date (-) the days or months or years that you want to decrement.
Maximum Date :
Display Format : Enables the Date format beside the field when informing the date.
Display Calendar : Enables the a calendar icon beside the field, this allows to select the date from a calendar with the format already setup.
Database Value
Trigger.
Lookup Settings
2

Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.
3

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. Time
Time
General Settings
Time field configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Time, you can inform a time to this field.
Values Format
Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, it will be displayed the date separator and time separator
attributes.
Time separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the time.
Display : Select the format of the time for display.
Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different fromTIME. You need to use the characters HH, II, and SS that correspond to Day, Hour,
Minutes and Seconds.
Display Format : Enables the Time format beside the field when informing the time.
Use Timepicker : Use the JQuery plugin to choose the time.
Database Value
Trigger.
Lookup Settings

2
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. Date and Hour
Date and Hour

General Settings
Date and Time field configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Datetime, you can inform a date and time to this field.
Values Format
attributes.
Display : Select the format of the day/time for display.
Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different fromDATETIME. You need to use the characters Y, M, D , HH, II, and SS that correspond
to Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minutes and Seconds.
Display Format : Enables the Date and Time format beside the field when informing the date.
Group Date and Time : Groups the date and time in the same field.
New Calendar : Show the new jquery calendar, or the old calendar.
Years Limit : The amount of years that will display in the calendar.
View week number : Display the week number in the calendar.
Additional months : Display additional months in the calendar.
Show Combo year and month : Allows you to select the year and month using a combo-box.
Decimal of seconds : Defines the amount of decimals for the seconds.
Database Value
Trigger.
Lookup Settings
2

Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

3

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. HTML Image
HTML Image
General Settings
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
2
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. Label
Label
General Settings
Label field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it is defined as label, the field only display the output of the value .
Text : You can inform the text that will display beside the field.
Reload : When enabled, make the text informed for the field to become a link to reload the form when clicked.
Position : Allows to position the field in the chosen block.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.
2

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. Card
Card
General Settings
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it is defined as a Credit Card Number, the field verifies if the value is valid.
Watermark : It is created a placeholder on the field with the text informed.
Field size in database : Determines the size in bytes of the fields. It is used to determine the max amount of characters to be typed in.
Field Mask : Defines the display mask for the field. There are three types of masks that can be merged.
9 Represents a numeric character (0-9)
A Represents an alpha numeric character (A-Z,a-z)
Represents any alpha numeric character (A-Z,a-z,0-9) typed by the
*
user.
It is possible to merge two or more masks simultaneously, separated by a semi coma with the smallest mask at start. The replacement occurs when the user is typing
when the lowest amount of character exceeds.
Examples of Masks
Field Mask Informed Value Formatted Value

Telephone Number +99 99 9999 - 9999 123456789012 +12 34 5678 - 9012
Software Key (Only Numbers) AAAA-AAAA-AAAA-AAAA QWERTYUIASDFGHJK QWER-TYUI-ASDF-GHJK
Software Key (Letters an
**---** Q1W2E3R4T5Y6U7I8 Q1W2-E3R4-T5Y6-U7I8
Numbers)
License Plates AAA - 9999 QWE1234 QWE - 1234
ScriptCase License A999A999A999-** D111H111G111DG2P D111H111G111-DG2P
Multiple Masks (Telephone) 9999-9999;(99)9999-9999; 9999 999 9999 +99 99 9999-9999
Database Value
Trigger.
Lookup Settings
2

Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

3

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. Card type
Card type
General Settings
Credit Card field configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Credit Card , it’ll setup a combo-box for you to select a creditcard type.
Field size in database : Determines the field size in bytes. It’s used to determine the max size of characters that’s allowed to type in.
HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.
Values Format
Format of Values Interface.
Credit Card : Allows to define which cards will be listed and their internal value.
Use Title/Deny : Allows to inform a new value if the one of the previous options (American Express, Diners, MasterCard and Visa) wasn’t chosen. The label and the value of
this option are defined as the Negative Value and the Title.
Negative value : Value of the new option if the one of the previous options (American Express, Diners, MasterCard and Visa) wasn’t chosen.
Title : Label of the new option if the one of the previous options (American Express, Diners, MasterCard and Visa) wasn’t chosen.
Related Field : You’ll inform which of the fields contains the values of a Credit Card Number so that the validations can be done correctly.
Reload Form : Reloads the form when the field’s value is modified.
Database Value
Trigger.
Lookups Settings

Display Settings
2
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. E-mail
E-mail
General Settings
Email field configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Email, the field applies validations for an email format.
Display Icon : Displays the Email icon next to the field.

Values Format
Database Value
Trigger.
Lookup Settings

2
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. URL
URL
General Settings
URL field configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to URL, you can inform a Link value to the field.
Display Icon : Displays an icon beside the field.

Show the URL as a clickable link : Sets the content of the field to clickable link.
Target handling where the link will open : Target where the the lick will direct to after being clicked
Values Format
Database Value
Trigger.
Lookup Settings

2
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. HTML Color
HTML Color
General Settings
HTML Color field configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to HTML Color, you can select a color to be used in the form.
Values Format
Database Value
Trigger.
Lookup Settings

2
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. HTML Editor
HTML Editor
General Settings
HTML Editor field configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to HTML Editor, you can inform any type of character and they will be saved in HTML form.
Height : Inform the Height in pixels for the HTML Editor.
Toolbar
HTML Editor toolbar settings Interface.
Properties
Position : Location of the HTML Editor toolbar
Alignment : Toolbar button alignment
Status : Status Bar Display (Do not Display, Top and Bottom).
Amount : The Amount of lines of the HTML Editor toolbar.
Button Organization : Allows to position the toolbar buttons.
Preview : You can visualize the toolbar according to the previous settings.
Database Value
Trigger.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
2
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. Localization
Localization
General Settings
Location field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as Location, you will see a combobox with the Languages that are part of the Project Properties.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

2

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. Theme
Theme
General Settings
Theme field configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Theme, you view a combo box with the list of themes that are set to your project.
Reload : Reload the form after modifying the value.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

2

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. Youtube
Youtube
General Settings
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
2
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. Google Maps
Google Maps
General Settings
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it is defined as Google Maps, it will use the Google Maps API to display the map in the Form Applications

Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
2
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. Image (Database)
Image (Database)
General Settings
Image (Database) field Configuration Interface.
Progress bar : Displays a progress bar when sending the files to the server.
Upload area : Displays a drag and drop area to upload the file.
Display link only : When enabled, you will be presented with a link to open the image in another image with the original size of the image ( without using the redimensioning
).
Extensions to allow : Extensions allowed to upload, separated by a semi coma (;). If left in blank, all the extensions are allowed. e.g. docx;jpg;png;xls
Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows its value to be processed through JavaScript or PHP.
Multi-upload
This option allows to upload multiple files and store them on a table referencing a record from another table.To use this option you first need to create a virtual field._
Multi-Upload Configuration.
Amount of columns : Amount of columns to displays the files in the Field.

Files sorting : Enables files sorting after the upload.
Position of the delete : Checkbox option to delete files position.
Position on the upload : Position of the records when uploading.
Show status : Display the upload status.
Table : Select the table that will store the information of the files when uploading.
After selecting the table, you will see a list of all the fields of the chosen table, where you will associate the parameters for each field when inserting a new record or updating an
existing record.
Multi-Upload fields of the table Configuration.
File Name : Obtains the name of the file that is being loaded.
Upload : Obtains the binary value of the file.
Auto Increment : Used only when field in the database in an auto increment or similar.
Manual Increment : The form will be responsible for managing the auto-increment, calculating the value of the field before inserting the record.
Foreign Key : Associates the file with a value of a field in the current form.
Defined : You can specify a constant value or use a global variable. [global_var]
Date of Insertion : Obtains the data of the server when inserting the record.
Datetime de Insertion : Obtains the data and time of the server when inserting the record.
User IP : The field will contain the IP of the computer that is accessing the application.
Calculated by the Database : The value of the field is applied in the database.
Calculated by the Database if empty : The value of the field is applied in the database if not informed by the application.
Null : The field will the null value.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
2
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
Image (File Name)

General Settings
Image (File Name) field Configuration Interface.
Increment file : Increments the file name if the theirs an existing one with the same name in the upload folder.
Subfolder : Subfolder’s name that the files are stored. The is sub folder is relative to the directory defined for the Document upload (see the Settings). It is possible to use
global variables or local variables to format the name of the subfolder.
Create Subfolder : When enabled, it creates the subfolder if not already created.
Image Caching : Time in minutes that the image cache will be stored.
Hide image name: When enabled, only the image will be displayed without it is name.
Files Deletion: Deletes the files from the directory when the record is deleted from the database.
Display link only : WHen enabled, you will be presented with a link to open the image in another image with the original size of the image ( without using the redimensioning
).
Multi-upload

existing record.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
2
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
Document (Database)
General Settings
Document (Database) field Configuration Interface.
File Size : Defines the field that conatins the file size.
Multi-upload

existing record.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
2
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form

General Settings

existing record.
Multi-upload

existing record.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
2
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. Barcode
Barcode
General Settings

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in the “Insert Mode” , “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.
Values Format
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
2
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. Select
Select
General Settings
Select field configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Select, you can select multiple option from a combobox (Select Field).

Use Select2 : Uses the new component for data selection, allowing searches within the select.
Display Select2 search area : Sets whether to display the search field within Select2.
Field size in database : Determines the field size in bytes. It is used to determine the max size of characters that is allowed to type in.
Database Value
Trigger.
Lookup Settings
Lookup Settings Display for the field.
Lookup Methods
Selecting the lookup type.
Lookup used to list the values that will be displayed on the Checkbox field. These values will be recovered dynamically using the Select command.
Automatic Lookup Interface.
SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that will recover the values that will be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following
structure “SELECT key_field , display_field FROM table”.
The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.
Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options
with a different delimiter then (;).
Height : Defines the height for the select object.
Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).
2
Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.
Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.
Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there is a change to the selected object in the field.
Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.
Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It is only necessary to inform
this value of the option Display original and lookup value is enabled.
Link : Allows to create a link to another form allowing to manipulate the list displayed on the select field. After the manipulation, the select object it updated
automatically.
This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that will be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database does not have a table that contains this information.
Manual Lookup Interface.
Single Value :
Setting up Single Value Lookup
Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that is stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will
view in the list Man.
Default : With this option enabled, the selected item will be inserted to the table when committed.
Multiple Values (delimiter)
You can store various values for the select field. The values are separated by the informed delimiter. For example: the combinationSport, Cinema and
Tourism selected in form will be stored likeE;C;T in case the delimiter is ; (semi coma).
Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter)
Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial position
and the number of bytes that each information occupies on a string.
The example below:
Label Valor Inicio Tamanho

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Example: Of you choose Man, Single and Read, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valorMSRD.
Setting up Multiple Values (position)
Negative : Value to be saved in the table in case there is not any valued selected on the field.
In this example uses the following list (although it is not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to the
order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
3

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
Configuração do lookup de edição Múltiplos Valores (Binário)
Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It will be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones
saved by the user.
Displaying the original lookup.
Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It is only necessary to inform this
value of the option Display original and lookup value is enabled.
Lookup Method - Actual value
This lookup is used to list all the values in the selected field.
This lookup will apply a “distinct” to your SQL query.
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
4
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. Double Select
Double Select
General Settings
Double Select field configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Double Select, your allowed to have multiple options selected.
Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through Javascript or PHP. .
Database Value
Trigger.
Lookup Settings
Lookup Settings Display for the field. Automatic Lookup Interface..
“SELECT key_field , display_field FROM table”.
Height : Allows to define the height(lines) of the field interface.

delimiter then (;).
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

2
CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. CheckBox
CheckBox
General Settings
Checkbox field configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Checkbox, your allowed to have multiple options selected.
Database Value
Trigger.
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with
a different delimiter then (;).
Option check all : Displays two options on the field to check and uncheck all.
2
Single Value :
Label : Text that will be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.
Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.
You can store various values for the checkbox field. The values are separated by the informed delimiter. For example: the combinationSport, Cinema and
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
3
Attribute
4 Value Lookup
8 Reading
16 Music
Setting up Multiple Values (Binary)
saved by the user.
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
4
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. Radio
Radio
General Settings
Radio field configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Radio, your allowed to select one of the options listed.
Database Value
Trigger.
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
2
Label : Text that will be displayed in the item list of the radio.
Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that is stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the
list Man.
Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on load lookup definition.
saved by the user.
Ajax Settings
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
3
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. Text Auto-Complete
Text Auto-Complete
General Settings
Text auto complete field configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Text auto complete, you can inform a value based on the select statement of the lookup settings and it will
manipulate an internal Text for the data.
Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Use Select2: Uses the new component for data selection, allowing searches within the select.
Amount of characters for the Select2: Sets the number of characters to start the search in Select2.
Amount of lines for the Select2: Sets the maximum number of rows to list the search result in Select2.
Width for the Select2: Sets a width for the area for the Select2.
Complete to the Left : Allows to define the character that will be used to complete the value to the left that the user typed in to the max size of the field defined in the Field
size in database option.
Validate on submit : Validate the field only when the form is submitted.
Values Format
Database Value
Trigger.
Lookup Settings
2
SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that will recover the values that will be displayed on the form field.
Rows : Allows to define the amount of records displayed in the field.
Width : Defines the width the size of capture box (Capture Text).
Search options : Allows to define the search settings of the field(Start equal to, Any part and End equals to).
Capture Text : When not enabled, you will only view the field to inform the data. See an example below. lookup Settings configuration
Interface.
lookup Settings validation configuration Interface.
Show label with the description : Displays a label with the description.
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
3
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. Number Auto-Complete
Number Auto-Complete
General Settings
Number auto complete field configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Number auto complete, you can inform a value based on the select statement of the lookup settings and it
will manipulate an internal number for the data.
Values Format
Database Value
Trigger.
Lookup Settings
2
Interface.
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.
3

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. Signature
Signature
General Settings
Pen color:
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. Rating
Rating
General Settings
This field allows the developer to create a field for rating using stars (or any other image), where the final user will be able to select a rate option according to the configuration
made by the developer.
Data type
Label
Subtitle
Amount of icons
Enabled icon and
Enabled icon
Disabled icon
Enabled icon.
Initial Value (type)
Allow the definition of an initial value for the field when the form application is in insert mode. The only option available in this field isDefined. Selecting this option the attribute
Initial Value will be showed for set the value.
Example: The initial value is 3 when inserting a new record, the rate field will initiate with 3 stars already selected.
The value defined in this attribute will overlap any value defined previously.
Save variable
Allow saving a session variable(Global variable) with the field value for being used in other applications.
Example: In the login form, the user name can be saved in the session and used to be displayed in the header of other applications.
Variable Name
In this attribute, we must define a name for thesession variable that was enabled previously to receive the field value.
We must inform only the variable name, - var_rating.
We can recover the value as a global variable.
HTML Type
HTML object used to show the form field.
SQL Type

2
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
Layout
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › LAYOUT
Pages
Using the definition of blocks, a page is a container of blocks. Where each application is created with a least one page that has the default name “pag1”. In applications of the
type Form, Control and Search is possible to create many pages for an application. The pages are Tabs where each tab contains blocks defined in the block settings.
Pages (available only in the Form, Control and
Search applications) configuration Interface.
See the example below of the Form application using two Pages: General Data and Documents.
Form Application using Pages feature.
Pages Settings
The form application already comes with a default page, identified as Pag1, that can be renamed, with the creation of new pages. The use of pages is indicated when you have an
application that contains various fields of a table (more than 20 for example). A form with more than 20 fields vertically placed would be difficult to use. An application can
contain various pages, and in each one of them you can add various blocks.
2
Pages Configuration Interface.
Attributes
Including A new page, just inform the two fields above the button Include, on the first field you’ll inform the name of the page and on the second field you’ll select the image that’ll
represent the icon of the folder, a then click on Include.
Deleting A page, just click on the Garbage Can icon corresponding to the line of the page.
The definition of pages is only considered in the Single Record Forms
Tab Folder configurations

Font : Allows to define which font-family will be displayed in the field. Clicking on the icon existing on the right side, it opens a page to select the font. Just select the font from the
list, and it’ll be applied to field, leaving to you just to confirm the font.
Font Size : Informs the desired size for the font.
Selected Font Color : Field to set the color for the text that will be in the Selected Tab. Clicking on the existing icon to the right of the field opens a screen containing a color palette.
When the selected color is selected, the selected color will be automatically transferred to the field.
Selected Background Color : Field to set the color for the text that will be in the Selected Tab. Clicking on the existing icon to the right of the field opens a screen containing a color
palette. When the selected color is selected, the selected color will be automatically transferred to the field.
Non Selected Font Color : Field to set the color for the text that will be in the Selected Tab. Clicking on the existing icon to the right of the field opens a screen containing a color
Non Selected Background Color : Field to set the color for the text that will be in the Selected Tab. Clicking on the existing icon to the right of the field opens a screen containing a
color palette. When the selected color is selected, the selected color will be automatically transferred to the field.
Blocks
current one.

3
Attributes
Block
Title
Label

Fields
Organization
Create New Block
click on Create.
Attributes
Edit Blocks
save.
4
Attributes
Layout Settings
5
Configuration
Header & Footer

Header
6
Footer
1
Events
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › EVENTS
Within the events you can include Scriptcase global, local variables, libraries and macros, PHP, JavaScript, HTML and CSS codes.
onApplicationInit
onNavigate
OnScriptInit
onLoadRecord
onLoad
This event runs when the application is finished loading.
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
This event runs when the form validation gives an error.
onValidateSuccess
This event runs when the form validation does not give an error.
onBeforeInsert
This event is executed before inserting a record from the application.
onAfterInsert
This event is executed after inserting a record from the application.
2
onBeforeInsertAll
This event runs before inserting all the selected records from the Multiple Records, Editable Grid and Editable Grid (View) Form.
onAfterInsertAll
This event runs after inserting all the selected records from the Multiple Records, Editable Grid and Editable Grid (View) Form.
onBeforeUpdate
This event is executed before updating a record from the application.
onAfterUpdate
This event is executed after updating a record from the application.
onBeforeUpdateAll
This event runs before updating all the selected records from the Multiple Records, Editable Grid and Editable Grid (View) Form.
onAfterUpdateAll
This event runs after updating all the selected records from the Multiple Records, Editable Grid and Editable Grid (View) Form.
onBeforeDelete
This event runs before deleting the records from the Form.
onAfterDelete
This event runs after deleting the records from the Form.
onBeforeDeleteAll
This event runs before deleting all the selected records from the Multiple Records, Editable Grid and Editable Grid (View) Form.
onAfterDeleteAll
This event runs after deleting all the selected records from the Multiple Records, Editable Grid and Editable Grid (View) Form.
1
Ajax Events
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › AJAX
EVENTS
OnClick
Selecting a field
OnChange
The ajax event OnChange is executed when the value of the field that it’s based on is modified.
Selecting a field
OnBlur
The ajax event OnBlur is executed when the focus is removed from the field that event is based on.
Selecting a field
2
OnFocus
The ajax event OnFocus is executed when the field that it’s based on is applied with a focus.
Selecting a field
1
Buttons
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › BUTTONS
In addition to the applications buttons, you can also create new manual buttons. These buttons will be placed on the application toolbar.
Creating new buttons
Creating a button
To create a new button, click the “new button” and type a name and the button type.
Form button types: (JavaScript, PHP, and Ajax).
Form button types
Deleting a button
To delete a button click on the icon next to the name of the button in the application menu (recycle bin).
Deleting a button
JavaScript
Button
2
Image
Link
Code Block
PHP
Button
3
Image
Link
Code Block
Link
Button

4
Image
Link
Setting up the Link

Link Parameters
5
Ajax
You can configure the display mode of the ajax button in Image, Button or Link.
Button
6
Setting up Ajax Button.
Image
Link
Code Block
Ajax button coding block.
In this block, you can use macros, Ajax code and JavaScript.
1
Master/detail form
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › MASTER/DETAIL FORM
This option allows you to create forms to update, on a single screen, tables with 1:N relationship.
New detail
In the application menu, you can create a new connection by clicking on the “New detail” option from Master/detail folder.
Creating a new detail.
Setting name and label

Interface to set link name and label. It is going to be displayed within the master application as a field. Name can not contain spaces nether special characters.
Interface to set link name and label.
Application list
Only the form types: Editable Grid or Editable Grid View can be used as an application detail. You must create the form detail application before you create the Master/Detail link,
because you will need to select the application during the link creation.
Interface to configure the detail application.
Parameters definition
In the left side column will be displayed all master form fields, and on the right side column are listed the detail form fields. You will need to associate the master form primary
keys with the detail form foreign keys. The 1:N relationship between the tables must to exist also within the database.
2
Interface to configure the link parameters.
Link properties
After the link creation, you can change the properties by clicking on the link and selecting the properties option.
Link properties.
Attributes
Form properties : Within this option you can select the buttons that are going to be displayed in the detail form.
Iframe properties : This option allows you to configure the iframe height and width (in pixels) where the detail form is going to be displayed.
Other properties
Editable Grid View : Allows you to select if the detail form will be an Editable Grid view or not.
Paging : Allows you to select your form detail paging. The options are:
Partial : This option will set page layout as partial, with a limited records per page, according to the quantity informed within the option below “Lines per page”
Total : This option will set the page to display all records in one page.
Lines per page : Here you can set the amount of records that are displayed in the detail form, you will need to set that just if paging is partial.
When deleting : This option allows you to choose how the form detail dependencies will be treated in a deletion. The options are:
Warn when there are dependencies : Displays an error message if there is dependency on the detail form record that is being deleted from the master form.
Delete dependencies without warning : Deletes all existing dependencies in the detail form without warning the user.
Edit link : This button will allow you to remake the link for application details.
1
Many-to-many relationship
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › MANY-TO-MANY RELATIONSHIP
Allows you to configure automatic update link tables in N:N relationships
Identification
This link will be handled as a field within the form application. We have to set the field name, data type, label and define if we will use a specific connection for this link. If decide
to you use a specific connection there will be a combo box with for you to seleact according to the connections available in the project.
Creating field to update link table.
Grid Information
In this step you need to inform the data source, this connection will be available for the user to select (lookup). It allows you to choose if the select command is manually
informed or if it will be based on a table.
Informing the select command.
If you check the option “Choose table” there will be 3 combo boxes for you to select according to the connections tables available in the project: table, key field and description.
Informing the select command based in a table..
Key : Value that will be stored in the table.
Description : Value that will be displayed in the update field.
SQL Select Statement

Select command informed by user or created based on a table, it is responsible for displaying the selection field contents.
Select command.
Lookup display
This option sets the display for the update field
Field object type.

2
Display key and description : If you want to display the code and the description informed in the select command.
Display Title : Displays attribute title (see attribute).
Separator : When the option Display key and description is checked as yes you must define a separator between the code and the description.
Object : Object field type that will be displayed in the update form. The types are: Select, Radio, Check box and Double Select.
Check and Uncheck All : Option to Check and Uncheck all records (available only for when Check box object is selected).
Columns : This option sets the number of columns (available only when the objects Check box or Radio is selected)
Height : This option sets the object height (available only when the objects Select or Double Select is selected).
Link Table
Link table.
This option sets the relationship table that will be updated.
Update table selection.
Relationship Keys
link key
This option sets the application fields that are related with the link table fields.
Setting values for the fields in the update table.
Lookup Field
Lookup field.
This option sets the field from the lookup table that is related to the link table.
Defining the foreign key relationship table..
Link Attributes
This option sets the values that are recorded in the fields of the link table that are not foreign key.
Setting the assignment field.
Attributes : It is written a value without the need for user data entry, it is an application field itself.
Data entry : It is written a value reported by the user, it is necessary to create a field and relate it by the select.
3
Search
Available only for Double Select object
Search in the double select field.
This option sets a filter for the link field.
![Search settings for the link field.][relacao_n_n_info_filtro_config] Search settings for the link field.
Limit of Records : Maximum number of records returned by the search.
Initial State : this option sets whether the form field load come Filled or empty.
Search Fields : This option sets whether the search will be displayed the code and/or Description.
General Display Settings

This option allows you to configure all general display settings from from field title and object.
Display settings.
Help Configuration
This feature allows it to be documented instructions for use of the application generated, that is, help end users to better understand the business rules of the system and the
best way to operate it.
Help Configuration
Attributes
Help Description : This option allows the inclusion of a text that will be displayed when the user to position the mouse over the field.
Help Type :
Popup : When choosing the type popup, help icon is displayed next to the field; that when clicked, will display what was reported in the attribute Describes Help.
Hint : When you pass the mouse cursor over the field, will help described in the field Describe Help.
Text : Next to the field will appear a text containing the help that was described in the field Describe Help.
1
Search
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › SEARCH
Settings
Attributes
Dynamic Search
Settings
Select Fields
QuickSearch
Quick Search is an option that allows to search data in various fields of the application, by using the text box in the toolbar.
2
Application running QuickSearch.
QuickSearch Settings
In the quicksearch settings are the following options:
QuickSearch Configuration Interface.
Button within the search - An option to inform if the search button will be in the text area of the box. Quicksearch show combo box - Displays a combo box if there is only one
option in the quicksearch. Quicksearch Watermark - Displays a Placeholder in the quicksearch. Quicksearch width - Defines the width of the Quicksearch field. Display the Quick
search old format - Displays in the old format with the selection of the fields in the Quick search. Search anywhere - If enabled, QuickSearch will search each part of the String for
the data informed in the field.
Select Fields
You need to define the fields that are part of the search in the Quicksearch Settings .
QuickSearch selecting fields Interface.
And you can select various criteria of the search.

3
QuickSearch search criteria configuration Interface.
You need to add the QuickSearch button in the toolbar in order to use it.
Fields
Field Data e Hora

1
Application
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › APPLICATION
Settings
Error Settings
Attributes
2
Navigation
Attributes
Messages
On this screen you can define the messages that will be displayed on each validation type (Insert, Update and Delete). You can also define messages for SQL errors.
Messages
No Records Message : Displays a customized message when the application has no records.
Primary key violation : Displays a customized message when the database’s primary key constraint is violated.
Unique key violation : Displays a customized message when the database’s unique constraint is violated.
Insertion Messages
Message After Insert : Displays a customized message after a record is inserted.
Message to Confirm Insert : Displays a customized message asking to confirm the insertion of a record.
Update Messages
Message After Update : Displays a customized message after a record is updated.
Message to Confirm Update : Displays a customized message asking to confirm the changes of a record.
Messages of delete
Message After Delete : Displays a customized message after a record is erased.
Message to confirm Delete : Displays a customized message asking to confirm the record deletion.
If you make no changes, the application will use the default values for messages. Those values can be configured in Locales -> Application Language.
Global Variables
3
Example:
Synchronize table
This process performs a comparison between the definitions of application fields and fields of the connected database table. If there is any change within the connected table,
such as adding a new field, exclusion, or a change in the data type, the changes will appear visible as in the image below:
Table synchronization interface.
After accessing the function from the link “Synchronize table” you will see a comparison table between the application fields (left table) and the database table fields (right table),
above image, the fields highlighted in “red” will be deleted of the application, the fields highlighted in “Green” will be inserted in the form, and the fields highlighted in “orange”
4
will be updated, so data type will be updated.
To rename a field in the database table, the table synchronization effect, by comparison, will be the same as deleting a field that existed in the application and the inclusion of a
new field.
1
1. Home
2. Applications
General Overview
New Link
Edit Link:
Capture Link:
Field Link:
Button Link:
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. Application link
Application link
Applications list
All:
By folder:
By type:
Fixed value:
No value:
Link properties
Open in an iframe:
Open in a parent:
Modal:

2

Open in an iframe.
3

Iframe’s height:
Iframe’s width:
Modal
application.
Height:
Width:
Form Properties

4
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. Capture link
Capture link
Applications list
All:
By folder:
By type:
Fixed value:
No value:
Link properties
Modal:
Modal
application.
Modal:
2
Height:
Width:
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. Link edit
Link edit
Editing Links.
Actions
Link
parameters.
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Form
4. Button link
Button link
All:
By folder:
By type:
Fixed value:
No value:
Link properties
Modal:

Hint for the link:

2

Hint for the link:
Title to the tab:
Hint to the tab:
Active tab icon:
Modal
application.
Height:
Width:
Hint for the link:
Form Properties

3
1
Programming
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › PROGRAMMING
ScriptCase has incorporated the concept of Object Oriented programming, using attributes, resources, methods and libraries. It is possible to create your own business rules in
applications, and by using these concepts you can reap huge rewards in terms of better organization and improved development.
Attributes
Attributes
Internal libraries
PHP Methods
Include Method.

2
JavaScript Methods
Methods are function or procedures declared by the developer, that helps when appling the routines. Using methods in the applications allows to reuse of the your code
throughout the application, optimizing the development experience.
JavaScript method creation Interface
Include Method.

3
Add the amount of variables: JavaScript method parameter definition
References allows to create a second name for a variable that you can use to read and modify the original variable’s information.

1
New Application
Application Data
SQL Select Statement - Display the select statement created after selecting the tables and fields. This field allows also to insert a previously created SQL, if the used tables are available in the
database selected in the connection.
Edit Fields
and datatypes.
Theme
automatically.
2
1
Settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TAB › SETTINGS
Tab settings interface.
Within the Tab settings you can configure the following attributes:
Title : Application title that will be displayed in the toolbar.
Friendly URL : This field allows you to customize the URL that will be called by the application, the allowed characters are the same available on regular URLs: a-z, A-Z, 0-9, -_. This option can
also be changed within Scriptcase Home interface, on the “Friendly URL” column from the applications grid.
Organization : Allows the applications to run inside folders via iframe or embedded on the tabs application.
Type : This option sets how the folders will be organized, it can be:
Folder on the Top : Displays the folders above the application.
Folder on the Bottom : Displays the folders below the application, next to the footer.
Folder on the Left : This option allows the folders to be aligned in the left, like a vertical menu.
Folder on the Right : This option allows the folders to be aligned in the right, like a vertical menu.
Menu on the Top : This option is similar to “Folder on the Top”, but its visual schema has the menu style.
Menu on the Bottom : This option is similar to “Folder on the Bottom”, but its visual schema has the menu style. .
Menu on the Left : This option is similar to “Folder on the Left”, but its visual schema has the menu style.
Menu on the Right : This option is similar to “Folder on the Right”, but its visual schema has the menu style.
Side by Side : Display all applications in folders, one next to the other.
Table Width : Main table size.
Measure Unit : The unit used by table size. It can be: Pixel or percentage..
Tab Alignment : This option sets the tab alignment position. It can be: center, left or right.
Application alignment : This option sets the application alignment position, It can be: center, left, or right.
Exit : This option allows you to define how the exit will be presented in the application, the options:
Button on the bottom of the page;
Folder;
Button in the toolbar
In view.
Exit Icon : This option allow you to select an icon for the “Exit” option in the tab. Use the image manage to select or import a customized image.
1
Folder settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TAB › FOLDER SETTINGS
You will use the folder settings options to manage each folder link to an existing application.
Folder Settings Interface.
Add a folder : To create a tab, click in ‘Add’ and fill these fields: * Label : Application name that will be displayed in the tab or menu (examples: Personal Data, Finance Data,
etc.); * Image : Choose the image that will be used for this tab;
Update : Double click on the folder name (left column / list of folders) and then update the data. Finally, click on the ‘update’ button.
Clean : Double click on the folder name (left column / list of folders) and then delete the item.
Remove : This button when clicked, clears all existing folders in the box (the box located in the left).
1
Application settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TAB › APPLICATION SETTINGS
In this folder you can set which applications will be part of the tabs implemented, as follows:
Application Settings Interface
Initially you must click on the tab that you need to update. You have the options:
Add : Click “Add” button, and then the following screen will be displayed for selection of applications.
Edit : Select the application for the link and then click the “Edit” button. The following steps are the application selection and setting the size of the iframe, as requested in the process to add
applications.
Remove : To remove just select the application you want to delete in the folder, and then click “Remove”.
Adding and editing applications
Select the application to be placed in the folder, and click the continue button, you must see the screen below:
Application Link Interface.
Then the following screen will be displayed to complement with the link parameters to the selected application:
Parameters set Interface..
Iframe width : Width set to be used inside the folder to display the application window, leaving 100% the application will be adjusted more easily.
Iframe height : Height set to be used in the iframe to display the application window, if the it is too small, the application will create a scroll bar to the window.
Reload Iframe : When a folder is selected the applications contained in the same run and the result is displayed, with this option turned on “Yes” when you click on the folder that contains
the application cache is created with the page loaded, this cache will be used if the user browse for other folders and return to the folder that has the application with this option enabled.
Parameters / Value : For each parameter of the application we are putting in the folder, there are three options to choose:
Variable : Global variable name where the content will be retrieved.
Value : Content to be loaded into the parameter at run time.
Empty : For this parameter the content will not be the responsibility of the Tab application
1
PDF settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TAB › PDF SETTINGS
PDF Settings Interface.
Create PDF : This option allows to define if the application will have output in PDF format.
PDF Orientation : This option sets the direction of the reports generated in PDF, it can be: portrait or landscape.
PDF Format : Pages format of the reports generated in PDF, such as Letter, A4, A5, etc.
Open PDF Directly : This option indicates whether the application will allow us to generate the PDF directly via button or through a link to the PDF.
1
Security
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TAB › SECURITY
Use Security
Url output of the
security
Request password
just once
URL
1
Log
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TAB › LOG
1
Layout
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TAB › LAYOUT
Layout Settings
Configuration
Header & Footer

Header
2
Footer
1
Application
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TAB › APPLICATION
General data
Settings interface.
In this folder you can set the application configuration attributes, such as:
Application Code : Code for internal use of ScriptCase. Should start by a letter.
Connection : Connection name of the used by ScriptCase to access the tables. The user can select it.
Default Profile : Default profile to be loaded into the production environment.
Language : Data formatting based on the regional settings.
Charset : Share location with other applications based on the values in the session.
Share Theme Variable : Shares themes with other applications based on the values in the session.
Exit URL :URL to which the user will be redirected to exit the application.
Folder : Folder where the application will be stored in the work group. The user can select it.
Description : Application description.
HelpCase Link : Using this option you can associate HelpCase files to your application.
Global variables
Example:
2

1
New Application
Theme
automatically.
1
Settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › DASHBOARD › SETTINGS
General Overview
The Dashboard application is focused on creating components where you can visualize several applications at the same time.
With the dashboard application, it is possible to create, for example, a screen to visualize several graphs, and also, with the addition of the Index Widget create comparisons,
show sum of values, among other functionalities.
On the home screen, you can also configure where the Widgets will be displayed, they can be easily dragged and mounted according to the user’s need.
At the homepage you can see the Widgets and some options.
ADD LINK WIDGET
This is the option to create a link widget
ADD INDEX WIDGET
This is the option for creating an index widget
And within these, there are the options for:
PENCIL
Used to edit Widget settings.
TRASH
Used to Delete a Widget.
Besides that when the mouse is over the Widget, we can see a button to change the size of it.
Add Link Widget

This option allows any application that exists in the project to be added to a Widget.
Link
To create the link enter the Widget and the application, it is necessary only to click on the field “Connection”, then it will be shown a list with all the applications existing in the
project.
Toolbar
In the toolbar settings, it is possible to configure the buttons that will appear in the toolbar of the application that is configured in connection.
The toolbar options will be displayed according to the application being connected, that is, according to the toolbar of each application.
Add Index Widget

This option allows you to add to an Index Widget based on a database table.
2
Index
To create an Index Widget you need to make a few settings.
TITLE
In this option we can define a title for the Widget for a better visualization of what we want to display.
ICON
In this option we can define an icon to be shown in the Widget.
ALIGNMENT
In this option we can define the horizontal position that the data in the Widget will be shown, we have three options:
Left: The left side of the Widget will be shown.

Centralized: Will be shown in the center of the Widget.
Right: This will be shown to the right of the Widget.
CONNECTION
In this option it is allowed to choose which connection will be used in the Index Widget, each Widget can be configured with different connections.
TA B L E N A M E
In this option it is allowed to choose which table will be used in the Index Widget.
After choosing the table, will be shown some more options, they are:
METRIC FIELD
In this option it is allowed to select a table field to perform a metric, as in chart application. However it is possible to make some comparisons according to the period defined in
the next option.
PERIOD FIELD
In this option it is allowed to select a field from the table so that the data chosen in the previous option can be compared.
Formatting
In this option you can configure the formatting of the metric and period that will be shown in the execution of the filter.
Metric Formatting
M E T R I C F O R M AT T I N G A S
Allows you to define the type of data that the metric will be shown, there are three options:
Internal: The index metric will be shown as a value of integer type. Decimal: The index metric will be shown as a value of type Decimal. Moeda : The metric of the index will be
shown as a value of type Modal.
USE REGIONAL SETTINGS
Lets you define whether the metric will follow the settings that were defined in the Regional Settings.
DECIMALS
Allows you to set how many decimal places will be in the metric index, however this will only be available when the metric format is Decimal or Currency.
COMPLETE WITH ZEROS
Allows you to set whether the value will be completed with zeros when set to Decimal or Currency.
F O R M AT T H E V A L U E I N S C A L E S
Lets you set whether the number in the index will appear in a scale or the whole number. If Yes is chosen, the number instead of 10.000 will appear with 10 k value.
Period Formatting
The options are shown according to the setting in Feed Function which is set to Index, so the setting can vary between:
3
USE REGIONAL SETTINGS
Allows you to set whether the period will follow the settings that were set in the regional settings.
D I S P L AY T H E N A M E O F T H E M O N T H
Lets you to set whether to display the name of the month.
PREFIX FOR SEMESTER, FOUR-MONTH, QUARTER, TWO-MONTH, WEEK.
Lets you inform a [lang][lang_sc] or a title that the developer wants to appear.
D I S P L AY N A M E O F T H E D AY
Lets you set whether to show the name of the day.
Filter
Allows you to perform the filter configuration that will be displayed when the Index Widget is running.
Metric filter
FILTER CONDITIONS
In this option we can define the condition of the filter so that the information regarding that metric is shown, and it is not possible to change that at run time.
Period Filter
D AT E R A N G E S
In this option we can define the condition of the filter so that the information regarding that period is shown, and it is not possible to change at run time.
R E L AT I V E P E R I O D
We must define which periods are available for use in the filter.
Another option referring only to the relative period is the possibility of creating conditions with relative periods customized directly within the filter interface.
The available values are separated by tabs:
Year: Sets the year used in the filter. Quarter: Defines the quarters used in the filter. Month: Sets the usage of the months of the year. Week: Sets the use of the weeks of the
year. Day : Sets the use of the days of the month.
U S E F I E L D TA B L E F I L T E R
Allows you to create filters from table fields.
Layout
In this option you can configure the layout of the map that will appear in the Widget.
INDEX BACKGROUND
It allows you to set a background color for the widget content.
TITLE SOURCE
Allows you to configure the font to be displayed in the index title, in this option there are four more options:
Family/source type Font size Color of the font The font style
SOURCE OF POSITIVE INDEX
Permite configurar a fonte que será exibida no índice quando positivo, nessa opção há mais quatro opções:
4
N E G AT I V E I N D E X S O U R C E
Allows you to configure the font that will be displayed in the index when negative, in this option there are four more options:
SOURCE OF THE NEUTRAL INDEX
Allows you to configure the font to be displayed in the index when neutral, in this option there are four more options:
SOURCE OF THE DIMENSION INDEX
Allows you to configure the font size, in this option there are four more options:
SOURCE OF POSITIVE METRICS
Allows you to configure the font that will be displayed in the metric when positive, in this option there are four more options:
N E G AT I V E M E T R I C S O U R C E
Allows you to configure the font that will be displayed in the metric when negative, in this option there are four more options:
NEUTRIC METRIC SOURCE
Allows you to configure the font that will be displayed in the metric when neutral, in this option there are four more options:
Properties
Allows you to configure some of the features that will be available at run time, these are:
COMPACT MODE
VIEW WIDGET HEADER
Enables or disables the running widget header.
REMOVE
Enables or disables the button to delete the widget at run time.
MOVE
Enables or disables the option that allows widgets to be moved at runtime.

5
MAXIMIZE
Enables or disables the option to maximize the widget.
EXPAND
Enables or disables the button to expand the widget.
RECHARGE TIME
Allows you to define in seconds a time for the Widget to be reloaded, thus reloading the information.
1
Security
HOME › APPLICATIONS › DASHBOARD › SECURITY
Use Security
Url output of the
security
Request password
just once
URL
1
Log
HOME › APPLICATIONS › DASHBOARD › LOG
1
Layout
HOME › APPLICATIONS › DASHBOARD › LAYOUT
Layout Settings
Configuration
Header & Footer

Header
2
Footer
1
Application
HOME › APPLICATIONS › DASHBOARD › APPLICATION
General data
Settings interface.
In this folder you can set the application configuration attributes, such as:
Application Code : Code for internal use of ScriptCase. Should start by a letter.
Connection : Connection name of the used by ScriptCase to access the tables. The user can select it.
Default Profile : Default profile to be loaded into the production environment.
Language : Data formatting based on the regional settings.
Charset : Share location with other applications based on the values in the session.
Share Theme Variable : Shares themes with other applications based on the values in the session.
Exit URL :URL to which the user will be redirected to exit the application.
Folder : Folder where the application will be stored in the work group. The user can select it.
Description : Application description.
HelpCase Link : Using this option you can associate HelpCase files to your application.
Global variables
1
New Application
Theme
automatically.
1
Settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › SETTINGS
Layout and Behavior
1
Edit fields
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › EDIT FIELDS
Fields
Label
Datatype
New
Update
Read-Only
Required
PK
DB value (Insert)
DB value (Update)
Page
Blocks
2
Display
Display Interface.
Attributes
1
Fields positioning
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › FIELDS POSITIONING
Field Positioning
1
Toolbar
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › TOOLBAR
Toolbar
DESKTOP
MOBILE
EXPORT:
U P D AT E :
OTHERS:

2
S E P A R AT O R :
Toolbar Mobile
Mobile toolbar.
Bottons Group
3
Buttons Settings
4
BUTTON:
LABEL:
HINT:
SHORTCUT KEY:
Allows defining the shortcut key that will be related to the button.
Application Hotkeys
Options
JUMP TO:
RECORDS BY PAGE:
HELP BY BLOCK:
GENERAL HELP:
TOOLBAR BUTTONS:
1
SQL
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › SQL
tables (SQL).
1
JavaScript
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › JAVASCRIPT
Attributes
Edit JavaScript
OnClick Example
}
}
OnBlur Example
2
{
}
OnChange Example

}
OnFocus
the purchase.
{
}
OnMouseOver Example
onMouseOut Example
1
Segurança
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › SEGURANÇA
Use Security
Url output of the
security
Request password
just once
URL
Captcha
reCAPTCHA
reCAPTCHA sample:
2
Light :
Dark :
Audio:
Image :

Normal :
Compact:

1
Log
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › LOG
1
Authentications
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › AUTHENTICATIONS
Scriptcase can link its applications using OAuth methods. These methods allow you to integrate a Scriptcase project with the following data sources:
Facebook
Facebook fields authentication interface.
When you create a button Facebook authentication, you must fill in the fields:
App ID : Facebook application ID. This ID will be provided by Facebook Developer’s page.
Secret : Secret key provided by Facebook, so the application can be executed.
Method return : Method that will be performed when Facebook service returns the requested data. You will have to create that method according to our validation rules, using the option
“Programming > PHP Methods”
For building applications, visit: Facebook app development
Twitter
Twitter fields authentication interface.
When you create a button “Twitter Authentication”, you must fill in the fields:
Key : Twitter application ID. This ID will be provided by Twitter Developer’s page .
Secret : Secret key provided by Twitter, so the application can be executed.
Method return : Method that will be performed when Twitter service returns the requested data. You will have to create that method according to our validation rules, using the option
For building applications, visit: Twitter app development
Google
Google fields authentication interface.
Application name : Name of the application created on Google+.
Client ID : Google+ application ID. This ID will be provides by Google Developer’s page.
Secret : Secret key provided by Google+, so the application can be executed.
Method return : Method that will be performed when Google+ service returns the requested data. You will have to create that method according to our validation rules, using the option
For building applications, visit: Google+ app development
PayPal
2
PayPal fields authentication interface.
To create the integration with PayPal, you must fill in these fields:
PayPal URL : This URL can be to the PayPal SandBox or to the real PayPal API. The SandBox is used to perform tests with the application before applying the integration in a real environment.
Id : PayPal ID to receive the sales money. Usually the registered email as business.
Order number : Order Number to be stored in PayPal. Also used to treat the receipt of the IPN in order to identify and process the order as paid.
Customized field :Custom field to be stored in PayPal. Also used to treat the receipt of the IPN in order to identify and process the order as paid, if you want to do some additional checking.
Variable with the description : Using this field you can place the Global variable that will contain the description to be sent to PayPal.
Variable with the Total amount. : Method to be ran when PayPal service return the data requested.
Variable with the currency type : Use to specify the payment currency. If the currency variable is not included, the currency defaults to USD.
PayPal Method : Method that will be called after the User complete the PayPal transaction. You will have to create that method according to our validation rules, using the option
Method Cancel : Method to be executed if the user cancels the PayPal transaction. You will have to create that method according to our validation rules, using the option “Programming > PHP
Methods”
Method IPN : Method that will be called by web service from PayPal to confirm the payment of a transaction. This method is called by web service and it has no HTML output to the end-user.
You will have to create that method according to our validation rules, using the option “Programming > PHP Methods”
For PayPal configuration, please visit: Configuring PayPal credentials
The variables list returned by the PayPal API can be found below:
[mc_gross]
[invoice]
[protection_eligibility]
[address_status]
[payer_id]
[tax]
[address_street]
[payment_date]
[payment_status]
[charset]
[address_zip]
[first_name]
[mc_fee]
[address_country_code]
[address_name]
[notify_version]
[custom]
[payer_status]
[business]
[address_country]
[address_city]
[quantity]
[verify_sign]
[payer_email]
[txn_id]
[payment_type]
[last_name]
[address_state]
[receiver_email]
[payment_fee]
[receiver_id]
3
[txn_type]
[item_name]
[mc_currency]
[item_number]
[residence_country]
[test_ipn]
[handling_amount]
[transaction_subject]
[payment_gross]
[shipping]
[ipn_track_id]
1
1. Home
2. Applications
General Overview
Example:
Virtual field

Quantity:
Example:
Field’s inclusion
Label
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
4. Text
Text
General Settings
Type of Data
Label
Customer Name.
Watermark
Inicial Value(type)
Show HTML Content
Validation Image
Password Field
Save Variable
Variable Name
Field Mask
X
the mask.

2
Telephone number

Phone Number +99 99 9999 - 9999 123456789012 +12 34 5678 - 9012
Validate with mask
Hidden Field
Label Field
Disable Field
HTML Type
SQL Type
Values Format
Lookup Settings

3
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
Multiple Lines Text

General Settings
Values Format
Lookup Settings

Display Settings
CSS of the Title

2
CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
4. Integer
Integer
General Settings
Data type:
Label:
Watermark
Validation Image
Use slider:
1, 2, 5, 10… N.
Field Mask Input:
X
the mask.

Phone Number +99 99 9999 - 9999 123456789012 +12 34 5678 - 9012
Validate with Mask

2
Record Variable
Variable Name
Hidden Field
Label Field
label.
Disable field
HTML Type
Tipo SQL:
Values Format
format.
Digit grouping:
Maximum Size:
Minimum Value:
Maximum Value:
Groupping:
Negative sign:
Accept:
Display Calculator:
Use Spin:
3
spin.
Lookup Settings
Example:
Lookup Methods
Select Command:
Multiple Options:
Delimiter:
Use the lookup in:
Default Value:
Separated By:
Lookup Types

4

Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married M 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study ST 3 2
Sportes SP 3 2
Reading LE 3 2

order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Leisure
8 Reading
16 Music
follows:

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Leisure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Leisure
8 Reading
16 Music
Label:
Include Button:
Alter Button:
Delete Button:

5
Clean Button:
It cleans the fiels
Save Button:
Use the lookup in:
Default Value:
Separated By:
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
6
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
4. Decimal
Decimal
General Settings
Values Format
Lookup Settings

Display Settings
CSS of the Title

2
CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
4. Currency
Currency
General Settings
Values Format
Lookup Settings

Display Settings
CSS of the Title

2
CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
4. HTML Image
HTML Image
General Settings
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
2
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
4. Label
Label
General Settings
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.
2

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
4. Card
Card
General Settings
*
user.
Examples of Masks

Numbers)
Lookup Settings

Display Settings
2
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
4. Card type
Card type
General Settings
Values Format
Lookups Settings

Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
2
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
4. E-mail
E-mail
General Settings

Values Format
Lookup Settings

Display Settings
CSS of the Title

2
CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
4. URL
URL
General Settings

Values Format
Lookup Settings

Display Settings
CSS of the Title

2
CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
4. HTML Color
HTML Color
General Settings
Values Format
Lookup Settings

Display Settings
CSS of the Title

2
CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
4. HTML Editor
HTML Editor
General Settings
Toolbar
Properties
Database Value
Trigger.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
2
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
4. Localization
Localization
General Settings
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

2

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
4. Theme
Theme
General Settings
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

2

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
4. Date
Date
General Settings
Values Format
and Day.
Minimum Date :
Maximum Date :
Lookup Settings

Display Settings
2
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
4. Time
Time
General Settings
Values Format
attributes.
Lookup Settings

Display Settings
CSS of the Title

2
CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
4. Date and time
Date and time

General Settings
Values Format
attributes.
Lookup Settings

Display Settings
CSS of the Title

2
CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
Image (File Name)

General Settings
).
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings

2
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control

General Settings

existing record.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings

2
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
4. Select
Select
General Settings

Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
automatically.

2
Single Value :
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

3
saved by the user.
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings

4
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
4. Double Select
Double Select
General Settings
Lookup Settings

delimiter then (;).
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
2
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
4. CheckBox
CheckBox
General Settings
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
Single Value :
2
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
saved by the user.
3
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

4

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
4. Radio
Radio
General Settings
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
list Man.
saved by the user.
2
Ajax Settings
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
3
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
4. Profile
Profile
General Settings
Profile field configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Profile, it will display a combo with the profiles setup in the project properties.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

2

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
4. Menu Links
Menu Links
General Settings
Menu Links field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it is defined as Menu Links, you can define links to be listed in the application.
Values Format
Values Format Interface.
Menu Items : Control the Insert, Update and Delete the items of the menu.
Label : Defines the label for the menu item.
Link : Defines the external link that’ll be called when clicking the item.
Icon : Defines the icons that’ll be displayed beside the link.
Insert : Insert a new item to the menu.
Update : Update the selected item.
Delete : Delete the selected item.
Clear : Clears the data of the selected item.
Clear All : Removes all items form the menu.
Display Mode : Defines how the menu items will display, having the types: Select , Radio and Link:
Select
Radio
Link
Hide Label : When using the display mode, you can enable or disable the label display.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings

2
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
Text Auto-Complete
General Settings

Values Format
Lookup Settings
Interface.
Ajax Processing
2
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
General Settings
Values Format
Lookup Settings
Interface.
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
2
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
4. Signature
Signature
General Settings
Pen color:
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
4. Rating
Rating
General Settings
Data type
Label
Subtitle
Amount of icons
Enabled icon and
Enabled icon
Disabled icon
Enabled icon.
Save variable
Variable Name
HTML Type
SQL Type

2
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
Layout
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › LAYOUT
Pages
Pages Settings
2
Attributes

Blocks
current one.

3
Attributes
Block
Title
Label

Fields
Organization
Create New Block
click on Create.
Attributes
Edit Blocks
save.
4
Attributes
Layout Settings
5
Configuration
Header & Footer

Header
6
Footer
1
Events
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › EVENTS
Within the events you can include Scriptcase global and local variables, libraries and macros, PHP, JavaScript, HTML and CSS codes.
onApplicationInit
OnScriptInit
onLoad
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
1
Ajax Events
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › AJAX
EVENTS
OnClick
Selecting a field
OnChange
Selecting a field
OnBlur
Selecting a field
2
OnFocus
Selecting a field
1
Buttons
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › BUTTONS
In addition to the applications buttons, you can also create new manual buttons. These buttons will be placed on the application toolbar.
Creating a button
To create a new button, click the “new button” and type a name and the button type.
Form button types: (JavaScript, PHP, and Ajax).
Form button types
Deleting a button
Deleting a button
JavaScript
Button
2
Image
Link
Code Block
PHP
Button
3
Image
Link
Code Block
Link
Button

4
Image
Link
Setting up the Link

Link Parameters
5
Ajax
Button
6
Image
Link
Code Block
1
Application
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › APPLICATION
Settings
Error Settings
Attributes
2
Navigation
Attributes
Messages
Messages
Insertion Messages
Update Messages
Messages of delete
Global variables
3
Example:

1
1. Home
2. Applications
General Overview
New Link
Edit Link:
Capture Link:
Field Link:
Button Link:
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
4. Application link
Application link
Applications list
All:
By folder:
By type:
Fixed value:
No value:
Link properties
Open in an iframe:
Open in a parent:
Modal:

2

Open in an iframe.
3

Iframe’s height:
Iframe’s width:
Modal
application.
Height:
Width:
Form Properties

4
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
4. Button link
Button link
All:
By folder:
By type:
Fixed value:
No value:
Link properties
Modal:

Hint for the link:

2

Hint for the link:
Title to the tab:
Hint to the tab:
Active tab icon:
Modal
application.
Height:
Width:
Hint for the link:
Form Properties

3
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Control
4. Link edit
Link edit
Editing Links.
Actions
Link
parameters.
1
Programming
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › PROGRAMMING
Attributes
Attributes
Internal libraries
PHP Methods
Include Method.

2
JavaScript Methods
Include Method.

3

1
User HTML
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › USER HTML
This option is available in the Control application if the item Set the template HTML manually template is selected when creating the application.
To use the custom HTML in Control, depends on specific Markups so that the Scriptcase can include its control and validation routines.
Check
2
Clicking the Check button, it verifies the structure to confirm which Markups were used in the content of the HTML.
When clicking on the Markups of the Check item, a modal window is displayed with tips for using the same Markup.
The Markups are divided in 3 different categories:
TIPS
These Markups are not required, however, they are used to import files from libraries, images and other features.
REQUIRED
These Markups are of obligatory use in the item HTML. If they are not used, certain internal Scriptcase routines will not be executed.
Optional
Like the category name, these Markups are optional, not influencing the correct execution of the application.
HTML
3
In this item, we can insert the desired HTML, remembering to use the required Markups.
The control.js and control.css files refer to the contents of the JavaScript and CSS items respectively. By default, they are automatically created by the application, by default:
appName.js and appName.css.
CSS
In this item, we can use our custom CSS to take effect in the HTML code used in the previous item.
JavaScript
In this item, we can use our custom JavaScript to take effect in the code HTML used in the previous item.
4
External Libraries
In this option, we can define if we will use the files . HTML , . CSS and . JS from an external library or if we will use the code HTML, CSS and JavaScript of the items of the
application itself.
Do not use external library
This option defines that the HTML,
CSS, and JavaScript code to be used, come from the current application’s HTML, CSS, and JavaScript items.
Use external library
When selecting this option, we define the use of external libraries that contain the HTMl, CSS and JavaScript to be used by the application. The HTML, CSS and JavaScript
items will be disabled.
Preview
You will see how the application will appear after its generation.
Create Fields
5
If you use field Markup before the field is created in the menu item Fields > New Field, and the item ( Create Fields) is pressed, a modal window is displayed to synchronize the
fields, after confirmation, the fields will be displayed in the Fields menu item.
When adding fields from the menu item Campos> New Field, Scriptcase will automatically insert new mandatory Markups related to the newly created field to be used in the
HTML item.
1
New Application
Application Data
Theme
automatically.
2
1
OnExecute
HOME › APPLICATIONS › BLANK › ONEXECUTE
In this menu is entered the PHP code that will be executed by the application.
OnExecute.
OnExecute : This event allows to entry PHP commands, JavaScript, CSS, HTML, ScriptCase macros and libraries.
1
SQL
HOME › APPLICATIONS › BLANK › SQL
In blank applications you can use one connection to access the database by default but as in other application types (Forms, Grids and Control ) you can run SQL commands
using other connections different from the native application connection.
SQL Settings.
Connection : This option allows you to choose one of your project databases connections.
1
Security
HOME › APPLICATIONS › BLANK › SECURITY
Use Security
Url output of the
security
Request password
just once
URL
1
Log
HOME › APPLICATIONS › BLANK › LOG
1
Application
HOME › APPLICATIONS › BLANK › APPLICATION
Settings
Error Settings
Attributes
2
Global Variables
Example:

1
Programming
HOME › APPLICATIONS › BLANK › PROGRAMMING
Attributes
Attributes
Internal libraries
PHP Methods
Include Method.

2

1
New Application
Theme
automatically.
1
Settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › MENU › SETTINGS
Desktop
The menu settings allow to define the attributes of the application display, according to the following:
Menu configuration Interface.
Attributes
Horizontal Alignment of the Menu : Defines the horizontal alignment of the menu (Left, Center, Right).
Vertical Alignment of the items : Defines the vertical alignment of the menu items (Top, Center, Bottom).
Horizontal Alignment of the Items : Defines the horizontal alignment of the menu items (Left, Center, Right).
Toolbar Horizontal Alignment : Defines the horizontal alignment of the toolbar items (Left, Center, Right).
Friendly URL : Allows to define a name for the URL that’s going to be called by the application. The characters allowed in the URL are(a-z, A-Z, 0-9). The Friendly URL can be informed on
the initial screen of the project, where the applications are listed, on the “Friendly URL” column.
Menu Width : Defines the width of the menu in pixels or percentage.
Menu Height : Defines the height of the menu in pixels or percentage.
Iframe Width : Defines the width of the Iframe (Where the applications will open in) in pixels or percentage.
Iframe Height : Defines the height of the Iframe (Where the applications will open in) in pixels or percentage.
Hide menu items : When enabled and used with the security module, it’ll hide the items that the user doesn’t have permission to access, instead of only disabling them.
Hide the menu’s toolbar : When enabled and used with the security module, it’ll hide the toolbar that the user doesn’t have permission to access, instead of only disabling them.
Use theme background : If defined as Yes, it’ll use the background theme of the menu, in case it’s defined as No, it’ll use the background defined in the project.
Scroll bar : Enables the scroll bar in the Iframe.
Select Language : Allows to select the language in the menu bar.
Select Theme : Allows to select the theme in the menu bar.
Alignment of Theme and Language : Defines the horizontal alignment of the language and theme combo boxes.
Always show the items : Displays the application items, even though they don’t exist, or haven’t been generated yet.
Hide menu : Enables the option to hide the menu.
Navigation
The menu navigation settings allow to define the attributes of the tabs and the navigation path, according to the following:
2
Menu Navigation configurations Interface.
Attributes
Open items in a tab : When enabled, the items will always open as tabs in a horizontal bar beneath the menu.
Navigating through Applications with tabs.
Tab context menu : Allows you to manage the open tabs. Application with a tab context.
Minimum tab width : Allows to inform the min width of all the tabs.
Maximum tab width : Allows to inform the max width of all the tabs.
Show navigation breadcrumb : Displays the path containing the application in the tab. Navigation path Display in the
Application.
Use default icons in the item : When enabled, this option displays the standard icons for each item.
Use default icons in the tab : When enabled, this option displays the standard icons for each tab.
Default Application : Select a default application that’s going to be initiated when the menu opens.
Show initial app as tab : Allows to open the default application in a tab.
Mobile
Mobile menu configuration Interface.
Hide menu : Enables the option to hide menu when view from a mobile device.
Menu’s initial mode : Inform the initial mode of the menu, otherwise it’ll always be visible.
Hide menu by clicking an item : When enabled, defines that when an item is clicked it’ll hide the menu.
Float menu : Hides the icon to open the menu or always displays it.
1
Menu items
HOME › APPLICATIONS › MENU › MENU ITEMS
Menu items settings

In this screen the user menu structure, indicating which applications will be called. Presents the following attributes, which should be completed by the user:
On mobile devices, if the menu item has sub-items and link, the link will be scorned to display the sub-items.
Menu settings interface.
Label : Title for the application within the menu. Type a fixed title or use the Scriptcase language system to create lang variable for these names, according to the languages used in the
project.
Link : Here you have to enter the application name that will be linked to the menu item. You can also click the search button and select from the application list. This link can also be an
external URL.
Hint : Descriptive text that helps the user to identify the application. It is an optional field.
Icon : Image that will be displayed as an icon in the menu item. The user can click the search button to select the image from the Scriptcase Image Manage. It is an optional field.
Active tab icon : Image that will be displayed as an icon in the menu item when active. The user can click the search button to select the image from the Scriptcase Image Manage. It is an
optional field. If you leave it blank Scriptcase adds a default image.
Inactive tab icon : Image that will be displayed as an icon in the menu item when inactive. The user can click the search button to select the image from the Scriptcase Image Manage. It is an
Target : This option sets how the application will be displayed, it can be targeted as: Same window, Another window or leave (it will log the user out from the system).
Resources for menu items creation

Insert item : This option add items to the menu.
Insert Sub-Item : This option add sub-items to the menu, you might select the main item before to add the sub-items within the selected main item. You can also manage the sub-item
position using the arrows.
Remove : This option deletes the item/sub-item, you can select the items before and then remove.
Import applications : You can use this option to call an application to attach to the item. It will open the project application list.
Move up : This option allows you to move up a menu item or sub-item.
Move down : This option allows you to move down a menu item or sub-item.
Move left : This option allows you to move a menu item or sub-item to the left. You can use it to organize the menu hierarchy.
Move right : This option allows you to move a menu item or sub-item to the right. You can use it to organize the menu hierarchy.
Importing the Applications

Importing the applications is easy and fast. Allows the user to select from a list of application, the application the desired to import. After selecting the application, you just need
to organize the levels of the menu, using the positioning buttons.
Application Import Interface.
After selecting the application, the link property will receive the application name. View the image below.
2

1
Toolbar
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TOOLBAR
Settings
Nesta interface você poderá construir uma barra de atalhos na aplicação de Menu que possibilite a ligação entre aplicações através de botões, ícones e links de texto.
I T E M S C R E AT I O N ( I C O N S I N T H E M E N U L I S T T O P ) :
Insert Item Add a new item in the menu toolbar.
Separator Insert Add a separator in the toolbar.
Remove Removes a menu item. Select the item or sub-item and click in the button to remove.
MOVING ITEMS (ARROWS):
Move Up Moves an item or sub-item from the toolbar up.
Move Down Moves down an item or sub-item from the toolbar.
Move Left Moves an item or sub-item from the toolbar to the left.
Move Right Moves an item or sub-item from the toolbar to the left.
SETTINGS ITEMS:
Type Allows inserting a link, a button or an icon.
Label Allows defining the application title that will be displayed in the menu.
Link Allows selecting the application through his name or by a link.
Icon Allows selecting the image that will be displayed as an icon.
Hint Allows typing a description text to help the identification of the application by the user.
Display This option allows choosing if the item will show only texts, only images or both.
Image Position Allows defining if the image will be displayed in the right or left side.
Target Allows defining how to display th applications: In the same window or in a new one.
1
Security
HOME › APPLICATIONS › SECURITY
Use Security
Url output of the
security
Request password
just once
URL
1
Log
HOME › APPLICATIONS › LOG
1
Events
HOME › APPLICATIONS › EVENTS
onApplicationInit
onExecute
This event runs when the item of the menu is clicked or an application is selected.
onLoad
1
Layout
HOME › APPLICATIONS › LAYOUT
Layout Settings
Configuration
Header & Footer

Header
2
Footer
Menu structure
Using this option you can change the entire menu structure.
3
Drag the selected option to the “Menu Items” area to create a new “Layer” where you can add the contents. You can increase or decrease the layer width and also change its
positioning within the “Menu items” area.
After adding the layer and customize its size you can click on the “pencil” icon to edit the layer options or click on the “trash” icon to delete it .
Layer editing
Name : Use this option to set a name for the layer.
Width : Using this option you can manually change the layer size, using percentage. You can also set this value in pixels, however to do that you will need to change the “Menu Width” option
within the Menu “Settings”, this value comes in percentage as default from Scriptcase.
Display : This option will set whether to display the layer or not.
Alignment : Using this option you can change the alignment of all layer contents in the Left, Right or Center.
Type : Using this option you select the data type that is going to be displayed in each row of the layer.
Title : If you use the option title it will be displayed the application title, according to the value set on “Application Title” within the menu “Header & Footer”.
Date : Using this option you can display a date within the layer, using different dates format. Example: d-m-Y
Image : Using this option you will be able to add an image to your Menu, once selected there will be a link for you to access the Image Manager from Scriptcase to choose a customized
image from your project or upload from your computer.
Value : Here you can inform any text or you to user a global variable from Scriptcase to add dynamic values to the layer such as the logged user, for example: [usr_login].
Library : Using this option you select an External Library from Scriptcase. You can import or create libraries using the option “Tools » External Libraries” from the main menu.
Method : Using this option you can select an application method to apply to the layer. A new method can be created within the menu application using the option “PHP Programming”
within the menu “Programming”
Font : Using this option you select a font family from the available in the list. Change the font size and set the text as bold and/or italic.
Background color : Here you change the background color of each row of the layer content.
Font color : In this option you can change the font color that appears in the layer.
Delete : Using this option you can delete the layer line.
Add : Using this option you add another line to the layer.
Close : You close the edit screen of the layer.
Save : You save all changes made to the layer.

1
Application
HOME › APPLICATIONS › APPLICATION
Settings
Error Settings
Attributes
2
Convert menu type
Menu conversion Interface.
Convert the Menu to a Tree Menu or vice versa.
*It doesn’t change any of the applications original configuration, with the exception of the format.
1
Programming
HOME › APPLICATIONS › PROGRAMMING
Attributes
Attributes
Internal libraries
PHP Methods
Include Method.

2

1
Toolbar
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TOOLBAR
Settings
Nesta interface você poderá construir uma barra de atalhos na aplicação de Menu que possibilite a ligação entre aplicações através de botões, ícones e links de texto.
I T E M S C R E AT I O N ( I C O N S I N T H E M E N U L I S T T O P ) :
Insert Item Add a new item in the menu toolbar.
Separator Insert Add a separator in the toolbar.
Remove Removes a menu item. Select the item or sub-item and click in the button to remove.
MOVING ITEMS (ARROWS):
Move Up Moves an item or sub-item from the toolbar up.
Move Down Moves down an item or sub-item from the toolbar.
Move Left Moves an item or sub-item from the toolbar to the left.
Move Right Moves an item or sub-item from the toolbar to the left.
SETTINGS ITEMS:
Type Allows inserting a link, a button or an icon.
Label Allows defining the application title that will be displayed in the menu.
Link Allows selecting the application through his name or by a link.
Icon Allows selecting the image that will be displayed as an icon.
Hint Allows typing a description text to help the identification of the application by the user.
Display This option allows choosing if the item will show only texts, only images or both.
Image Position Allows defining if the image will be displayed in the right or left side.
Target Allows defining how to display th applications: In the same window or in a new one.
1
Settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TREE MENU › SETTINGS
Desktop
The menu settings allow to define the attributes of the application display, according to the following:
Menu configuration Interface.
Attributes
Horizontal Alignment of the Menu : Defines the horizontal alignment of the menu (Left, Center, Right).
Vertical Alignment of the items : Defines the vertical alignment of the menu items (Top, Center, Bottom).
Horizontal Alignment of the Items : Defines the horizontal alignment of the menu items (Left, Center, Right).
Toolbar Horizontal Alignment : Defines the horizontal alignment of the toolbar items (Left, Center, Right).
Friendly URL : Allows to define a name for the URL that’s going to be called by the application. The characters allowed in the URL are(a-z, A-Z, 0-9). The Friendly URL can be informed on
the initial screen of the project, where the applications are listed, on the “Friendly URL” column.
Menu Width : Defines the width of the menu in pixels or percentage.
Menu Height : Defines the height of the menu in pixels or percentage.
Iframe Width : Defines the width of the Iframe (Where the applications will open in) in pixels or percentage.
Iframe Height : Defines the height of the Iframe (Where the applications will open in) in pixels or percentage.
Hide menu items : When enabled and used with the security module, it’ll hide the items that the user doesn’t have permission to access, instead of only disabling them.
Hide the menu’s toolbar : When enabled and used with the security module, it’ll hide the toolbar that the user doesn’t have permission to access, instead of only disabling them.
Use theme background : If defined as Yes, it’ll use the background theme of the menu, in case it’s defined as No, it’ll use the background defined in the project.
Scroll bar : Enables the scroll bar in the Iframe.
Select Language : Allows to select the language in the menu bar.
Select Theme : Allows to select the theme in the menu bar.
Alignment of Theme and Language : Defines the horizontal alignment of the language and theme combo boxes.
Always show the items : Displays the application items, even though they don’t exist, or haven’t been generated yet.
Hide menu : Enables the option to hide the menu.
Navigation
The menu navigation settings allow to define the attributes of the tabs and the navigation path, according to the following:
2
Menu Navigation configurations Interface.
Attributes
Open items in a tab : When enabled, the items will always open as tabs in a horizontal bar beneath the menu.
Navigating through Applications with tabs.
Tab context menu : Allows you to manage the open tabs. Application with a tab context.
Minimum tab width : Allows to inform the min width of all the tabs.
Maximum tab width : Allows to inform the max width of all the tabs.
Show navigation breadcrumb : Displays the path containing the application in the tab. Navigation path Display in the
Application.
Use default icons in the item : When enabled, this option displays the standard icons for each item.
Use default icons in the tab : When enabled, this option displays the standard icons for each tab.
Default Application : Select a default application that’s going to be initiated when the menu opens.
Show initial app as tab : Allows to open the default application in a tab.
Mobile
Mobile menu configuration Interface.
Hide menu : Enables the option to hide menu when view from a mobile device.
Menu’s initial mode : Inform the initial mode of the menu, otherwise it’ll always be visible.
Hide menu by clicking an item : When enabled, defines that when an item is clicked it’ll hide the menu.
Float menu : Hides the icon to open the menu or always displays it.
1
Itens do Menu
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TREE MENU › ITENS DO MENU
Menu items settings

In this screen the user menu structure, indicating which applications will be called. Presents the following attributes, which should be completed by the user:
Tree menu settings interface.
Label : Title for the application within the menu. You type a fixed title or use the Scriptcase language system to create lang variable for these names, according to the languages used in the
project.
Link : Here you have to enter the application name that will be linked to the menu item. You can also click search button and select from the application list. This link can also be an external
URL.
Hint : Descriptive text that helps the user to identify the application. It is an optional field.
Icon : Image that will be displayed as an icon in the menu item. The user can click the search button to select the image from the Scriptcase Image Manage. It is an optional field.
Active tab icon : Image that will be displayed as an icon in the menu item when active. The user can click the search button to select the image from the Scriptcase Image Manage. It is an
Inactive tab icon : Image that will be displayed as an icon in the menu item when inactive. The user can click the search button to select the image from the Scriptcase Image Manage. It is an
Target : This option sets how the application will be displayed, it can be target as: Same window, Another window or leave (it will log the user out from the system).
Resources for menu items creation

Insert item : This option add items to the menu
Insert Sub-Item : This option add sub-items to the menu, you might select the main item before to add the sub-items within the selected main item. You can also manage the sub-item
position using the arrows.
Remove : This option deletes the item/sub-item, you might select the items before and then remove.
Import applications : You can use this option to call an application to attach to the item. It will open the project application list.
Move up : This option allows you to move up a menu item or sub-item.
Move down : This option allows you to move down a menu item or sub-item.
Move left : This option allows you to move a menu item or sub-item to the left. You can use it to organize the menu hierarchy.
Move right : This option allows you to move a menu item or sub-item to the right. You can use it to organize the menu hierarchy.
Importing the Applications

Importing the applications is easy and fast. Allows the user to select from a list of application, the application the desired to import. After selecting the application, you just need
to organize the levels of the menu, using the positioning buttons.
After selecting the application, the link property will receive the application name. View the image below.
2

1
Security
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TREE MENU › SECURITY
Use Security
Url output of the
security
Request password
just once
URL
1
Log
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TREE MENU › LOG
1
Eventos
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TREE MENU › EVENTOS
onApplicationInit
onExecute
This event runs when the item of the menu is clicked or an application is selected.
onLoad
1
Layout
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TREE MENU › LAYOUT
Layout Settings
Configuration
Header & Footer

Header
2
Footer
1
Application
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TREE MENU › APPLICATION
Settings
Error Settings
Attributes
2
Convert menu type
Menu conversion Interface.
Convert the Menu to a Tree Menu or vice versa.
*It doesn’t change any of the applications original configuration, with the exception of the format.
1
Programming
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TREE MENU › PROGRAMMING
Attributes
Attributes
Internal libraries
PHP Methods
Include Method.

2

1
New Application
Theme
automatically.
1
Settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › SEARCH › SETTINGS
Through these attributes you can define some general search settings such as alignment, width, search conditions, etc.
Search settings interface.
Attributes
Search Criteria : Using this option you can select the SQL command as “AND” or “OR” to set the search criteria to be used;
Display Condition : If you choose “Yes”, it will be displayed all records when the search fields are blank. If the option set is “No”, no record will be displayed;
Horizontal Alignment : This option sets the application horizontal alignment;
changed on the home screen, at the “Friendly URL” column at the applications list;
Margins : Allows you to set the Search aplication positioning (margins).
Keep Values : When this option is activated the last searched values are going to be maintained and displayed when the system user returns to the search aplication screen.
Keep columns and sorting : This option determines if each search should preserve the selected values to the Grid fields columns and sorting, i.e. to each search, these values return to
original condition.
Table Width : This option sets the search aplication HTML width value, it can be in pixels or percent. You need to set the unit within the option “Table Width Unit”.
Table Width Unit : Using this option you can set the Search aplication width unit;
Use Iframe : When this option is enabled the Search screen and the search results are going to be displayed in the same browser window, using two FRAMES, one above the other. The
Search aplication and the Grid with the results are going to be part of the same page.
Show Results : This option is associated with the “Use Iframe”. When enabled it will initially displays the Search aplication along with the Grid inside the iframe positioned below the
search screen, when disabled initially displays only the Search screen.
Iframe Height : This option is also associated with the “Use Iframe”. It sets the height, in pixels, of the iframe where the recovered data will be displayed by the search.
Case Sensitive : This option enables the Case Sensitive option.
Use auto-complete in the fields : Using this option you can enable the auto-complete option automatically based on the existing values in the database tables. You can also define this
option one by one using the “defined in the field”
1
Advanced search
HOME › APPLICATIONS › SEARCH › ADVANCED SEARCH
Select fields
Select fields interface.
Required
This interface has the options for you to select and set the Search aplication required fields.
Required fields interface.
Within the generated application will be displayed a marker(*) next to the field and an error message will also pops up if there’s no value assigned to the mandatory fields. You
will be able to set some options for the market using the options below.
Marker placement configuration interface.
Marker position : Marker’s position relative to the field (options are right, left or Do not display).
Search Criteria

2
Toolbar
Desktop
Toolbar Interface.
S E P A R AT O R
BUTTON SETTINGS

3
OPTIONS
Options Interface.
Save Search
Save Tag
This feature allows to organize search profiles for the tags, it creates an option Save Filter in a Search application, this way it is possible to save the search done previously. You
can add a name. With this name you can save a search done by the user login.
Save Tag Interface.
Save Tag Interface.
Layout
Blocks
current one.
4

Attributes
Block
Title
Label

Fields
Organization

5
Create New Block
click on Create.
Attributes
Edit Blocks
save.
Attributes

6
Layout Settings
Configuration
Header & Footer

Header
7
Footer
1
SQL
HOME › APPLICATIONS › SEARCH › SQL
SQL Settings
Grid SQL
configuration
1
Security
HOME › APPLICATIONS › SEARCH › SECURITY
Use Security
Url output of the
security
Request password
just once
URL
1
Log
HOME › APPLICATIONS › SEARCH › LOG
1
1. Home
2. Applications
General Overview
Example:
Virtual field

Quantity:
Example:
Field’s inclusion
Label
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Search
4. Text
Text
General Settings
Type of Data
Search Label
For example, this text field that has the name nomevendedor, the client would have a much better understanding of the functionality of the field when we define the label as
Nome do Vendedor.
Watermark
Maximum Size:
Allows the user to determinate the maximum size used in the application field.
SQL Type
Field Behavior
Use autocomplete:
Field automatically turns into autocomplete according to existing values in the database.
Use Select2
Uses the new component for data selection, allowing searches within the select combobox.
Width for the Select2
Sets a width for the area in the Select2.
Sets the amount of characters to start the search.
Amount of rows
Sets the maximum number of rows to list the search result.
Width:
Define a largura em pixels para a caixa de resultados.
Search options:
Defines the validation that will be made to fetch the search result.
Start equals to: Will return the records with the same start value as in the database.
Any part: Will return the records when exist the character in any part of the record.
End equals to: Will return the records with the same final value as in the database.
Posição entre valores:
Define a posição que os objetos serao exibidos.
Text Between Values
Text that will appear when using a filter condition between two values.
OnChange Submit:
Submit search on this field changing.

2
Show Condition:
To show or not the search condition. It only works if the search has at least one condition.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.
Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it will display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you will view a popup with help description.
Help type - Popup configuration Interface.
Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you will view a hint with the help description.
Help type - Hint configuration Interface.
Text : It will display the help description beside the field.
Help type - Text configuration Interface.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Search
4. Integer
Integer
On this page, you can configure settings related to your field of type Number. Since the use of specific symbols display until the mode in which they are displayed. And thus, boost
your application.
Data type:
Watermark
Use slider:
1, 2, 5, 10… N.
Tipo SQL:
Use autocomplete:
The field turns into autocomplete automatically according to the values in the database.
Amount of characters:
Number of rows:
It sets the maximum number of rows to list the search result.
Width:
it sets the width in pixels for the results.
Search options:
It sets the validation that will be made to get the search result.
Position between values:
It sets the position that objects will be displayed.
Text between values:
Text that will appear between the values.
Submit in Onchange:
Allows you to submit the filter when there are changes in the field.
Display Condition:
Allows you to display or not the condition of the filter, it will only work if the filter has at least an option.
format.
Groupping:
Accept:
Lookup Settings
2
Example:
Lookup Methods
Select Command:
Multiple Options:
Delimiter:
Use the lookup in:
Default Value:
Separated By:
Lookup Types
3

Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married M 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study ST 3 2
Sportes SP 3 2
Reading LE 3 2

order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Leisure
8 Reading
16 Music
follows:

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Leisure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Leisure
8 Reading
16 Music
Label:
Include Button:
Alter Button:
Delete Button:
Clean Button:
It cleans the fiels
Save Button:
Use the lookup in:

4
Default Value:
Separated By:
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.
5

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Search
4. Decimal
Decimal
General Settings
X
Z
Mask Examples

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Field Behavior
Use autocomplete:
Field automatically turns into autocomplete according to existing values in the database.
Use Select2
Uses the new component for data selection, allowing searches within the select combobox.
Width for the Select2
Sets a width for the area in the Select2.
Amount of rows
Sets the maximum number of rows to list the search result.
Width:
Define a largura em pixels para a caixa de resultados.
Search options:
Defines the validation that will be made to fetch the search result.
Start equals to: Will return the records with the same start value as in the database.
Any part: Will return the records when exist the character in any part of the record.
End equals to: Will return the records with the same final value as in the database.
Posição entre valores:
Define a posição que os objetos serao exibidos.
Text Between Values
Text that will appear when using a filter condition between two values.
OnChange Submit:
Submit search on this field changing.
Show Condition:
2
To show or not the search condition. It only works if the search has at least one condition.
Values format
Decimal Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Type

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Search
4. Currency
Currency
General Settings
![Currency field Configuration Interface.][filtro_cons_moeda] Currency field Configuration Interface.
Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it will be more clear for the comprehension
of the user if the name would be “Client Name”.
Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label is not used.
Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.
Field Behavior
![Currency Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.][filtro_cons_moeda_filtro] Currency Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.
Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.
Amount of characters : Sets the amount of characters to start the search.
Amount of rows : Sets the maximum number of rows to list the search result.
Width : Sets the width in pixels for the result box.
Search options : Defines the validation that will be made to fetch the search result.
Position between values : This option sets the position that objects will be displayed.
Text between values : Text that will appear between values.
OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there is modifications to the field.
Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it will only work if there is at least one option selected.
Values format
![Currency Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.][filtro_cons_moeda_format] Currency Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.
Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the field. When not enabled, the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
2
Help Type

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Search
4. Date
Date
General Settings
Watermark: Displays a watermark in the field input.
Values format
and Day.
Year as Combo : Allows to use the year combo to select the date.
Initial Year : First year displayed in the combo.
Actual Year + : Display the current plus the amount of years informed.
Month in full textual : Displays the Month format in Full.
New Calendar : Defines if the JQuery calendar (New Calendar) is going to be displayed or the old format.
Years Limit : Amount of years displayed in the calendar.
View week number : Displays the number of the week in the application.
Additional months : Displays the additional months of the calendar.
Show Combo year and month : Displays the year and month of the calendar in the combo box.
Field Behavior
Special Conditions
All Period : Searches for all periods of dates.

Today : Searches in today’s date.
Yesterday : Searches in yesterday’s date.
Last 7 days : Searches the last 7 days. Ex: ((01/01/2017 01/07/2017).
This month : Searches the dates from the first day of the current month.
Last month : Searches the dates from the first day of lasts month.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
2
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Search
4. Time
Time
General Settings
![Time field Configuration Interface.][filtro_cons_hora] Time field Configuration Interface.
Values format
![Time Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.][filtro_cons_hora_filtro] Time Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.
attributes.
Field Behavior
![Time Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.][filtro_cons_hora_format] Time Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Type
2

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Search
4. Datetime
Datetime
General Settings
![Datetime field Configuration Interface.][filtro_cons_data_hora] Datetime field Configuration Interface.
Values format
![Datetime Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.][filtro_cons_data_hora_format] Datetime Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.
attributes.
Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different fromDATETIME. You need to use the characters A, M, D , HH, II, and SS that correspond
Year as Combo : Allows to use the year combo to select the date.
Initial Year : First year displayed in the combo.
Actual Year + : Display the current plus the amount of years informed.
Month in full textual : Displays the Month format in Full.
New Calendar : Defines if the JQuery calendar (New Calendar) is going to be displayed or the old format.
Years Limit : Amount of years displayed in the calendar.
View week number : Displays the number of the week in the application.
Additional months : Displays the additional months of the calendar.
Show Combo year and month : Displays the year and month of the calendar in the combo box.
Field Behavior
![Date Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.][filtro_cons_data_hora_format] Date Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.
Special Conditions
![Datetime Field Special Conditions.][filtro_cons_data_cond] Datetime Field Special Conditions.
All Period : Searches for all periods of dates.

Today : Searches in todays date.
Yesterday : Searches in yesterdays date.
Last 7 days : Searches the last 7 days. Ex: ((01/01/2017 01/07/2017).
This month : Searches the dates from the first day of the current month.
Last month : Searches the dates from the first day of lasts month.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
2
Help Settings
Help Type

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Search
4. Select
Select
General Settings
![Select field Configuration Interface.][filtro_cons_select] Select field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Select, you can select multiple option from a combo box (Select Field).
Field Behavior
![Select Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.][filtro_cons_cpf_filtro] Select Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.
Search Lookup
Lookup Methods
automatically.
Single Value :
2
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
3
saved by the user.
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Type

4

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Search
4. Double Select
Double Select
General Settings
![Double Select field Configuration Interface.][filtro_cons_duplo_select] Double Select field Configuration Interface.
Field Behavior
![Double Select Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.][filtro_cons_cpf_filtro] Double Select Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.
Search Lookup

delimiter then (;).
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
2
Help Settings
Help Type

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Search
4. Check box
Check box
General Settings
![Check box field Configuration Interface.][filtro_cons_checkbox] Check box field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Check box, your allowed to have multiple options selected.
Field Behavior
![Check box Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.][filtro_cons_cpf_filtro] Check box Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.
Search Lookup
Lookup Methods
Single Value :
2
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
saved by the user.
3
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Type

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Search
4. Radio
Radio
General Settings
![Radio field Configuration Interface.][filtro_cons_radio] Radio field Configuration Interface.
Field Behavior
![Radio Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.][filtro_cons_cpf_filtro] Radio Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.
Search Lookup
Lookup Methods
list Man.
saved by the user.
2
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Type

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Search
Text Auto-Complete
General Settings
![Text Auto-Complete field Configuration Interface.][filtro_cons_texto_auto] Text Auto-Complete field Configuration Interface.
Field Behavior
![Text Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.][filtro_cons_texto_filtro] Text Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.
Search Settings
Interface.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
2
Help Settings
Help Type

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Search
General Settings
![Number Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.][filtro_cons_número_auto] Number Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search
Configuration.
Field Behavior
![Number Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.][filtro_cons_decimal_filtro] Number Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search
Configuration.
Values format
![Number Auto-Complete Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.][filtro_cons_decimal_format] Number Auto-Complete Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.
Search Lookup
Interface.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
2
Help Settings
Help Type

1
Events
HOME › APPLICATIONS › SEARCH › EVENTS
onApplicationInit
onScriptInit
onRefresh
onSave
onValidate
1
Application
HOME › APPLICATIONS › SEARCH › APPLICATION
Settings
On this configuration, you can set the common attributes of the applications created by ScriptCase, you can view the attributes below.
Attributes
Application Code : Code of the application that’s determined at the moment the creation of the application, this code can be renamed in the main menu.
Use Enter to : Allows the use of the Enter key to submit or tabulate the Form.
Error Settings
Attributes
Show the Error Title in the Application : Show the title line of the error message in the application.
Show the Error Title in the Field : Show the title line of the error message in the field.
Error Title : Title message of the error.
Navigation
Attributes
Global Variables
2
Example:

1
1. Home
2. Applications
General Overview
New Link
Edit Link:
Capture Link:
Field Link:
Button Link:
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Search
4. Application Link
Application Link
Applications list
All:
By folder:
By type:
Fixed value:
No value:
Link properties
Open in an iframe:
Open in a parent:
Modal:

2

Open in an iframe.
3

Iframe’s height:
Iframe’s width:
Modal
application.
Height:
Width:
Form Properties

4
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Search
4. Capture Link
Capture Link
Applications list
All:
By folder:
By type:
Fixed value:
No value:
Link properties
Modal:
Modal
application.
Modal:
2
Height:
Width:
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Search
4. Button link
Button link
All:
By folder:
By type:
Fixed value:
No value:
Link properties
Modal:

Hint for the link:

2

Hint for the link:
Title to the tab:
Hint to the tab:
Active tab icon:
Modal
application.
Height:
Width:
Hint for the link:
Form Properties

3
1
Programming
HOME › APPLICATIONS › SEARCH › PROGRAMMING
Attributes
Attributes
Internal libraries
PHP Methods
Include Method.

2

1
New Application
Application Data
Relationship
2
Edit Fields
and datatypes.
Datatype - Field’s datatype.
Theme
automatically.
1
Settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › REPORTPDF › SETTINGS
PDF Report Settings
PDF Report Settings Interface.
Attributes
PDF Orientation : Using this option you can set whether to print the PDF in portrait or landscape orientation.
Type : PDF type

Records per Page : Only applicable to Grids aligned horizontally, which allows you to set the number of records that will be printed per page.
Records per Line : Allows you to set the records that will be printed per page in the pdf.
PDF measure unit : Using this option you can define the unit of measurement of the position of objects in the PDF. Used in printing format, it can be: points, millimeters, centimeters
and counts.
PDF Format : Using this option you can select the Form type in which the PDF will be printed (letter, A4, etc).
PDF Destination : Using this option you can set where the PDF will be sent to the Browser, Download or server.
Browser : If you use this option the PDF will open within the browser.
Download : The PDF will open for download. you must inform the name of the file to be generated. E.g.: file.pdf
Server : The PDF will be sent to the server. It is necessary to inform the path of the file to be generated. E.g.: c:\folder\file.pdf
Automatic page break : Use automatic page break on pages.
Margins : Allows you to view the application on the page according to the values reported in the margins (right, left, top and bottom) in millimeters.
Search Creation : Using this option you can set the PDF startup mode by the Search. So the initial mode will be a Search application.
Page Amount : Allows you to set the number of pages that will be printed in the PDF.
Amount of Columns : Allows you to set the number of columns that are printed, what allows you to create applications for issuing of labels printing for example.
Columns Width : Allows you to set the width of the columns in the application.
Columns Height : Allows you to set the height of the columns in the application.
Font and Background

Configuring the PDF Preview allows you to set values of text and layout preview.
2
PDF Report visualization interface settings.
Text Font : Here you can choose the font family to be used initially by the Report PDF.
Text Font Size : Here you can choose the font size .
Font Color : Here you can choose the font color .
Text Font Style : Allows you to choose the style of the text, if this will be bold, italic, or underlined, or any other combination.
Show Ruler : Sets whether the PDF printing displays ruler at the edges of the pages.
Image : Allows you to insert a background image on the page. This image will be also printed, it can be a watermark for your document for example.
Width :Sets the image width, in pixels, to be inserted into the page.
Height :Sets the image height, in pixels, to be inserted into the page.
X Position : Sets the abscissa of the initial image position.
Y Position : Sets the ordinate of the initial image position.
Print : This option sets whether the image will be printed on the application.
1
SQL
HOME › APPLICATIONS › REPORTPDF › SQL
SQL Settings
Grid SQL
configuration
1
Security
HOME › APPLICATIONS › REPORTPDF › SECURITY
Use Security
Url output of the
security
Request password
just once
URL
1
Log
HOME › APPLICATIONS › REPORTPDF › LOG
1
PDF Advanced settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › REPORTPDF › PDF ADVANCED SETTINGS
Interface
Using this interface you can define the display layout of cells containing the values of the fields in the body of the report.
PDF interface settings.
Attributes
Seq : Sequential number of cells (ascending order).
Cell : Cell name.
Pos X : Sets the abscissa of the cell.
Pos Y : Sets the ordinate of the cell.
Width : Sets the cell width.
Alignment : Sets the cell alignment.
Field : Here you have to select the field that will be displayed within the cell, according to the application SQL.
Code
Scriptcase creates the codes automatically, so by changing that within the option “code” you will assume the PDF creation PHP code.
Configuration interface of the PDF Code.
The application “Report PDF” was developed based on a library called TCPDF, so that you can use the available library methods or a corresponding macro from the table below.
In order to use some method you must use the $pdf object, for example: $pdf->AcceptPageBreak(parameters).
In order to access the TCPDF documentation Click here
PDF Report Macros

TCPDF Method Scriptcase Macro Description
AcceptPageBreak sc_pdf_accept_page_break Accept automatic page break.
AddFont sc_pdf_add_font Add a new font
AddLink sc_pdf_add_link Creates an internal link
AddPage sc_pdf_add_page Add a new page
AliasNbPages sc_pdf_alias_nb_pages Defines an alias for the number of pages
Cell sc_pdf_cell Prints a cell
2
Close Method
TCPDF sc_pdf_close:
Scriptcase Macro Ends the document
Description
Error sc_pdf_error Display error message
Footer sc_pdf_footer Page footer
GetStringWidth sc_pdf_get_string_length Calculates the size of a string
GetX sc_pdf_get_x Returns the current x position
GetY sc_pdf_get_y Returns the current y position
Header sc_pdf_header Page header
Image sc_pdf_image Places an image on the page
Line sc_pdf_line Draws a line
Link sc_pdf_link Enter a link
Ln sc_pdf_ln Configure the line break
MultiCell sc_pdf_multi_cell Prints a text with line breaks
Output sc_pdf_output Save or send the document
AliasNumPage sc_pdf_page Returns the current page number
AliasNbPages sc_pdf_page_tot Returns the total number of pages
Rect sc_pdf_rect Draws a rectangle
SetAuthor sc_pdf_set_author Defines the author of the document
SetAutoPageBreak sc_pdf_set_auto_page_break Enables or disables the automatic page break mode
SetCompression sc_pdf_set_compression Page compression on/off
SetCreator sc_pdf_set_creator Sets the document’s creator.
SetDisplayMode sc_pdf_set_display_mode Toggles the display mode
SetDrawColor sc_pdf_set_draw_color Sets the color used for drawing operations
SetFillColor sc_pdf_set_fill_color Sets the color for fill operations
SetFont sc_pdf_set_font Sets the font settings
SetFontSize sc_pdf_set_font_size Sets the font size
SetKeywords sc_pdf_set_keywords Associates a key word to a document
SetLeftMargin sc_pdf_set_left_margin Sets the left margin
SetLineWidth sc_pdf_set_line_width Sets the width of the line
SetLink sc_pdf_set_link Sets the target of an internal link
SetMargins sc_pdf_set_margins Sets the margins
SetRightMargin sc_pdf_set_right_margin Sets the right margin
SetSubject sc_pdf_set_subject Sets the subject
SetTextColor sc_pdf_set_text_color Sets the color of the text
SetTitle sc_pdf_set_title Sets the title of the document
SetTopMargin sc_pdf_set_top_margin Sets the top margin
SetX sc_pdf_set_x Sets the current position of x
SetXY sc_pdf_set_xy Sets the current position of x and y
SetY sc_pdf_set_y Sets the current position of y
Text sc_pdf_text Prints a string
Write sc_pdf_write Prints a string of characters
Positioning
This interface allows you to define the display order of the fields (selecting through the arrows next to the right frame).
Configuration interface of the PDF fields placement.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
General Overview
Example:
Virtual field

Quantity:
Example:
Field’s inclusion
Label
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. ReportPDF
4. Text
Text
General Settings
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
Man.
Man.
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
2

Man.

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

the user.
Use lookup in :
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. ReportPDF
Multiple Lines Text

General Settings
browser.
X
Z
Mask Examples

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
2
Man.
Man.
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2

Man.

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

3
the user.
Use lookup in :
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. ReportPDF
4. Integer
Integer
On this page, the developer can configure the settings for your field of type number. From the use of specific display symbols to the mode in which they are displayed. Thus, it can
streamline its application.
Data type:
Field Mask Input:
X
the mask.

Phone Number +99 99 9999 - 9999 123456789012 +12 34 5678 - 9012
Tipo SQL:
format.
Groupping:
Negative sign:
Example:
Example:
Line size:
Lookup Settings
2
Example:
Lookup Methods
Select Command:
Multiple Options:
Delimiter:
Use the lookup in:
Default Value:
Separated By:
Lookup Types

3

Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married M 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study ST 3 2
Sportes SP 3 2
Reading LE 3 2

order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Leisure
8 Reading
16 Music
follows:

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Leisure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Leisure
8 Reading
16 Music
Label:
Include Button:
Alter Button:
Delete Button:
Clean Button:
It cleans the fiels
Save Button:

4
Use the lookup in:
Default Value:
Separated By:
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. ReportPDF
4. Decimal
Decimal
General Settings
X
Z
Mask Examples

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Values Format
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
2
Single Value :
Man.
Man.
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2

Man.

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

3

the user.
Use lookup in :
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. ReportPDF
4. Percent
Percent
General Settings
X
Z
Mask Examples

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Values Format
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
2
Single Value :
Man.
Man.
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2

Man.

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

3

the user.
Use lookup in :
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. ReportPDF
4. Currency
Currency
General Settings
X
Z
Mask Examples

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Values Format
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
2
Single Value :
Man.
Man.
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2

Man.

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
3
8
Value Lookup
16 Music

the user.
Use lookup in :
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. ReportPDF
4. HTML Image
HTML Image
General Settings
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. ReportPDF
4. Credit Card
Credit Card
General Settings
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
Man.
Man.
The example below:

2
Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2

Man.

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

the user.
Use lookup in :
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. ReportPDF
4. E-mail
E-mail
General Settings
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
Man.
Man.
The example below:

2
Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2

Man.

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

the user.
Use lookup in :
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. ReportPDF
4. URL
URL
General Settings
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
Man.
Man.
The example below:

2
Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2

Man.

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

the user.
Use lookup in :
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. ReportPDF
4. Date
Date
General Settings
Values Format
Regional Settings).
d-m-Y 25-09-2009
F/Y September/2009
j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A 25/9/2001 as 14:30:11 PM
l, d \d\e F \d\e
Y
h:i:s 11:33:20
#h:i:s
hours)
Format Table
and Day.
format like: MMYYYY
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
2
Single Value :
Man.
Man.
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2

Man.

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

3
the user.
Use lookup in :
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. ReportPDF
4. Time
Time
General Settings
Values Format
Regional Settings).
d-m-Y 25-09-2009
F/Y September/2009
j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A 25/9/2001 as 14:30:11 PM
l, d \d\e F \d\e
Y
h:i:s 11:33:20
#h:i:s
hours)
Format Table
and Day.
format like: MMYYYY
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
2
Single Value :
Man.
Man.
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2

Man.

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

3
the user.
Use lookup in :
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. ReportPDF
4. Date and time
Date and time

General Settings
Values Format
Regional Settings).
d-m-Y 25-09-2009
F/Y September/2009
j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A 25/9/2001 as 14:30:11 PM
l, d \d\e F \d\e
Y
h:i:s 11:33:20
#h:i:s
hours)
Format Table
and Day.
format like: MMYYYY
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
2
Single Value :
Man.
Man.
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2

Man.

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

3
the user.
Use lookup in :
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. ReportPDF
4. Image (Database)
Image (Database)
General Settings
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. ReportPDF
Image (File Name)

General Settings
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. ReportPDF
Document (Database)
General Settings
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. ReportPDF

General Settings
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. ReportPDF
4. QRCode
QRCode
General Settings
Values Format
Display Settings
Field Settings
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. ReportPDF
4. Bar code
Bar code
General Settings

Values Format
Display Settings
Field Settings
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. ReportPDF
4. SubSelect
SubSelect
General Settings
SubSelect field configuration Interface.
Increment : Defines the space between the record lines of the SubSelect field.Connection : Displays a list of connections created in the current project.Table : Displays the tables
related to the database connection selected previously. SubSelect : Displays the SQL of the chosen table in the previous option. Allowed to be modified and use field variables and
global variables. SQLBuilder : Opens the ScriptCase SQLBuilder, to build the SQL commands.
1
Events
HOME › APPLICATIONS › REPORTPDF › EVENTS
onApplicationInit
onNavigate
OnScriptInit
onRecord
onHeader
onFooter
1
Search
HOME › APPLICATIONS › REPORTPDF › SEARCH
Settings
Attributes
Search Criteria
Advanced Search
Settings
Through the table below we are able to set all the options that will be part of the application “Grid Search”.
Search button).
2
Select fields
![Interface for filter fields selection.][filtro_avancado_configuracao_selecionar_campos] Interface for filter fields selection.
Required
Defines which fields of application will be required for the Search.
![Required fields interface.][filtro_avancado_configuracao_campos_obrigatorios] Required fields interface.
The application generated will be displayed a bullet (*) next to the field and an error message is generated if not assigned no value.
![Configuration interface of the marker placement.][filtro_avancado_configuracao_campos_obrigatorios_posicionamento] Configuration interface of the marker placement.
Marker position : Marker’s position relative to the field.
Toobar
Desktop
Toolbar Interface.
S E P A R AT O R
3
BUTTON SETTINGS
OPTIONS
Options Interface.
Save Search
Events
In event blocks can be used global variables, local, JavaScript code, CSS codes and Scriptcase macros.
ONSCRIPTINIT
ONREFRESH
ONSAVE
O N V A L I D AT E
Layout
4
BLOCKS
current one.

Attributes
Block
Title
Label

Fields
5
Organization
Create New Block
click on Create.
Attributes
Edit Blocks
Attributes

6
Configuration
HEADER & FOOTER
Header
7
Footer
Fields
8
Field Data e Hora

1
Application
HOME › APPLICATIONS › REPORTPDF › APPLICATION
Settings
Error Settings
Attributes
2
Navigation
Attributes
Global Variables
Example:

3
1
Programming
HOME › APPLICATIONS › REPORTPDF › PROGRAMMING
In this version of ScriptCase is incorporated the concept of programming with the use of attributes, methods, resources and libraries. In the previous version it was already
possible to create business rules in applications using this concept. The big difference now is that this can be done in a more organized, facilitating both the development as the
understanding of the rule by another developer.
Attributes
Attributes
Internal Libraries
PHP Methods
Include Method.

2

1
Layout PDF
HOME › APPLICATIONS › REPORTPDF › LAYOUT PDF
The PDF Report application has a way of positioning the report fields in a simple and dynamic way, using the drag and drop functionality.
In the PDF Layout, at the main screen, you can change some application settings. These settings are also present in PDF Report > Settings.
Using Drag and Drop functionality, you can configure the placement of fields in this interface. To change them you need to click on the field you prefer to change the position and
drag to their new position.
Clicking on a specific field opens a field configuration screen.
Properties
Name: On this field, it is necessary to inform a name to identify the field.
Field: On this option, you need to select the field from the table that will be used in the cell. In case you have selected a field from the “Special” category you will see the following:
System Date : The current date of the system on which the application runs.
Current Page : Number of the current page that the cell is located.
Total Page : Total number of application pages.
Label: Selecting this option will open an input so you can inform the text that will be displayed.
Pos X : Positioning the X axis. Up and down.
Pos Y : Positioning the Y axis. Left and Right.
Width : Enter the width of the cell. The unit of value is pixel.
Alignment : In this field, you will select the alignment of the cell text: Left, Right or Center.
Font: In this field, you will select a source according to the list.
Font Size : Here you inform the font size of the text that will be displayed.
2
Font Color : In this field, you will inform a color in hexadecimal. (Example: # 000000)
Font Style : In this field, you will mark the style of the font: Bold, Italic and / or Underline. (You can select more than one option)
Show: In this field, you enable or disable the field display.
General Setting - Text Fields
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application.
Upper case : All in Upper Case.
Lower case : All in Lower case.
Capitalize first word : Capitalizes the first letter of the first word.
Capitalize all words : Capitalizes the first letter of all the the words.
Show HTML content : Determines if the html contained in the field will be displayed or not. If enabled, the html will be displayed, otherwise the html will be interpreted by the browser.
Amount of characters: Defines the field width. This option is available only for the field type Multiple lines text .
Field Mask : In this field, you can configure a display mask according to the table given in Applications> Grid > Fields> Text.
General Setting - Integer Fields
Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format of the fields. When not enabled, you will view attributes for set yourself. You can change of the Regional Settings in Locales
>Regional settings . For more information click here.
Color of Negative : In this field, you will inform a color in hexadecimal. (Example: # 000000)
General Setting - Currency Fields
Complete with Zeros : Defines the decimal places that will or not be completed zeros to the right. Example: The value is 125,50, but the decimal precision is 3. If the option is enabled, then
the value will 125,500.
General Setting - Decimal Fields

3
Complete with Zeros : Defines the decimal places that will or not be completed zeros to the right. Example: The value is 125,50, but the decimal precision is 3. If the option is enabled, then
the value will 125,500.
General Setting - Percent Fields
Related Field : Field that contains the values for the calculation of the percentage.
General Settings - Date/Time Fields
Display: Offers a series of formats predefined for displaying dates.
Internal Format : Defines the internal format of the fields (for database storage) date, time, and datetime if the field type in SQL is varchar type.
General Settings - Bar code Fields
Height : Sets the height in pixel of the image display. Must contain only numbers.
Width : Sets the width in pixel of the image display. Must contain only numbers.
General Settings - QRCode Fields
Level of error correction : Codewords are 8 bits long and use the Reed–Solomon error correction algorithm with four error correction levels. The higher the error correction level, the less
storage capacity.
Image Size : Lets you set the display size of the QR Code by selecting one of the available sizes.
Margin: Lets you set the margin width around the QR Code by selecting one of the available sizes.
1
New Application
Application Data
Relationship
2
Edit Fields
and datatypes.
Theme
automatically.
1
Settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CALENDAR › SETTINGS
Layout and Behavior
1
Edit fields
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CALENDAR › EDIT FIELDS
Fields
Label
Datatype
New
Update
Read-Only
Required
PK
DB value (Insert)
DB value (Update)
Page
Blocks
2
Display
Display Interface.
Attributes
1
Fields positioning
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CALENDAR › FIELDS POSITIONING
Field Positioning
1
Unique key
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CALENDAR › UNIQUE KEY
With this module you can inform the fields that are unique. To inform more than one field that are unique (is a unique key at database level), select the fields by holding the CTRL
of your keyboard and then click on the add button. The fields informed will receive an identification for example: UK2.
Unique key configuration Interface.

1
Toolbar
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CALENDAR › TOOLBAR
Toolbar
DESKTOP
MOBILE
EXPORT:
U P D AT E :
OTHERS:

2
S E P A R AT O R :
Toolbar Mobile
Mobile toolbar.
Bottons Group
3
Buttons Settings
4
BUTTON:
LABEL:
HINT:
Application Hotkeys
Options
HELP BY BLOCK:
GENERAL HELP:
TOOLBAR BUTTONS:
1
06 Calendar Print Settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CALENDAR › 06 CALENDAR PRINT
SETTINGS
title: Print settings
Print export settings.
Display print button: This option enable a button within the application to print the calendar.
Print format : It changes the display data format for printing.
Display title for printing : Displays the calendar title for printing.
Additional fields: Additional fields to be displayed for printing.

1
SQL
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CALENDAR › SQL
tables (SQL).
1
Procedures
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CALENDAR › PROCEDURES
In this module, you can configure a Form application so that it can use Stored Procedures (defined in the Database) in the Insert, Update and Delete operations. It is not
necessary to use the three options simultaneously, in a way that the options that are not configured to use Procedures continue to work as ScriptCase’s default that are the
commands INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE.
See below, the step-by-step to implement a Stored Procedure to insert into the Database.
Form Stored Procedures Interface.
Let check the first option: “Enable INSERT Procedure”. Next inform the Name of the Procedure the number of parameters.
Defining parameters for the Procedure.
Now define the fields that will reference each parameter of the Stored Procedure, as the type of parameter (Input or Output). Next click on the button save to finish the process.
Passing value to the Stored Procedure Parameters.

1
JavaScript
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CALENDAR › JAVASCRIPT
Attributes
Edit JavaScript
OnClick Example
}
}
OnBlur Example
2
{
}
OnChange Example

}
OnFocus
the purchase.
{
}
OnMouseOver Example
onMouseOut Example
1
Dependencies
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CALENDAR › DEPENDENCIES
This feature allows to link the tables that contain relationships, being the tables that contain dependencies, like the tables orders and order_details. This way it’s possible to
delete a record in the table orders, all the details for that order will be deleted as well. Below you’ll see a practical example on this feature.
Firstly, you’ll define a new dependency. In this example, we’ll create a dependency between the orders (Dependent Table) with the order_details (Current Application). Click on the button
New Dependency to start.
Creating a new Dependency.
Selecting a the dependent table you’ll inform the amount of fields that are related between the both tables. In this example, only one field will be related to the orders id.
Dependency Table configuration.
Next, select the fields that link the Keys: order_details->Orderid - orders->Orderid.
Dependency Key Fields Configurations.
Creating a Dependency relationship, you only need to set the rules that the application will use. To do this, just click on the button Generate Scripts to define the Dependency Rule.
Configurando as regras da dependência.

1
Security
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CALENDAR › SECURITY
Use Security
Url output of the
security
Request password
just once
URL
Captcha
reCAPTCHA
reCAPTCHA sample:
2
Light :
Dark :
Audio:
Image :

Normal :
Compact:

1
Log
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CALENDAR › LOG
1
Calendar
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CALENDAR › CALENDAR
Calendar fields
This interface displays the basic Calendar field settings.
Calendar fields interface.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
General Overview
Example:
Virtual field

Quantity:
Example:
Field’s inclusion
Label
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. Text
Text
General Settings
Type of Data
Label
Customer Name.
Watermark
Inicial Value(type)
Show HTML Content
Validation Image
Password Field
Save Variable
Variable Name
Field Mask
X
the mask.

2
Telephone number

Phone Number +99 99 9999 - 9999 123456789012 +12 34 5678 - 9012
Validate with mask
Complete to the left
When this option is used, the value defined will be added on the left of the information iserted in the field if the value is lower than the maximum set in the
Maximum Size option.
Hidden Field
Label Field
Save HTML tags
When this option is active, it allows to HTML tags in the field to be inserted with the data, instead of being interpreted.
Text input in Javascript
When this option is active, it will be show every Javascript content inserted in the database with its main value.
This option can only be used using the Editable grid view.
Disable Field
HTML Type
SQL Type
Values Format
Database Value
3
Trigger.
Lookup Settings

Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
4
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
Multiple Lines Text

General Settings
Initial Value : you will inform the Defined Value here.
Save HTML tags : This option allows to save the HTML content of the field to the database.
Text input in Javascript : Allows to save javascript code informed in the field to the database.
Values Format
Database Value
Trigger.
Lookup Settings
2

Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

3

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. Integer
Integer
General Settings
Data type:
Label:
Watermark
Validation Image
Use slider:
1, 2, 5, 10… N.
Field Mask Input:
X
the mask.

Phone Number +99 99 9999 - 9999 123456789012 +12 34 5678 - 9012
Validate with Mask

2
Record Variable
Variable Name
Hidden Field
Label Field
label.
Disable field
HTML Type
Tipo SQL:
Values Format
format.
Digit grouping:
Maximum Size:
Minimum Value:
Maximum Value:
Groupping:
Negative sign:
Accept:
Display Calculator:
Use Spin:
3
spin.
Database Value
It allows you to define how the value to be written to the database.
Pre-set value:
It allows you to specify a fixed value or associate it to global variables created inside the project and save it automatically to the database field.
Auto increment (automatic):
It allows you to use the increase generated automatically by the database to fill the field. It is used only when the database field is of type AUTO INCREMENT or similar. For the
databases that use string, such as Oracle, PostGres and Firebird, you must inform the name of the string.
Auto increment (mannual):
The application itself will simulate an auto increment in the field. So the value of the field will be calculated automatically by the application.
Date of inclusion:
The field will be populated automatically with server date during the inclusion.
Date of update:
The field will be populated automatically with server date during the update.
User IP:
The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application.
Calculated by the database:
The field value is assigned by the database itself. The field will not be used in the process of updating. For example: it will be updated via a Trigger.
Null:
The field will be automatically filled with null.
Lookup Settings
Example:
Lookup Methods
Select Command:
Multiple Options:
Delimiter:
Use the lookup in:

4
Default Value:
Separated By:
Lookup Types

Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married M 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study ST 3 2
Sportes SP 3 2
Reading LE 3 2

order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Leisure
8 Reading
5
16
Assigned Music
value Description in Lookup
follows:

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Leisure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Leisure
8 Reading
16 Music
Label:
Include Button:
Alter Button:
Delete Button:
Clean Button:
It cleans the fiels
Save Button:
Use the lookup in:
Default Value:
Separated By:
Display Settings
Permite definir valores de CSS para o campo individualmente. Desta forma, por exemplo, podemos destacar um campo dos demais na aplicação.
As propriedades CSS do campo, quando alteradas, são adicionadas à uma classe criada automaticamente pelo Scriptcase para cada campo da aplicação.
As configurações individuais do CSS dos campos, quando informadas, sobrepõem as configurações do tema(CSS das Aplicações (Temas)) selecionado para a aplicação.
As configurações de visualização são divididas em três blocos de propriedades, estes blocos são:
CSS do Título
Que possibilita a alteração das propriedades do CSS da Label(Título) do campo.
No exemplo abaixo, podemos visualizar a diferença nas configurações do titulo do campo.

Enquanto os campos Fornecedor e Categoria possuem a mesma formatação, herdada do tema da aplicação, o campo Avaliação do Produto possui uma formatação diferente
dos demais, proveniente das alterações realizadas no CSS do campo.
6
CSS do Campo
Que altera as propriedades do CSS da <td> onde o Objeto Input(onde informamos os dados para inserção em um formulário) está posicionado. Na imagem abaixo, podemos
visualizar onde as alterações são aplicadas.
Campo com alterações nas propriedades do CSS do Campo, alterando a cor de fundo e o alinhamento horizontal
CSS do Objeto Input
Que altera as propriedades do CSS no Objeto Input do campo, onde digitamos os dados em um formulário.
Campo com alterações nas propriedades do CSS do Objeto Input, alterando a cor de fundo e cor da fonte do input
Propriedades CSS
As opções de configuração disponíveis são basicamente as mesmas para cada um dos blocos de configuração mencionados acima.
Descrição dos atributos da configuração disponíveis

Fonte
Altera a fonte do texto de acordo com as fontes selecionadas, utilizando a propriedadefont-family.
Nesta opção, disponibilizamos alguns tipos de fontes(conforme imagem abaixo).
Tamanho
Altera o tamanho da fonte do texto utilizando a propriedade font-size na classe do campo.
Devemos selecionar o valor disponível em nossa lista, a medida utilizada para esta propriedade é o pixel.
Cor da fonte
Define a cor da fonte utilizado a propriedade color na classe do campo.
Cor de fundo
Define a cor de fundo, utilizado a propriedade background-color na classe do campo.
As cores que serão utilizadas nas duas propriedade de cores listadas acima, Cor da fonte e Cor de fundo, podem ser informadas por meio da paleta de cores -
- disponível ao lado do campo ou informado manualmente os valores nos formatos aceitos que são: Hexadecimal, RGB, RGBA, HSL, HSLA ou o Nome da Cor.
Paleta de Cores
Ao clicar no ícone da paleta de cores - - ao lado do campo, uma janela será aberta com algumas cores predeterminadas.
Ao selecionar uma das cores, será inserido um valor no formato hexadecimal(HEX), que representa a cor escolhida.
Hexadecimal
Sigla para hexadecimal, este código é composto do sinal de cerquilha (#) mais seis dígitos.
Os dois primeiros definem a intensidade da cor vermelha; os dois do meio dizem respeito ao verde e os dois últimos, ao azul.
Este código é representado por #000000.
Nesse sistema de representação o #000000 representa a cor preta e o #ffffff representa a cor branca.
RGB / RGBA Sigla que representa Vermelho (Red), o Verde (Green) e o Azul (Blue).
Este código é representado por RGB(255,255,255).
Os três primeiros números definem a intensidade da cor vermelha; os três números do meio dizem respeito ao verde e os três últimos números representam o azul.
HSL / HSLA
Nome das Cores

Devemos informar o nome da cor que desejamos utilizar. Este nome deve ser informado em inglês e a cor deve está dentro da lista de cores suportadas pelo navegador que iremos
utilizar.
Exemplo:
Alguns sites disponibilizam uma lista de cores com cada um dos valores citados acima.
especificar as cores de diferêntes maneirasutilizando diferentes maneiras de atribuição de valores
Esta propriedade possibilita
É possível também informar valores diretamente no campo, sem a utilização da nossa paleta de cores.
Esta propriedade permite especificar as cores de diferentes maneiras de se atribuir valores para as propriedades CSS que admitem cores
Negrito
Permite aplicar o tipo negrito na fonte.
Sublinhado
7
Permite aplicar o tipo sublinhado na fonte.
Estilo da Borda
Define o estilo da fonte.
Collapse da Borda
Define o collapse da borda.
Tamanho da Borda
Permite aumenta o tamanho da borda do título.
Cor da Borda
Permite escolher a cor da borda, utilizando uma paleta de cores para ser aplicada no título.
Alinhamento Horizontal
Permite posicionar o label do filtro no local desejado (left,rigth,center e justify).
Alinhamento Vertical
Permite posicionar o label do fitro no local desejado (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).
Não disponível no CSS do Objeto Input
Largura
Para definir a largura do título.
Altura
Para definir a altura do título.
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. Decimal
Decimal
General Settings
Values Format
Database Value
Trigger.
Lookup Settings

2

Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.
3
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. Currency
Currency
General Settings
Values Format
Database Value
Trigger.
Lookup Settings
2

Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

3

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. Date
Date
General Settings
Values Format
and Day.
Minimum Date :
Maximum Date :
Database Value
Trigger.
Lookup Settings
2

Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.
3

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. Time
Time
General Settings
Values Format
attributes.
Database Value
Trigger.
Lookup Settings

2
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. Date and Hour
Date and Hour

General Settings
Values Format
attributes.
Database Value
Trigger.
Lookup Settings
2

Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

3

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. HTML Image
HTML Image
General Settings
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
2
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. Label
Label
General Settings
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.
2

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. Card
Card
General Settings
*
user.
Examples of Masks

Numbers)
Database Value
Trigger.
Lookup Settings
2

Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

3

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. Card type
Card type
General Settings
Values Format
Database Value
Trigger.
Lookups Settings

Display Settings
2
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. E-mail
E-mail
General Settings

Values Format
Database Value
Trigger.
Lookup Settings

2
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. URL
URL
General Settings

Values Format
Database Value
Trigger.
Lookup Settings

2
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. HTML Color
HTML Color
General Settings
Values Format
Database Value
Trigger.
Lookup Settings

2
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. HTML Editor
HTML Editor
General Settings
Toolbar
Properties
Database Value
Trigger.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
2
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. Localization
Localization
General Settings
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

2

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. Theme
Theme
General Settings
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

2

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. Youtube
Youtube
General Settings
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
2
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. Google Maps
Google Maps
General Settings
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it is defined as Google Maps, it will use the Google Maps API to display the map in the Form Applications

Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
2
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. Image (Database)
Image (Database)
General Settings
Image (Database) field Configuration Interface.
Display link only : When enabled, you will be presented with a link to open the image in another image with the original size of the image ( without using the redimensioning
).
Multi-upload

existing record.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
2
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
Image (File Name)

General Settings
).
Multi-upload

existing record.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
2
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
Document (Database)
General Settings
Document (Database) field Configuration Interface.
File Size : Defines the field that conatins the file size.
Multi-upload

existing record.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
2
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar

General Settings

existing record.
Multi-upload

existing record.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
2
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. Barcode
Barcode
General Settings

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in the “Insert Mode” , “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.
Values Format
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
2
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. Select
Select
General Settings

Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
automatically.

2
Single Value :
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

3
saved by the user.
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings

4
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. Double Select
Double Select
General Settings
Lookup Settings

delimiter then (;).
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
2
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. CheckBox
CheckBox
General Settings
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
Single Value :
2
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
saved by the user.
3
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

4

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. Radio
Radio
General Settings
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
list Man.
saved by the user.
2
Ajax Settings
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
3
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
Text Auto-Complete
General Settings

Values Format
Lookup Settings
Interface.
Ajax Processing
2
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
General Settings
Values Format
Lookup Settings
Interface.
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
2
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field
Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. Signature
Signature
General Settings
Pen color:
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. Rating
Rating
General Settings
Data type
Label
Subtitle
Amount of icons
Enabled icon and
Enabled icon
Disabled icon
Enabled icon.
Save variable
Variable Name
HTML Type
SQL Type

2
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

Help Settings
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
Layout
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CALENDAR › LAYOUT
Pages
Pages Settings
2
Attributes

Blocks
current one.

3
Attributes
Block
Title
Label

Fields
Organization
Create New Block
click on Create.
Attributes
Edit Blocks
save.
4
Attributes
Layout Settings
5
Configuration
Header & Footer

Header
6
Footer
1
Events
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CALENDAR › EVENTS
In the events you can use global variables, local variables, PHP, JavaScript, HTML, CSS codes and macros.
onApplicationInit
onNavigate
OnScriptInit
onLoadRecord
onLoad
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
onBeforeInsert
This event is executed before inserting a record from the application.
onAfterInsert
This event is executed after inserting a record from the application.
2
onBeforeInsertAll
This event runs before inserting all the selected records from the Multiple Records, Editable Grid and Editable Grid (View) Form.
onAfterInsertAll
This event runs after inserting all the selected records from the Multiple Records, Editable Grid and Editable Grid (View) Form.
onBeforeUpdate
This event is executed before updating a record from the application.
onAfterUpdate
This event is executed after updating a record from the application.
onBeforeUpdateAll
This event runs before updating all the selected records from the Multiple Records, Editable Grid and Editable Grid (View) Form.
onAfterUpdateAll
This event runs after updating all the selected records from the Multiple Records, Editable Grid and Editable Grid (View) Form.
onBeforeDelete
This event runs before deleting the records from the Form.
onAfterDelete
This event runs after deleting the records from the Form.
onBeforeDeleteAll
This event runs before deleting all the selected records from the Multiple Records, Editable Grid and Editable Grid (View) Form.
onAfterDeleteAll
This event runs after deleting all the selected records from the Multiple Records, Editable Grid and Editable Grid (View) Form.
1
Ajax events
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CALENDAR › AJAX
EVENTS
OnClick
Selecting a field
OnChange
Selecting a field
OnBlur
Selecting a field
2
OnFocus
Selecting a field
1
Buttons
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CALENDAR › BUTTONS
Including the default applications buttons, you can also create new buttons manually. These buttons can appear in the application toolbar.
Creating a button
To create a new button, click int the option “new button” and type a name and the button type.
Button types: (JavaScript, PHP, and Ajax).
Button types
Deleting a button
Deleting a button
JavaScript
Button
2
Image
Link
Code Block
PHP
Button
3
Image
Link
Code Block
Link
Button

4
Image
Link
Setting up the Link

Link Parameters
5
Ajax
Button
6
Image
Link
Code Block
1
Application
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CALENDAR › APPLICATION
Settings
On this configuration, you can set the common attributes of the applications created by ScriptCase, you can view the attributes below.
Attributes
Application Code : Code of the application that is determined at the moment the creation of the application. This code can be renamed in List of Application.
Documents Path : The absolute path of the application’s documents directory.
Application images : Allows to import images into the application and use them within the application routines, disregarding the macro sc_image.
Language : Language of the generated application. All the application’s hints and messages are displayed in the selected language.
Use Share Location Variable : Shares the Location settings with other applications based on the value of the session variable.
Maximum file size : Set the upload maximum file size of the application.
Message title : Message box title.
Error Settings
Attributes
Error position : Position of the error messages on the application.
Error Position on the field : The position of the error messages when criticizing the field.
Show the Error Title in the Application : Show the title line of the error message in the application.
Show the Error Title in the Field : Show the title line of the error message in the field.
Script Error : Allows to display the information of the Script Line where a error occurred.
SQL Error : Allows to display the SQL where a error occurred.
Debug Mode : Runs the application in Debug mode, displaying the SQL statements at the moment that they are executed.
Ajax Error Output : Enables the use of the ajax alert for debugging errors.
Navigation
Attributes
Return After Inserting : Dont open a new blank record after an insert, instead go to edit mode.
Exit Application : The target exit the application after processing the form.
Messages
Messages
2
Insertion Messages
Update Messages
Messages of delete
Global Variables
Example:

3
Synchronize table
This process will performs a comparison between the definitions of application fields and the connected database fields. If there is any change within the connected table, such
as adding a new field, exclusion, or a change in the data type, the changes will appear visible like in the image below:
Table synchronization interface.
After accessing the function from the link “Synchronize table” you will see a comparison table between the application fields (left table) and the database table fields (right table),
like the image above, the fields highlighted in “red” will be deleted of the application, the highlighted fields in “Green” will be inserted in the form, and the highlighted fields in
“orange” will be updated, so data type will be updated.
To rename a field in the database table, the table synchronization effect, by comparison, will be the same as deleting a field that existed in the application and the inclusion of a
new field.
1
1. Home
2. Applications
General Overview
New Link
Edit Link:
Capture Link:
Field Link:
Button Link:
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. New link
New link
When you click in “New Link” the ScriptCase application menu will display the screen below.
![Links menu interface.][ligacao_criando] Links menu interface.

1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. Capture link
Capture link
Applications list
All:
By folder:
By type:
Fixed value:
No value:
Link properties
Modal:
Modal
application.
Modal:
2
Height:
Width:
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. Link edit
Link edit
Editing Links.
Actions
Link
parameters.
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Calendar
4. Button link
Button link
All:
By folder:
By type:
Fixed value:
No value:
Link properties
Modal:

Hint for the link:

2

Hint for the link:
Title to the tab:
Hint to the tab:
Active tab icon:
Modal
application.
Height:
Width:
Hint for the link:
Form Properties

3
1
Programming
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CALENDAR › PROGRAMMING
The concept of programming is incorporated in this ScriptCase version. With the use of resources of attributes, methods and libraries. In the previous version was already possible
create business rules in the applications, using this concept. The biggest difference is that now this can be realized in a more organized way, making it easier to be developed and
comprehended by another developer.
Attributes
Attributes
Internal Libraries
PHP Methods
Include Method.

2
JavaScript Methods
Include Method.

3

1
Calendar Configuration
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CALENDAR CONFIGURATION
Update applications already created to support Google Calendar
To update the structure and configuration of the application access our article: Adding new columns in the table for Calendar
Fixing SSL certificate error
To correct the error cURL error 60: SSL certificate problem: unable to get local issuer certificate access our article: Calendar displays in execution: cURL error 60
Settings
All the options that can be configured will be reflected in the Calendar Application.
Calendar setup screen
Margins : Allows you to arrange the display of the application in the page, according to the values entered in the margins. These values must be informed in pixels.
Form Iframe Width : Allows you to set the form width that will open in the calendar application. These values must be informed in pixels.
Form Iframe Height : Allows you to set the form height that will open in the calendar application. These values must be informed in pixels.
Time Format : Allows you to choose which time format you want. You can choose between “13:00” (24 hours) or “1:00 pm” (12 AM / PM).
Start Mode : Allows you to choose how the calendar will start. The list of events can start in month, day, week, or calendar.
Disable Drag & Drop : Allows you to disable the option to drag events to other days or months.
Disable option ‘all day’ : Allows you to disable the ‘All Day’ option when registering an event. This option is available in the calendar form.
Minimum Time Limit : Allows you to limit the minimum time displayed in the Week and Day tabs.
Maximum Time Limit : Allows you to limit the maximum time displayed in the Week and Day tabs.
Mini calendar and category position : Allows you to position the mini calendar and category in the generated application. This positioning can only be done together to the left or right side.
Display mini calendar : Allows the display of a mini calendar to navigate independently from the main calendar.
Full day - hide time : Allows you to hide the time fields when the “whole day” is selected in the generated application.
Recurrence - hide fields : Allows you to hide period fields and recurrence information in the generated application.
Time interval : Allows you to enter the time interval you want to display on the calendar in week or day mode.
Calendar Fields
This interface displays the fields relationship that will be used in the application.
You need to relate the table fields to the form application fields.
Calendar Fields Configuration Screen
Google API
The Google Calendar API will allow you to synchronize your Google calendar with the application developed in Scriptcase.
First you must activate the Google Calendar API by clicking on https://console.developers.google.com/apis/api/calendar-json.googleapis.com/overview.
After activation you need to configure the “OAuth consent screen” by clicking on https://console.developers.google.com/apis/credentials/consent.
OAuth consent screen
E-mail Address : Select the email that will be used as the source for the google calendar. The application will use this data for synchronization.
Product name shown to users : Allows you to enter the consent name that will be displayed to the clients. Make sure the name accurately describes your product and be careful not to use
names that suggest that the product is from Google or another company.
Home URL : Allows you to enter a URL to homepage. (optional)
Product Logo URL : Lets you enter a URL that contains an image that will serve as the product logo. (optional)
Privacy Policy URL : Lets you enter the URL of the product privacy policy. (optional)
Terms of Service URL : Lets you inform the URL of the terms of service of the product. (optional)
Note: You only need to inform the e-mail address and the product name. All other items are optional.
2
Now you need to create aCredential> OAuth client ID
Select the “Web Application” option and follow the setup below.
OAuth Client ID Configuration Screen
Name: Enter a name for the OAuth client ID.
Authorized JavaScripts Origins : Insert the root URL of your system. For example: http://yourdomain.com or http://localhost
Authorized redirect URLs : Enter the full URL until your calendar application.
After entering the above data, click “Save.”
Now let’s configure the Scriptcase application.
Google Calendar API Settings Screen
Integrate with Google Calendar : Synchronize with Google calendar events, allowing you to import or export events.
OAuth Client Json : Json from Google OAuth with the credential to access the project. To get this content, open the OAuth Client ID of the previously configured OAuth__ client and download
the JSON.
Login on Google OAuth : Choose if you want to store the login made in the application to not ask again or if you will request session authentication.
Integrate form : Enables the form to insert, delete or update events in Google Calendar.
Insert : When inserting an event in the form, it also inserts in google calendar.
Update: When updating an event on the form, it also updates in google calendar. * Delete: When deleting an event in the form, it also excludes in the google calendar.
1
New Application
Application Data
The calendar application is a little different of the others because it has two group of fields, the form’s group inside the application and the field’s group of the own calendar.
Edit Fields
Insert - It defines the available fields in the insert.
Update - It defines the available fields in the update.
Read-Only - It defines if the field will be read-only.

2
Required - It defines if the field will be required to fill.
Edit Calendar Fields

In these field settings, we will relate the calendar fields to the table’s fields that we are using in this application.
Form Fields - These are the fields returned from the database’s table.
Table Fields - The calendar fields that are going to be related to the form fields.
Theme
automatically.
1
Grid Modules
HOME › APPLICATIONS › STORED PROCEDURES › GRID MODULES
Initial Module
Allows you to set in which mode the application will start when executed.
Grid Application Modules
Filter : Application will be started by the filter view, so you can filter the records before the next application, that can be a Grid, PDF, Summary… you can configure that options within the
Filter’s settings.
Grid : Application will be started by the Grid itself, this is the default option.
Summary : Application will be started by the Summary. To use the Summary as initial application it’s mandatory to create at least one Group, using the Static Group By settings.
Chart : Application will be started by the Chart. To use the Chart as initial application it’s mandatory to create at least one Group, using the Static Group By settings.
Print : Application will be started by the print mode, according to the select command.
PDF : Application will be started with the option to view or download a PDF file.
Word : Application will be started with the option to view or download a Word file( .doc or .docx ).
Excel : Application will be started with the option to view or download an Excel file ( .xls or .xls ).
RTF : Application will be started with the option to view or download a RTF file ( .tft ).
XML : Application will be started with the option to view or download a XML file.
CSV : Application will be started with the option to view or download a CSV file.
Filter
Grid Filter Settings
Filter Module : This option configures which application will be called after the Filter.
Use Iframe : This option configures the filter to be displayed within an Iframe (displaying the Filter itself and the search results on the same page). This option is available only when the initial
2
module is set to be the Filter.
Show Results : Display the search results on the same page when loading the application for the first time when the “Use Iframe” option is set as “Yes”, otherwise, the results will be displayed
only after the search.
Iframe Height : Iframe height, in pixels, used to display the search results.
Search Modal : This option configures the Filter Application to open in a modal window.
Search Modal Height : Search Modal box height (in pixels). Option available only when the Search Modal box is enabled.
Search Modal Width : Search Modal box Width (in pixels). Option available only when the Search Modal box is enabled
Table Width : Filter application table width. This value can be in percent, pixel or automatic (set by Scriptcase). If you change the value you will also need to set the “Table Width Unit”
Table Width Unit : This option configures the unit for the table width (percent, pixel or automatic). The value itself must to be set within the option “Table Width”.
Grid
Grid Settings
Orientation : This option configures the Grid records’ orientation (Horizontal, Vertical, Slide or User Defined). When using the “User Defined” option you can design the HTML manually inside
the option “Layout » HTML templates” and select within the Layout settings.
Fixed Label : This option will fix the columns’ label at the top of the page (it is only available when the Grud records’ orientation is set as Horizontal).
Pagination : This option sets the Grid paging type: Partial (pagination according to the amount of records set per page), Total (displays all records) or Infinite Scroll (automatic srolling acording
to the increment)
Lines Per Page : This option sets the amount of records per page for the Grid
Infinite Scroll Increment : This option sets the number of rows displayed on each increment of new records. It is available only when paging is configured with Infinite Scroll.
Open windows using modal : For Grids apps with the Infinite Scroll paging enabled, this option will set the links between applications and details of the Grid, that are configured to open in
iframe, to open using a modal instead.
Maintain records : It configures if the amount of records displayed will be preserved when the application navigates to another window and go back.
Grid height : Defines a altura da consulta em pixels. Caso esteja vazio
Table Width : Grid application table width. This value can be in percent, pixel or automatic (set by Scriptcase). If you change the value you will also need to set the “Table Width Unit”
Table Width Unit : This option configures the unit for the Grid table width (percent, pixel or automatic). The value itself must to be set within the option “Table Width”.
Detail
3
Grid Detail settings
Display Detail : Allows you to set where the detail will open within the Grid Application * Beside the Grid : Displays the Grid Details to the right of the record, in the same
window where Grid is being displayed. * Below the Grid : Displays the Grid Details below the Grid records, in the same window where Grid is being displayed. * In another
page : Displays the Grid Details in another page, replacing the Grid view. * In another window : Displays the Grid Details in a separated browser window. * Modal : Opens a
pop-up window to the display of the Grid Detail.
Alignment : Using this option you can set an alignment (center, right or left) for the Grid Detail when it’s using the “Display Detail” setting as “Beside the Grid” or “Below the Grid”.
Detail Width : This option sets the Grid Detail width when it’s using the “Display Detail” setting as “Beside the Grid”, “Below the Grid”, “In another page” or “In another window”.
Width of the modal : Allows you to customize the Grid Detail width when it’s using the “Display Detail” option as “Modal”.
Height of the modal : Allows you to customize the Grid Detail height when it’s using the “Display Detail” option as “Modal”.
Detail Width Unit : This option configures the unit for the “Detail Width” (percent, pixel or automatic).
Summary
Grid Summary
Settings
Summary Display : Sets the Grid Summary display option ( On another page, On the last page, On every page). The Summary Application Module is only available when a group is created in
the Group By settings.
Chart
4
Grid Chart settings
Charts display mode : Sets the Chart Summary display option ( New window, Same page, Other page ).The Chart Application Module is only available when a group is created in the Group By
settings.
Display before summary : Sets whether the Chart is displayed above or below the Summary. Available when the Charts display mode is configured in the Same page.
Number of columns : Sets the Chart number of columns per line (one in each column). Available when Charts display mode is configured in the Same page.
Margin : Sets the Charts horizontal margin. Available when Charts display mode is configures in the Same page.
Horizontal alignment : Sets the Charts horizontal position (Left, Right, Center). Available when Charts display mode is configures in the Same page.
Vertical alignment : Sets the Charts vertical position (Top, Center, Bottom). Available when Charts display mode is configured in the Same page.
View settings in the chart window : Sets the chart settings display on the same page. Available when the Char display mode is configured on Other page or new window.
1
Settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › STORED PROCEDURES › SETTINGS
Grid application advanced settings
Display Line Number : This option sets whether to display or not the sequence number of each Grid row.
Display Titles : This option sets if the column title (column label) will be displayed or not.
Line break in title : This option sets if the column line title will break or not.
Alignment : Allows you to set the fields alignment for when the Grid orientation is set as Vertical or Slide.
Table Columns : Sets the column widths type: Provides (It will assume the informed width values at field level in the configuration of the visualization), Calculated (Calculate size according to
type and the field size) and Automatic (The alignment will be according to the browser criteria).
1
Edit Fields
HOME › APPLICATIONS › STORED PROCEDURES › EDIT FIELDS
Fields :Allows to access the configuration of the field (icon on the left) and dragging the fields can change the field position and choose weather or not the field will be displayed.
Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.
Line Break: Allows the Line Break in the records.
Line Break PDF: Allows the line break in the PDF records.
Title Horizontal Alignment : Defines the horizontal alignment of the field.
Text Alignment : Defines the alignment from the text of the field.
Font Color : Allows configure the text color.

1
Fields positioning
HOME › APPLICATIONS › STORED PROCEDURES › FIELDS POSITIONING
Field Positioning
1
Toolbar
HOME › APPLICATIONS › STORED PROCEDURES › TOOLBAR
Toolbar
DESKTOP
MOBILE
EXPORT:
2
EXPORT BY EMAIL:
OTHERS:
S E P A R AT O R :
Toolbar Mobile
3
Mobile toolbar.
Bottons Group

4
Buttons Settings
BUTTON:
LABEL:
HINT:
Application Hotkeys

5
Options
D I S P L AY S U M M A R Y :
Allows defining if the summary button will be displayed.
JUMP TO:
RECORDS BY PAGE:
TOOLBAR BUTTONS:
1
Export Settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › STORED PROCEDURES › EXPORT SETTINGS
PDF Settings
WORD Settings
WORD CONFIGURABLE
time.
Example:
run time.
Example:
PASSWORD
Runtime Example:
SELECT COLUMNS
OPEN WORD DIRECTLY
2
WORD Settings
CSV Settings
CONFIGURABLE CSV
time.
Example:
run time.
Example:
PASSWORD
Runtime Example:
SELECT COLUMNS
OPEN CSV DIRECTLY
CSV Settings
3
TEXT DELIMITER
ADD LABEL
XLS Settings
XLS CONFIGURABLE
time.
Example:
run time.
Example:
4
PASSWORD
Runtime Example:
SELECT COLUMNS
OPEN XLS DIRECTLY
XLS Settings
F O R M AT
XML Settings
CONFIGURABLE XML
time.
Example:
run time.
Example:

5
PASSWORD
Runtime Example:
SELECT COLUMNS
OPEN XML DIRECTLY
XML Settings
X M L F O R M AT
Print Settings
time.
Example:
run time.
Example:

6
PASSWORD
Runtime Example:
SELECT COLUMNS
RTF Settings
SELECT COLUMNS
OPEN RTF DIRECTLY
Word Settings
Word export settings
Print Type Allows you to set the print mode for the word file (Both, Black & White, Color).
Rows per Page in Grid Allows you to set the number of lines per page of the query will be displayed in the file.
Rows per Page in Summary Allows you to set the number of lines per page in the Summary that be displayed in the file.
Open Word Directly Allows you to set whether the document will be generated directly or if an intermediate page will be displayed.
CSV Settings
CSV export settings

7
Lines Separator Allows you to set the separator for character.
Columns Separator Allows you to set the column separator for character and records.
Text Delimiter Allows you to define the character used to delimit the text columns.
Open CSV Directly Allows you to set whether the document will be generated directly or if an intermediate page will be displayed.
Add Label Allows you to define if the columns label will be added to the file.
XLS Settings
XLS export settings
Open XLS Directly Allows you to set whether the document will be generated directly or if an intermediate page will be displayed.
Format Allows you to define the format of the generated document (xls or xlsx).
Print Settings
Print export settings
Print Mode Allows you to define the contents of the file printing (Both, Current Page or Full Report).
Print Type Allows you to set the print mode for the file (Both, Black & White, Color).
Rows per Page Allows you to set the number of lines per page of the query will be displayed in the file.
Rows per Page in Summary Allows you to set the number of lines per page in the Summary that be displayed in the file.
Print Background Allows you to define whether the background will appear for printing.
Other Formats
XML and RTF export settings
Generate XML directly Allows you to set whether the document will be generated directly or if an intermediate page will be displayed.
Generate RTF directly Allows you to set whether the document will be generated directly or if an intermediate page will be displayed.
1
SQL
HOME › APPLICATIONS › STORED PROCEDURES › SQL
SQL Settings
Grid SQL
configuration
1
Security
HOME › APPLICATIONS › STORED PROCEDURES › SECURITY
Use Security
Url output of the
security
Request password
just once
URL
1
Log
HOME › APPLICATIONS › STORED PROCEDURES › LOG
1
1. Home
2. Applications
General Overview
Example:
Virtual field

Quantity:
Example:
Field’s inclusion
Label
1
1. Home
2. Applications
3. Stored Procedures
4. Text
Text
General Settings
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
Man.
Man.
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
2

Man.

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

the user.
Use lookup in :
Display Settings
Field Settings
//## PDF Configuration {#id-04}

3
Chart Settings
Chart Layout
1
1. Home
2. Applications
Multiple Lines Text

General Settings
browser.
X
Z
Mask Examples

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Display Settings
Field Settings
Chart Settings
2
Chart Layout
1
1. Home
2. Applications
4. Integer
Integer
On this page, you will learn how you can configure settings related to the Number field. From the use of specific symbols display to the mode in which they are displayed. And thus,
boost the application.
Data type:
Label:
Field Mask Input:
X
the mask.

Phone Number +99 99 9999 - 9999 123456789012 +12 34 5678 - 9012
Repeat value:
Example:
Tipo SQL:
format.
Groupping:
Negative sign:
Example:

2
Example:
Line size:
Lookup Settings
Example:
Lookup Methods
Select Command:
Multiple Options:
Delimiter:
Use the lookup in:
Default Value:
Separated By:
Lookup Types
3

Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married M 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study ST 3 2
Sportes SP 3 2
Reading LE 3 2

order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Leisure
8 Reading
16 Music
follows:

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Leisure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Leisure
8 Reading
16 Music
Label:
Include Button:
Alter Button:
Delete Button:
Clean Button:
4
It cleans the fiels
Save Button:
Use the lookup in:
Default Value:
Separated By:
Display Settings
Field Settings
Line Chart
1000.
negative.
Charts Settings
5
Chart Layout
1
1. Home
2. Applications
4. Decimal
Decimal
General Settings
X
Z
Mask Examples

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Values format
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
2
Single Value :
Man.
Man.
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2

Man.

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

3

the user.
Use lookup in :
Display Settings
Field Settings
Line Chart
1000.
negative.
Chart Settings
4
Chart Layout
1
1. Home
2. Applications
4. Percent
Percent
General Settings
X
Z
Mask Examples

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Values Format
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
2
Single Value :
Man.
Man.
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2

Man.

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

3

the user.
Use lookup in :
Display Settings
Field Settings
Line Chart
1000.
negative.
Chart Settings
4
Chart Layout
1
1. Home
2. Applications
4. Currency
Currency
General Settings
X
Z
Mask Examples

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Values Format
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
2
Single Value :
Man.
Man.
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2

Man.

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
3
8
Value Lookup
16 Music

the user.
Use lookup in :
Display Settings
Field Settings
Line Chart
1000.
negative.
Chart Settings
4
Chart Layout
1
1. Home
2. Applications
4. Percent (Calculated)
Percent (Calculated)
General Settings
X
Z
Mask Examples

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Values Format
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
2
Single Value :
Man.
Man.
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2

Man.

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

3

the user.
Use lookup in :
Display Settings
Field Settings
Line Chart
1000.
negative.
//## PDF Configuration {#id-06
Chart Settings
4
Chart Layout
1
1. Home
2. Applications
4. HTML Image
HTML Image
General Settings
Display Settings
Field Settings
1
1. Home
2. Applications
4. Credit Card Number
Credit Card Number

General Settings
Display Settings
Field Settings
Chart Settings
Chart Layout
1
1. Home
2. Applications
4. E-mail
E-mail
General Settings
Display Settings
Field Settings
Chart Settings
Chart Layout
1
1. Home
2. Applications
4. URL
URL
General Settings
Display Settings
Field Settings
Chart Settings
Chart Layout
1
1. Home
2. Applications
4. YouTube
YouTube
General Settings
Link Type : The display settings of the link, if it is going to be a Text or a Button.
Link text : A text that will link to the video.
Display Settings
Field Settings
1
1. Home
2. Applications
4. Google Maps
Google Maps
General Settings
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it is defined as Google Maps, it will use the Google Maps API to display the map in the Grid Applications

Text Link : Text to call the Map.
Marker Description : Displays the description for each marker displayed on the map.
Display Settings
Field Settings
1
1. Home
2. Applications
4. Date
Date
General Settings
Values Format
Regional Settings).
d-m-Y 25-09-2009
F/Y September/2009
j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A 25/9/2001 as 14:30:11 PM
l, d \d\e F \d\e
Y
h:i:s 11:33:20
#h:i:s
hours)
Format Table
and Day.
format like: MMYYYY
Display Settings
Field Settings
Chart Settings
2
Chart Layout
1
1. Home
2. Applications
4. Time
Time
General Settings
Values Format
Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, it will be displayed the date separator attribute (Check the
Regional Settings).
d-m-Y 25-09-2009
F/Y September/2009
j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A 25/9/2001 as 14:30:11 PM
l, d \d\e F \d\e
Y
h:i:s 11:33:20
#h:i:s
hours)
Format Table
and Day.
format like: MMYYYY
Display Settings
Field Settings
Chart Settings
2
Chart Layout
1
1. Home
2. Applications
4. Date and time
Date and time

General Settings
Values Format
Regional Settings).
d-m-Y 25-09-2009
F/Y September/2009
j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A 25/9/2001 as 14:30:11 PM
l, d \d\e F \d\e
Y
h:i:s 11:33:20
#h:i:s
hours)
Format Table
and Day.
format like: MMYYYY
Display Settings
Field Settings
Chart Settings
2
Chart Layout
1
1. Home
2. Applications
4. Image (Database)
Image (Database)
General Settings
Display Settings
Field Settings
1
1. Home
2. Applications
Image (File Name)

General Settings
Display Settings
Field Settings
1
1. Home
2. Applications
Document (Database)
General Settings
Display Settings
Field Settings
1
1. Home
2. Applications

General Settings
Display Settings
Field Settings
1
1. Home
2. Applications
4. Bar code
Bar code
General Settings

Values Format
Display Settings
Field Settings
1
1. Home
2. Applications
4. QRCode
QRCode
General Settings
Values Format
Display Settings
Field Settings
1
1. Home
2. Applications
4. Signature
Signature
General Settings
Pen color:
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

1
1. Home
2. Applications
4. Rating
Rating
This field allows the developer to create a rate field to display the data previously added usgin stars (or any other image).
Data type
Label
Subtitle
Amount of icons
Enabled icon and
Enabled icon
Disabled icon
Enabled icon.
SQL Type
Configuração da Visualização
Permite definir valores de CSS para o campo individualmente. Desta forma, por exemplo, podemos destacar um campo dos demais na aplicação.
As propriedades CSS do campo, quando alteradas, são adicionadas à uma classe criada automaticamente pelo Scriptcase para cada campo da aplicação.
As configurações individuais do CSS dos campos, quando informadas, sobrepõem as configurações do tema(CSS das Aplicações (Temas)) selecionado para a aplicação.
As configurações de visualização são divididas em três blocos de propriedades, estes blocos são:
CSS do Título
Que possibilita a alteração das propriedades do CSS da Label(Título) do campo.
No exemplo abaixo, podemos visualizar a diferença nas configurações do titulo do campo.

Enquanto os campos Fornecedor e Categoria possuem a mesma formatação, herdada do tema da aplicação, o campo Avaliação do Produto possui uma formatação diferente
dos demais, proveniente das alterações realizadas no CSS do campo.
CSS do Campo
Que altera as propriedades do CSS da <td> onde o Objeto Input(onde informamos os dados para inserção em um formulário) está posicionado. Na imagem abaixo, podemos
visualizar onde as alterações são aplicadas.
Campo com alterações nas propriedades do CSS do Campo, alterando a cor de fundo e o alinhamento horizontal
CSS do Objeto Input

2
Que altera as propriedades do CSS no Objeto Input do campo, onde digitamos os dados em um formulário.
Campo com alterações nas propriedades do CSS do Objeto Input, alterando a cor de fundo e cor da fonte do input
Propriedades CSS
As opções de configuração disponíveis são basicamente as mesmas para cada um dos blocos de configuração mencionados acima.
Descrição dos atributos da configuração disponíveis

Fonte
Altera a fonte do texto de acordo com as fontes selecionadas, utilizando a propriedadefont-family.
Nesta opção, disponibilizamos alguns tipos de fontes(conforme imagem abaixo).
Tamanho
Altera o tamanho da fonte do texto utilizando a propriedade font-size na classe do campo.
Devemos selecionar o valor disponível em nossa lista, a medida utilizada para esta propriedade é o pixel.
Cor da fonte
Define a cor da fonte utilizado a propriedade color na classe do campo.
Cor de fundo
Define a cor de fundo, utilizado a propriedade background-color na classe do campo.
As cores que serão utilizadas nas duas propriedade de cores listadas acima, Cor da fonte e Cor de fundo, podem ser informadas por meio da paleta de cores -
- disponível ao lado do campo ou informado manualmente os valores nos formatos aceitos que são: Hexadecimal, RGB, RGBA, HSL, HSLA ou o Nome da Cor.
Paleta de Cores
Ao clicar no ícone da paleta de cores - - ao lado do campo, uma janela será aberta com algumas cores predeterminadas.
Ao selecionar uma das cores, será inserido um valor no formato hexadecimal(HEX), que representa a cor escolhida.
Hexadecimal
Sigla para hexadecimal, este código é composto do sinal de cerquilha (#) mais seis dígitos.
Os dois primeiros definem a intensidade da cor vermelha; os dois do meio dizem respeito ao verde e os dois últimos, ao azul.
Este código é representado por #000000.
Nesse sistema de representação o #000000 representa a cor preta e o #ffffff representa a cor branca.
RGB / RGBA Sigla que representa Vermelho (Red), o Verde (Green) e o Azul (Blue).
Este código é representado por RGB(255,255,255).
Os três primeiros números definem a intensidade da cor vermelha; os três números do meio dizem respeito ao verde e os três últimos números representam o azul.
HSL / HSLA
Nome das Cores

Devemos informar o nome da cor que desejamos utilizar. Este nome deve ser informado em inglês e a cor deve está dentro da lista de cores suportadas pelo navegador que iremos
utilizar.
Exemplo:
Alguns sites disponibilizam uma lista de cores com cada um dos valores citados acima.
especificar as cores de diferêntes maneirasutilizando diferentes maneiras de atribuição de valores
Esta propriedade possibilita
É possível também informar valores diretamente no campo, sem a utilização da nossa paleta de cores.
Esta propriedade permite especificar as cores de diferentes maneiras de se atribuir valores para as propriedades CSS que admitem cores
Negrito
Permite aplicar o tipo negrito na fonte.
Sublinhado
Permite aplicar o tipo sublinhado na fonte.
Estilo da Borda
Define o estilo da fonte.
Collapse da Borda
Define o collapse da borda.
Tamanho da Borda
3
Permite aumenta o tamanho da borda do título.
Cor da Borda
Permite escolher a cor da borda, utilizando uma paleta de cores para ser aplicada no título.
Alinhamento Horizontal
Permite posicionar o label do filtro no local desejado (left,rigth,center e justify).
Alinhamento Vertical
Permite posicionar o label do fitro no local desejado (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).
Não disponível no CSS do Objeto Input
Largura
Para definir a largura do título.
Altura
Para definir a altura do título.
Help Description
Help Type
Buttons.

1
Layout
HOME › APPLICATIONS › STORED PROCEDURES › LAYOUT
Blocks
current one.

Attributes
Block
Title
Label

Fields
2
Organization
Create New Block
click on Create.
Attributes
Edit Blocks
save.
Attributes

3
Layout Settings
Configuration

4
Header & Footer

Header
Footer
1
Events
HOME › APPLICATIONS › STORED PROCEDURES › EVENTS
Scriptcase has Events to allow the developers to customize the application code. By using the events, the developers can program custom actions at a specific execution time
(e.g. After a record is inserted, when it is loaded, upon submitting a Form, …) and for a specific application type. In the events area you can use global and local variables,
JavaScript, CSS, HTML, PHP codes and also Scriptcase macros.
onApplicationInit
onNavigate
OnScriptInit
onRecord
onHeader
onFooter
1
Ajax Events
HOME › APPLICATIONS › STORED PROCEDURES › AJAX
EVENTS
OnClick
Selecting a field
1
Buttons
HOME › APPLICATIONS › STORED PROCEDURES › BUTTONS
In addition to the buttons that comes automatically with the applications, you can also create your own buttons. All the buttons are displayed within the application toolbar.
New buttons creation settings
Creating a new button

To create a new button, click on the “New Button” option and enter a name and a button type.
The button Types are: JavaScript, PHP, Link and Run.
Grid buttons type
Deleting a button
To delete a button click on Delete icon (represented by a recycle bin image) in the right of the button name, at the application menu under the Buttons option.
Deleting a button
JavaScript
Button
2
Image
Link
Code Block
PHP
Button
3
Image
Link
Code Block
Link Button
Button
4
Image
Link
Setting up the Link

Link Parameters
5
RUN
D I S P L AY O P T I O N S
We can configure Run Button display as Link, Image or Button:
Button
6
Grid’s Run Button settings - Button type
Display Mode Combo box to select the button display option, you can choose button, image or link.
Label Application button title (text that will be displayed for the button within the application)
Confirmation
Using this option you can set a confirmation message that will be displayed when the button is pressed. Leave it empty if you don’t need to display a message.
Message
CSS for the the button, if you do not change this option Scriptcase will apply the default application/project CSS. You can customize the buttons’ CSS using the option within
CSS Style
the main menu “Layout » CSS Buttons”
Reload quantity of
Option used to update the amount of application records.
records
Image
Grid’s Run Button settings - Image type
Display Mode Combo box to select the button display option, you can choose image, button or link.
Icon Button display icon. You can use this option to select an image (from Scriptcase images or from you computer) to represents the button within the application toolbar.
Confirmation Message Using this option you can set a confirmation message that will be displayed when the button is pressed. Leave it empty if you don’t need to display a message.
Tipo Button type description.
Link
Grid’s Run Button settings - Link type
Display Mode Combo box to select the button display option, you can choose link, button or image.
Label Text that will be displayed on the button (on running application).
Hint Application button title (text that will be displayed for the button within the application)
Confirmation Message Using this option you can set a confirmation message that will be displayed when the button is pressed. Leave it empty if you don’t need to display a message.
CSS Style CSS class name, style created in the theme buttons editor .
Coding Area
Grid’s Run Button settings - Coding area

7
There are two types of events in the Run button
OnRecord : Runs after processing on each record selected.
OnFinish : Runs after processing all records selected.
In this coding area you can use Scriptcase Macros, PHP and JavaScript.
1
Nested Grids
HOME › APPLICATIONS › STORED PROCEDURES › NESTED GRIDS
Nested grids are used when you need to display hierarchical data, such as customers and their respective applications. The main Grid encapsulates other Grids, showing in each
of its Nested grids additional data records. Note the image below in which for each customer is displayed a sub-query with the applications.
Customer Grid with an order nested grid.
Settings
In the application menu, by clicking on the item folder Configuration Nested grids, can be changed the General attributes of the Nested grids.
Nested grid menu.
Nested grid general settings.
Attributes
Title in the same line : This attribute enables you to configure the Nested Grid title display. If it is displayed on the same line, Nested Grid table will be incorporated into the main Grid.
Example using Nested Grid title on the same line.
PDF : This option allows you to enable/disable the nested grid display in PDF reports.
Enable TreeView : This option enables an option to hide/display the Nested Grid within the main Grid records. By choosing “Yes”, the option “Title in the same line” will be automatically
disabled.
Using tree view in the Nested Grid.

2
Position : This option allows you to configure the Nested Grid placement in the main Grid. This option is not available if you enable “Title in the same line”. You will be able to position
the Nested Grid within the records. The options are:
In one column
Displaying the Nested Grid in the same row of the
main Grid record.
Below the record
Displaying the Nested Grid in a separate row of
the main Grid record.
Alignment : Allows you to set the Nested Grid alignment in the main Grid interface when “Position” is set set as Below the record. The options are: left, right and Center.
Set individually
Any of the attributes that use the value “Set individually” requires the property to be configured on each created link settings.
Links
To create a Nested Grid link click on the “New link” within the Link folder.
Creating a new Nested Grid
Adding a new Nested Grid : Enter the name and the label for the link that will be created.
Adding a new Nested Grid
Application list : All Grid applications from current project, that contain global variables, will be listed.
Grid application selection.
For an application to be used as a Nested Grid, it must have within its SQL command (Grid > SQL) a WHERE clause with a global variable to receive the parameters from the main Grid.
SQL query configuration to the Grid be used as Nested Grid.

3
Parameters setting : Setting the value that will be passed to the variable(s) of the Nested Grid SQL statement.
Informing the parameter to the variable
In the screen above, on the left side, it is displayed the Nested Grid input parameters (global variables created within the Nested Grid WHERE clause), on the right side, you must
select the parameter option. The options are:
Attributes
Field : Used to assign a Grid field value as a parameter.
Fix : Used to assign a fixed value as a parameter.
Empty : Choosing this option will not be assigned any value as a parameter.
Save button : By clicking this button the Nested Grid creation will be completed and saved.
Editing an existing Nested Grid link

All Nested Grid links created will placed within its menu options, inside the folder “Links”. By clicking on the Nested Grid name there will be an interface for settings editing.
Editing a Nested Grid
General settings
Nested Grid general settings
This interface can be used to edit the following Nested Grid attributes:
Label : Nested Grid title for the application
Link : In this attribute are displayed the current Nested Grid connection data, showing the application and parameters used. To change any link attribute just click to edit Link.
Display : This attribute allows you to set which Nested Grid items, if it uses any of these resources, will be displayed in the main Grid.
Display settings
* __1__ : Display Title.

* __2__ : Sequential display (number line).
* __3__ : Display Totals.
Inherit view : When marked it sets that the Nested Grid view will be equal to that of the main Grid.
Set individually
If the value of one of the attributes in the Nested Grid settings has been selected as “Set Individually”, these values must be configured in the Nested Grid editing screen for each
called link.
4
Nested Grid settings.
Display settings
These options will only appear if all of the following conditions are true:
Attribute Value
Title in the same line No
Enable Tree view No
Position In one column
Nested Grid display settings
Attributes
Horizontal Alignment : This option sets the Nested Grid horizontal alignment. It can be aligned left, right or Center.
Vertical Alignment : This option sets the Nested Grid vertical alignment. It can be aligned to the top, middle, or End.
Background color : Here you can set the background color. If it is not filled it will get the Grid default background color.
Title horizontal alignment : This option sets the Nested Grid label horizontal alignment. It can be aligned Left, Right or Center.
Title vertical alignment : This option sets the Nested Grid label vertical alignment. It can be aligned to the top, middle, or End.
Bold : This option sets the Nested Grid title (label) in bold.
1
Grid totals
HOME › APPLICATIONS › STORED PROCEDURES › GRID TOTALS
The total fields will be displayed only when the Grid application is using at least one Group By.
Settings
The settings below only can be applied for the Grid totals.
Results in a single line. : This option sets the display of the General Total title and its results in a single line.
Example for this option Enabled :
Example for this option Disabled:
Display Total : This option indicates in which pages the General Total will be displayed. The options are: On every page , On the last page or Do not display .
Group Subtotal : This option defines where the subtotal group by will be displayed.
Record Count : This option allows you to view the amount of records by the General Total title.
Example for this option Enabled : * Example for this option Disabled:
Layout settings
Setting of display of the subtotal group.
Label - This field sets the Label for the Group Subtotal .
Display - This option sets if the Group Subtotal it will be display.
Select fields
Using the select fields area you can set the total fields ant the total options for each field. The same field can be used more than once in the Grid totals area, just if they are using
different summaries types.
To define the fields that will be used for totals, drag them to the area, Grid Totals .
2
Note: The total fields will only be displayed if they are also selected to be displayed within the Grid application module.
When positioning the fields, you must define what summarization will be used, to select that you must click in the combo box and select one of the available options, that will be
according to the data type (integer, date, text…).
The summarization options available are:
Sum : Sets a sum of the values for the selected field.
Maximum : Displays the highest value identified in the selected field.
Minimum : Displays the lowest value identified in the selected field.
Average (Avg) : Calculates the arithmetic mean of the values for the selected field.
Variance : Calculates the dispersion of the values related to the average.
Standard Deviation : Measures the variability of values around the average, the minimum value of the standard deviation is 0 indicating that there is variability, i.e. that all values are equal to
the mean.
Weighted mean (WAvg) : Calculates the weighted average for the selected field. To set the weight used in the calculation of the average access field settings selected in Totals > Fields (select
the field where you are using the Weighted mean) > Weighted average weight.
Weighted average weight : Field that will be used as weighted average weight. In calculating the weighted average, each set value is multiplied by its “weight”, that is its relative
importance.
Count : Displays the total number of records for the selected field.
Distinct Count : Displays the total number of records for the selected field, distinguishing the values.
Important note: The fields in the Grid totals are displayed only on Grids with no Group by or with empty Group by.
Positioning
Defines the positioning and the label used by Grid totals. There are three display formats,, Default, Grouped or By field
Default
To add the same field two or more times in the Totals or use different types of summaries in selected fields, this option will not be displayed.
The option Default returns the result below the column being summarized. When you use the total for more than one column of the Grid, using the same type of summarization,
the results are displayed on the same line.
3
The line with General Total displaying the Sales.
ALIGNMENT
Left :
Right :
Center :
LABEL SETTINGS (DEFAULT)
This option allow you to customize the total labels.
As default we are going to display Grant total
Grouped
The option Grouped returns the total result, separating each type per line.
It is possible to position the total lines by dragging to the desired position.
In this example, we are displaying the sum, average, maximum and minimum of column Sales.
4
ALIGNMENT
Left :
Right :
Center :
LABEL SETTINGS (GROUPED)
By field
This option displays the values in the left corner by positioning the results next to each other.
LINE BREAK PER FIELD
This option sets the total fields display. If selected it shows the fields in the same row or divided by line.
Separated by line:
5
Displayed on the same line:
LABEL SETTINGS (BY FIELD)
Fields
This option allows you to configure the display of values and labels of the selected fields in the Grid totals.
General Settings
Allows you to change the label displayed in the totals
Visual configuration for the Grid totals

Sets the formatting of the fields displayed in the subtotal for the group.
Example of formatting the subtotal for the Group:
General Total Visual setting

Sets the formatting of the fields displayed in the General total.
6
Example of formatting the Grid General Total

1
Application
HOME › APPLICATIONS › STORED PROCEDURES › APPLICATION
Settings
Error Settings
Attributes
2
Navigation
Attributes
Global Variables
Example:

3
1
1. Home
2. Applications
General Overview
New Link
Edit Link:
Capture Link:
Field Link:
Button Link:
1
1. Home
2. Applications
4. New link
New link
![Links menu interface.][ligacao_nova] Links menu interface.
When you click the “New Link” item from ScriptCase application menu will, the screen below will be displayed.
![Interface for creating links][ligacao_criando] Interface for creating links

1
1. Home
2. Applications
4. Application Link
Application Link
Used to edit records of a Grid Application by using a Form Application. In the generated Grid you will view a link for each record to edit the records. Clicking on
the link, the form selected can be displayed in various ways (in an iframe, in the same window or on another window).
Application: You need to select the form application that is going to be called by the Grid Application.
Parameters Definition
Parameters Definition Interface.
On the screen above, on the left side, are displayed the parameters that are expected for the form application (Primary Key, Global Variables), on the right side, you need to select
the option that is going to be set to the parameter. The options are:
Field : Used to pass a field value of a Grid as a parameter.

Value : Used to pass a static value as a parameter.
Variable : Used to pass a global variable value used in the Grid as a parameter.
Empty : Choosing this option, no value will be passed as a parameter.
1
1. Home
2. Applications
4. Fiels Link
Fiels Link
Creating a field link
Allows to create a link, represented through a link, from a grid’s column to any project’s existing application. All the links are displayed in a dropdown if there are more than one link
to the same field.
In the types of link option, we will choose the Field link.
Applications list
All:
By folder:
By type:
Fixed value:
No value:
Link properties
Modal:

2
Hint for the link:

Hint for the link:
Open in an iframe
Hint for the link:

Iframe’s height:
Iframe’s width:
Modal
application.
Height:
Width:

3
Hint for the link:
Form Properties
Grid’s Properties
In those settings we can define how our target grid will be displayed. We inicially have six options, that are:
Initial module:
We can define how our application will be executed in those two options:
Grid: The application will be executed as a grid.

Search: The application will be executed as a search.
Quantity of rows:
In this option we can define the quantity of rows that will be displayed in the target application.
Quantity of Columns:
In this option we can define the quantity of columns that will be displayed in the target application.
Pagination:
In this option we can define if the target application’s pagination will be total or partial, in case partial is the selected option the quantity of rows will be the informed previously.
Enable header:
In this option we can define if the target application’s header will be displayed.
1
1. Home
2. Applications
4. Capture Link
Capture Link
Applications list
All:
By folder:
By type:
Fixed value:
No value:
Link properties
Modal:
Modal
application.
Modal:
2
Height:
Width:
1
1. Home
2. Applications
4. Button Link
Button Link
All:
By folder:
By type:
Fixed value:
No value:
Link properties
Modal:

Hint for the link:

2

Hint for the link:
Title to the tab:
Hint to the tab:
Active tab icon:
Modal
application.
Height:
Width:
Hint for the link:
Form Properties

3
1
1. Home
2. Applications
4. Links Edit
Links Edit
Editing Links.
Actions
Link
parameters.
1
1. Home
2. Applications
4. Link Propeties
Link Propeties
On the screen below, you can see the attributes relevant to the link behavior of that need to be informed.
Link properties Interface.
Link Operation Mode :

Open in the same Window : Displays the Form in the same browser window.
Open in another Window : Displays the Form in another window of the browser.
Open in Iframe : The Form will be displayed in the same window, allowing to position below, above, to the left or right of the Grid.
Open in Parent : If the Grid is in a iframe, it displays the Form in the page’s parent viewport.
Modal : Opens the Form in modal, allowing to configure the modal’s size.
Display button (new row) on the grid toolbar : This option, when enabled, adds a button to the toolbar that allows to add a New Record to the Form.
Label for the button New : You can apply a Label for the button, if not informed the label will be “New”.
Hint for the button New : You can apply a Hint for the button, if not informed the hint will be “New”.
Hotkey for the button “New” : Indicates which key will be the shortcut for the New Record.
Exit URL for the target application : The URL that is going to call after exiting the Form. In case no value is informed, the “back” button will redirect to the Grid.
Form Property
Allows to select the buttons that are going to be displayed in the Form through the link. Form properties configurations
Interface.
Enable insert button on target application : Enables the Insert Button in the Form.
Enable update button on target application : Enables the Update Button in the Form.
Enable delete button on target application : Enables the Delete Button in the Form.
Enable navigation button on target application : Enables the navigation buttons (first, previous, next and last) in the Form.
Enable button to edit a grid record : Enables the edit button for each record.
Iframe properties
These options are displayed when the property Link Operation Mode is set to “Open in Iframe”. Iframe properties
configurations Interface.
Display the header of the called application: Displays the Form’s header.
Iframe position relative to the main application : It can be: below, above, right or left.
Action After Insert view the list below :
Reload Grid : Does a refresh on the current page.
Move to the end of the grid : Navigate to the Grid’s last page.
Iframe height : Iframe Height in pixels.
Iframe width : Iframe Width in pixels.
1
Programming
HOME › APPLICATIONS › STORED PROCEDURES › PROGRAMMING
The concept of programming is incorporated in this ScriptCase version. With the use of resources of attributes, methods and libraries. In the previous version was already possible
create business rules in the applications, using this concept. The biggest difference is that now this can be realized in a more organized way, making it easier to be developed and
comprehended by another developer.
Attributes
Attributes
Internal Libraries
PHP Methods
Include Method.

2

1
New Application
Dados da Aplicação
When the Procedure application is selected the following screen will be displayed:
In this tab you need to select the connection that will be used in the application. When selected the connection, you need to inform the name of the procedure that will be used
and inform if it uses parameters.
Procedure Name: You will inform here the procedure name that will be used in this application.
Connection: Select the connection SQL Server that has the called procedure.
Name: It defines the name of your Procedure application.
Localization: It defines the language and charset that the application will use.
Number of parameters: Informs how many parameters to be defined exists in the Procedure.
Edit Fields
In this tab we will set the parameters informed in the application creation, to be defined correctly.
Parameter: It shows the quantity of parameters informed in the application’s data.
Var Name: It informs the variable name to be passed as a parameter in the Procedure.
Type: Selects the type of data of the parameter.
Value: It defines a default value to be called by the parameter.
Theme
automatically.
1
Email Export
EXPORT
Sending Options
SMTP
Gateway.
to: 25
Mandrill
Gateway.
Amazon SES
Gateway.
Export Settings
2
1
General Overview
HOME › TOOLS
Scriptcase offers tools that helps you out on developing systems, with the goal of optimizing the time of development making it easier to maintain your product.
Data Dictionary - This tool offers the option to create langs for the applications of your current project.
Express Edit - This tool offers the option to edit various applications simultaneously, it contains some options to be edited in the applications.
External Libraries - This tool offers the option to include external libraries to your project like JavaScript, CSS, HTML and other libraries. This allows you to integrate the
libraries to your applications.
Internal Libraries - This tool offers the option to create PHP functions to be used in the applications.
To-Do List - Allows you to create a To-Do List and assign Tasks to your developers.
Messages - Allows the developers to exchange messages between themselves in the same ScriptCase .
Converters - This tool offers the option to convert your projects from previous versions of ScriptCase to the current version.
Database Import - This tool offers the option to import tables in the formats (XLS, CSV and ACCESS) for the following databases: MySQL, PostgreSQL, SQLite and SQL Server
SQL Builder - This tool is an interface that provides some options to create a SELECT query to be used in your applications.
Database Builder - This tool is an interface to manage your database directly from ScriptCase, without needing to use any other software. It supports the Databases: MySQL,
SqlServer (not ODBC), SQLite, Oracle, Postgres.
1
Data Dictionary
HOME › TOOLS › DATA
DICTIONARY
The Data Dictionary is used to internationalize your system, by using this feature, you can create a data repository and associate it too one or more tables.
To access this functionality, you need to access it from the main menu Tools > Data Dictionary.
Creating a Data Dictionary

Inform the necessary data for the creation of the repository. The files with an asterisk are required.
The option Associate dictionary with connection , define a connection to associate with the repository data, allowing that the new applications, created using the tables
associated with the repository, have indexes in the language files with the field labels from the tables.
Add tables to the Data Repository

Here we need to select the tables that will be added to this repository. After selecting the desired tables click on next.
You should choose whether or not to create the indexes (langs) on the field labels of the existing applications of the project.
Generate the indexes in the language files of the table fields - On this option the field labels are replaced with he indexes that can be edited in one place when accessing Locales >
Application Language.
An example of an index created by the Data Dictionary:
Overwriting the indexes in the language files - On this option, the existing indexes will be overwritten with new data based on the database.
Next, we can view a list of tables added to the repository data, where we can view a couple of information about these tables, like the name of the table of the database and the
2
index created for each table, on the label field, and the version of the Data Dictionary of each field.
The tables that were not added can be viewed when accessing the Dictionary tables, the process of including these tables to the repository of data is the same.
When doing a modification to the structure of the database tables, the same should be updated using the option SYNCHRONIZE DICTIONARY .
Table status
Next to the name of the tables there’s an icon that indicates the status of the tables.
Green - Indicates that the tables and the repository are updated.
Red - Indicates that the tables don’t exist in the database, in this case you should delete it from the repository.
Yellow - Indicates that the tables are not updated because of some modification in its structure. In these cases, you should click o the link edit referring to the table and click on update, so
that the data of the repository could update.
Edit Tables
Can be found on the right side, in the list of tables.
This option allows you to edit the fields from the chosen table, like the data types and the indexes created by the repository for example.
Other properties of the fields can be accessed when clicking the plus icon on the right side of the field list.
Syncing Dictionary
This option is activated when selecting one or more tables, on this option we will update the data dictionary according to the database.
3
When synchronizing the tables, a yellow icon will be displayed on the side of the updated tables, See how to remove it . In case of change the structure of the tables, then you
need to resync them again.
Synchronizing Applications
After doing all the desired configurations on the tables and fields, you need to sync the changes to the existing applications, so that the changes can be applied.
First, you need to select the tables that will be synchronized.
Next, you can define what will be done and which applications will suffer the modifications. A list of applications, that received the changes, are based on the tables that they
used.
When clicking on synchronizing, when finishing the process, you will see a summary of the procedure done.
Clicking to show the log, you can view all the modifications done, where it will display the previous state (blue) and the result of the modification (red)
Clicking on Back you will return to the Page of definition of modifications.

4
To finish the process, click on close.
Editing the Data Dictionary Properties

On the top part, we can view the dictionary properties, informed when created.
You have three possible actions, Edit, Reload and Close.
Edit - Allows you to change the data of the properties of the dictionary, like the modification of the connection used to associated with repository for example.
Reload - Updates all the information of the Data Dictionary, like the status of the table for example.
Close - Closes the current data dictionary and you are redirected to the list of dictionary.
Editing Indexes
To edit the created indexes in the repository, access Locales > Application Language .
On the side panel is possible to view all the lang from ScriptCase. The langs referring to the data dictionary will be in the folder Project Messages .
1
Express Edit
HOME › TOOLS › EXPRESS EDIT
This tool offers the option to edit multiple applications of your project simultaneously, where you can define value for various common attributes for these applications.
Some configurations are available.
See below how to use the express edit.
This tool can be accessed from the menu Tools > Edit Express .
Select applications which will be edited
Firstly, we need to inform which applications we want to edit.
All - All the applications existing in the project without exceptions, will be edited.
Select Applications - All the applications existing in the project will be listed, so that you can select the applications that you want to edit.
Apply Modifications
After selecting the applications, you will need to define the modifications that you want for those applications. In this page, we can define how the modifications will be applied.
Appling to all the applications
This option allows to apply the same configurations, to all the selected applications, automatically.
2
Header Image - Define the image for the header of the applications.
Use Security - Define the use of security on the applications of the project.
Enable direct call by URL - Allow the applications to be called directly by the URL.
Enable CSRF - Enables the “Cross-Site Request Forgery” protection. (This option only applies for the Control and Form applications)
Show HTML content - Defines if the HTML code stored in the database will be interpreted by the browser. (This option only applies for the Grid application)
Remove the HTML tags - Defines if the HTML code stored in the database will have the HTML tags removed for display.
Run content in JavaScript - Defines if the JavaScript code stored in the database will run on the browser.
Save HTML tags - Stores the HTML tags informed within the Application field to the database. (This option only applies for the Form application)
Text input in JavaScript - Stores the JavaScript informed within the Application field to the database. (This option only applies for the Form application)
Language - Applies the selected language for all the selected applications in the project.
Connection - Apply the desired connection (Connections created in the “New Connection” module) for the applications.
Connection for fields - Apply the desired connection (Connections created in the “New Connection” module) for the fields in the applications.
Theme - Apply the desired Theme (Only the ones included in the Project properties) to all the applications.
Template - Change the Header and Footer template of the applications.
After selecting the modifications that you want to do for all the select applications, It will be displayed a list with all the selected attributes that will be listed for modification.
Apply individually
This option allows you to apply the modifications individually for each application selected.
This option contains, not only the previous attributes, but also three exclusive attributes.
Description - Apply a description individually for the selected applications.
Friendly URL - Apply a friendly URL individually for each selected application.
Title - Apply the title individually for each application.
After selecting the modifications individually for all the select applications, It will be displayed a list with all the selected attributes that will be listed for modification.
When you apply the modifications, It will be displayed a list of the applications that were modified.
1
Helpcase
HOME › TOOLS › HELPCASE
This tool is used to create a documentation for your system, that works integrated with the projects related by ScriptCase.
This tool can be accessed from the menu at Tools > HelpCase.
How to Create a HelpCase

The creation process is simple, needing only to inform the name of the documentation.
After creating the helpcase, you need to generate the content of the documented manual of the functionalities and description of the project.
On the left side, in the block ‘WebHelp’, we will see the folder structure. Still in this block we can create the folders of the documentation.
Select the root or any other folder on the side panel and click on the folder icon. This way a folder will be created in the select directory.
Inform the directory name (Special characters are not acceptable) and the display name in the documentation menu.
To create .html files, where you will place your content, you need to select the directory where you will place the files in.
Inform the name of the file (Special characters are not acceptable) and the display name in the documentation menu.
Editing the helpcase

Selecting the folder that you will create, you will view some new option with the create button.
2
Icon (Folder with letters) - Allows you to rename the archives and the display name for the menu.
Icon (Recycle Bin) - Deletes the directory with all its content.
Icon (Eye) - View the directory in the documentation menu.
Icon (Slashed Eye) - Disable the view of the directory in the documentation menu.
After created, the files will be displayed on the list, when clicking on the directory that were created. Details about the files can be viewed, like the display title on the menu and
its actual size, also other options like rename and delete.
View - View the content of the file.
Edit - Open the file to place your content in it.
Link - Create a link between the file and the applications selected.
Copy - Creates a copy of the file.
Rename - Rename the file and it is display menu.
Delete - Deletes the chosen file.
After the creation or clicking on edit a file, you can insert the content that will be displayed for the end user.
Upload
You can upload already created content or images to use in the manual. The upload of these files, can be done by clicking on the upload button, on the upload page you will see
the supported formats and size limit of the files.
General Settings
Settings
Allows you to setup some things, like the header display and the search tab.
3
Initial Page
Allows to write content of the initial page of the documentation. The modification can be done also when selecting the _home.htm file on the files panel.
View
Define a template to be used in the header of the manual, it is possible to edit or create new templates in the editor.
This editor can be accessed from the menu Layout > HTML Templates
Header
Allows to configure what will be displayed in the header.
CSS
Allows to modify the HelpCase CSS.
4
After creating all the content and the configuration of the layout, you need to associate the create files with the applications, so that the end user can have access to the
information that he needs in a quick way.
Associating Applications
You can start associating all the applications at once by clicking on links, or clicking on link, where you can associate only the chosen file to various applications.
Links
On this option, you will see a list of the applications, where you should select the applications that will be associated.
Link
Clicking on link, you will be presented a list of all the applications, in this case you need to select the files that will be associated for each application.
Generating Manual
Generating the manual is the last step of its creation, after doing all the configurations, click on generate.
5
After generating the manual, you can download or access it.
For you to have access to the manual from the applications, you need to click on the button WebHelp on the toolbar of the applications that have a link to the manual.
1
External Libraries
HOME › TOOLS › EXTERNAL LIBRARIES
This feature allows to import complete libraries and create files of any extension (.JS, .CSS, .PHP…) that can be used in your projects, making it easier to reuse some of the source
code.
This feature is available in the menu Tools > External Libraries, where you can manage the libraries of your project.
To use this functionality, you need to use the macro, sc_url_library() and the sc_include_library() (Only for PHP files)to import the library to the applications.
Creating a new library

To create a library, click on Create a new library. Next, inform the library name and the access level of the library.
Public - Available for all the ScriptCase projects.
Project - Available only for the project it was created in.
Managing the Libraries

All the public and project libraries are listed here. This page allows you to select the libraries that will be part of the project, delete the unnecessary libraries, rename or edit them.
Using a Library
This option defines a library that will be used in the current project. The enabled libraries, for this project, can be differentiated by the checkmark next to the name of the library.
Selecting a library to be used in the project, the icon changes color when you click on the button “Save the library to the project” and enabled, you need to click on the button to
save the modifications.
Rename
To rename a library just click on “rename”, and then inform the new name for the library.
To rename a library, you will need to change all the includes of the library in the events of the applications.
2
Editing a Library
Clicking on “Editing”, you can create or upload files to the libraries. You can create files in a folder, with the goal to organize your files.
On Footer of the page, you can view the options to create or upload the files.
New Directory
To create a directory, click on “New Directory” and inform the name of the directory.
New File
To create a file, click on “New File” and inform the name and extension (it is indispensable to inform the file extension).
Upload Files
This tool, allows to upload files and external libraries and used them in the project.
Clicking on upload, select the desired file.
Delete
Delete the libraries and all the files contained in them.
Before deleting the library, be certain that it is not being used, you will not be able to recover deleted libraries.
Importing libraries into the applications

3
Like mentioned before, to use the libraries, you need to use the macro sc_url_library() and the sc_include_library() (Only for PHP files).
The macro sc_url_library() returns the path to the file in the library and the sc_include_library() is used to include php files into applications from the external library:
This example changes the background color of a grid application, se the code in the style.css file
1
Internal Libraries
HOME › TOOLS › INTERNAL LIBRARIES
This tool allows to create or upload php routines that can be reused in various applications of the project or other projects, depending on the level of access that they were
saved.
There are three types of access levels that can be used.
User - Only for the user that created the script will have access.
Project - All the users linked to the project will have access to the script.
Public - All the users from ScriptCase will have access to the script.
You can’t create or modify scriptcase that are in the Scriptcase Level, the scripts from this level are available to be used but nor modified.
Creating a Script
The item Internal Libraries are accessed from the tools menu.
Select the level that the script is being saved, in this example the user level was used.
Next, inform a name for the file, place your code and save it.
Using the Script

To use the Scripts, firstly you need to enable them in the applications that you want to use.
All the libraries that you have access will be listed, just select the the ones you desire to enable and use them.
To use the libraries, you need to import them by using the macro sc_include .
Example of using the macro: sc_include("File", "Origin");

1
To-Do List
HOME › TOOLS › TO-DO LIST
Tool that allows the creation of a list of tasks for the users registered in the same ScriptCase, with a progress control for the task.
A message that will always be displayed when the users that possess a task pending login.
To access the feature, go to the menu Tools > To-Do List
Accessing it, you will see all the registered tasks with the information about each one of them.
Creating a Task
The tasks can be created in four levels.
Public List - All the ScriptCase users can view the tasks of the this level.
My List - Only the Creator and the user responsible for the task can view.
Project: Public List - All the users of ScriptCase, linked to the project that the task was created can view them. (This option is available only when a project is opened)
Project: My List - Only the Creator and the Responsible user can view this task, they need to have access to the project where the task was created. (This option is available only when a
project is opened)
Firstly, you need to select where you are going to create the task. Selecting the folder, the “New Task” button will be enabled.
Next, after clicking on “New Task”, you need to fill up the required fields.
Task list - Name of da tarefa, que será exibido na lista das tarefas.
Percentage done - Inform the percentage of the task conclusion.
Deadline - Define the date and time that the task need to be concluded.
Responsible - Define which of the ScriptCase users are responsible for the task.
Who can change - Defines who can modify the current task:
Owner - Only the user that created the task.
Responsible - Only the user responsible for the task.
All - All the ScriptCase users can modify the task.
Application - Inform the application of the project that the responsible user needs to edit. (This option will only be available for task created in a project.)
Description - Task Description.
Task Status
This tool is used to inform the status of the task, using colors to symbolize the progress.
Open tasks - Tasks recently created within the deadline, are represented in yellow.
Completed tasks - Tasks that finished completely, are represented in blue.
Expired tasks - Tasks that passed the deadline, are represented in red.
2
1
Messages
HOME › TOOLS › MESSAGES
The message system allows the communication between the registered developers on the same ScriptCase.
You can access this feature. Tools > Messages.
New Message
After clicking on the New Message button, you need to select the user that is going to receive the message.
One message can be sent to many users.
After typing the message, click on send.
Inbox
Receiving the message, the users will be notified by an alert.
You can click on the notification bell or access Tools > Message to view the received messages.
Accessing the inbox where all the received messages are stored and ordered by the date.
Outbox
The sent messages are stored in the outbox.
By sending a message to various users, it will be registered a message for each user in the outbox.
Read and Reply

Click on the message that you want to read.
2
When reading a message, you can reply the received message.
Received Response
In the Outbox, a responded message can be identified with a Re: before the subject
The original message, will be highlighted in the received response.
Delete Messages
You can delete the messages individually by clicking on the delete link.
You can also delete various messages. Select all the messages that you want to delete and then click on the delete button.
1
Converters
HOME › TOOLS › CONVERTERS
Project Converters
The Project Converter allows to convert the projects developed in previous versions of Scriptcase to the current version of Scriptcase.
Basically it is an import of the projects from different versions of Scriptcase.
The process of conversion does not modify any of the information of your project.
To prevent eventual problems, it is recommend to create a backup of your projects.
The project’s conversion works the same way for all Scriptcase versions.
Coping Scriptcase
If your Scriptcase is not installed in the same place of your Scriptcase 9 you need to copy the Scriptcase folder, of the previous version, nexto to the current ScriptCase folder that
will receive the projects.
In this example:
Scriptcase 8 folder - Old version of the tool.
Scriptcase 9 folder - Version that will receive all the projects.
Coping the Scriptcase 8 folder to the same place
Path to Scriptcase
In Scriptcase select the converter (compatible to the version that you want to convert), and inform the complete path to the folder of the old version.
If your Scriptcase 9 is installed in the same place of your old version you can inform the complete path where your old version is installed.
Ex1: /opt/NetMake/v9/wwwroot/scriptcase
Ex2: C:\Program Files(x86)\NetMake\v81\wwwroot\scriptcase
Informing the path to the Scriptcase 8
Converting the projects from your old version

In this screen will appear all projects from your old version.
Convert : Will convert the projects from your old version.
Not Convert : Will not convert the projects from your old version.
If is not the first time that you are converting, may appear a option called Overwrite . If you convert with this option selected will overwrite your project with the old one.
2
Selecting the projects that will be converted
Next, you will view a log of everything that has been converted. With this the selected projects are already in the current ScriptCase and ready for use.
Information showing the success

1
Database Convert
HOME › TOOLS › DATABASE CONVERT
Allows you to convert one or more data sources to one structured database. You can convert the stored tables in .XLS, .CSV, .accdb and .mdb files to the following databases:
MySQL, PostgreSQL, SQLite and SQL Server.
You can find all the options to import databases in the menu Database.
Access Import
Selecting Files
First, select the files that will be converted. You can inform the absolute path to the file, drag and drop the file or select the file in the option Select Files.
!mSelecting an access file to convert the tables
Configuring the tables

After selecting the file, you will need to access the configuration page.
On this page, you will see the password field, that is only used with Acess files that were selected and require a password to list the tables. In these cases, after informing the
password, click on list tables .
Still in the same page, you can view the tabs Tables and Advanced.
Table Tabs
We can view a list of the tables that can be converted. Beside the name of the tables, are two options: Edit and Preview.
On the option Edit , you can modify the table structure that will be created, like the name, field size, and the data type and other options.
in Preview you will see a preview of how the table will be imported.
Advanced Tab
2
On the “Advanced” tab the configurations import script for the table are available. You can configure the script that will be created for the generation of the tables of new
database.
Add DROP TABLE - Adds a DROP TABLE IF EXISTS before the CREATE of the tables, so that if the tables exist with the same name in the database, they will be deleted first.
Recreate the database structure - Where you will define the table structure and the data that will be imported.
Recreate the structure - Where you will define only the structure the table that will be imported.
Recreate data - Where you will define only the data of the tables that will be imported (In case the tables exist in the database with the same structure of the ones being imported)
Connection
On this step, we need to select the connection (Database) to where you will import the tables. You can select a connection existing in the project or create a new one.
Next, you will be presented with a log of the tables that have been imported and the total of records inserted.
XLS Import
Selecting Files
After selecting the file, you need to access the configuration page.
On this page, you need to inform first the line that the name of the columns are, this way all the information that is below will be considered a record of the table. If you do not
inform the line, all the file content will be considered a record.
3
You can view below the list of tables of the files, with the names of the tables and the name of the file. In the case of XLS or CSV files, the table names are obtained through the
name of the tab in the file.
Table Tabs
Advanced Tab
database.
Connection
4
CSV Import
Selecting Files

After selecting the file, you need to access the configuration page.
On this page, you need to inform first the line that the name of the columns are, this way all the information that is below will be considered a record of the table. If you do not
inform the line, all the file content will be considered a record.
You can view below the list of tables of the files, with the names of the tables and the name of the file. In the case of XLS or CSV files, the table names are obtained through the
name of the tab in the file.
Table Tabs
Advanced Tab
5
database.
Connection
1
SQL Builder
HOME › TOOLS › SQL BUILDER
This tool helps on the construction of Queries in a Wizard form. These queries can be saved and used later.
Database
Any SQL can run directly from the Run tab that will be available after selecting the database.
Firstly you need to select the connection(Database) that you want to use.
Tables
All the existing tables in the database are listed in the Tables tab.
Select the desired tables to create the query.
You can select various tables, although they need to have a relationship between them.
Fields
Select the fields that will be part of the query. The fields can be ordered alphabetically (Ascendant) or in the order that they were created (Default)
It is possible to create an alias for the selected tables, this option can be found below the field list were also all the selected tables will be listed.
Joins
Defining the fields, it is necessary to configure the join. To do that, you need to select the tables that have a relationship, next you will select the type of join that will be used in
the field Type then click on Add.
2
After clicking on add, click on Confirm , so that you can inform the fields that do the relationship between the tables.
Defining the fields, you will be redirected to the run tab.
To add a “WHERE” clause to the SQL, click on the tab Conditions
Conditions
You can add the “WHERE” clauses where the query was created.
Order By
Define the sorting of the query result display.
Run
This is where you can run the SQL commands. The result of the query configuration wizard will be displayed on this tab. You can run DML (Data Manipulation Language)
commands here and also DDL (Definition Data Language) commands.
3
You can define a total of records per page.
Saved
To save the created commands, just inform the name of the query and click on the save button. The commands that are already, will be listed.
1
Database Builder
HOME › TOOLS › DATABASE BUILDER
This is a tool that allows the management of your database into ScriptCase. This tool is avaliable to connections with: MySQL, SQLServer(Cannot be ODBC), SQLite, Oracle and
Postgres.
In the beginning we must select an existing connection in the project.
This tool can be accessed in the menu Database.
The options and settings on the Database Builder depends of the user database privileges and the used database.
Acessing the Database Builder

First, select the database connection that we wish to display.
Next step, we will go to the home screen from Database Builder, where we can access all the available functionalities.
At the screen left corner, we will see a few functionalities and the table list, to a quickly access of the selected database.
DB
Allows see the database that is being accessed in the moment. Here we can change the database.
To the databases which possess user access restriction, it is necessary that the user set in the connection creation has access to all the databases
SQL Commands
Allows to execute any SQL command, from a select command to procedure commands of creation and execution, for example.
In this case, we will execute a simple SELECT.

2
Below the code insertion area, we can see a history of commands that were executed.
If everything goes well, when runs the command, will be showed the consult result, with the edição dos registros possibility.
Below of the displayed result, we will see a summary of the used tables in the SQL, informing the number of lines, the quantity of id fields and other informations, even the
executed SQL.
To return to the database builder home screen, select the table in the ‘breadcrumb’ in the page top.
Import Files
Allows you to execute .SQL files.
Export Tables
Enables the creation of a dump in the database.
We must review the default settings of the exportation, for that we can change them and format according with our necessities.
Output - Actions around the exportation.

Open - Display all the generated SQL inside the ScriptCase.
3
Save - Generates a .sql file.
gzip - Generates a .sql.gz file.
Format - Format of the created file.
Database - Defines the commands utilization referring at the database creation.
Tables - Defines the commands utilization referring at the database creation.
Data - Defines the commands utilization at the data insertion.
Create Tables
Enables the tables creation through of a simple and intuitive interface, where we can create them quickly.
Database Change
Enables change the database name, your default collation or delete the database.
Database Schema
Display a relationship diagram of the database tables.
Privileges
Edit the users privileges to the current database.

4
Create View
Enables a quickly creation of a view, where we must inform only the name and the select that will be used in the view.
After save, we can see the command executed and the structure of the created view.
All the created views can be displayed toghether the database tables.
Create Procedure
This functionality makes the procedure creation more easily. The parameters must be informed like in the example below, where we obligatory must inform the parameter type
(input and/or output), your name, the data type that will recieve or return and your size.
The executed command will be displayed.

5
All the created procedures can be visualized below the table and view list.
Executing a Procedure
There are two ways to execute a procedure inside the database builder.
At visualize the procedure and functions list, we can click in their name. We will be redirect to the procedure call, where we must inform the input parameter(in case that
procedure possess).
After that, will be displayed the result of the procedure execution and the used SQL for that.
The second way is using the SQL command functionality that allow us to execute any SQL command.
In this case, we must use the command to call a procedure: ‘CALL procedure_name(parameter)’.
Creating Functions
The parameters must be informed like in the example below, where we obligatory must inform your name, the data type that will receive and the size.
We must define the datatype of the function return too.

6
The executed command will be displayed.
Executing a Function
There are two ways to execute a function inside the database builder.
At visualize the procedure and functions list, we can click in their name. We will be redirect to the function call, where we must inform the input parameters(in case that possess).
After that, will be displayed the result of the execution and the used SQL for that.
The second way is using the SQL command functionality that allow us to execute any SQL command.
In this case, we must use the command to call a function: ‘CALL function_name(parameter)’.
1
API
HOME › TOOLS › API
API settings let you integrate the various APIs available into the Scriptcase. Through this interface it is possible to configure email sending, SMS and Online Payment APIs.
APIs List
On access you can view a list of all the APIs already configured.
Name: Configured API Name.
Geteway: Geteway used to send the email.
Email APIs
Scriptcase connects to three different APIs for sending emails: SMTP, Mandrill and Amazon SES.
SMTP Configuration
SMTP is the standard protocol for sending e-mails over the Internet, and each provider has its own SMTP.
Gateway.
Gateway: Select the way the e-mail is sent. In this case the SMTP is selected. SMTP is the default protocol for sending e-mails over the Internet, each provider has its own SMTP.
to: 25
Mandrill Configurations
Gateway.
Gateway: Select the way the e-mail is sent. In this case the Mandrill is selected. Mandrill is a transactional email API for MailChimp users, ideal for sending data-driven emails.
For more information about mandrill
Amazon SES Configurations
Amazon Simple Email Service Amazon SES is an email sending service designed to assist in sending marketing emails, notifications, and transactional messages.

2
For more information about Amazon SES
SMS APIs
Scriptcase connects to different APIs for sending SMS text messages:
Twilio
Plivo
Clickatell
Setting up Twilio API
Twilio is a set of libraries that enables SMS communication on a global scale. For correct configuration, we need to enter the data of Authentication ID, Authentication Token and
Sender, as shown below:
Name: Enter a name for your API;
Gateway: Gateway to be used (in this case we use Twilio);
Auth ID : Enter the authentication ID for your Twilio account;
Auth Token : Enter the authentication Token for your Twilio account;
From : Enter the sender’s number to send the SMS;
Setting up Plivo API
Gateway: Gateway to be used (in this case we use Plivo);
Auth ID : Enter the authentication ID of your Plivo account;
Token ID : Enter the authentication Token of your Plivo account;
From : Enter the sender number to send the SMS;
Setting up Clickatell API
Gateway: Gateway to be used (in this case we use Clickatell);
Auth Token : Enter the authentication Token of your Clickatell account;
Whatsapp APIs
We do use the ChatAPI for sending messages through WhatsApp.
Chat api
First, we should [access the ChatAPI website][get_token_chatapi]{:target=’blank’} where we will get the data needed for the API configuration in Scriptcase.
With the data in hand, go to the Tools> API menu to access the settings screen (as shown below in the image).
Name - Defines the name that will identify the configured API. We recommend that the name is defined in a way that identifies the data used in the configuration, since it is possible to create
more than one API with this Gateway, so it will be simpler to identify the API at the time of the call.
Mode - Defines the access level of this API, which are: Public, where all users of all projects have access to this API; Project , where all users of this project have access to this API; Usuário,
where only the user creating the API will have access to any project.
Gatway - Defines the API that will be used. We must select Chat api.
URL - URL required for or sending a message
Auth Token - Enter Token generating in the settings of your API. [Visit the ChatAPI website to get your token.][get_token_chatapi]{:target=’blank’}
After the configuration of the APIs, we must use the macro macro sc_whatsapp (); where we must inform the other information to send the message.
Check the macro syntax below:

3
sc_send_whatsapp (['profile' => 'api_chatapi',
'message' => 'Message to be sent',
'to' => '558182499699']);
Payment APIs
It is possible to use APIs for online payment processing in Scriptcase. Integration with the following APIs is available:
paypal
Setting up Paypal
Gateway: Gateway to be used (in this case we use paypal_express);
Username: User authentication of the PayPal account;
Password: Password of authentication of the account Paypal;
Signature: Signature of authentication of the Paypal account;
Test Mode: Allows you to use the API as a test mode.

1
Hotkey Templates
HOME › TOOLS › HOTKEY TEMPLATES
This tool allows that the user manage templates to the application hotkeys. Can be possible create a new hotkeys set or use an existing setting and change then to improve your
development environment.
Home screen to the template and scopes managements availables.
AVAILABLES SCOPES:
Scriptcase: Here is the default Scriptcase template. This template cannot be edited or erased, only can visualized or a copy can be made to utilize the already defined
hotkeys.
Public: Here is the created and edited templates at public level by user.
Project: Here is the created and edited templates at project level by user.
In “New” the user will can create a new template with all the configurables hotkeys.
Then, will come the creation screen, when the user will can select the name and the scope of the template that will be created.
Creation screen of Hotkey Templates
Mode: Allows the user to select the scope that the template will be created.
Name: Allows the user to select the name to the template that will be created.
Action: Selects the action that will be made when press the selected keybind.
Keybinding: Selects the keybinds that will be responsible for execute the chosen action.
Clear: Clears all predefined settings by Scriptcase or by user.
When selecting one of the categories that possess created templates, the user will have some setting options. All the applications will come with the Scriptcase default template
configured.
Options to Template configuration.
Edit : Allows the user to edit the name, mode and the defined hotkeys in the template.
Copy: Creates a copy of the selected template allowing to use the same configurations, coulding change the name and hotkeys settings that the user desires.
Delete: Realizes the exclusion of the selected template.
When editing the name or the scope of a template, automatically all the related applications to them will lose your own configurations. Will be necessary configure the edited
template again as in use in the application.
1
Code Snippets
HOME › TOOLS › CODE SNIPPETS
This tool allows the developer to perform the creation of blocks of code and also to use these codes easily in Scriptcase applications. In this way, streamlining and facilitating the
use of programming within the tool.
The created codes can be used in all events present in Scriptcase applications. Through the Snippets tab.
Creating a Code Snippet

To create a Code Snippet, simply click the New button available in the interface.
VIEW:
It allows the user to view all the code, but without the possibility to make edits.
COPY:
It makes a copy of the code snippet for a new one, allowing the user to change where it will be located and the usage name.
EDIT:
It allows the complete editing of the selected code, as well as where it is located and its name of use. This option is only available for the code snippets located in Public, Project,
and User.
After that, the code edit screen will open, where you can create the code desired by the developer. See the image below:
MODE:
Lets you select where the code will be created. As available options there are: Public, Project and User.
NAME:
Lets you define the name that will be used to call the code in the event.
Any special character and/or space that is entered in the name is automatically replaced by the symbol ( _ ).
Example:
THEMES:
Allows you to select the theme used in the code editor. If you already have a previously selected theme for editing an event, the same theme is applied to the code snippet
editor.
SEARCH:
The search icon allows the user to search for one or more terms within the code.
REPLACE:
The replace icon allows you to replace snippets of code with another. Thus, facilitating the editing of several terms within the code.
Using a Code Snippet

To use a code snippet you must have access to any event present in the Scriptcase. By accessing the Snippets tab, you can view the list of code snippets created by Scriptcase
and the user.
When you click on the usage name, the code is automatically added to the event.
1
SMTP Settings
HOME › TOOLS › SMTP SETTINGS
To proceed with the password recovery, it is necessary that has the SMTP server configured for a successful process. Look here how to realize this procedure.
Yahoo
For more information about these settings Click Here
SMTP Server Settings Yahoo
SMTP Server smtp.mail.yahoo.com
Port 465 or 587
E-mail address Your full email address (name@domain.com.)
Password The password for your account.
Requires SSL Yes
Requires TSL Yes (if available)
Requires authentication Yes
Some email applications uses older, less secure technologies to sign in to your email account, and Google will block these requests by default. To solve this, sign in to your
Google account and enable access through less secure apps through this link.
Gmail
SMTP Server Settings Gmail
SMTP Server smtp.gmail.com
E-mail address Your full email address (Ex. example@gmail.com)
Port (TLS) 587
Port (SSL) 465
TLS / SSL Required Yes
Some email applications uses older, less secure technologies to sign in to your email account, and Google will block these requests by default. To solve this, sign in to your
Google account and enable access through less secure apps through this link
Outlook
SMTP Server Settings Outlook.com
SMTP Server smtp-mail.outlook.com
E-mail address Your full email address (Ex. myname@outlook.com, not an alias)
Port 587 (you can use port 25 as an alternative)

2
Hotmail
SMTP Server Settings Windows Live Hotmails
SMTP Server smtp.live.com
E-mail address Your full email address (Ex. me@hotmail.com or me@live.com)
Port 587

1
General Overview
HOME › LAYOUT
In Layout section, you can either edit or create standard previews that will be placed in the developed project with ScriptCase. In this area, you can make changes to each part of
the application, being from presentation of the applications to the buttons and menu on which they’ll be presented in.
1
CSS Applications (Themes)
HOME › LAYOUT › CSS APPLICATIONS
(THEMES)
In the CSS Applications section, it’s possible to create layouts for the applications using the editor. It’s possible to create new themes or edit existing ones.
To create new themes, click on “Create New Theme”. And the modifications done to the theme, will be displayed on the preview in real-time.
1
CSS Buttons
HOME › LAYOUT › CSS
BUTTONS
While editing the buttons, the user can create new button schemes and link them to themes. It’s possible to create or edit button schemes being text buttons or image buttons.
Creating a new button scheme

Clicking on the “New” button located on the Button Scheme toolbar.
On the first tab (Buttons) the buttons used in ScriptCase are displayed. Each button can have its own customization, being able to select between an image, text button or link. In
case you use the image type, you’ll see a field to upload an image to be used for the button. For the text buttons and link types, use the tabs: Button Styles and Link Styles to edit
the appearance of the buttons.
2
Editing the button styles
On this tab, it is possible to define the CSS styles of the text buttons used in your schemes. All the schemes already have their standard style that can’t be deleted. If you need to
more than one layout type for the text buttons in your scheme, just click on “New” to configure a new style. And select the tab Button Styles and then select the created style.
Configuring Style of Link Type Buttons

The same principles displayed in the styles for the text buttons can be applied to the link buttons. In a way that you can define that one or more buttons will be a link type and
their CSS style or a new one that you can create.
1
HTML Templates
HOME › LAYOUT › HTML TEMPLATES
In the Templates, it’s possible to edit and create models for the Headers, Footers or the User HTML (Grid and Control). These models define the interface structure of the
applications. You can create a HTML file and define where the entry data will be, by use curly brackets {} to specify a variable. The User Defined HTML option is used in Grid and
Control applications, where it’s possible to define all the structure of the report in HTML and associate the fields of the applications with the variables created on the body of the
HTML file. With this it’s possible to create Control and Grid applications with a different layout, being able to place the fields anywhere on the page.
Header and Footer

In the editor for the Header and Footer, you need to create or edit existing models.
To create a new model, there’s a standard code to use as a base of all the HTML.
The creation of fields in the HTML needs to be done with curly brackets, for example: {variable}.
Code example:
<div style="width: 100%">

<div {NM_CSS_FUN_CAB} style="height:11px; display: block; border-width:0px; "></div>
<div style="height:37px; background-color:#FFFFFF; border-width:0px 0px 1px 0px; border-style: dashed; border-color:#ddd; display: block">
<table style="width:100%; border-collapse:collapse; padding:0;">
<tr>
<td id="lin1_col1" {NM_CSS_CAB}><span>{LIN1_COL1}</span></td>
<td id="lin1_col2" {NM_CSS_CAB}><span>{LIN1_COL2}</span></td>
</tr>
</table>
</div>
</div>
These fields are displayed in the application where the template is going to be used.
After saving the template, you need to open the application that you’re going to use the template in and go to “Layout > Settings”, choose the model for the Header and Footer
that you’ll use and in “Layout > Header & Footer” you’ll associate the created fields in the template with the desired information available by ScriptCase.
User Defined HTML

2
In the User Defined HTML we can specify where the fields of the applications will be displayed in the HTML file by using curly brackets {variable}. Like the example below:
<table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">

<tr>
<td width="247" height="96" align="left" valign="center">
<font face="verdana" style="font-size:11px">
<b>{Name}</b><br>{Address}<br>{City} - {State}<br>
{ZIP}
</font>
</td>
</tr>
</table>
The preview of the code above will be like the following: {Name} {Address} {City}-{State} {ZIP}
Remember that all the content that has curly brackets are considered a field of the application, this is why when you have {Name}, it’ll be referencing a field called ‘Name’ in your
application.
In the template we can define a delimiter by using “ ”:

<tr>

<b>{Name}</b><br>{Address}<br>{City}- {State}<br>
{ZIP}
</font>
</td>

</tr>
</table>
These parts are defined where the loop is going to start and end. The quantity of delimiters are defined as the “Columns per page” on the Grid application.
e.g.: If within the Grid application the option “Lines Per Page” is set to 3, you’ll see the following result.

<tr>
{ZIP}
</font>
</td>
{ZIP}
</font>
</td>
{ZIP}
</font>
</td>
</tr>
</table>
The preview of the code above will be the following:
{Name} {Name} {Name}

{Address} {Address} {Address}
{City}-{State} {City}-{State} {City}-{State}
{ZIP} {ZIP} {ZIP}
If you have a HTML File created in the standards above, you can include it in ScriptCase by accessing “Layout > HTML Templates > User HTML > New Template”. On “New
Template” you’ll inform the file that you want to import or create a new template by writing the code in the ScriptCase editor.
3
After having the User Defined HTML, the next step is open the application that supports the Template (Control or Grid) and go to “Position of Fields” and associate the fields with
the application fields.
1
CSS Menu
HOME › LAYOUT › CSS MENU
The CSS Menu section is used to create and/or edit layout styles to be applied in Menu Applications.
To create a new theme for the menu it’s necessary to first select a theme to be used as base of the new theme.
After clicking on “New”, to create a new theme for the Menu, you’ll have many options to change the colors that are part of the Menu you chosen. Also, you can change the font
size of the items.
Before saving the theme that you created, you need to select the access level as Public, Project or User levels.
Public the theme is available for everyone that uses your Scriptcase installation.
Project the theme is available for the project that it was created in.
User the theme is available only for the user that created the theme.
After selecting the access level, inform the name of the theme and click on “Save”.
1
Menu Icons
HOME › LAYOUT › MENU ICONS
While editing the menu icons, you can change the icons of the active and inactive tabs that will be opened in the menu. These icons are linked to the opened applications.
On the page below, we can view the icons divided in blocks for each type of application, so each icon corresponds to an application from ScriptCase.
Select the icons that you desire for each state for the menu tabs, being active or inactive.
1
Images Manager
HOME › LAYOUT › IMAGES MANAGER
The Images Manager is where you’ll organize and upload new images that’ll be used in your project.
To upload new images, you need to select the scope of which the image will be part, after selecting the folder where the image will be stored at and after that click on File >
Upload.
When the image is uploaded, the image’s name is modified depending on the scope of which it’s part of (public, project or user) and the type of image (background, button, icons,
menu or general) following the pattern below:
sys__NM__ (Public)
grp__NM__ (Project)
usr__NM__ (User)
Image Type:
bg__NM__ (background images)
btn__NM__ (button images)
img__NM__ (general images)
ico__NM__ (icons)
menu_img__NM__ (menu images)
This way, the image called 001.jpg that was added to the public and icon scope will receive the name sys__NM__ico__NM__001.jpg
The image will be in the folder “app/project_name/_lib/img” in the development environment and in the production, will be “/project_name/_lib/img”.
After uploading the image to the project, you need to insert the image in the applications that you desire, to do that in the applications desired, go to Applications > Settings >
Application images and click on the icon next to the garbage icon to add an image.
1
Chart Themes
HOME › LAYOUT › CHART THEMES
The chart themes tool offers the option for you to create different themes for the chart applications of your project. The chart theme allows you to modify some options, such as
the background color, font, margin, data, border and shadow.
To create new themes, you need to select an existing theme so that you can use it as a base and on top of it you’ll customize it to the way you feel satisfied.
1
HTML Editor Templates
HOME › LAYOUT › HTML EDITOR TEMPLATES
The html editor tool offers you the option to modify the toolbar of the html editor field present in the applications.
You can create a new template theme and/or edit an existing one.
To create a new theme, just select an existing one and click on “Save As”, to edit an existing theme just select the theme and click on “Save”.
1
General Overview
HOME › LOCALES
ScriptCase offers a complete generator so that you can define the languages and regional settings that your project will support. The locales settings can be accessed via the
menu Locales.
Application Language
The language menu for the applications allows you to translate the ScriptCase’s default messages, and also create custom messages to be used in different parts of the
applications.
Too see how to set the Application Language, click here.
Regional Settings
The regional settings allows you to define some parameters of the monetary unit, date and numbers, according to the country or region where your application is going be used.
Clicking on Customizing, you can modify the values that’ll be used in your applications.
To see how to set the Regional Settings, click here.

1
Application Language
HOME › LOCALES › APPLICATION LANGUAGE
The language menu for the applications allows you to translate the ScriptCases default messages, and also create custom messages to be used in different parts of the
applications.
Messages
Using the messages menu, it’s possible to select and edit messages. The messages are divided in the categories: “ScriptCase Messages” and “Project Messages”. New categories
can be created using the item “New Folder”.
Selecting a lang to be modified, a new page will appear with the columns of each language of your project. You’ll inform the value of the message in each language.
1
Regional Settings
HOME › LOCALES › REGIONAL SETTINGS
The regional settings allows you to define some parameters of the monetary unit, date and number according to the country or region where your application is going be used.
Clicking on Customize you can modify the values that’ll be used in your applications.
Customizing Regional Settings

In the General group, you can set the writing direction. This setting configures if the characters will be inserted from left-to-right or right-to-left.
In the Number group, we have some parameters like the Decimal Symbol, digit grouping and negative format. These parameters are used in the applications that uses the
decimal type field.
In the Currency Unit group, we have some parameters like the Monetary Symbol, Currency positive format, etc. These parameters are used in the applications that uses the
Currency type field.
Within the Time and Date groups are available the parameters of Date and time, that can be used in the fields of the Type Time, Date and Datetime.
1
General Overview
HOME › MODULES
Scriptcase offers a complete generator for your system security through the Security and Log modules. All the Security related to the project users can be found in the Modules
menu. Check below how to create these two modules within Scriptcase.
Security Module
It creates an access control with restrictions according to the system users/groups. There are four types of security with different control levels. Scriptcase will create all the
necessary database tables and applications to manage the system security according to the type applied.
Scriptcase has five types of security, they are similar, diverging only in how the permissions are applied: User security, Application security, Group security and LDAP security.
Configure Security Modules is simple and quick. Check the following link to see how to set the module. click here.
Log Module
Using the Log Module, you will be able to track and monitor all actions that the system users will make within the systems developed with the Scriptcase. Together with the
Security Module, you will have a complete and effective security system rapidly developed for your applications.
Check the following link to see how to set the Log Module with very simple steps, click here.
1
Security Module
HOME › MODULES › SECURITY MODULE
Making use of the security modules, you can implement a complete access rules for systems developed by ScriptCase. The process for the security module creation is quick and
simple.
Scriptcase has five types of security, they are similar, diverging only in how the permissions are applied.
User Security Type
Under this security type all users have access to all applications. It works only for user authentication. Scriptcase will create one table to store the user and password information
and validate the acess using a login screen.
In this security type Scriptcase creates these tables:
User - Login, Password, Name, E-mail, Active, Activation Code and admin privileges
Logged users - Login, login date, Session, IP address
The table Logged users will be created only if the option Protect Logged users is checked during the Security Module creation.
Application Security Type

Under this type Scriptcase will also control login and password as the User Security and also create a restricted access control to the applications or system options according to
the logged user. It is possible to define which applications is accessible to each user.
Application - Code, Description, Application type
User / Application - Login, Application Name, Access privileges, Insert privileges, Delete privileges, Update privileges, Export privileges, Print privileges
Group Security Type
This type of security includes the options of User and Application types, however with the Group Security type you will group the users and define the permissions to access the
applications or system options according to the groups. One user can belong to one or more groups.
Group - Description and ID
User / Group - Login, Group ID
Group / Application - Group ID, Application name, Access privileges, Insert privileges, Delete privileges, Update privileges, Export privileges, Print privileges
LDAP Security Type

The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is an open, vendor-neutral, industry standard application protocol for accessing and maintaining distributed directory
information services over an Internet Protocol (IP) network. You can use this protocol within Scriptcase Security module to authentication users in two ways: (Authentication only,
performs only a simple user authentication, similar to User Security Type and the Total Control, where we can define the access by groups, similar to the Group Security Type.
User / Application - Login, Application Name, Access privileges, Insert privileges, Delete privileges, Update privileges, Export privileges, Print privileges
See how to create each security type:

2
User security creation
Security Type
First you should select the security type.
Connection
After the security type definition, you must select the connection that will be used to create the tables that make up the security module.
Connection - Sets the connection that will be used for the creation of the security tables.
Use existing tables -Enables you to use pre-existing tables in your database. These tables must have at least the same fields used by Scriptcase security module. We recommend that you use
this option if the tables have already been created by Scriptcase Security Module, to minimize errors.
Create tables - This option creates all necessary security tables inside the selected database.
Tables prefix - You can set a prefix of the tables that will be created by the Security Module. By default Scriptcase uses the prefix: sec_
Delete if tables already exist - This option is available only when you select Create Tables . By selecting this option, if your database has tables with the same names, they will be deleted and
replaced by new tables created by the Security Module.
Protect Logged Users - Protection to prevent users to perform simultaneous logins in different sessions.
Tables link
This step is important if the option Use existing tables is selected. In this case, you must associate the fields from the existing tables to fields of security applications (applications
generated by the Security Module).
In these cases, the existing database tables must contain a minimum number of fields so that they can be associated to the fields of security applications.
The required tables for each type of security are described at the beginning of this article.
If you have selected the option Create tables , in the previous step the fields will be automatically associated, just click continue.
Settings
In this step we will define the security module settings.
General
User password encryption, the folder where the applications are created, the log module used among other things.
Applications Prefix - Prefix for the applications that will be created automatically by the Security Module.
3
When session expires - Define what will occurs when the session expires.
No action - The Scriptcase will allow continuing using the application however, nothing you have done after the session expires will be saved.
Redirect to login after the session expiration - Will make the application return to the login after expiring the session.
Display a message that the session has expired - Will show a message saying that the session has expired.
Encryption - Encryption used for to store the password in the table of users.
Enable Security - Activate the flag Application Security of all project applications.
Enable Captcha - Activates the captcha for the login application created by the Security Module.
No - Does not display the captcha in the login application.
Captcha - Uses the built-in scriptcase library for captcha display.
reCAPTCHA - Uses Google’s reCAPTCHA V2. To configure click here.
Folder - Folder name that will be created to store the applications generated by Security Module.
Theme - Theme that is used for the applications created by the Security Module.
Log - This option is available if the project has a Log Module previously created. Click here and check out how to create a Log Module
Menu - This option is only available if your project has a Menu Application previously created. You can associate this existing Menu and include all applications generated by the Security
Module to it. If you do not select an existing Menu here, Scriptcase Security Module will create a new Menu Application exclusively for the security applications.
Menu Type - Security Module menu type (option only available if you do not select and existing menu in the previous item)
Login
Here you can set the type and amount of characters allowed for the username and password fields.
Minimum size - Minimum amount of characters used by the user.
Maximum size - Maximum size of the characters used by the user.
Characters allowed - Define which characters are allowed when creating a password.
Password recovery settings
Defines how password recovery will work in the system created by the Security Module.
These password recovery options works only when the SMTP server is configured properly, please check the Email settings.
Send the password by e-mail - The system will send the user password directly by email just if the SMTP has been correctly set up and the password is not encrypted.
Reset password and send new one by email - The system will reset the password automatically and send it to the user by email just if the SMTP has been correctly set up.
Send a link to e-mail with reset option - The system will send a link by e-mail for the user to access an application and reset the passoword.
New Users
Settings for creating new users in the secutity system.
The options activation by email and send an email to admin work only when the SMTP server is configured properly, access Email settings to set it up.
System allows new users registration - This option sets the availability of users registration directly in the login system. If this option is not checked, only users with administrative access to
the system will be able to insert new users.
System requires activation by email - This option sets whether the new user will have to perform a validation email to activate the account (This option is available only if the email SMTP is
configured)
System requires the user to send an email to admin - This option sets whether the system administrator will receive an e-mail whenever a new user is created (This option is available only if
the email SMTP is configured)
Email settings
This option sets the provider that will be used for sending e-mails from the system.
4
The information from this example may change according to the SMTP. We are using the Gmail SMTP for this example..
SMTP Server - Must enter the SMTP server address.
SMTP Port - Enter the SMTP server port. This information must comply with the secure connection option. Use 465 for SSL, 587 for TLS or 25 for unsafe connection. If you do not inform the
port Scriptcase will apply a defauld one: 25.
Secure Connection - Use SSL or TSL, or leave it blank for unsecure connection.
SMTP User - Enter the SMTP User information.
SMTP Password - Enter the SMTP password information.
SMTP E-mail - Enter the SMTP outgoing email.
Logged Users
Defines the system behavior for login protection.
This option is available if you have checked Protect logged users during the connection step.
Display logged users - If you check this option Scriptcase will also create with the Security Module a Grid Application to display a report with all users current logged on the system
Brute Force Attack Protection - Enables/disables the blocking of users after some unsuccessful access attempts.
Brute Force lockout time (in Minutes) - Time, in minutes, that the user will remain inaccessible after several unsuccessful access attempts. (Available only when rute Force Attack Protection is
enabled)
Numbers of attempts before lock - Number of failed access attempts, until the protection is enabled. (Available only when enable protection for brute force attacks)
Enter the first record
This option insert the first user inside the security tables. This user will have full administrator permissions in order to manage the security system and add new users.
Login - This option sets the system administrator user.
Password - This option sets the system administrator passwrod.
Name - This option sets the system administrator name.
E-mail - This option sets the system administrator user E-mail.
Group - This option sets the group name that will receive the administrator privileges and that the registed user will be part.
The group option, is available only for Group Security , in the remaining modules this option will not be displayed.
Add applications
This option add the applications already created in the project to the Security Module applications’ table.
Save profile
5
Using this option you will save all settings during the Security Module creation. The same profile can be used later for other projects.
Save Profile - Allows you to save a profile with all the current security module settings.
Name - Profile name
Target - This option sets who will have access to the saved profile in the future.
Public - Your security profile will be available in all projects from your Scriptcase.
Project - Your security profile will be available only in the project in which it was created.
User - Your security profile will be available only to the logged user.
Using a saved security profile

The saved profiles can be selected at the beginning of a new Security Module creation, before you choose the security type.
Application security creation

Security Type
Connection
Tables link
6
Settings
General
Login
7
New Users
configured)
Email settings
Logged Users
enabled)

8
Add applications
Save profile
Name - Profile name
Group security creation

Security Type
Connection
9
Tables link
Settings
General
10
Login
New Users
configured)
Email settings
11
Logged Users
enabled)
Add applications
Save profile
Name - Profile name

12
LDAP Creation - Authentication Only

Security type
Connection
After the security type, you will have to select the connection where you want to store the security module tables.
Settings
In this step, you will define the general security module settings.
General
Login
13
LDAP
Under this option, you have to inform correctly your LDAP server settings.
Server - Enter here the LDAP server IP.
DN - Enter the input attributes.
Port - Enter here the port for access to the server. Default port is 389.
Sufix - Enter the user suffix.
Password - This option sets the system administrator password.
Save profile
Using this option, you will save all settings during the Security Module creation. The same profile can be used later for other projects.
Save Profile
Name - Profile name
LDAP Creation - Total control

Security type
14
Connection
After the security type, you will have to select the connection where you want to store the security module tables.
Tables prefix - You can set a prefix of the tables that will be created by the Security Module. By default, Scriptcase uses the prefix: sec_
Tables link
Settings
General
15
Login
Email settings
The information from this example may change according to the SMTP. We are using the Gmail SMTP for this example.
port Scriptcase will apply a default one: 25.
LDAP
Under this option, you have to inform correctly your LDAP server settings.
Server - Enter here the LDAP server IP.
DN - Enter the input attributes.
Port - Enter here the port for access to the server. Default port is 389.
Sufix - Enter the user suffix.
Logged Users
16
Display logged users - If you check this option Scriptcase will also create with the Security Module a Grid Application to display a report with all user’s current logged on the system
Brute Force lockout time (in Minutes) - Time, in minutes, that the user will remain inaccessible after several unsuccessful access attempts. (Available only when brute Force Attack Protection
is enabled)
Registering the admin user
In this step, you must inform a user to connect to the LDAP server. The informed user will have full administrator permissions on the system where you are applying the Security
Module.
Login - This option sets the system LDAP administrator user.
Password - This option sets the system LDAP administrator LDAP password.
Name - This option sets the system LDAP administrator name.
E-mail - This option sets the system LDAP administrator E-mail.
Add applications
This option adds the applications already created in the project to the Security Module applications’ table.
Save profile
Using this option, you will save all settings during the Security Module creation. The same profile can be used later for other projects.
Name - Profile name
reCAPTCHA
reCAPTCHA sample:
17
Now, we can setting the reCAPTCHA keys on security module:
Related videos
Control Application
Facebook Authentication
Twitter Authentication
Google Authentication
1
Log Module
HOME › MODULES › LOG MODULE
Using the log module, you can create multiple log schemas, each project application can be linked to a different log schema, which will be configured individually. Each project
can have one or more log schemes applied to its applications.
Schemas list
Access the menu Modules > Log and chick Create / Edit Log Module .
If you are creating your first log schema project, proceed direct to step three, for the schema Creation/editing.
It lists all log schemes previously created. On this screen, we can manage the schemas created.
Edit Applications - Edits the relation between the applications and the schemes.
New scheme - Creates a new Log scheme in the project.
Create Application Log - Creates a report using the log table, that is also used by the project’s default scheme.
Edit Scheme Icon - Edits the Log scheme.
Delete Scheme Icon - Deletes the Log scheme.
Schema Creation/editing
Access the menu Modules > Log and check Create / Edit Log Module .
New Schema
Name - Log schema name that will be created. It is a mandatory field.
Description - Short description for the new schema.
Connection - Connection on where the log table will be created. It is a mandatory field.
Table - Table name on where the log information will be stored. It is a mandatory field.
Existing Table - This option deletes the table that has the same name in the database and create a new one. If you want to use the existing table to store the log data just leave this option
unchecked.
Default Schema - It sets the schema that is being created as the default one for project.
Login - Global variable used to store the logged user information into the system. This variable must be the same used in the Security Module. By default, Scriptcase sets this variable on
both modules as [usr_login] .
Default Values
Events - Actions that will be stored in the log table.
Storage mode - User data that will be stored in the log table.
2
A confirmation screen will appear when you save, just click Close to leave and save the schema.
Close to save the schema - Saves the schema you created, and redirects to the applications screen.
See SQL - Display the SQL used by Scriptcase to create the table ‘sc_log’ that will be used to store the log events.
Download SQL - This option will download the SQL used by Scriptcase to create the table ‘sc_log’.
Close Icon - This option cancels the schema creation and redirects to a new schema creation.
After the confirmation, you will be redirected to link the log schemas to the project applications.
Link Applications
In this step, you must define which log schema will be used in each project application. The list of applications can be filtered by type or by log schema used.
At the top, you can apply actions to all rows or you can select only one action for each row individually.
Apply schema - Select the schema that will be used for the applications. (when you select a schema, the other information is filled according to what was previously
configured).
Store for the Log - User data that will be stored in the Log table.
Access - This event stores the information every time the application is accessed.
Insert - This event stores the information when inserting a record.
Update - This event stores the information when updating a record.
Delete - This event stores the information when deleting a record.
Log Report
In this report, you can see all stored information according to the schema selected during the report creation.
3
Schema - Log schema that the application will be based on
Name - Application name
Folder - Folder name where the application will be stored
Theme - Theme used for the generated application
Security - This option attaches a security profile to the log schema.

1
General Overview
HOME › OPTIONS
Gathers the main configurations of ScriptCase. For the users with administrator privileges, it’s possible to register the ScriptCase, manage the system users, do backups and
restore projects and other configurations.
For the other users, without administrator privileges, its possible to define the default language for ScriptCase, customize Scriptcase’s toolbar and other options that when done,
will be available for the users that did them, for those who won’t change these configurations, they’ll use the default configurations from ScriptCase.
1
Settings
HOME › OPTIONS › SETTINGS
Access restricted to users with administrative privileges. We have access to the main settings of ScriptCase.
Access Options > Settings.
Left side Menu of the Settings page from ScriptCase.
Below its possible to see some detailed information of each option.
System Settings
Page where you can define various settings that will be used by all the users of ScriptCase.
2
Language - Defines the default Language for the projects.
Quantity of compilations in parallel - Defines number of compliers used to generate the applications.
Display the applications’ compile-time individually - Allows to compile each application individually.
Number of automatic application copies - Define the amount of copies that application restores module can save.
Send an alert if the last backup is older than(days) - Define the amount of days for the system to alert the user that the last backup is becoming obsolete.
Show backup alert for - Defines the user group that is going to receive the backup’s alert.
Check for ScriptCase update versions after login - Sets ScriptCase to validate on every login, if there is a new update released.
Periodic verification of Scriptcase’s database - Feature the does a periodic backup of ScriptCase’s database (Not the projects).
Check version every - Allows you to select the day of the week that will occur the new update’s verification.
ScriptCase Session Timeout (min) - Time limit for the execution of the PHP scripts, during the application development, example compile the applications, select analysis, save the applications
and etc. (in seconds).
Show Generation Status Message - Allows you to define the messages of the actions of ScriptCase, when it is compiling or running your applications, in the options:
Main - Displays a subgroup of the messages;
None - Does not display the messages;
All - Enables the display of all the messages.
Use cache for table fields - With this feature enabled, makes the applications faster while consulting the data.
To recover the ScriptCase password, available at the login, it is necessary to setup correctly the options below.
SMTP Server - You should inform the address of your SMTP server, that is responsible for your email.
SMTP Port - Inform the port for the SMTP server. This information is according to the option of secure. Use 465 for SSL and 25 for unsecure connections. Not informing the port, scriptcase will
place 25 by default.
SSL - Define if you’re going to use SSL or not.
SMTP User - Inform the user for the SMTP server.
SMTP Password - Inform the password for the SMTP server.
SMTP E-Mail - Inform the e-mail for the origin of the messages.
PROXY Server - Inform the IP for the Proxy Server.
PROXY Gateway - Inform the Gateway of your Proxy Server.
PROXY User - Inform the Proxy User.
PROXY Password - Informe a senha do usuário do proxy.

3
Use session in database - Allows to use the session in the database.
Show an option on the deployment wizard to store the PHP session variables in a Database - Allows to display the option to use the deployment’s session in the database.
Pass the PHP Session ID in the URL - Allows to pass the PHP Session id in the URL.
Timezone Sets the Timezone to be used in ScriptCase.
Default Values
With this configuration, it is possible to standardize the projects’ creation of the applications, increasing the applications’ productivity in development. To change the settings only
for a project, access from the menu Project > Default Values .
Common Settings
Logo - The favicon that is going to use with the project. Customize the project using the same favicon in all the application.
Records per page - Amount of records per page.
Theme - Default theme for the projects
Show Summary - Displays the number of records in the page and the total of the records in the application. This option will execute only if the line option in the Grid toolbar is disabled.
Use template in the HTML Editor - Selecting Yes, you will be using the new templated of the HTML Editor field, these themes should be setup in Layout > HTML Editor Templates .
HTML Editor template - Defines the template for editing of the field HTML Editor.
Initial sort fields
Text - Set the initial sorting for the text fields.
Date - Set the initial sorting for the date fields.
Number - Set the initial sorting for the number fields.
Currency - Set the initial sorting for the currency fields.
Grid
Table Width Unit - The unit used to define the application’s width. Automatic (Width automatically defined according to the fields’ size); Pixel (Width defined by pixels, that should be informed
in the form: 800px); Percent (Width defined in percentage, and should be informed in the form: 80%)
Tab a Group By - Defines the left margin of the Group By.
Separates the Group - Defines the margin between two Group Bys.
Lines per page - Defines the option for the user to select and list the amount of records desired by page. If you need an option to list all the records, ads “all” to the options. Ex.: 10,20,30, all
Form
4
Table Width Unit - The unit used to define the application’s width the application. Automatic (Width automatically defined according to the fields’ size); Pixel (Width defined by pixels, that
should be informed in the form: 800px); Percent (Width defined in percentage, and should be informed in the form: 80%)
Tab
Tab Alignment - Display alignment of the tabs in the application.
Menu
Horizontal Alignment of the Menu - Menu alignment.
Horizontal Alignment of the Items - Menu item alignment
Template
Defines the templates used by default on the Header and Footer.
Toolbar Buttons
Define the buttons that will be setup by default in the toolbar for the new applications.
System Directories
Directories where information and models will be stored. All the directories are configured automatically in the automatic installation of ScriptCase and in the manual installation
when using the Typical installation method, making unnecessary any modifications from the user. We recommend not changing any of the fields without contacting the support
first.
5
Root Directory for the Web Server files - Root of the Web Server, where scriptcase is installed. On IIS servers, the default directory would be “inetpub/wwwroot”.
Application Path - Location where the applications will have stored when created.
Production Path - Path to where the “prod” directory is located in ScriptCase, in this directory is located all the libraries that the generated applications need to execute.
Documents Directory - Directory on which the documents used by the applications will be stored.
Images Directory - Directory on which the images used in the applications will be stored. The images loaded in the applications, using the upload field (Image File Name) will be stored in this
directory.
Temporary Files Directory - Directory where the images manipulated by the application is stored temporary. This temporary storage is a condition the the HTML code requires, so that the
images can be opened correctly and the specific directory for these images so that they do not get mixed up with the images from the gallery.
Security Type
We need to define the method of the access information storage and the type of security used.
Security Type - Method of data storage. We can select between ScriptCase or LDAP.
Scriptcase - The access data is stored in the ScriptCase Database.
LDAP - The access data is stored in the LDAP Server, that scriptcase will check to validate the access.
Security Level - Type of security that will be used, this option is the same independently of the storage method.
User - The permissions are defined for each user. On this option, the permissions need to be configured individually.
Group - The permissions are defined for the User Groups. On this option, we will tie the users to one or more groups, and define the permissions for each group, users that are part of the
groups will inherited the permissions.
User/Groups - On this option, the permissions are defined by the groups and/or individually by the users. This security level, the permissions for the group and the user is added. This way, we
can have users existing in the same groups but with different permissions.
The security level option is the same independently of the Security Type. (Scriptcase or LDAP)
Users
User management page of the the system, on it you will view a list with all the users registered on the system. We also have other options, like including new users and editing the
existing ones.
This option will be available on the left side menu when select it in the Security Type
6
User - Login of the registered Users.
Insert - Date and time of the user’s creation.
Applications - Number of applications for each user.
Action
Detail - Gives you a detailed view of the user, like it’s email, it’s privileges, projects and groups of users on which it is part of.
Edit - You can change the privileges and the projects that it has access.
Change Password - Change the password for the user.
Below, we will specify some options listed above.
New User
When clicking on the button, New User we will be redirected to the page to inform the data for user like login, password, privileges and other things.
Users - Inform a login for the user.
e-mail - Defining the user e-mail.
New Password - Defining the password for the user.
Confirm Password - Confirming the password that is being registered.
Privileges
Administration - Permission for the user to access the administrative area of ScriptCase.
Projects - Actions that the user can do when accessing a project.
Application - Permission to create applications.
Database - Actions that the user can do with the database configurations in the projects it has access to.
Project - Projects that the user has access.
Next, we will be redirected to a page where you can select which projects will managed by the user. In the example below, I am defining the user sc as the administrator of the
project gradebook.
The project administrator, can change various preferences of the project, existing connections.
7
Editing a User
The editing page is similar to the creation of the users, having the same options of configurations.
Users - Users login.
e-mail - The e-mail registered for the user.
Privileges
Administration - Permission for the user to access the administrative area of ScriptCase.
Projects - Actions that user can do when accessing a project.
Application - Permission to create applications.
Database - Actions that user can do with the database configurations in the projects it has access to.
Project - Projects that the user has access.
Like the procedure for creating a user, we will be redirected to a page where you can select which projects will managed by the user. In the example below, I am defining the user
sc as the administrator of the project documents_library.
Changing the Password
On this page, you need to inform the new password for the user.
Delete Users
We can delete more than one user at the same time

8
When deleting a user that has applications linked to its login, you need to inform if you want to delete the applications or if you want to move them to another user.
Delete Application - All the applications created by the user will be deleted.
Move Application - All the applications will be moved to the user informed.
Groups
Managing user groups. You will see a list of the existing groups and some information about them.
This option will only be available on the left side menu when we select the Groups option in the Security Type
Name - Name of the groups.
Description - Group Description.
Users - Users that are part of this group.
Projects - Projects that the users of this group have access to.
Actions
Users - Defines the users that will be part of this group.
Edit - Edits the group.
Delete - Delete the group.
You will see more details below about the existing options.
New Group
Creating the groups, we can define the privileges.

9
Name - Name of the group.
Description - Group Description.
Admin Privilege - Defines if the users that are in the group, will have Administrator Privileges for ScriptCase.
Privileges
Project - Defines if the users from this group will have access to do some actions in the projects.
Application - Defines the permission to create applications (By type).
Connections - Defines the privileges to the options of the database of the project.
Projects - Defines the projects that will be accessed by the group.
Admin projects - Defines if the group will have Administrator Permission for the project. On this Example, the users from the Group C will be Administrators of the the gradbook project.
Users
After creating the group, we can define which users will be part of the group.
LDAP
Page where you will sync with LDAP. We recommend using the LDAP Administrator user, this way, all the group users of the server will be listed. So, that you can connect with
LDAP in ScriptCase and have the LDAP privileges in ScriptCase.
This option will be available on the left side menu, if you selected the LDAP option in Security Type
10
Server - IP of the LDAP server (Needs to be setup before proceeding).
Suffix - Domain of the server.
DN - Domain Component.
User - Administrator of the Server.
Password - Senho do usuário informado.
Port - Server Port.
After saving the LDAP server connection, the users and groups listed in the Users and Groups tabs according to the server. Initially, only the administrator user (The same used for
the LDAP connection) will have access to ScriptCase. The other users need to be enabled and their permission needs to be setup also with the groups.
Users
This option is displayed when selecting users in the Security Level, lists all the users from the LDAP server. We can manage the privileges of each user with the projects and
options of ScriptCase.
Groups
Option displayed when selecting the group option in the Security Level, lists all the groups from the LDAP server. You need to access this tab to enable the groups and set their
privileges.
11
User / Groups
When selecting a security level of User/Groups, two tabs will be displayed. In this case, the permissions are defined for the group of users and/or individually by user. On this type
of security, the permissions of the group and the user are added. So, that can user exist in a group and have different users.
Projects
List of Scriptcase existing projects. You can view all projects details, such as users who have access, the current version of projects, number of applications, among other
information.
Project - Project name.
Description - Project description.
Creation - Project creation date.
Applications - Number of applications from each project version. 1:33(Versions count: number of applications)
Action - Project details.
By clicking on the magnifying glass next to the number of applications, you can see more details of the project. In addition to some information previously views on the list of
projects.
12
Connections - Lists of connections of the project.
User - Users that have access to the project. The users will have the basic permissions, like create applications.
Administrators - User/Groups that are administrators of the project. It’s possible to create and edit connections in the properties of the project, with this permission.
The permission of each user needs to be setup individually as the group permission also needs to be.
Backup
ScriptCase’s backup works in a similar way as the project export, but the backup does an export of all the applications from ScriptCase, with all the files necessary for them to
work. To do a backup, just inform the name of the file to be generated.
Finally, download the generated file and save it in a secure location.
Restore
This option is similar to Project Import, however using the restore you can import more than one project at a time. When you access the restore you will see a list of backups
performed recently, you will be able to restore these backups or to import a backup exported from other Scriptcase installation.
Backup - Backup generated files.
Created in - Creation date and time of the listed backups.
Restore - Backup restore.
Detail - Backup details.
Delete - Deletes the backup permanently.
To restore another backup, which is not in the list above, select zip restore and upload a backup file created by Scriptcase.
After choosing the backup that is going to be restored you will be redirected to a confirmation page. At this moment, you must inform if you want to overwrite duplicate files or
keep the existing files in Scriptcase.
13
Log Settings
ScriptCase maintains in its database a log of the main actions done by the users. By default, all the actions are stored in our database. On this option, we can customize the log
registry, by marking and unmarking the actions that should be stored.
View Log
This option allows you to view the main actions done by the users, being stored separately by day. On the calendar, we can select the desired date to view the information on the
table on the side. The days that have log, have a blueish background color.
Login - Login of the user responsible for the action.
IP - IP of the work station that the user did the actions described.
Time - Time when the action was done.
Type - The type of action done.
Action - What action was done.
Info - Details of the action;
Scriptcase Update
ScriptCase update area. All the update process is done by the internet, using our servers. We recommend using a fast connection.
Firstly, we will verify if the there is a new version of ScriptCase available.
We can later define if the offline documentation and the prod used by ScriptCase are updated.
14
Next, we can visualize the total of updates found.
After started the update, the process can not be interrupted.
After downloading and updating all the files, you will view a screen with the option to view log of modifications done in the process: Click here to view ScriptCase update log .
If you are having problems connecting to our server, check if your firewall is allowing the connections to the links: .scriptcase.com.br__; __.scriptcase.net;
Online registration
For the online registration, you must be connected to the internet. There will be an online communication between your server and Scriptcase servers. We are going to validate
the information that you enter and send you back the confirmation online. It’s quick and simple.
In order to register your Scriptcase you essentially need to have the account owner information (user, password and serial key). This information is created during the license
purchase.
Enter your account details (User login, password and serial key).
User - Account user login linked to serial (License owner details, same information used to access My Scriptcase options under the website)
Password - Account password
Serial - Active and available for registration (open) serial key.
To complete the register, you will need to log out of Scriptcase.
Offline Registration
Used for cases where the machine where Scriptcase is installed does not have internet access. The offline registration is done in two steps: Request (request the registration file)
and Register (register the file).
15
In order to register your Scriptcase you essentially need to have the account owner information (user, password and serial key). This information is created during the license
purchase.
Request
You can access the Request option under the menu License > Offline Request
Inside this option you request a encrypted file containing relevant information to Scriptcase registry (.req file).
User - Account user login linked to serial (License owner details, same information used to access My Scriptcase options under the website)
After completing the request, you need to access the website through the link https://www.scriptcase.net/licenserequest/ to upload the file and get the registry file
Enter the serial you want to use for the registry and upload the file .rec delivered by Scriptcase during the file request step. You will receive another file called: .lic , download
this file and go back to Scriptcase registration step.
Registration
Back to Scriptcase, please access: Licenses > Offline Registration .
Reenter the account information and the serial key, upload the .lic downloaded from the website.
User - Same login used to generate the file .rec (License owner details, same information used to access My Scriptcase options under the website)
16
Upload - Upload the file .lic downloaded from the website.
To complete the register you will need to log out of Scriptcase.

1
My ScriptCase
HOME › OPTIONS › MY SCRIPTCASE
Interface where you can define the ScriptCase settings. All the users have access to this section, and the changes done are tied to the login(user) that you are currently using. This
way each user can have their own settings for ScriptCase.
Language - Scriptcase’s interface language. When informing the language in My ScriptCase , the selected language at the login won’t be considered.
Security Resources - When unchecking these options, the security settings won’t be considered when running the applications in the development environment. When deploying the
applications, they will respect the security settings normally.
Initial Information - Defines the information that will be displayed on the application listing.
Show Friendly URL - Defines the display of the field to inform the Friendly URL in the application.
Main Menu Interface - Defines the width of the left side menu of the home page, where the applications are listed and the option of incrementation.
Application Settings Interface - Defines the width of the left side menu of the applications settings and the option of incrementation.
Auto Save - Allows the modifications to be saved automatically.
Display INSERT CODE on events - Defines if the examples will be displaying in the events of the applications.
Convert identation to tab - Allows to use “tab” hotkey to indent your code or line selected.
Show folders at home - Allows for the subfolders to be listed with the applications, when selecting a folder on the side menu in the home of the project.
Allow Hotkeys - This option allows to enable/disable Scriptcase hotkeys. Click Here to view the hotkeys list.
1
Change Password
HOME › OPTIONS › CHANGE PASSWORD
Interface where you can change the password of your user. We always recommend using passwords with a certain level of complexity, to prevent hacks of brute force.
Inform your current password, and the new password twice just to confirm it.
For the option of password recovery to work, the administrator need to setup the SMTP configurations correctly in ScriptCase’s settings.
Old Password - Inform your current password.
New Password - Inform your new password.
Confirmation - Confirm the new password.

1
My Toolbar
HOME › OPTIONS › MY TOOLBAR
Allows each user to customize their toolbars, by including or removing unnecessary items for your usage, giving you a better experience while developing the applications. This
option is tied to the user that did the modification, this way each user can modify their own toolbar the way they desire.
The icons are divided in categories. To include an item to the toolbar, we just need to drag it to the toolbar.
Toolbar - Icons that’ll be displayed on the toolbar of ScriptCase.
Buttons
Save - Saves the modifications done to the toolbar.
Add Separator - Adds a separator to the toolbar, after the last item of the current setup.
Create item - Creates a new item in the toolbar. Inform the URL, icon and description of the new item.
Return to default - Restores the toolbar to its default configuration.

1
My Hotkeys
HOME › OPTIONS › MY HOTKEYS
Allows you to change the default Hotkeys of your Scriptcase interface, offering to you more praticity and customisation to your development.
To change the default hotkeys, you just need access the menu Options > My Hotkeys.
Will be open the hotkeys and the setting options, as the image below:
Clear: Clears all predefined settings by Scriptcase or by user.
Restore Default : Restores all the default shortcuts that was changed or erased.
Action: Selects the action that will be made when press the selected keybind.
Keybinding: Selects the keybinds that will be responsible for execute the chosen action.
Upload Settings : Realizes the importation of the keybind settings exported.
Download Settings: Realizes the download of the keybind settings in use.

1
General Overview
HOME › DEPLOY
A deploy is the final thing you will need to do with your project, so that your applications can be accessed by in the production environment. Basically, it is the development’s final
phase, where the ScriptCase user will find the help to publish the project on a WEB server, this server being correctly setup to guarantee the perfect functionality of the
applications.
Scriptcase offers two ways to deploy your project, both of them are detailed below:
We recommend that the production’s PHP version environment, needs to be the same as the Development environment, due to compatibilities of the functions between the
versions.
Typical Deploy
It is the type of deploy which the production environment is automatically setup, with all the common libraries used in the applications. In case you need to customize the deploy
directories, like the image directory or the temporary directory for example, this type of deployment is not recommended, considering that theses directories are setup by
ScriptCase default, not allowing customizing their locations, to deploy with the liberty to choose the directories’ location you will need to do the “Advance” deployment.
To proceed with the Typical Deploy Click Here.
Advanced Deploy
It is a deploy that gives the ScriptCase User the possibility to choose the default directories for the project, e.g., Image Directory, Document Directory, Prod (Common Libraries)
Directory and etc. This type of deployment is recommended if you need to specify the directories for the WEB Server, to be used be your projects.
To proceed with the Advanced Deploy Click Here.

1
Typical Deploy
HOME › DEPLOY › TYPICAL DEPLOY
Pre-Requirements:
Web Server (ex: Apache, IIS).
PHP version 5.6 or 7.0.
Access to the project database that is going to be used in the production environment.
This type of deployment is for users that want the Production Environment (Common Libraries) with the default settings from ScriptCase, the basic setup is done already be
ScriptCase.
Follow the process will be described below to realize the Typical Deploy:
Project Deployment
1 - Access your project and choose the option “Project -> Deploy applications” , available on the top menu.
ScriptCase “Project” Menu
2 - After clicking on the Deploy applications button, you will have the option to deploy all the applications from the project or you can select the applications that you want to
deploy.
All Applications
When select this option, all the applications of the project will be deployed.
Select the applications to be deployed
Select the applications
This option allow us to select the applications that will be deployed.

2
List of available applications
Select the applications that you wish to deploy.
3 - Choose the type of deploy that you will use (Typical).
4 - Choose the initial application.
In this step we also defines if we will send the common libraries with our project.
Select the initial application for the deployment
It is necessary to select the common libraries, which are the files responsible for the “Production Environment”. It is necessary to select the common files, for the images, css and
custom messages to be sent at the moment of the deploy.
Common Libraries(Prod) Contains the used libraries by our applications and also the informations of connections used by the project.
Deploy with common files : This option is obligatory for a project deployment, for the images, css and customized messages be send in the moment of deploy generation.
Initial Application : Defines the system initial application.
Generated Files
5 - Generating the files to deploy:
In this step we must select the way that we wish the applications will be generated.
Generate ZIP or Tar.Gz with applications (Option used in this example):
The Scriptcase will generate a file Zip or Tar.Gz. In the end of this process, will be displayed a report of the deployed applications with the download link for download the
3
project.
The file ZIP or Tar.Gz generated, must be decompressed only in the deployment server, to avoid that the files be corrupted.
Select the ZIP method
Deploy on a server directory :
Deploys the project in the informed directory. We must inform the absolute path to the deployment directory.
This option should be used in the case that the deploy is going to be in the same sever where ScriptCase is installed, otherwise this option is not valid.
Choose the Directory to deploy
Deploy on FTP server:
This option generates the files directly in the FTP remote server.
Select the FTP method
FTP server : Server where you will deploy your project. Inform the domain or the server’s IP.
User : User for the FTP server in the production, remembering that the user need to have permission to write in the server folder, otherwise it will not work.
Password: Password for the FTP user.
FTP Folder : Server directory where the project will be deployed in.
To use this option is necessary that you have a server that provides the FTP access and an user with write permissions.
Deploy on a SFTP server:
Deploys the application automatically on a remote SFTP server.

4
Select the SFTP method
SFTP server: Server where you will deploy your project. Inform the domain or IP the server’s IP.
User : User for the SFTP server in the production, remembering that the user need to have permission to write in the server folder, otherwise it will not work.
Password: Password for the SFTP user.
SFTP Folder : Server directory where the project will be deployed in.
Note: To use the SFTP option is necessary that the user have permission to write on the server folder.
6 - At the end of the process you will receive a report with all the applications deployed and a download link of the project ready to be published.
The file ZIP or Tar.Gz generated, must be decompressed only in the deployment server, to avoid that the files be corrupted.
Last Page of Deploy
Server Directories
7 - In the server root was created a folder(typical) where we will decompress the deployment files.
8 - In the end of the compression process, we must access your project through the browser.
In the first access we must configure the connections in Production Environment.

1
Advanced Deploy
HOME › DEPLOY › ADVANCED DEPLOY
Pre-Requirements:
Web Server (ex: Apache, IIS).
PHP version 5.6 or later.
Access to the project database that is going to be used in the production environment.
Note: Different from the typical deploy, where the directories’ setup is done from ScriptCase using the default settings, the advanced deployment allows you to choose the
directories is according to the server’s architecture where it is going to be deployed to.
1 - Access your project and choose the option “Project -> Deploy applications” , available on the top menu.
ScriptCase “Project” Menu
2 - After clicking on the Deploy applications button, you will have the option to deploy all the applications from the project or you can select the applications that you want to
deploy.
All Applications
Select the applications
List of available applications

2
3 - Choose the type of deploy that you will use (Advanced).
4 - Create a template for the deployment so that the settings can be saved and reused each time you deploy the current application.
Choose the name of the template to deploy
5 - Define the structure of the production environment’s directories defined in the production server. You can see two examples of different setup examples.
Example 1:
Note: It is necessary to create the directories in the production server, so that it can store the deployment’s Production environment (Common Libraries), remembering that
the absolute path until the folder of the documents directory needs to be informed. On this example, we are using the production folder.
Example 1: Choose the Example 1: Choose the
structure of the deploy folders
Example 2:
Note: On this example, it is necessary to create the image, documents and temporary directories, on your production server, remembering that the documents directory needs
to be informed the absolute path. Relating to the Production Environment (Common Libraries), it is necessary to take the “prod” folder generated at the end of the deploy to
the server. In this case, we are using different directories form the previous example.
3
Example 2: Choose the
Example 2: Choose the
Note: On both examples on top, in case you want after the conclusion the deployment process, there will be a link to download and deploy the common files, check the option
“Deploy with common files (css, buttons, images, messages)”.
Common Libraries Folder : Library and service package used by the deployed applications. Inform the relative path to the prod directory, ex: /production/prod or /prod
Images Folder (used for uploading service) : Folder where will be stored all the images, when an application uses a field of the type “Image (File Name)”. Inform the relative path to the image
directory: /production/file/img
Temp Folder : Folder where will be stored the generated temporary files during applications’ runtime. The files of this directory will be removed periodically according to the specific settings,
by default it is 120 minutes. Inform here the relative path to the tmp directory, ex: /production/tmp or /temporay_files/tmp
Documents Folder (used for uploading serviced) : folder where all the documents will be stored when an application uses a field of the type “Image(File Name)”. Absolute Path (Full Path) to
the doc directory, ex: C:/Apache/htdocs/productions/file/doc or C:/Apache/htdocs/my_documents/doc
Note: The Character “/”, means the Web Server’s root, it is used for relative paths.
6 - Define the connection name that will be used by the project after deploying.
Choose the name of the connection
7 - Choose the the way method of deploy that is going to be used. ScriptCase offers 4 options:
Generate the ZIP with the applications (recommended):

The final process that will be give you a link to download the deploy package.
Select the ZIP method
Note: This option is recommended because it does not need other services to be done.
Deploy on a server directory:

Deploys the project in the informed directory. This option should be used, in the case that the deploy is going to be in the same sever where ScriptCase is installed, otherwise this
option is not valid.
4
Choose the Directory to deploy
Deploy on a FTP server:

Deploys the application automatically on a remote FTP server.
Select the FTP method
FTP server : Server where you will deploy your project. Inform the domain or server’s IP.
User : User for the FTP server in the production, remembering that the user need to have permission to write in the server folder, otherwise it will not work.
Password: Password for the FTP user.
FTP Folder : Server directory where the project will be deployed in.
Note: To use the Deploy on FTP server option is necessary that the user have permission to write on the server folder..
Deploy on a SFTP server:

Deploys the application automatically on a remote SFTP server.
Select the SFTP method
SFTP server: Server where you will deploy your project. Inform the domain or server’s IP.
User : User for the SFTP server in the production, remembering that the user need to have permission to write in the server folder, otherwise it will not work.
Password: Password for the SFTP user.
SFTP Folder : Server directory where the project will be deployed in.
Note: To use the SFTP option is necessary that the user have permission to write on the server folder.
8 - At the end of the process you will receive a report with all the applications deployed and a download link of the project, also with the common libraries, that are the necessary
routine to run the applications on the production environment, that is why they are required to upload with the deployment.
5
Last Page of Deploy
Note: The advanced deploy requires that you download the “Production Environment”, that is the package that contains the common libraries. If you do not want to download
the Production Environment (Common Libraries) from the link generated by the deploy, you can download it by Clicking Here. If you deploy the project again, you do not need
to download the common libraries, but this information is not valid if the common libraries were updated in a new ScriptCase release.
1
Production Environment
HOME › DEPLOY › PRODUCTION ENVIRONMENT
In the production environment we will configure the connections used in the deployed projects.
First Access
When realize the first access to production environment, for security, we must create a new password.
In first access, the default password always will be “scriptcase”.
The production default path in a typical deployment is: /project_name/_lib/prod . Access Example: http://192.168.254.196:8090/project/_lib/prod
Accessing the production Environment
When we put the default password “scriptcase”, we must define our new password.
Password configuration for production environment
Then we will be redirect to screen that inform the connections name that must be created.
The connections must be created with the same connections names listed here, because it is about the connection names that the applications are using.
Production Environment setting
screen
Create New Connection

We must choose the SGBD, the database that we will use to this project.
2
Selecting connection in production environment
Then we must inform the Database Server. If the database is in the same server that the applications we will be able to call they trough ‘localhost’. If the database is in another
server, you will be able to connect the database trougth the machine Name or IP adress. We will inform the Login and Password to access the database(if possess).
The connection in production environment should possess the same name in the used connection by the project in production environment.
Creating connection in production environment
Connection name : Defines the name for the connection created.
DBMS Type: Select the Driver type to the connection.
Server/Host (Name or IP) : Allows you to inform the machine Name or IP adress to your database server.
Port (default) : Allows you to select a port to establish the connection.
Username: Inform the username to connect with your database.
Password: Inform the password to connect with your database.
Database name : Inform the database that will be used in the connection.
Rename Connection
Allows you to rename the connections in production environment.
Select the connection that you wish to rename, and inform a new name to this connection.
Renaming the connection
This procedure do not change the connection name that the project will use . The connection in production environment must possess the same name of the used connection
by the project in the development environment.
API
We must configure the APIs that we are using in our project with the same informations used in the development environment.
Click here to see the APIs documentation.
API list on production Environment

1
SCRIPTCASE MACROS
Scriptcase has macros and special variables that allow the user to manipulate events, buttons, applications, security control, manipulate with dates, etc.
Follows a table of all macros and special variables from ScriptCase, including the list of applications that works for each one.
MACROS AND SPECIAL VARIABLES
SQL
sc_begin_trans ("Connection") This macro starts a set of transactions in the database.
sc_change_connection ("Old_Connection", "New_Connection") This macro dynamically change the application connections.
sc_commit_trans ("Connection") This macro effective a set of transactions in the database.
sc_concat With this macro you can concatenate fields on select for every database.
sc_connection_edit ("Connetion_Name", $arr_conn) This macro edits an existing connection at runtime.
sc_connection_new ("Connection_Name", $arr_conn) This macro creates new connections dynamically.
sc_error_continue ("Event") This macro deactivates the Scriptcase standard database error treatment message for an event.
This macro configure the variable that contains the database error message that can occurs during the
sc_error_delete
exclusion of a record.
sc_error_insert
addition of a record.
sc_error_update
update of a record.
sc_exec_sql ("SQL Command", "Connection") This macro execute SQL commands passed as parameter or a SQL command in the SQL field action type.
This macro executes a SELECT command stored in the second parameter and returns the data in a
sc_lookup (Dataset, "SQL Command", "Connection")
variable.
sc_reset_change_connection This macro erases the changes made using "sc_change_connection".
sc_reset_connection_edit This macro undoes the connection edits made by macro "sc_connection_edit".
sc_reset_connection_new This macro undoes the connections made by the macro "sc_connection_new".
sc_rollback_trans ("Connection") This macro discards a set of transations in the data base.
This macro executes the commands passed in the second parameter and returns the dataset in a
sc_select (dataset, "SQL Command", "Connection")
variable.
sc_select_field ({Field}) This macro modify dynamically a field that will be recovered in the grid.
sc_select_order ("Field") This macro modify dynamically the grids "ORDER BY" clause field.
sc_select_where (add) This macro adds dynamically a condition to the grid WHERE clause.
sc_set_fetchmode (parm); This macro allows to change the type of return from the dataset of the select commands
sc_sql_injection ({My_Field}) or ($My_Variable) This macro is used protect the field/variable against "SQL injection".
sc_sql_protect (Value, "Type", "Connection") This macro protects the value passed as parameter according with the used database.
sc_where_current This macro is used to make a reference of the where clause currently used.
sc_where_orig This macro saves the where clause content of the original application select.
Variables - Database Database Variables Global variables containing database access values used by main connection.
Date
sc_date (Date, "Format", "Operator", D, M, Y) This macro calculates and returns increments and decrements using dates.
This macro converts the date field passed as parameter with an input format to another field with an
sc_date_conv ({Field_Date}, "Input_Format", "Output_Format")
output format.
This macro calculates the difference between two dates (passed as parameters) returning the result in
sc_date_dif ({Date1}, "Format Date1", {Date2}, "Format Date2")
days.
sc_date_dif_2 ({Date1}, "Format Date1", {Date2}, "Format Date2", Option) This macro calculates the difference between two dates returning the amount of days, months and years.
sc_date_empty ({Field_Date}) This macro checks if a date field its empty retuning a boolean.
sc_time_diff ({datetime_01}, "Date_01 Format", {datetime_02}, "Date_02
Calculate difference in hours, returning the amount of hours, minutes and seconds.
Format")
Control
sc_ajax_javascript ( 'JavascriptMethodName', array("parameter")) This macro allows the execution of JavaScript methods in form/control events
sc_alert ("Message") This macro shows a Javascript alert message screen.
sc_apl_conf ("Application", "Property", "Value") This macro modify the application execution property.
This macro allows that the user defines in your initial application what will happen when the application
sc_apl_default ('application', 'type');
lost the session.
sc_calc_dv (Digit, Rest, Value, Module, Weights, Type) This macro calculate verify digits.
sc_call_api ($profile, $arr_settings) This macro allows us to use as integrated Scriptcase APIs
sc_changed ({Field_Name}) This macro returns "true" if the field name have been changed.
sc_confirm ("Message") This macro shows a Javascript confirm screen.
sc_decode ({My_Field}) This macro returns the encrypted field or variable to its original value.
sc_encode ({My_Field}) This macro returns the field or variable with the content encrypted.
This macro Interrupts the application execution if there are error messages generated by the macro
sc_error_exit (URL, "Target") or (My_Application, "Target")
"sc_error_message".
sc_error_message ("Text") This macro generate an error message.
sc_exit (Option) This macro forces the application exit.
sc_getfield ('myField') This macro assign the properties of a field to a javascript variable.
sc_get_language This macro returns the abbreviation of the language used.
sc_get_regional This macro returns the abbreviation of the regional settings used.
sc_get_theme This macro returns the application theme name.
sc_groupby_label ("My_Field") This macro dynamically modify the field label displayed in group by lines.
2
sc_image (Image01.jpg) This macro loads images passed as parameter to use in the application.
sc_include ("File", "Source") This macro is used to "include" PHP routines.
sc_include_lib ("Lib1", "Lib2", ...) This macro is used to select dynamically the application libraries.
sc_include_library ("Target", "Library Name", "File", "include_once", "Require") This macro includes a PHP file from a library in the application.
sc_label ({My_Field}) This macro its used to modify dynamically the grid form field label.
sc_language This macro returns the language and regional settings.
sc_link (Column, Application, Parameters, "Hint", "Target", Height, Width) This macro dynamically creates or modifies links between grid applications and other applications.
sc_log_add ("action", "description") This macro will add a register into the log table.
sc_log_split ({description}) This macro returns what was inserted in the "description" field of the log table in an array format.
sc_mail_send (SMTP, Usr, Pw, From, To, Subject, Message, Mens_Type, Copies,
This macro is used to send e-mails.
Copies_Type, Port, Connection_Type, Attachment, SSL)
sc_make_link (Application, Parameters) This macro is used to create a string with the link data to another application.
sc_master_value ('Object', Value) This macro update a Master Application object from a Detail Application.
sc_redir (Application, Parameter01; Parameter02; Target, Error, height_modal,
This macro its used to redirects to other application or URL.
width_modal)
sc_reset_global ([Global_Variable1], [Global_Variable2] ...) This macro delete session variables received as parameter.
sc_send_mail_api ($arr_settings) Enables dynamic sending of embedded emails with Mandrill and Amazon SES
sc_send_sms ($arr_settings) This macro is used to send text SMS messages
sc_send_whatsapp ($arr_settings) This macro allows the dynamic sent of text messages through Whatsapp.
sc_seq_register This macro provide the register sequential number.
sc_set_global ($variable_01) or ({My_Field}) This macro is used to register session variables.
sc_set_groupby_rule Macro is used to select an specific GROUP BY rule.
sc_set_language ('String Language') This macro allows to dynamically change the application language.
sc_set_regional ('String Regional') This macros allows to dynamically change the application regional settings.
sc_set_theme ('String Theme') This macro is used to dynamically define the application themes.
sc_site_ssl This macro verifies if its been used a safe/secure site. (https protocol)
sc_trunc_num ({My_Field}, Decimal_Number) This macro its used to set the number of decimals.
sc_url_exit (URL) This macro modifies the application exit URL.
sc_url_library ("Target", "Library Name", "File") This macro returns the path of a file, inside a library, to be used on the applications.
sc_warning 'on' or 'off' This macro dynamically activates or deactivates warning messages control.
sc_webservice ("Method", "URL", "Port", "Send Method", "Parameters Array",
This macro is used to communicate with a web service.
"Setting's Array", "Timeout", "Return")
sc_zip_file ("File", "Zip") This macro its used to generate ZIP files from a file list and/or directories.
Variables - Totalling Totalling Variables Variables that contains all the totals (general and for grouping).
Variables - Totalling (group by) Totalling Variables (group by) Breaking totals variables.
Filter
sc_where_filter This macro its used to save the where clause content generated through the filter form.
Security
sc_apl_status ("Application", "Status") This macro Activate/Deactivate the applications at user level.
sc_ldap_login This macro establish the connection with the user credentials.
sc_ldap_logout () Macro used to release the connection after using the macro sc_ldap_login
sc_ldap_search ( $filter = 'all', $attributes = array() ) Macro to perform searches in the LDAP.
sc_reset_apl_conf ("Application", "Property") This macro deletes all the modifications effected by "sc_apl_conf" macro.
sc_reset_apl_status This macro deletes all the application security status variables.
sc_reset_menu_delete This macro restores a menu item structure. (removed by the macro "sc_menu_delete").
sc_reset_menu_disable This macro its used to enable a menu item structure. (disabled by the macro "sc_menu_disable").
sc_user_logout ('variable_name', 'variable_content', 'apl_redir.php', 'target') Macro used to log the user out to the system.
Shows
sc_ajax_message ("Message", "Title", "Parameters", "Parameters_Redir") This macro allows the application to display customized messages.
sc_ajax_refresh () Macro to refresh a Grid
sc_block_display (Block_Name, on/off) This macro dynamically show/hide the fields of a specific block.
sc_field_color ("Field", "Color") This macro changes the color of a determined field text.
sc_field_disabled ("Field_Name = True/False", "Parameter") This macro is used to block a field to get any data that would be typed on it.
sc_field_disabled_record ("Field_Name = True/False", "Parametre") This macro has the objective to block the typing on determined fields in the Forms.
sc_field_display ({My_Field}, on/off) This macro dynamically display or not a specific field.
sc_field_init_off (Field1, Field2,...) This macro is intended to inhibit the query fields on the initial load.
sc_field_readonly ({Field}, on/off) This macro dynamically set a form field attribute to '"Read-Only"
sc_field_style ({My_Field}, "Background-Color", "Size", "Color", "Family",
This macro allows to modify dynamically the grid field style.
"Weight")
sc_format_num ({My_Field}, "Group_Symb", "Dec_Symb", "Amount_Dec",
This macro its used to format numerical values.
"Fill_Zeros", "Side_Neg", "Currency_Symb", "Side_Currency_Symb")
sc_format_num_region ({My_Field}, "Qtde_Dec", "Insert_Zeros",
This macro has the objective to format numbers, using the regional settings
"Monetary_Sym")
sc_form_show 'on' or 'off' This macro dynamically show or not the form.
sc_get_groupby_rule () This macro provides the name of the Group By rule running at the time.
sc_hide_groupby_rule ('group1', 'grop2', 'group3') Macro used to disable Group By rules.
sc_set_focus ('Field') This macro its used to set the focus to a form field.
sc_text_style ({My_Field}, "Background-Color", "Size", "Color", "Family",
This macro allows to modify dynamically the text style from the grid field.
"Weight")
Buttons
3
sc_btn_copy This macro returns "true" when the "copy" button is selected in a form.
sc_btn_delete This macro returns "true" when the "Delete" button is selected in a form.
sc_btn_display ("Button_Name","on/off") This macro shows and hides buttons on the toolbar in execution time.
sc_btn_insert This macro returns "true" when the "Add" button is selected in a form.
sc_btn_new This macro returns "true" when the "Add New" button is selected in a form.
sc_btn_update This macro returns "true" when the "Save" button is selected in a form.
PDF
sc_set_pdf_name "sc_my_file_name.pdf" This macro will change the grid's exported files name.
Variables - Authentication Authentication Variables User/Password for the WEB server.
Menu
sc_appmenu_add_item ("Menu_Name", "Id_Item", "Id_Parent", "Label",
This Macro adds dinamically an item to the menu.
"Aplication", "Parameters", "Icon", "Hint", "Target")
sc_appmenu_create ("Menu_Name") This macro dynamically creates a menu item.
sc_appmenu_exist_item ("Menu_Name", "Id_Item") This macro checks if there is a menu item.
sc_appmenu_remove_item ("Menu_Name", "Id_Item") This macro removes dynamically a menu item.
sc_appmenu_reset ("Menu_Name") This macro reset the array used in the dinamically creation of a menu application.
sc_appmenu_update_item ("Menu_Name", "Id_Item", "Id_Parent", "Label",
This macro updates a menu item.
"Aplication", "Parameters", "Icon", "Hint", "Target")
sc_btn_disable ('button_id', 'on/off') Macro used to disable Menu buttons.
sc_menu_delete (Id_Item1) This macro remove items of the menu structure.
sc_menu_disable (Id_Item1) This macro deactivate menu structure items.
sc_menu_force_mobile (boolean) Macro used to force the creation of menus to mobile devices.
sc_menu_item This macro Identifies the menu item selected.
sc_script_name This macro identifies the application name that was selected in the menu.
sc_ajax_javascript( 'JavascriptMethodName', array("parameter"))
This macro allows the execution of JavaScript methods called from some events in form,control
and calendar applications.
To use this macro you need to create a javascript method in theProgramming settings.
This macro receive two parameters:
The firs parameter (required) recive the javascript method name.

The second (optional) recive an array with the method parameters on it.
Examples:
Ex. 1: Method javascript without parameters:

sc_ajax_javascript('method_name');
sc_ajax_javascript('sum');
Ex. 2: Method javascript with a paramenter:

sc_ajax_javascript('method_name', array("paramameter"));
Ex. 3: Method javascript with two paramenters:

sc_ajax_javascript('method_name', array("param1","param2"));
Example using global variables:

sc_ajax_javascript('sum', array([num1],[num2]));
Macro Scope
calendar application Form application Control Form

ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
ajaxFieldonBlur
OnClick
Onchange
OnFocus
OnClick
onAfterDelete onBlur
OnFocus
onAfterDeleteAll onChange
onAfterDelete
onAfterInsert onClick
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll onFocus
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdate onValidateFailure
onValidate
onAfterUpdateAll
onValidateFailure
onValidate
onValidateSuccess
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_ajax_message("Message", "Title", "Parameters", "Parameters_Redir")
This macro allows the application to show customizable messages. It's use is restricted to AJAX events of
Form/Control applications.
4
This macro is only available in applications with AJAX support.
Parameters Description
Message The message to be shown. This parameter is required.
Title Messagebox title, if this parameter is empty, the title will not be shown.
Message format parameters.

Message Ex.:
Parameters modal=Y&button=Y&button_label=Ok&redir=form_employees.php&redir_target=_blank
String
For more details about this parameter, see Table2.
In this section is possible to define values for the redirecting target application. This
Redirecting parameter works only if a "redir" property was informed. The properties for this
Parameters parameter must be informed in this format: parameter=value;parameter=value.
String
Ex.: customer_id=ALFKI;customer_name=ALBERT FRANCINET
Table2: Message Parameters String
Property Description Values Example
Flag to define if the

modal message will be shown in Y or N modal=Y
modal
Time in seconds to hide the

message. If this property is
not informed, the message
timeout will be shown indefinitely. Seconds timeout=5
This property works only if
"button" property is not
enabled.
Shows a button inside the

message. This button
default function is to close
the message. If there is
button Y or N button=Y
redirecting enabled, the
application will be
redirected after closing the
message.
Button label. This option

button_label works only if the "button" String button=Y&button_label=OK
property is enabled.
Message positioning value Pixels

top top=300
in pixels from top margin. Number
Message positioning value Pixels

left left=200
in pixels from left margin. Number
Messagebox width value in Pixels

width width=320
pixels Number
Messagebox height value in Pixels

height height=30
pixels Number
URL or application name for

redirecting. This macro
redir String button=Y&redir=form_employees.php
works only if the "button"
property is enabled.
Target for redirecting. This

property works only when
redir_target String redir=form_employees.php&redir_target=_blank
the "redir" property is
enabled.
Flag for exhibition of the

"close" button on the
messagebox title bar. When
show_close activated, this parameter Y or N show_close=Y
forces a title bar to be
shown, even if there is no
title defined.
Flag for exhibiting a icon on

the message body. The icon
exhibition depends on the
body_icon Y or N body_icon=N
applications theme
configuration (exhibition
schemes).
Ex. 01
sc_ajax_message ("Message", "Title", "timeout=0");
Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur
Onchange Onchange onChange
OnClick OnClick onClick
OnFocus OnFocus onFocus
5
sc_ajax_refresh()
This macro is used especially in Ajax events of a Grid with the purpose of reload the Grid data
(refresh).
Ex:
sc_ajax_refresh();
Macro Scope
Grid application
onClick
sc_alert("Message")
This macro shows a Javascript alert message box.
Ex. 1:
sc_alert("This is an alert message!!");
Macro Scope
Control Form
onLoadAll
onValidate
sc_apl_conf("Application", "Property", "Value")
This macro allows to modify the property of the application. The user can determine if a Form will
start in insert mode, or a Grid starts by filter, etc.
This macro must be used by one application to modify the properties of another application.
Properties for Form applications
Property Value Description

start new Forces the form to start in the insert mode in order to add new records.
insert on/off Qualifies (on) or unqualifies (off) the "add new" button to allow the
addtion of new records.
update on/off Qualifies (on) or unqualifies (off) the "save" button on the form.
delete on/off Qualifies (on) or unqualifies (off) the "delete" button on the form.
field_display_off field Dinamically hides a field.
field_display_on field Dinamically shows a field.
field_readonly field Dinamically set the "readonly" attribute in order to select the field.
rows Forces the number of lines for each page (only for form of multiple
records).
rows_ins Forces the number of lines for insert (only for form of multiple records).
Property for Grid applications

start filter Forces the Grid to start by the filter.
cols Forces the number of columns. (vertical and slide kind)
rows Forces the number of lines per page.
lig_edit on/off Qualifies (on) or unqualifies (off) the record edition. (the pencil icon)
Property for all applications

exit apl/url Forces application to exit to a specified location.
Ex. 1: Forces the "my_form" application to start in the addition mode.

sc_apl_conf("my_form", "start", "new");
Ex. 2: Doesn't allow the "my_form" application make addition of new registers.
sc_apl_conf("my_form", "add", "off");
Ex. 3: Sets "my_field" on the application "my_form" (readonly attribute) to "true"

dinamically.
sc_apl_conf("my_form", "field_display_off", "my_field");
Ex. 4: Shows "my_field" on the application "my_form" dinamically.

sc_apl_conf("my_form", "field_display_on", "my_field");
6
Ex. 5: Forces the "my_grid" application to start by filter.
sc_apl_conf("my_grid", "start", "filter");
Ex. 6: Forces the "my_grid" application to show 20 lines.

sc_apl_conf("my_grid", "rows", "20");
Ex. 7: Hides "my_field" on the application "my_form" dinamically.

sc_apl_conf("my_form", "field_display_off", "my_field");
Ex. 8: Use the button on the toolbar menu.

if ({sc_menu_item} == "btn_1")
{
sc_apl_conf("form_customer", "start", "new");
}
Macro Scope
Blank calendar chart Grid Search Form Menu ReportPDF

Control Form Tree menu
application application application application application application application application
onApplicationInit
onScriptInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onExecute onValidate onExecute onExecute
onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onFilterInit onScriptInit onScriptInit
onValidateFailure onLoad onLoad
onValidateSuccess
sc_apl_default('application', 'type');
This macro allows that the user defines in your initial application what will happen when the
application lost the session.
The macro has the following parameters:
Apl: Here it is necessary to inform which application the macro will redirect after lost the session.
Type: Here we will inform the redirecting type that will occur. There are two types:
R: The application will only redirect to the initial application.

M: Will be shown a message before the redirecting.
Example: In a login application defined as the initial application, we can define that this application
will redirect to himself.
sc_apl_default("app_login","R")
Macro Scope
calendar application chart application Grid application Search application Form application Control Form ReportPDF application
onCalendarScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onFilterInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit
sc_apl_status("Application", "Status")
Used to control the security access. These macros activate/deactivate the applications that a user
has acess to.
Application: Is the name or the variable that contains the name of the application to be
activated/deactivated.
Status: Is the value or variable that contains the value to be attributed to the application. The
values are: "on" to activate and "off" to deactivate.
Ex. 1:
sc_apl_status ('atu_cad', 'off');
Ex. 2:
sc_apl_status ({var_name_appl}, {var_status});
Macro Scope
Blank chart Grid Search Form Menu ReportPDF

calendar application Control Form Tree menu
application application application application application application application
onApplicationInit
onApplicationInit
onScriptInit
onCalendarApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onExecute onValidate
onCalendarScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onFilterInit onScriptInit onLoad onLoad onScriptInit
onValidateFailure
onScriptInit
onValidateSuccess
sc_appmenu_add_item("Menu_Name", "Id_Item", "Id_Parent", "Label", "Aplication", "Parameters", "Icon", "Hint", "Target")
Adds dinamically an item to a menu application.
It is only possible to use this macro when there is an array created before by the macro
sc_appmenu_create.
Parameter Description
7
Menu_name Application menu name.
Id_item Menu item id.
Id_Parent Parent menu item id. For roots the null/empty value is passed.
Label Menu item description.
Aplication Menu item URL or application name
String with parameters to pass to the menu item application.
Parameters
Ex.: param1=valor;param2=valor
Icon Path to icon used in menu item.
Hint Descriptive hint to menu item.
Target for menu item link. ("_self" to use the same window, "_blank" to a new one and
Target
"_parent" to exit the window.
Ex. 1: Creates a menu named menu_main.

sc_appmenu_create('menu_main');
Ex. 2: Adds a on the menu_main the the item_1 named Category.

sc_appmenu_add_item('menu_main','item_1','','Category','');
Ex. 3: Adds a on the menu_main (item_2) the item_1 name Category linked to the
form_category passing a few parameters.
sc_appmenu_add_item('menu_main','item_2','item_1','Category
Form','form_category','param1=value;param2=value');
Macro Scope
Menu application Tree menu

onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onLoad onLoad
sc_appmenu_create("Menu_Name")
Esta macro inicializa la matriz utilizada en la creaci
Macro Scope

onLoad onLoad
sc_appmenu_exist_item("Menu_Name", "Id_Item")
Verifica si el menu existe y devuelve verdadero V o falso.
Parametro Descripci?006e0026006ct;/strong>
Nombre de la aplicaci?006e00200064e men?
menu_name
0026006c0074003b/td>
id_item ID del elemento de men?0026006c0074003b/td>
Ej. 1:
if(sc_appmenu_exist_item('menu_main', 'item_2')){
sc_appmenu_update_item('menu_main','item_2','item_1','Category Form','form_category');
}
else{
sc_appmenu_add_item('menu_main','item_2','item_1','Category Form','form_category');
Macro Scope

onLoad onLoad
sc_appmenu_remove_item("Menu_Name", "Id_Item")
Remove dinamically a menu item.
To use this macro it is necessary to execute the macro sc_appmenu_create before.
Parâmetro Descrição
Menu application Ex. 1:
menu_name
8
name sc_appmenu_remove_item('menu_main','item_2');
id_item Menu item id
Macro Scope

onLoad onLoad
sc_appmenu_reset("Menu_Name")
This macro resets the array used in the dynamic creation of a menu application.
This macro is expecting the menu application name as the single parameter.
Ex. 1:
sc_appmenu_reset('menu_main');
Macro Scope

onLoad onLoad
sc_appmenu_update_item("Menu_Name", "Id_Item", "Id_Parent", "Label", "Aplication", "Parameters", "Icon", "Hint", "Target")
Updates an application menu item dinamically
It is only possible to use this macro when there is an array created before by the macro
sc_appmenu_create.
It is only possible to use this macro on items created before by the macro
sc_appmenu_add_item.
menu_name Application menu item name
id_item Application menu item id
id_parent Application menu item parent id. For roots the null/empty value is passed.
Label Application menu item description.
Aplication Menu item URL or application name
String with parameter to pass to the application menu item
Parameters
Ex.: param1=valor;param2=valor
Icon Icone path used in menu item.
Hint Descriptive Hint for menu item.
Target Target for menu item link
Ex. 1:
sc_appmenu_update_item('menu_main','item_2','item_1','Category Form','form_category');
Macro Scope

onLoad onLoad
sc_begin_trans("Connection")
This macro starts a set of transactions in the database.
For the use of this macro you need to have a transactional database.
In form applications, the events (onAfterInsert, onAfterUpdate, onAfterDelete, onBeforeInsert,

onBeforeUpdate or onBeforeDelete) are automatically protected by a transaction control, since the
connection is the same of the application.
In the other cases, if the user need to make a transaction control, must begin with this macro and
finish with the sc_commit_trans() macro to confirm the updates or sc_rollback_trans() to cancel the
transactions.
The "connection" parameter is optional, necessary only if the command is executed in a

different connection from the actual application.
Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur
9
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
ajaxFieldonBlur
onAfterDeleteAll
Onchange
onAfterInsert
OnClick
onAfterInsertAll onBlur
OnFocus
onAfterUpdate onChange
onAfterDelete
onClick onAfterUpdateAll onClick
onAfterInsert
onFooter onBeforeDelete onFocus
onAfterUpdate onFilterInit onFooter
onFooter onGroupBy onBeforeDeleteAll onClick onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onBeforeDelete onFilterRefresh onHeader
onExecute onHeader onHeader onBeforeInsert onScriptInit onExecute onExecute
onBeforeInsert onFilterSave onScriptInit
onScriptInit onScriptInit onBeforeInsertAll onLoadAll onLoad onLoad
onBeforeUpdate onFilterValidate onRecord
onNavigate onBeforeUpdate onRefresh
onScriptInit
onRecord onBeforeUpdateAll onValidate
onLoad
onClick onValidateFailure
onRefresh
onScriptInit onValidateSuccess
onValidate
onLoad
onValidateFailure
onNavigate
onValidateSuccess
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_block_display(Block_Name, on/off)
Dynamically determines the display fields of a specific block.
By default all the blocks are displayed ("on" condition).
Ex. 1:
if ({type_customeri} == "personal")
{
sc_block_display(company, off);
}
else
{
sc_block_display(personal, off);
}
Obs: In grids, this macro only works with "slide" orientation.
Macro Scope
calendar application chart application Grid application Form application Control Form
onAfterDeleteAll
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterInsert
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onScriptInit onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad onScriptInit
onScriptInit onScriptInit onLoad
onRefresh onLoadAll
onNavigate
onValidate onRefresh
onLoadRecord
onValidateFailure
onRefresh
onValidateSuccess
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_btn_copy
Available when the "Copy" button is clicked. Can be tested and used inside the ScriptCase events,
allowing especific programmation in run time.
Ex. 1:
if (sc_btn_copy)
sc_message("Record copied successfully!");
Macro Scope
calendar application Form application

onScriptInit onScriptInit
onLoad onLoad
sc_btn_delete
Available when the "Delete" button is clicked. Can be tested and used inside the ScriptCase events,
Available when the "Delete" button is clicked. Can be tested and used inside the ScriptCase events,
10
Ex. 1:
if (sc_btn_delete)
{
sc_error_message("Unable to delete this record");
}
Macro Scope

onValidate onValidate
onValidateFailure onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess onValidateSuccess
sc_btn_disable('button_id', 'on/off')
This macros is used to disable or enable buttons from a Menu application.
Ex:
sc_btn_disable('btn_2', 'off');
Macro Scope

onApplicationInit
onLoad
onLoad
sc_btn_display("Button_Name","on/off")
Activate toolbars buttons on the application in execution time.
Button_Name: Is the variable name that contains the name of the button to be
activated/deactivate.
Buttons Name (Grid):
Buttons Description
Name
first Goes to the first page of the grid.
back Goes to the previous page of the grid.
forward Goes to the next page of the grid.
last Goes to the last page of the grid.
filter Displays the "Filter" button.
pdf Generates colored PDF.
det_pdf Generates detail PDF.
pdfbw Generates black and white PDF.
xls Generates the XLS.
xml Generates the XML.
cvs Generates the CVS.
rtf Generates the RTF.
word Generates the Word.
print Displays the "Print" button in the grid.
det_print Displays the "Print" Button in the detail.
summary Displays the "Summary" button in the grid.

new Displays the "New" button. (if the application has link for it, or if the form is
running in the grid iframe)
insert Displays the "Include" button of the form. (only for forms running in grid´s
iframe)
update Displays the "Update" button of the form. (only for forms running in grid´s
iframe)
delete Displays the "Delete" button of the form (only for forms running in grid´s iframe)
qsearch Displays the "Quick Search" button in the grid.
groupby Displays the "Group By" button in the grid.
dynsearch Displays the "Dynamic Search" button in the grid.
gridsave Displays the "Save Grid" button in the grid.
Buttons Name (Form):
Buttons Description
Name
first Goes to the first page of the form.
back Goes to the previous page of the form.
11
forward Goes to the next page of the form.
last Goes to the last page of the form.
new Displays the "New" button on the form, if its off the form will starts in insertion
mode.
insert Displays the "Include" button of the form.
update Displays the "Update" button of the form.
delete Displays the "Delete" button of the form.
copy Displays the "Copy" button of the form.
qsearch Displays the "Quick Search" button of the form.
pdf Generates PDF file from form.
print Open the form in print mode.
dynsearch Displays the "Dynamic Search" button in the grid.
Buttons Name (Control):
Buttons Description
Name
ok Displays the "Ok" button on a control.
exit Displays the "Exit" button on a control.
facebook Displays the "Facebook" button on a control.
twitter Displays the "Twitter" button on a control.
google Displays the "Google+" button on a control.
paypal Displays the "PayPal" button on a control.
OBS. Remember that the buttons name must be lowercase.
Ex. 1:
sc_btn_display ('new', 'off');
Ex. 2: If we use variables or fields ({Fields} or [Global_Variables]) as parameters its not

allowed the use of the quotes or single quotes.
sc_btn_display ({variavle_button}, 'off');
Macro Scope
calendar application chart application Grid application Form application Control Form
onAfterDelete
onAfterDeleteAll
onAfterInsert
onAfterDelete
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterInsert
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdate onScriptInit
onAfterUpdateAll
onScriptInit onLoadAll
onScriptInit
onLoad onScriptInit onScriptInit onRefresh
onLoad
onRefresh onValidate
onNavigate
onValidate onValidateFailure
onLoadRecord
onValidateFailure
onRefresh
onValidateSuccess
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_btn_insert
Available when the "Add" button is clicked. Can be tested and used inside the ScriptCase events,
Ex. 1:
if (sc_btn_insert)
{
sc_message("Record inserted successfully");
Macro Scope

sc_btn_new
Available when the "Add New" button is clicked. Can be tested and used inside the ScriptCase
events, allowing especific programmation in run time.
Ex. 1:
if (sc_btn_new)
{
{My_Date} = date('Y/m/d');
}
12
Macro Scope

onLoad onLoad
sc_btn_update
Available when the "Save" button is clicked. Can be tested and used inside the ScriptCase events,
Ex. 1:
if (sc_btn_update)
{
sc_error_message("Record updated successfully");
}
Macro Scope

sc_calc_dv(Digit, Rest, Value, Module, Weights, Type)
Calculate verifier (checksum) digits.
Digit Variable that will recieve the calculated digit.
Rest Variable that will recieve the "rest" of the division.
Value Value or Variable to calculate the digit.
Module Value or Variable containing the module to be used. Default value is module "11".
Weights Value or Variable containing the weights to be used. Default value is the
"98765432" values.
Type Value or Variable containing the parcels calculation to be used: 1 to normal sum of
the parcels values and 2 to the sum of each algorithm of the parcels. Default value
is "1".
Ex. 1:
sc_calc_dv({my_dv}, {my_rest}, 1234567, 11, 98765432, 1);
Parcels calculation: 7x2= 14 ; 6x3=18 ; 5x4=20 ; 4x5=20 ; 3x6=18 ; 2x7=14 ; 1x8=8
Parcels sum : 14 + 18 + 20 + 20 + 18 + 14 + 8 = 112
Rest of the division of 112 / 11 = 2
Digit: 11 - 2 = 9
Ex. 2:
sc_calc_dv({my_dv}, {my_rest}, 1234567, 10, 12, 2);
Parcels calculation: 7x2= 14 ; 6x1=6 ; 5x2=10 ; 4x1=4 ; 3x2=6 ; 2x1=2 ; 1x2=2
Parcels sum: 1 + 4 + 6 + 1 + 0 + 4 + 6 + 2 + 2 = 26
Rest of the division of 26 / 10 = 6
Digit: 10 - 6 = 4
Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
ajaxFieldonBlur
onAfterDeleteAll
Onchange
onAfterInsert
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
onAfterInsert
onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onFocus
onAfterUpdate onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onApplicationInit onFooter onBeforeDelete onApplicationInit
onApplicationInit onFilterInit onApplicationInit onFooter
onFooter onGroupBy onBeforeDeleteAll onClick onExecute
onExecute onBeforeDelete onFilterRefresh onExecute onHeader
onHeader onHeader onBeforeInsert onScriptInit onLoad
onBeforeInsert onFilterSave onLoad onScriptInit
onScriptInit onScriptInit onBeforeInsertAll onLoadAll
onScriptInit
onLoad
onRefresh
onValidate
onLoad
onValidateFailure
onNavigate
onValidateSuccess
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
13
sc_call_api($profile, $arr_settings)
Permite utilizar las API integradas con Scriptcase. Actualmente ofrecemos la integración con
Mandrill y Amazon SES API.
Esta macro tiene dos parámetros:
Parámetros Descripción
Parámetro requerido. Puede ser vacío '' o contener el nombre de la puerta de
$profile
enlace configurada en "Herramientas> API".
This parameter is optional, as long as the "profile" is not empty.Cuando el mismo
$arr_settings
es informado debe contenr un Array con la puerta usada y la API key.
Ejemplo 1 - Configuración de parámetros, array con información de la API.

$settings = array( 'settings' => ['gateway' => 'mandrill', 'api_key'=> {api_key}] );
$mandrill = sc_call_api('', $settings);
Ejemplo 2: Envío de correo electrónico usando Mandril.

$txt_no_tags = strip_tags({body});
$arr_merge = array(
'name' => '',
'type' => 'to',
'email' => 'example@exemple.com'
);
$var_config = array( 'settings' => ['gateway' => 'mandrill', 'api_key'=> {api_key}] );
$mandrill = sc_call_api('', $var_config);

$var_msg = array(
'from_email' => {from_email},
'from_name' => {from_name},
'html' => {body},
'text' => $txt_no_tags,
'to' => array($arr_merge),
'subject' => {subject},
'important' => true,
'auto_text' => null,
'auto_html' => null,
'inline_css' => null,
'metadata' => array('website' => 'www.scriptcase.net')
);
$async = false;
$return = $mandrill->messages->send($var_msg, $async);
Ejemplo 3 - Envío de SMS usando clickatell.

$var_config = array(
'message' => [
'to' => {sms_to},
'message' => {sms_txt},
],
'settings' => [
'gateway' => {gateway},
'auth_token' => {auth_token},
]
);
sc_send_sms($var_config);
Ejemplo 4 - Uso de la macro con PayPal

$arr_settings = [
'gateway' => 'paypal',
'environment' => 'sandbox',
'auth_email' => 'vitorjamil@gmail.com',
'auth_token' => '72AE21503DDA4840BE1DC7945F6D1CE1'
];
sc_call_api('',$arr_settings);
Macro Scope

onAfterDelete
onAfterDeleteAll
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterDelete
onAfterUpdateAll
onAfterInsert
onBeforeDelete
onAfterUpdate
onBeforeDeleteAll onClick
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeInsert onScriptInit
onBeforeInsert onClick onFooter
onFooter onFilterInit onBeforeInsertAll onLoadAll onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onBeforeUpdate onHeader onHeader
onExecute onHeader onFilterSave onBeforeUpdate onRefresh onExecute onExecute
onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit
onScriptInit onFilterValidate onBeforeUpdateAll onValidate onLoad onLoad
onLoad onRecord onRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onLoad
onValidateFailure
onNavigate
onValidateSuccess
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
14
sc_changed({Field_Name})
Macro to check if the field name have been changed.
Ex. 1:
if (sc_changed({my_field}))
{
Echo "Filed have been changed";
}
Macro Scope

onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdate
onRefresh
sc_change_connection("Old_Connection", "New_Connection")
This macro dynamically change the application connections
Ex. 1: To change the connections:
sc_change_connection("Old_Concection01", "New_Connection01" ; "Old_Concection02", "New_Connection02");
Allows to change more then one application/connection in one command. Multiple connections can
be passed as parameters that must be separated by a ";".
Ex. 2: Using variables:
sc_change_connection([Global_Connetion], [Test_Connection]);
The changes take effect in the following applications.
Ex. 3: Changing the application main connection
sc_change_connection({Password}, [Test] ; "My_Connection", [Global_Connection]);
The changes take effect in the following applications.
Ex. 4: To delete the exchange:
To recover your previous settings you can use the sc_reset_change_connection(); macro
Macro Scope
Blank application calendar application chart application Grid application Form application Control Form ReportPDF application
onScriptInit onHeader onApplicationInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onHeader
onExecute onLoad onScriptInit onScriptInit onLoad onLoadAll onScriptInit
onLoadRecord onRecord
sc_commit_trans("Connection")
This macro is used to confirm a transaction set in the database.
In form applications, there are events that perform transactions with the database (Ex:
onAfterInsert, onAfterUpdate, onAfterDelete, onBeforeInsert, onBeforeUpdate, onBeforeDelete,
etc...).
The transactions control of these events is done by Scriptcase itself, if the connection provided is
the same of the application.
However, if the user has to perform any type of redirection in these events, it is necessary to use
the macro sc_commit_trans before the redirect to secure the transactions previously performed.
Ex: onAfterUpdate - Using redirection after update a record:
sc_commit_trans();
sc_redir('grid_main');
The "connection" parameter is optional, being necessary only if the command is executed in a
different database specified to the application.
Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur
15
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
ajaxFieldonBlur onAfterDelete
Onchange onAfterDeleteAll
OnClick onAfterInsert
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
onAfterInsert
onScriptInit
onLoad
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure onLoad
onValidateSuccess onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_concat
This macro is intended to concatenate table fields in the selects.
This macro has the purpose of concatenating table fields in selects made in the events and in the
application's SQL, and can be used in select fields, text-autocomplete fields and any other field that
can be done select automatic.
Ex. 1: Use(Editing Lookup):
SELECT field1, sc_concat(field2,' - ',field3) FROM table

SELECT field1, sc_concat(field2,' | ',field3) FROM table
Ex. 2: Using the macro with sc_lookup:
sc_lookup(Dataset,"SELECT field1,sc_concat(field2, ' - ' ,field3) FROM table");
Makes the formatting according to your bank.
Macro Scope

OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
onAfterDeleteAll
onAfterInsert
OnClick
onAfterInsertAll
OnFocus onBlur
onAfterUpdate
onAfterDelete onChange
onAfterUpdateAll
onAfterInsert onClick onClick
onBeforeDelete
onAfterUpdate onFooter onFocus
onFilterInit onBeforeDeleteAll onFooter
onBeforeDelete onFooter onGroupBy onClick onApplicationInit
onFilterRefresh onBeforeInsert onExecute onHeader
onExecute onBeforeInsert onHeader onHeader onScriptInit onExecute
onFilterSave onBeforeInsertAll onLoad onScriptInit
onBeforeUpdate onScriptInit onScriptInit onLoadAll onLoad
onFilterValidate onBeforeUpdate onRecord
onScriptInit onNavigate onRefresh
onBeforeUpdateAll
onLoad onRecord onValidate
onClick
onRefresh onValidateFailure
onScriptInit
onValidate onValidateSuccess
onLoad
onValidateSuccess
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateSuccess
sc_confirm("Message")
Valid only in the PHP programming code that runs when called through a toolbar button.
This macro is used to confirm that the action must be really executed, preventing mistakes.
Ex. 1:
sc_confirm ("Do you really wish to execute this action??");
Macro Scope
16
Form application Control Form
onClick onClick
sc_connection_edit("Connetion_Name", $arr_conn)
1º Parameter: Connection name to be edited.
2º Parameter: Array of items containing the connection information to be edited. Check out the
indices of the array:
Indice Description Example

['server'] Database server (host) $arr_conn['server'] = "127.0.0.1"
['user'] Database username $arr_conn['user'] = "root"
['password'] Database password $arr_conn['password'] =
"secretpass123"
['database'] Database name used in the connection $arr_conn['database'] =
"sc_samples"
['persistent'] Defines if the connection is persistent or $arr_conn['persistent'] = "Y" / "N"
not
['encoding'] Configure the connection encoding $arr_conn['encoding'] = "utf8"
Note:Is not required to use all the indices in the array, we can pass only the required ones.
Example:
$arr_conn = array();
$arr_conn['user'] = "admin2";
$arr_conn['password'] = "admin2pass";
$arr_conn['database'] = "sc_samples2";
sc_connection_edit("sc_connection", $arr_conn);
Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
ajaxFieldonBlur
onAfterDelete
Onchange
onAfterDeleteAll
OnClick onBlur
onAfterInsert
OnFocus onChange
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterDelete onClick
onAfterUpdate
onAfterInsert onFocus
onApplicationInit onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit
onFilterInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onFooter
onApplicationInit onFooter onClick onExecute
onExecute onScriptInit onFilterRefresh onBeforeDelete onExecute onHeader
onBeforeDelete onHeader onScriptInit onLoad
onFilterSave onBeforeDeleteAll onLoad onScriptInit
onBeforeInsert onScriptInit onLoadAll
onFilterValidate onBeforeInsert onRecord
onBeforeUpdate onRefresh
onBeforeInsertAll
onCalendarApplicationInit onValidate
onBeforeUpdate
onCalendarScriptInit onValidateFailure
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onLoad
onScriptInit
onValidateSuccess
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onValidateSuccess
sc_connection_new("Connection_Name", $arr_conn)
When used, the macro creates a new connection with the information inserted in its parameters.
This connection is available throughout the current session Scriptcase and cease to exist when the
session is closed.
1º Parameter: Connection name.
Note: If there is a connection created within the Scriptcase with the same name, this macro has no
effect. Connections created within the Scriptcase prevail. If you want to edit an existing connection,
see the documentation for the macro sc_connection_edit.
2º Parameter: Array of items containing the connection information. Check out the indices of the
array:
Indice Description Example

['drive'] Driver of the database used for the connection $arr_conn['drive'] = "oci8"
(see table below)
['server'] Database server (host) $arr_conn['server'] =
"127.0.0.1"
['user'] Database username $arr_conn['user'] = "root"
['password'] Database password $arr_conn['password'] =
"secretpass123"
17
['database'] Database name used in the connection $arr_conn['database'] =
"sc_samples"
['persistent'] Defines if the connection is persistent or not $arr_conn['persistent'] = "Y" /
"N"
['encoding'] Configure the connection encoding $arr_conn['encoding'] = "utf8"
Note: It is required that all items are filled, with the exception of items['persistent'] and
['encoding'].
See below the driver's list:
Driver Descrição
access MS Access
ado_access MS Access ADO
odbc ODBC Genérico
db2 DB2
db2_odbc DB2 ODBC Nativo
odbc_db2 DB2 ODBC Genérico
odbc_db2v6 DB2 ODBC Genérico 6 ou Abaixo
pdo_db2_odbc DB2 PDO ODBC
pdo_ibm DB2 PDO
firebird Firebird
pdo_firebird Firebird PDO
borland_ibase Interbase 6.5 ou Acima
ibase Interbase
pdo_informix Informix PDO
informix Informix
informix72 Informix 7.2 ou Abaixo
ado_mssql MSSQL Server ADO
pdo_sqlsrv MSSQL Server NATIVE SRV PDO
mssqlnative MSSQL Server NATIVE SRV
odbc_mssql MSSQL Server ODBC
mssql MSSQL Server
pdo_mysql MySQL PDO
mysqlt Mysql (Transactional)
mysql MySQL (Non-Transactional)
pdo_oracle Oracle PDO
oci805 Oracle 8.0.5 ou Acima
odbc_oracle Oracle ODBC
oci8 Oracle 8
oci8po Oracle 8 Portable
oracle Oracle 7 ou menor
postgres7 PostgreSQL 7 ou Acima
pdo_pgsql PostgreSQL PDO
postgres64 PostgreSQL 6.4 ou acima
postgres PostgreSQL 6.3 ou abaixo
pdosqlite SQLite PDO
sqlite SQLite
sybase Sybase
pdo_sybase_dblib Sybase PDO DBLIB
pdo_sybase_odbc Sybase PDO ODBC
Example:
$arr_conn = array();
$arr_conn['drive'] = "mysqlt";
$arr_conn['server'] = "127.0.0.1";
$arr_conn['user'] = "root";
$arr_conn['password'] = "pass123";
$arr_conn['database'] = "sc_samples";
$arr_conn['persistent'] = "Y";
$arr_conn['encoding'] = "utf8";
sc_connection_new("new_conn_mysql", $arr_conn);
Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
ajaxFieldonBlur OnFocus
Onchange onAfterDelete
OnClick onAfterDeleteAll onBlur
OnFocus onAfterInsert onChange
onAfterInsertAll
18
onAfterDelete onAfterUpdate onClick
onAfterInsert onApplicationInit onAfterUpdateAll onFocus onApplicationInit
onApplicationInit
onAfterUpdate onFilterInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onFooter
onFooter onExecute
onExecute onApplicationInit onScriptInit onFilterRefresh onBeforeDelete onClick onExecute onHeader
onHeader onLoad
onBeforeDelete onFilterSave onBeforeDeleteAll onScriptInit onLoad onScriptInit
onScriptInit
onBeforeInsert onFilterValidate onBeforeInsert onLoadAll onRecord
onBeforeUpdate onBeforeInsertAll onRefresh
onCalendarApplicationInit onBeforeUpdate onValidate
onCalendarScriptInit onBeforeUpdateAll onValidateFailure
onScriptInit onClick onValidateSuccess
onLoad onScriptInit
onValidateSuccess onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onValidateSuccess
sc_date(Date, "Format", "Operator", D, M, Y)
This macro has the aim to calculate the increment or decrement of dates. For its use are necessary
some parameters as follows:
Date Date field that contains the date to be modified.
Format Formatting thats the date field is.
Operator "+" for increment and "-" for decrement.
D Number of days to increment or decrement.
M Number of months to increment or decrement.
Y Number of Years to increment or decrement.
Ex. 1:
{birthdate} = sc_date({birthdate}, "dd/mm/yyyy", "+", 30, 0, 0);
Ex. 2:
$new_date = sc_date({birthdate}, "yyyy-mm-dd", "-", 15, 3, 2);
Ex. 3:
{inclusion_dt} = sc_date(date('Ymd'), "yyyymmdd", "-", 0, 1, 1);
OBS: To be certified of the date format, before use the function, try it in any event:
echo "form_date =". {name of the field date};
Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
onAfterDeleteAll
ajaxFieldonBlur
onAfterInsert
OnClick
onAfterInsertAll
OnFocus onBlur
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onApplicationInit
onAfterUpdate onApplicationInit onFocus
onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onApplicationInit
onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onFooter onApplicationInit
onFilterInit onBeforeDeleteAll onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onFooter
onBeforeDelete onFooter onGroupBy onClick
onExecute onFilterRefresh onBeforeInsert onExecute onExecute onHeader
onBeforeInsert onHeader onHeader onScriptInit
onFilterSave onBeforeInsertAll onLoad onLoad onScriptInit
onBeforeUpdate onScriptInit onScriptInit onLoadAll
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onValidateFailure
onNavigate
onValidateSuccess
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_date_conv({Field_Date}, "Input_Format", "Output_Format")
This macro converts the date field passed as parameter with an input format to another field with
an output format.
A or Y Used to reference years.
M Used to reference Months.
D Used to reference Days.
Db_Format Used to get the Dadabase date format.
19
Ex. 1: Converts the date from "dd/mm/yyyy" format to the "yyyymmdd" format.
{field_date} = sc_date_conv({field_date}, "dd/mm/aaaa", "aaaammdd");
Ex. 2: Converts the date from the database native format to "dd/mm/yyyy" format.
{field_date} = sc_date_conv({field_date}, "db_format", "dd/mm/aaaa");
Ex. 3: Converts the date from the "dd/mm/yyyy" format to the Database native format.
{field_date} = sc_date_conv({field_date}, "dd/mm/aaaa", "db_format");
Macro Scope
Blank application calendar application chart application Grid application Search application Form application Control Form ReportPDF application
ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
ajaxFieldonBlur
onAfterDeleteAll
Onchange
onAfterInsert
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterUpdateAll onClick
onAfterInsert onApplicationInit
onBeforeDelete onFocus
onAfterUpdate onFooter onFilterInit onFooter
onFooter onBeforeDeleteAll onClick
onBeforeDelete onGroupBy onFilterRefresh onHeader
onExecute onHeader onBeforeInsert onScriptInit
onBeforeInsert onHeader onFilterSave onScriptInit
onScriptInit onBeforeInsertAll onLoadAll
onBeforeUpdate onScriptInit onFilterValidate onRecord
onScriptInit onNavigate
onBeforeUpdateAll onValidate
onLoad onRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onLoad
onValidateFailure
onNavigate
onValidateSuccess
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_date_dif({Date1}, "Format Date1", {Date2}, "Format Date2")
Calculates the difference between two dates (passed as parameters) in days.
Date1 Date1 value or variable.
Format Date1 Value or Variable containing the date format stored on

Date1.
Format Date2 Value or Variable containing the date format stored on
Date2.
Ex. 1:
{amount_days} = sc_date_dif({date1}, "aaaa-mm-dd", {date2}, "mm/dd/aaaa");
Ex. 2:
{amount_days} = sc_date_dif("2000-05-01", "aaaa-mm-dd", "04/21/2004", "mm/dd/aaaa");
{amount_days} would be equal to -1451 (days)
Note: Formats can be different but must be in days, months and years.
Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
ajaxFieldonBlur onAfterDeleteAll
Onchange onAfterInsert
OnClick onAfterInsertAll
OnFocus onBlur
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onApplicationInit
onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onFooter onApplicationInit
onFilterInit onBeforeDeleteAll onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onFooter
onBeforeDelete onFooter onGroupBy onClick
onExecute onFilterRefresh onBeforeInsert onExecute onExecute onHeader
onBeforeInsert onHeader onHeader onScriptInit
onFilterSave onBeforeInsertAll onLoad onLoad onScriptInit
onBeforeUpdate onScriptInit onScriptInit onLoadAll
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onScriptInit
20
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_date_dif_2({Date1}, "Format Date1", {Date2}, "Format Date2", Option)
Calculates the difference between two dates (passed as parameters) returning the amount of days,
months and years.
The result is returned in an array structure, where the index 0 have the amount of days, the index
1 have the amount of months and the index 2 have the amount of years.
Format Date1 Value or Variable containing the date format stored on Date1.
Format Date2 Value or Variable containing the date format stored on Date2.
Option 1 = Doesn't consider the initial day; 2 = Considers the initial
day.
Ex. 1:
{differences} = sc_date_dif_2 ({date1}, "yyyy-mm-dd", {date2}, "mm/dd/yyyy", 1);
{dif_days} = {differences[0]};
{dif_months} = {differences[1]};
{dif_years} = {differences[2]};
Ex. 2:
{differences} = sc_date_dif_2 ("2000-05-01", "yyyy-mm-dd", "04/21/2004", "mm/dd/yyyy", 1);
{differences[0]} = 20 (days)
{differences[1]} = 11 (months)
{differences[2]} = 3 (years)
Ex. 3: Using the option 2

{differences} = sc_date_dif_2 ("2000-05-01", "yyyy-mm-dd", "04/21/2004", "mm/dd/yyyy", 2);
{differences[0]} = 21 (days)
{differences[1]} = 11 (months)
{differences[2]} = 3 (years).
Note: Formats between the two dates can be different but it must have days, months and years
Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
ajaxFieldonBlur
onAfterDeleteAll
Onchange
onAfterInsert
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
onAfterInsert
onApplicationInit onFilterInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onFooter
onFooter onGroupBy onBeforeDeleteAll onClick
onExecute onBeforeDelete onFilterRefresh onExecute onExecute onHeader
onHeader onHeader onBeforeInsert onScriptInit
onBeforeInsert onFilterSave onLoad onLoad onScriptInit
onScriptInit
onLoad
onRefresh
onValidate
onLoad
onValidateFailure
onNavigate
onValidateSuccess
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_date_empty({Field_Date})
This macro checks if a date field is empty.
Ex. 1:
21
if (sc_date_empty({my_date}) )
{
sc_error_message("Invalid Date");
}
Macro Scope
Blank application calendar application chart application Grid application Search application Form application Control Form ReportPDF application
ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
ajaxFieldonBlur
onAfterDeleteAll
Onchange
onAfterInsert
OnClick
onAfterInsertAll
OnFocus
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onAfterInsert onApplicationInit onBlur
onBeforeDelete
onAfterUpdate onFooter onChange
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeDelete onGroupBy onFilterRefresh onClick onHeader
onExecute onHeader onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsert onHeader onFilterValidate onFocus onRecord
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate onScriptInit onLoadAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onLoad onRecord
onClick
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onLoad
onValidateFailure
onNavigate
onValidateSuccess
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_decode({My_Field})
Returns, the encrypted field or variable, to its original value.
Ex. 1: Using a local variable:

{my_field} = sc_decode($field_cript);
Ex. 2: Using an user variable:

$my_var = sc_decode($field_cript);
Note: Netmake isn't responsible by the cryptography algorithm integrity (it is an open source
algorithm)
Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
ajaxFieldonBlur
onAfterDeleteAll
Onchange
onAfterInsert
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
onAfterInsert
onClick onApplicationInit onFocus
onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onApplicationInit
onFooter onHeader onBeforeDeleteAll onClick
onHeader onScriptInit onBeforeInsert onScriptInit
onScriptInit onNavigate onBeforeInsertAll onLoadAll
onRecord onBeforeUpdate onRefresh
onScriptInit
onLoad
onRefresh
onValidate
onLoad
onValidateFailure
onNavigate
onValidateSuccess
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_encode({My_Field})
Returns the field or variable with the content encrypted.

22
Ex. 1: Encrypting a local variable:
$field_cript = sc_encode({my_field});
Ex. 2: Encrypting an user variable:

$field_cript = sc_encode($my_var);
Note: Netmake isn't responsible by the encrypting algorithm integrity, (The algorithm provided is
open source).
Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
ajaxFieldonBlur
onAfterDeleteAll
Onchange
onAfterInsert
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
onAfterInsert
onClick onApplicationInit onFocus
onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onApplicationInit
onFooter onHeader onBeforeDeleteAll onClick
onHeader onScriptInit onBeforeInsert onScriptInit
onScriptInit onNavigate onBeforeInsertAll onLoadAll
onRecord onBeforeUpdate onRefresh
onScriptInit
onLoad
onRefresh
onValidate
onLoad
onValidateFailure
onNavigate
onValidateSuccess
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_error_continue("Event")
This macro deactivates the Scriptcase standard database error treatment message for the event
passed as parameter allowing it to be substituted by the programmer customized error treatment.
It can be used in along with variable: {sc_erro_delete}, {sc_erro_insert} and/or {sc_erro_update}
The events to be passed as parameter are: insert, delete or update.
Ex. 1: Using on the event onDelete for the message returned by mssql, trigger treatment, which
cancels the record exclusion, displays a error message in the format [Microsoft] [ODBC SQL Server
Driver] [SQL Server] You can't erase the record.
sc_error_continue("delete");
if (!empty({sc_error_delete}))
{
$tmp = strrpos({sc_error_delete}, "]");
if ($tmp !== false)
{
{sc_error_delete} = substr({sc_error_delete}, $tmp 1);
}
sc_error_message({sc_error_delete});
sc_error_exit;
}
Macro Scope

onBeforeDelete onBeforeDelete
onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsert onScriptInit
onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdate
sc_error_delete
This variable returns a string with a database error message, which occurs by trying to exclude a
record.
It is used when there is a need to treat these messages.
Like for example, in case of database validations via triggers or procedures that they return
messages.
Ex. 1: Content of the variable {sc_error_delete}, returning an error message generated by

database trigger using
23
MsSQL.“[Microsoft] [ODBC SQL Server Driver] [SQL Server] You can't erase this register.”
Note: To access the database return error, sees the macro "sc_error_continue".
Macro Scope

onAfterDelete onAfterDelete
sc_error_exit(URL, "Target") or (My_Application, "Target")
Interrupts the application execution, if there is error message generated through

"sc_error_message" macro, displaying the error messages. If informed an URL or the name of an
Application, an "OK" button is displayed, bellow the error messages to redirect the processing to the
informed URL/Application.
The target parameter is opitional.
Ex. 1: Displays only the error messages.

sc_error_exit();
Ex. 2: Display the error messages and the "OK" button to redirect to URL.
sc_error_exit(http://www.mysite.com);
Ex. 3: Display the error messages and the "OK" button to redirect to Application, opening
in another window.
sc_error_exit(my_application, "_blank");
Macro Scope
calendar application Search application Form application Control Form

ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
Onchange onAfterDeleteAll onBlur
OnClick onAfterInsert onChange
OnFocus onAfterInsertAll onClick
onAfterDelete onAfterUpdate onFocus
onAfterInsert onAfterUpdateAll onScriptInit
onAfterUpdate onFilterValidate onBeforeDelete onLoadAll
onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onRefresh
onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsert onValidate
onBeforeUpdate onBeforeInsertAll onValidateFailure
onValidate onBeforeUpdate onValidateSuccess
onValidateFailure onBeforeUpdateAll
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_error_insert
This variable returns a string with the database error, that occurs when adding a record. It is used
when is neede to treat these messages. For example, in case of database validations via triggers or
procedures that return message.
Ex. 1: Variable {sc_erro_insert}, returning an error message generated by database trigger the
using mssql
“[Microsoft] [ODBC SQL Server Driver] [SQL Server] You can't add this register.”
Note: To access the return of the database error, see the macro "sc_error_continue".
Macro Scope

onAfterInsert onAfterInsert
sc_error_message("Text")
This macro generates an error messages.
In "Form and Control" applications, the messages are presented together with other error
24
messages found in the application, except when using the "sc_error_exit" macro.
In "Grid and Menu" applications the messages only will be presented through the "sc_error_exit"
macro.
Ex. 1:
if ({discount} > 0.10 && [glo_usr] == 'operator')
{
sc_error_message("Discounting of " . {discount} . " above of the allowed one");
}
In this example, if the value in the discount field is over 0.10 and the user try to add or save this
record, the operation is finished and the error message is presented.The command must finish with
");" (close parentheses and semicolon) used as delimiter for the macro interpreter.
Macro Scope
calendar application Search application Form application Control Form

ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterInsert onBlur
OnClick
onAfterInsertAll onChange
OnFocus
onAfterUpdate onClick
onAfterDelete
onAfterUpdateAll onFocus
onAfterInsert
onBeforeDelete onScriptInit
onAfterUpdate onFilterValidate
onBeforeDeleteAll onLoadAll
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeInsert onRefresh
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll onValidate
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdate onValidateFailure
onValidate
onBeforeUpdateAll onValidateSuccess
onValidateFailure
onNavigate
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_error_update
This variable returns a string with a database error message that occurs when updating a record. It
is used when there is a need to treat these messages. For example, in case of database validations
via triggers or procedures that return message.
Ex. 1: Variable {sc_erro_update}, returning an error message generate by a database trigger

using mssql.
“[Microsoft][ODBC SQL Server Driver][SQL Server] You can't updatethis record.”
Note: To have access the return of database error see the macro "sc_error_continue".
Macro Scope

onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdate
sc_exec_sql("SQL Command", "Connection")
This macro allows to condition the circumstances thats the SQL commands are executed.
The "Connection" parameter is optional. Required only, if the command is executed in a data base
different from the application.
Ex. 1:
if (sc_after_delete) {
sc_exec_sql("delete from mytable where key = {key_ant}");
}
Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
25
OnFocus onAfterInsertAll onBlur
onAfterDelete onAfterUpdate onChange
onAfterInsert onClick onAfterUpdateAll onClick
onAfterUpdate onGroupBy onFilterInit onBeforeDelete onFocus onFooter
onBeforeDelete onFooter onBeforeDeleteAll onClick onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onHeader onFilterRefresh onHeader
onExecute onBeforeInsert onHeader onBeforeInsert onScriptInit onExecute onExecute
onScriptInit onFilterSave onScriptInit
onBeforeUpdate onScriptInit onBeforeInsertAll onLoadAll onLoad onLoad
onNavigate onFilterValidate onRecord
onCalendarScriptInit onRecord onBeforeUpdate onRefresh
onScriptInit onBeforeUpdateAll onValidate
onLoad onClick onValidateFailure
onRefresh onScriptInit onValidateSuccess
onValidate onLoad
onValidateFailure onNavigate
onValidateSuccess onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_exit(Option)
This macro can be used in the ScriptCase events and created button and may return values/process
after the execution.
Option Description
sc_exit() Returns to the previous application without display anything.
sc_exit(ok) Displays a window with an OK button adn returns to the previous application.
sc_exit(sel) Doesn’t display the window with an OK button and returns to the current
application, repeat the application select.
sc_exit(ref) Doesn't display the window with an OK button refresh data and returns to the
current application.
sc_exit(ok,ref) Same of the sc_exit(ref) function; however, display the OK button.
sc_exit(ok,sel) Same of the sc_exit(sel) function; however, display the OK button.
This option is only valid for Form and Control Applications.
Opton Description
sc_exit() Doesn't complete transactions in database.
sc_exit(c) Commit pending transactions.
sc_exit(r) Rollback pending transactions.
Macro Scope

onClick onClick
onScriptInit
sc_field_color("Field", "Color")
This macros its used to change/restore a grid field text color dynamically.
Ex. 1: Change the grid text field “customer_id” color.

sc_field_color ("customerid", "#33FF66");
Ex. 2: Change the "value_order” field text color, if the value is greater that 1000.
Otherwise, use the default color.
if ({value_order} > 1000)
{
sc_field_color ("value_order", "#33FF66");
}
else
{
sc_field_color ("value_order", "");
}
Ex. 3: Using a local variable.

sc_field_color ("customerid", {fld_color});
Ex. 4: Using a global variable.

sc_field_color ("customerid", [glo_color]);
Macro Scope
Grid application ReportPDF application

onRecord onRecord
26
sc_field_disabled("Field_Name = True/False", "Parameter")
This macro its used to block a field to get any data that would be typed on it.
Fields that its going to be blocked should be followed by the option "true" (default) or "false".
The parameter its optional, "I" its used only to block de addition of new records, "U" to block only
the update, in case of the parameter has not been informed the scriptcase will use both options.
Ex. 1: Blocks only one field for addition and update.

sc_field_disabled("Field_01");
Ex. 2: Unblocking a field for addtion and update.

sc_field_disabled("Field_02=false");
Ex. 3: Blocks several fields, only for update.

sc_field_disabled("Field_01; Field_02; Field_03", "U");
Ex. 4: Combination of block and unblock of several fields, for adition and update.
sc_field_disabled("Field_01=true; Field_02=false; Field_03=true");
Macro Scope
calendar application Form application Control Form ReportPDF application

onLoad
onLoad onLoadAll onHeader
onNavigate
sc_field_disabled_record("Field_Name = True/False", "Parametre")
This macro has the objective to block the typing on determined fields in the lines of the Multiple
Record form, Editable Grid and Editable Grid View.
Fields that are suppose to be blocked should be applied the options, "true" ( To block) or "false" ( to
unblock). If not informed, the default value is "true".
The optional parameter is using the “I” to block while inserting a new record and “U” to block while
updating a record. If not informed, Scriptcase will block on both occasions by default.
Ex. 1: Blocking the field while including and updating.

sc_field_disabled_record(“Field_01");
Ex. 2: Unblocking the field while including and updating.

sc_field_disabled_record(“Field_02=false");
Ex. 3: Blocking the various fields only when updating.

sc_field_disabled_record(“Field_01; Field_02; Field_03", "U");
Ex. 4: Combination of blocking and unblocking various fields while including and
updating.
sc_field_disabled_record("Field_01=true; Field_02=false; Field_03=true");
The macro can also work within a condition, blocking a specific field on the record line.
Example 1:
if ({Filed_01} == 1)
{
sc_field_disabled_record("Filed_03");
}
Example 2:
switch(trim([arr_apps][ {app_name} ]))
{
case 'form':
break;
case 'calendar':
sc_field_disabled_record("priv_export; priv_print");
break;
case 'cons':
sc_field_disabled_record("priv_insert; priv_delete; priv_update");
break;
default:
sc_field_disabled_record("priv_insert; priv_delete; priv_update; priv_export; priv_print");
break;
}
Macro Scope
Form application
onLoadRecord
sc_field_display({My_Field}, on/off)
This macro dynamically display a specific field.

By default all the fields are display ("on" condition").
27
Ex. 1:
if ({tp_customeri} == "personal")
{
sc_field_display({company_name}, off);
}
else
{
sc_field_display({personal_name}, off);
}
Macro Scope
calendar application chart application Grid application Form application Control Form ReportPDF application
ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
OnClick onAfterInsert onBlur
OnFocus onAfterInsertAll onChange
onAfterDelete onAfterUpdate onClick
onAfterInsert onApplicationInit onAfterUpdateAll onFocus
onAfterUpdate onHeader onScriptInit onBeforeInsertAll onScriptInit onScriptInit
onScriptInit onScriptInit onBeforeUpdateAll onLoadAll
onLoad onScriptInit onRefresh
onRefresh onLoad onValidate
onValidate onNavigate onValidateFailure
onValidateFailure onLoadRecord
onValidateSuccess onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_field_init_off(Field1, Field2,...)
This macro is intended to inhibit the query fields on the initial load.
Fields inhibited by this macro can be enabled by using the "Columns" button.
Ex 01:
sc_field_init_off ({orderID}, {TotalValue});
Macro Scope
Grid application
onApplicationInit
sc_field_readonly({Field}, on/off)
This macro dynamically set a form field attribute to 'ReadOnly'. Use this macro only to do it at
'runtime'. Otherwise set this parameter on / off on the form interface. section "Read-Only".
The on/off parameter its opitional, used by an ajax event to define if a field its going to be read-only
(On) or read-only (Off).
Ex 1: To set a field as read only even when the form is in "Addition mode":
if (sc_btn_new)
{
sc_field_readonly({my_field});
}
Ex. 2: To set a field as read only dynamically use:

sc_field_readonly({my_field});
Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
ajaxFieldonBlur
onAfterDelete
Onchange
onAfterDeleteAll
OnClick onBlur
onAfterInsert
OnFocus onChange
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onAfterUpdate onScriptInit
onBeforeInsertAll
28
onScriptInit onBeforeUpdateAll onLoadAll
onLoad onScriptInit onRefresh
onRefresh onLoad onValidate
onValidate onNavigate onValidateFailure
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_field_style({My_Field}, "Background-Color", "Size", "Color", "Family", "Weight")
This macro allows to modify the grid field style dinamically.
Field Name
Background-Color (optional) Field cell background Color
Size (optional) Field font size
Color (optional) Font Color
Family (optional) Font family
Weight (optional) Font weight
Ex. 1:
sc_field_style({my_field}, '#33FF99', '15px', '#000000', 'Arial, sans-serif', 'bold');
Macro Scope
Grid application
onRecord
sc_format_num({My_Field}, "Group_Symb", "Dec_Symb", "Amount_Dec", "Fill_Zeros", "Side_Neg", "Currency_Symb", "Side_Currency_Symb")
This macro its used to format numerical values.
My_Field Variable or field to format (The return is in the next variable).
Group_Symb Integer values grouping symbol.
Dec_Symb Decimals separator symbol.
Amount_Dec Number of decimals to be displayed.
Fill_Zeros Complete decimals with zeros (fill in) (S = yes and N = no).
Side_Neg Negative sign position. (1 = left and 2 = right)
Currency_Symb Monetary symbol to be displayed.
Side_Currency_Symb Currency symbol position. (1 = left and 2 = right).
Ex. 1: Formatting an integer.

sc_format_num({my_value}, '.', '', 0, 'N', '1', '');
Input value = 001234567890
Output value = 1.234.567.890
Ex. 2: Formatting a negative value and truncating decimals.

sc_format_num({my_value}, '.', '', 0, 'N', '1', '');
Input value = 0012345678.90-
Output value = -12.345.678
Ex. 3: Formatting a value with 4 decimals and filling with zeros.

sc_format_num({my_value}, '.', ',', 4, 'S', '1', '');
Input value = 0012345678.9
Output value = 12.345.678,9000
Ex. 4: Formatting a value with 2 decimals, filling with zeros and using monetary symbol.
sc_format_num({my_value}, '.', ',', 2, 'S', '1', 'US$');
Input value = 0012345678.9
Output value = US$ 12.345.678,90
Ex. 5: Formatting a value with 2 decimals, filling with zeros.

sc_format_num({my_value}, '.', ',', 2, 'S', '1', '');
Input value = .9
Output value = 0,90
Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
29
onAfterDelete
ajaxFieldonBlur
onAfterDeleteAll
Onchange
onAfterInsert
OnClick
onAfterInsertAll
OnFocus onBlur
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onApplicationInit
onAfterUpdate onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onFocus
onApplicationInit onFooter onFilterInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onFooter onBeforeDeleteAll onExecute onFooter
onExecute onBeforeDelete onHeader onFilterRefresh onClick onExecute
onHeader onBeforeInsert onLoad onHeader
onBeforeInsert onScriptInit onFilterSave onScriptInit onLoad
onScriptInit onBeforeInsertAll onScriptInit
onBeforeUpdate onNavigate onFilterValidate onLoadAll
onBeforeUpdate
onScriptInit onRecord onRefresh
onBeforeUpdateAll
onLoad onValidateFailure
onClick
onRefresh onValidateSuccess
onScriptInit
onValidate
onLoad
onValidateFailure
onNavigate
onValidateSuccess
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_format_num_region({My_Field}, "Qtde_Dec", "Insert_Zeros", "Monetary_Sym")
This macro has the objective to format numbers, using the regional settings
My_Field Variable or field that has a value to be formated (if the value is 0 the result will
be the same as the variable).
Qtde_Dec Amount of decimals that'll be displayed.
Insert_Zeros Complete with the non exisiting decimals (Y = yes and N = no).
Monetary_Sym Display monetary symbol (Y = yes and N = no).
Ex. 1: Formating a value with 2 decimal spaces, inserting the zeros and the monetary
value.
sc_format_num_region({my_value}, "2", "Y", "Y");
Input value = 9
Output value = R$0,90
Macro Scope
Blank application Grid application Search application Form application Control Form Menu application Tree menu
ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
onAfterDeleteAll
onAfterInsert
onApplicationInit
onFooter onBeforeDelete onApplicationInit
onFilterInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onGroupBy onBeforeDeleteAll onClick
onExecute onFilterRefresh onExecute onExecute
onHeader onBeforeInsert onScriptInit
onFilterSave onLoad onLoad
onFilterValidate
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_form_show'on' or 'off'
This macro dynamically display or not a form.

By default, the form is displayed ("on" condition).
Ex. 1: Doesn't display the form.

sc_form_show = 'off';
Macro Scope

onScriptInit
onLoad onLoad
onLoadAll
30
sc_getfield('myField')
This macro is used to assign objects (that represent the field's form) to a javascript variable,
allowing the user to access the object properties. This macro will run on control and forms at the
javascript events and methods.
EX:
Showing the value of the "client" field of a form cli_js = sc_getfield('cliente'); alert (cli_js.value);
Macro Scope
sc_get_groupby_rule()
This macro is used to retrieve the name of the Group By rule that is being used at this moment. The
return value is a String containing the name of the rule.
Ex:
if (sc_get_groupby_rule() == "rule1")
[title] = "Sales X Region";
Macro Scope
chart application Grid application

onFooter onScriptInit
onHeader onNavigate
onScriptInit onRecord
sc_get_language
This macro returns the abbreviation of the language used.
Ex. 1:
$my_language = sc_get_language();
Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
ajaxFieldonBlur
onAfterDeleteAll
Onchange
onAfterInsert
OnClick
onAfterInsertAll
OnFocus onBlur
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onApplicationInit
onApplicationInit onFooter onBeforeDelete
onApplicationInit onFilterInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onFooter
onFooter onScriptInit onBeforeDeleteAll
onExecute onBeforeDelete onFilterRefresh onClick onExecute onExecute onHeader
onHeader onNavigate onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsert onFilterSave onScriptInit onLoad onLoad onRecord
onScriptInit onRecord onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate onFilterValidate onLoadAll
onBeforeUpdate
onScriptInit onRefresh
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onScriptInit
onValidate
onLoad
onValidateFailure
onNavigate
onValidateSuccess
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_get_regional
This macro returns the abbreviation of the regional settings used.

31
This macro returns the abbreviation of the regional settings used.
Ex. 1:
$my_regional = sc_get_regional();
Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
ajaxFieldonBlur
onAfterDeleteAll
Onchange
onAfterInsert
OnClick
onAfterInsertAll
OnFocus onBlur
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onApplicationInit
onApplicationInit onFooter onBeforeDelete
onApplicationInit onFilterInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onFooter onScriptInit onBeforeDeleteAll onHeader
onExecute onBeforeDelete onFilterRefresh onClick onExecute onExecute
onHeader onNavigate onBeforeInsert onRecord
onBeforeInsert onFilterSave onScriptInit onLoad onLoad
onScriptInit onRecord onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate onFilterValidate onLoadAll
onBeforeUpdate
onScriptInit onRefresh
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onScriptInit
onValidate
onLoad
onValidateFailure
onNavigate
onValidateSuccess
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_get_theme
This macro returns the application theme used.
Ex. 1:
$my_theme = sc_get_theme();
Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
ajaxFieldonBlur
onAfterDeleteAll
Onchange
onAfterInsert
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
onAfterInsert
onApplicationInit onFocus
onFooter onScriptInit onBeforeDeleteAll onClick
onHeader onNavigate onBeforeInsert onScriptInit
onScriptInit onRecord onBeforeInsertAll onLoadAll
onScriptInit
onLoad
onRefresh
onValidate
onLoad
onValidateFailure
onNavigate
onValidateSuccess
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_groupby_label("My_Field")
This Macro dynamically modify the field label displayed in group by lines.
Ex. 1:
sc_groupby_label('state') = "state grouping";
Ex. 2:
sc_groupby_label('balance') = "balance total";
32
Macro Scope
Grid application
onGroupBy
sc_hide_groupby_rule('group1', 'grop2', 'group3')
This macro is used to disable Group By rules in execution time.
The Group By rules ID should be informed as parameters in the macro.
Ex:
if( [usr_login_group] == 'seller' ){
sc_hide_groupby_rule('rule_1', 'rule_2');
Macro Scope

sc_image(Image01.jpg)
This macro its used to copy images in some events or Javascript commands to load images to an
application.
All images used in the applications are automatically copied to each application.
Ex. 1:
sc_image (img1.gif, img2.jpg);
Note: The images must exist in the development environment images directory
(../devel/conf/sys/img/img/).
Macro Scope

onApplicationInit
onApplicationInit
onApplicationInit onClick
onScriptInit
onScriptInit onApplicationInit onFooter onScriptInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onExecute onFilterInit onLoadAll onLoad
onLoad onScriptInit onScriptInit onLoad onLoad onScriptInit
onValidateFailure
onValidate onLoadRecord
onValidateSuccess
onValidate
sc_include("File", "Source")
The Scriptcase allows the user to catalogue his PHP scripts to use in various applications.
To catalogue the scripts go to the ScripCase main menu at "Tools > Library" and use the
"upload" option existing in the interface.
When a script is catalogued, the user has the option of the context choice where it will be stored,
global level (Scriptcase), group level or user level.
- Public: All the projects will have acess.
- Project: Only the project users (the one's that will be loged at that time) will have acess.
- User: Only the user (the one's that will be loged at that time) will have acess.
The sc_include macro, the user must inform the script name that will be included and the
source.
- Script Name: Script name to be included.
The Source context that the script was saved, that could be:
- Sys or Blank: Scriptcase global level.
- Prj: Group level.
- Usr: User level.
Ex. 1: Including a catalogued script to global level.

sc_include(my_script.php);
Ex. 2: Including a catalogued script to the group level.

sc_include(my_script.php, grp);
33
Ex. 3: Including a catalogued script to the user level.

sc_include(my_script.php, usr);
Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
ajaxFieldonBlur
onAfterDeleteAll
Onchange
onAfterInsert
OnClick
onAfterInsertAll
OnFocus onBlur
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onApplicationInit
onBeforeDelete onApplicationInit
onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onScriptInit onFilterInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onBeforeDeleteAll onExecute onHeader
onExecute onBeforeDelete onHeader onNavigate onFilterRefresh onClick onExecute
onBeforeInsert onLoad onScriptInit
onBeforeInsert onScriptInit onRecord onFilterSave onScriptInit onLoad
onBeforeInsertAll onRecord
onBeforeUpdate onFilterValidate onRefresh
onBeforeUpdate
onScriptInit onValidate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onScriptInit
onValidate
onLoad
onValidateFailure
onNavigate
onValidateSuccess
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_include_lib("Lib1", "Lib2", ...)
This macro its used to select dynamically the application libraries.
PHP JavaScript
Libraries Libraries
tcpdf Jquery
fpdf_html jquery_thickbox
excel jquery_blockui
rtf tiny_mce
- jquery_touch_punch
- fusioncharts
- jsmind
- jkanban
- orgchart
Ex. 1:
sc_include_lib ("tcpdf");
$pdf=new TCPDF();
$pdf->AddPage();
$pdf->SetFont('Arial','B',16);
$pdf->Cell(40,10,'Hello World!');
$pdf->Output();
Ex. 2:
?>
sc_include_lib ("jsmind");
< ?php
Macro Scope
Blank application Grid application

onExecute onScriptInit
sc_include_library("Target", "Library Name", "File", "include_once", "Require")
This macro includes a PHP file from a library in the application. You must have a library created in
Scriptcase to make use of this macro. To create a library, go to "Tools -> Libraries".
Target Tells you what the scope of the library. Can be "sys" for libraries ofPublic scope or
"prj" for libraries of Project scope.
Library Name Name given to the library at the time of creation.
File Absolute path within the library.
34
include_once Make sure that the file will only be included once. If not informed, this value is set
(optional) as "true".
Require If the file or library does not exist, the application to be executed and returns an
(optional) error. If not informed, the value is set as "true".
Ex: Including a file from a library:

sc_include_library("prj", "phpqrcode", "qrlib.php", true, true);
Macro Scope
Blank application calendar application chart application Grid application Search application Form application Control Form Menu application Tree menu
ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
ajaxFieldonBlur
onAfterDeleteAll
Onchange
onAfterInsert
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
onAfterInsert
onAfterUpdate onApplicationInit
onApplicationInit onFilterInit onApplicationInit
onFooter onScriptInit onBeforeDeleteAll onClick onExecute
onExecute onBeforeDelete onFilterRefresh onExecute
onHeader onRecord onBeforeInsert onScriptInit onLoad
onBeforeInsert onFilterSave onLoad
onBeforeUpdate onFilterValidate
onScriptInit
onLoad
onRefresh
onValidate
onLoad
onValidateFailure
onNavigate
onValidateSuccess
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_label({My_Field})
This macro its used to modify dynamically the grid form field label.
Ex. 1: Using the field name.

sc_label("Customer") = "Cust Name";
Ex. 2: Using a variable as paramenter.

sc_label({Customer}) = "Cust Name";
Ex. 3: Using a global variable.

sc_label([global_variable]) = "Cust Name";
Macro Scope
calendar application chart application Grid application Form application Control Form ReportPDF application
ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
onBlur
OnClick
onChange
onScriptInit onClick OnFocus
onClick
onLoad onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit
onFocus
onRefresh onNavigate onLoad
onScriptInit
onNavigate
onLoadAll
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
sc_language
This macro returns the language and regional settings.
Ex. 1:
echo "Language: ".{sc_language};
Macro Scope

onExecute onCalendarApplicationInit onApplicationInit onScriptInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onScriptInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
35
onCalendarScriptInit onScriptInit onFilterInit onScriptInit onValidate onLoad onLoad onScriptInit
sc_ldap_login
$ldapConn = sc_ldap_login($server [, $domain, $user, $password, $dn, $group]);
This macro initiates the connection and bind it to the user credentials. This macro needs the
following parameters:
Server =
Domain =
User =
Password =
DN =
Group =
There are three possible returns:
Macro return Situation

(string)'ldap_connect_error' Connection error with LDAP host/service.
Authentication error after successfull
(string)'ldap_bind_error'
connection.
(resource) Successful connection and bind.
Macro Scope

onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onValidate onValidate onValidate
sc_ldap_logout()
This macro is used to release the connection after using the macro sc_ldap_login.
Ex1:
sc_ldap_logout();
Macro Scope

sc_ldap_search( $filter = 'all', $attributes = array() )
Macro to perform searches in the LDAP.
'all' or 'member':
'all' returns all information that the logged user can
$filter
see.
'member' returns the information aobut that member
$attributes Array of LDAP filter options.
Ex:
$result = sc_ldap_search($filter, array('mail', 'displayname'));
Macro Scope

sc_link(Column, Application, Parameters, "Hint", "Target", Height, Width)
This macro dynamically creates or modifies links between grid applications and other applications.
Column: Grid column field name to generate the link.

36
Application: Application name to establish the link.
Parameters: Parameters required by the called application.
Must be informed "=" (attribution sign) . More than one parameter must be separated by ";"
(semicolon).
Hint: Observation or tip displayed when the mouse cursor passes over the link.
Target : Where the application will function call and may be:
Target Descrição
"_self" For carrying on the same page (overrides the query);

"_blank" To run on another page (pop-up);
"iframeT" To run in an iframe above the Grid (top);
"iframeL" To run in an iframe, the left of the Grid (Left);
"iframeR" To run in an iframe, the left of the Grid (Left);
"iframeB" To run in an iframe below the Grid (Bot);
"modal" Opens a new window and blocks any interaction in the main
window;
In the case of modal target, there are two optional parameters *:
*Height: Set the height of the modal window (default 440);

*Width: Set the width of the modal window (default 630);
Note: If omitted, will be assigned the value "_self".
Ex. 1: Creates a link to the costumer.php application, on the Id field, passing the global
variable [global_costumer] as and the product field (local variable) {Id} to the
costumer.php application:
sc_link(Id, costumer.php, product=[global_costumer]; Id={Id}, "Client Data", "_blank");
Ex. 2: Creating a dynamic link to another application depeding on the field valor
{costumer_type} and opening it in a modal.
if ({costumer_type} == "F") {
sc_link (costumer_type, type_f.php, product=[global_costumer]; Id={Id}," Personal Data ", "modal",
500, 700);
}
else{
sc_link (costumer_type, type_a.php, product=[global_costumer]; Id={Id}," Company Data ",
"iframeR");
}
Ex. 3: Creating a link to an URL: in this case, "paramater and target" have no effect. It
will be executed redirecting to a informed URL.
sc_link (my_field, http://www.scriptcase.com, ,"hint of the link");
Macro Scope
Grid application ReportPDF application

onRecord onRecord
sc_log_add("action", "description")
This macro is intended to add a record to the log table, thereby making the message and / or the
name of the action customizable to the developer. The macro parameters can use PHP variables.
Ex:
sc_log_add ("access", "Application has been accessed by the user trial");
Macro Scope
Blank application calendar application Grid application Form application

onExecute onValidate onScriptInit onValidate
sc_log_split({description})
This macro is intended to provide access to the information written in the last insertion in the log
table, allowing the manipulation of the data before and after the record update returning it in an
array mode. The information is stored in the "description" field of the log table in the string format
with delimiters.
Ex:
$arr_description = sc_log_split({description});
Input: -> keys fields Array ( [clientid] => ANTON ) [fields] => Array ( [old] => Array ( [CEP] =>
50710500 [Address] => Rua Desembargador Joao Paes 657 [City] => Farol [State] => RS ) [new]
=> Array ( [CEP] => 53230630 [Address] => Avenida Presidente Kennedy, 1001 [City] =>
Peixinhos [State] => PE ) ) )
37
Macro Scope
Blank application calendar application Grid application Form application

onExecute onLoad onScriptInit onLoad
sc_lookup(Dataset, "SQL Command", "Connection")
This macro allows the user to execute SQL commands and returns the result to the "dataset"
variable. The "dataset" structure is an array (line/column).
The "connection" parameter is optional. Use when the command is executed in a database
different from that specified for the application.
Note: The connection parameter does not accept variable. You must enter the name of the
connection that the SQL command will execute.
Ex. 1:
sc_lookup(dataset, "select customer_id, customer_name, credit_limit from customers" );
To have access to the first line (Dataset), use :

{customer_id} = {dataset[0][0]};
{customer_name} = {dataset[0][1]};
{credit_limit } = {dataset[0][2]};
To have access to the second line (Dataset), use:

{customer_id} = {dataset[1][0]};
{customer_name} = {dataset[1][1]};
{credit_limit} = {dataset[1][2]};
If occurs error in the execution of the SQL command, the variable attributed to the dataset will
return as "false" and the error message will be available in the "dataset_erro" variable. It is also
important to verify the select returned data, to prevent access to inexistent variables, once the
output array only will be created if the select command returns data.
Ex. 2:
sc_lookup(my_data, "select customer_id, customer_name, credit_limit from customers");
if ({my_data} === false)
{
echo "Access error. Message=". {my_data_erro} ;
}
elseif (empty({my_data}))
{
echo "Select command didn't return data";
}
else
{
{customer_id} = {my_data[0][0]};
{customer_name} = {my_data[0][1]};
{credit_limit} = {my_data[0][2]};
}
Ex. 3: The SQL command also can be composed of application fields (local variables) or of
global variables:
sc_lookup(dataset, "select order_value from orders where clienteid = '{customer_id} ' and
salesman_id = [var_glo_salesman]");
Note: The command must always finished with semicolon ";".
Note2: For a big result returned in the dataset we recomend the use of the macro sc_selec instead
of this one.
Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
onAfterInsert
onCalendarScriptInit
onScriptInit
onLoad
onRefresh
onValidate onLoad
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
38
onValidate
onValidateSuccess
sc_mail_send(SMTP, Usr, Pw, From, To, Subject, Message, Mens_Type, Copies, Copies_Type, Port, Connection_Type, Attachment, SSL)
This macro its used to send emails.
SMTP SMTP server name or IP address. (String or Variable that contains the server
name)
Usr SMTP user name. (String or Variable that contains the user name)
Pw SMTP password. (String or Variable that contains the password)
From From email. (String or Variable that contains the email)
To List of the emails that will recieve the message, it could be a string or variable
that cointains one or more emails separated by ";" or one variable that contains
one array of emails.
Subject Message subject. (String or Variable that contains the subject)
Message Message body. (String or Variable that contains the message)
Mens_Type Message format: (T)ext or (H)tml.
Copies List of the emails that will recieve the message, it could be a string or variable
that cointains one or more emails separated by ";" or one variable that contains
one array of emails.
Copies_Type Type copies: BCC (Hiden copies) or CCC (Regular copies).
Port The port used by your e-mail server. Use the port 465 for the security type SSL,
and the port 587 for the security type TLS or the port 25 for no security. If not
informed, Scriptcase will set the default port: 25
Connection_Type Indicating a secure connection. Use S for SSL, T for TLS or N for non secure
connections. If not informed, Scriptcase will set the default value:N.
Attachment Absolute path of the file that will be attached in the email
SSL Optional parameter to add SSL settings. If you need to add more than one
setting, use ";" for separate them. Ex: $ssl =
'allow_self_signed=false;verify_peer=false';
Note: To use safe connection its required to have the PHP "php_openssl" extension enable.
Ex. 1:
sc_mail_send('smtp.meuserver.com.br', 'usr', 'pw', 'from@netmake.com.br', 'to@netmake.com.br',
'Test Email Subject', 'Message', 'H', 'abc@cop.com.br;zxy@cop.com.br', 'H', '', '', 'c:/test/arq.txt');
Ex. 2: Usising variables and defining the port.

sc_mail_send([glo_smtp], [usuar], [glo_pw], {from}, {to}, {subject}, {message}, 'T', [glo_copias],
'CCC', '419', 'S', {attached});
Ex. 3: No user and password.

sc_mail_send([glo_smtp], '', '', 'from.netmake.com.br', {to}, {sunject}, {message}, 'H', '', '', '', '',
[glo_att]);
The amount of emails sent will be stored at the special variable "sc_mail_count".
If any error happend when the scriptcase try to send the email, the variable "sc_mail_ok" will
recieve "false" and the error message will be stored on the variavle "sc_mail_erro".
Ex.4 :
sc_mail_send([glo_smtp], '', '', 'from@netmake.com.br', {to}, {subject}, {message}, 'H');
if ({sc_mail_ok})
{
echo "sent {sc_mail_count} e-mail(s) with sucess!!";
}
else
{
sc_error_message({sc_mail_erro});
}
Macro Scope

onAfterDelete
onAfterDeleteAll
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterDelete onAfterUpdateAll
onAfterInsert onBeforeDelete
onAfterUpdate onBeforeDeleteAll onClick
onBeforeDelete onBeforeInsert onScriptInit
onBeforeInsert onClick onBeforeInsertAll onFooter
onFooter onFilterInit onLoadAll onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onBeforeUpdate onHeader onBeforeUpdate onHeader
onExecute onHeader onFilterSave onRefresh onExecute onExecute
onScriptInit onScriptInit onBeforeUpdateAll onScriptInit
onScriptInit onFilterValidate onValidate onLoad onLoad
onLoad onRecord onClick onRecord
onValidateFailure
onValidate onLoad
39
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_make_link(Application, Parameters)
This macro creates a string containing a link to other Scriptcase application (when writing html
code).
Application Name of the application to establish the link.
Parameters Parameters necessary so called application. In the format: "=" (the attribution sign)
. More than one parameter must be separated by ";" (semicolon).
Ex. 1: Creating a string with a link for the datacli.php application, without parameters
passage.
$string_link = sc_make_link(datacli.php);
Ex. 2: Creating a string with a link for the application datacli.php, with parameters
passage.
$string_link = sc_make_link(datacli, parm1={company};parm2=[glo_office]);
Macro Scope
Blank application chart application Grid application Control Form

onFooter onScriptInit
onValidate
onExecute onHeader onNavigate
onValidateSuccess
onScriptInit onRecord
sc_master_value('Object', Value)
Update a data in the master application, in real time, according to changes made in a given field of
the detail application.
Object Object name to be updated in master Application. It's not necessary the {} in a
field name.
Value Object value. The value can be a field or a variable.
Ex. 1:
sc_lookup(result,"SELECT SUM(Total) FROM adm_order_itens WHERE OrderID = '{OrderID}'");
//Using sc_format_num() to format the value that will be updated in the master application
$value = sc_format_num({result[0][0]}, ',', '.', 2, 'S', 1, '');
sc_master_value('OrderPrice', $value);
* If the value, that will be sent to the master, be numeric, you have to use thesc_format_num() to
format it. To see the macro documentation, click here.
Macro Scope

onAfterDelete
onAfterDeleteAll
onAfterInsert
onAfterDelete
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterInsert
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onApplicationInit
onApplicationInit
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsert onLoadAll
onBeforeUpdate
onScriptInit
onScriptInit
onLoad
onLoad
onRefresh
onNavigate
onValidate
onLoadRecord
onValidateFailure
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
sc_menu_delete(Id_Item1)
40
This macro removes menu items passed as parameters. Can be use in menu applications or tree
menu.
Observe that the parameters used in this macro are the "ID" of the items.
If a menu item its removed and it have "nodes", they will be hidden too.
Macro Scope

onLoad onLoad
sc_menu_disable(Id_Item1)
This macro deactivates menu items pass as parameters. Can be used in menu applications or tree
menus.
The parameters passed are items "ID”. Menu items are deactivated recursively (when a submenu
item is deactivated its “nodes” are also deactivated).
Macro Scope

onLoad onLoad
sc_menu_force_mobile(boolean)
This Macro is used to force the creation of menus to mobile devices.
The parameter (true or false) is optional. If no value is passed, it will use the value "true" ( enable
mobile mode)
Ex1:
sc_menu_force_mobile(true);
Ex2:
sc_menu_force_mobile(false);
Macro Scope

onApplicationInit
onLoad
onLoad
sc_menu_item
This variable is only avaliable for menu application and it has the objective of giving acess to a
menu item that was selected, this way the user can take desicions before to run the application.
Ex. 1: To clean global variable.

if ({sc_menu_item} == "item_1")
{
sc_reset_global([global1], [global2]);
}
Ex. 2: If an application requires a global variable another application can initialize it

accordingly.
if ({sc_menu_item} == "item_5" && (!isset([glo_employ]) || empty([glo_employ])))
{
sc_redir(apl_inf_emp);
}
Ex. 2: Use the button on the toolbar menu.

if ({sc_menu_item} == "btn_1")
{
sc_apl_conf("form_customer", "start", "new");
}
Macro Scope

onApplicationInit
onExecute
41
onExecute
sc_redir(Application, Parameter01; Parameter02; Target, Error, height_modal, width_modal)
This macro its used to redirect the processing to other application or URL.
If the redir uses parameters, these must be passed in the following format:
1) After the name of the application, use the comma delimiter (,) then
2) = (equal sign) .
3) More than one parameter, must be separated by semicolon (;)
4) The target determine which application is opened (default=_self): _self, _parent, _blank or modal.
5) Optional parameter to set error messages redirection in the application: "F" redirects if there is
error in the application (default value) and "E" does not redirect.
OBS. If your connection uses transaction control the use of this macro on the events onAfterInsert,
onafterupdate, onAfterDelete, onBeforeInsert, onbeforeupdate or onBeforeDelete should come after
the use of macro sc_commit_trans so this way it will save the form changes.
This macro does not support the use of the Modal parameter when used in a Run button.
Ex. 1: Application without parameters nor target.

if ([global_user] == "test")
{
sc_redir(application_x.php);
}
Ex. 2: Application with parameters and without target.

{
sc_redir(application_x, parm1={var_test}; parm2="xxx");
}
Ex. 3: Application without parameters and with target.

{
sc_redir(application_x, "", "_parent");
}
Ex. 4: Application with parameter and target.

{
sc_redir(application_x, parm1={var_test}; parm2="xxx", "_blank");
}
Ex. 5: URL.
{
sc_redir(http://www.my_page.com);
}
OBS. Everthing that was passed as parameter to the called application will be avaliable as global
variable.
EX: sc_redir(employee.php, parm1={var_test}; parm2="xxx", "_blank");
In the employee.php application the parameters will be acessible at [parm1] and [parm2]
Macro Scope

onAfterDelete
onAfterDeleteAll
onAfterInsert
onAfterDelete
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterInsert
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit
onApplicationInit
onApplicationInit onClick
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeInsert onApplicationInit
onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onFilterInit onBeforeDeleteAll onLoadAll onExecute
onExecute onBeforeUpdate onExecute onApplicationInit
onScriptInit onScriptInit onFilterValidate onBeforeInsert onRefresh onLoad
onCalendarApplicationInit onLoad
onBeforeInsertAll onValidate
onBeforeUpdate onValidateFailure
onScriptInit
onBeforeUpdateAll onValidateSuccess
onLoad
onClick
onValidate
onScriptInit
onValidateSuccess
onLoad
onValidate
onValidateSuccess
sc_reset_apl_conf("Application", "Property")
This macro have the objective to delete all modifications effected by the sc_apl_conf macro.
The property parameter its opicional, if its passed it will only erase the modification from that
42
specific application.
Ex. 1: Deleting the modifications of the "my_application" application, property "start".

sc_reset_apl_conf("my_application", "start");
Ex. 2: Deleting the modifications of the "my_application" application.

sc_reset_apl_conf("my_application");
Ex. 3: Deleting the modifications of all the applications.

sc_reset_apl_conf();
Macro Scope

onApplicationInit
onApplicationInit
onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onScriptInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onExecute onCalendarApplicationInit
onScriptInit onScriptInit onFilterInit onScriptInit onValidate onLoad onLoad onScriptInit
onScriptInit
onValidateSuccess
sc_reset_apl_status
This macro has the objective to clean all security variables, set through the sc_apl_status macro.
Ex. 1:
sc_reset_apl_status();
Macro Scope

onCalendarApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onScriptInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onExecute
onCalendarScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onFilterInit onScriptInit onValidate onLoad onLoad onScriptInit
sc_reset_change_connection
This macro has the objective to erase the changes made using the macro "sc_change_connection".
Ex. 1:
sc_reset_change_connection();
Macro Scope
Blank chart Grid Form Menu ReportPDF

application application application application application application
onCalendarApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onScriptInit onApplicationInit
onExecute onLoad onScriptInit
onCalendarScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onValidate onLoad
sc_reset_connection_edit
This macro undoes the connection edits made by macro "sc_connection_edit".
Ex. 1:
sc_reset_connection_edit();
Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnClick onAfterDeleteAll onBlur
OnFocus onAfterInsert onChange
onAfterDelete onAfterInsertAll onClick
onAfterInsert onAfterUpdate onFocus
onAfterUpdate onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onApplicationInit onFilterInit onApplicationInit onClick onApplicationInit onFooter
43
onExecute onBeforeDelete onFooter onScriptInit onFilterRefresh onBeforeDelete onScriptInit onExecute onExecute onHeader
onBeforeInsert onHeader onFilterSave onBeforeDeleteAll onLoadAll onLoad onLoad onScriptInit
onBeforeUpdate onScriptInit onFilterValidate onBeforeInsert onRefresh onRecord
onCalendarApplicationInit onBeforeInsertAll onValidate
onCalendarScriptInit onBeforeUpdate onValidateFailure
onScriptInit onBeforeUpdateAll onValidateSuccess
onLoad onClick
onValidateSuccess onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onValidateSuccess
sc_reset_connection_new
This macro undoes the connections made by the macro "sc_connection_new".
sc_reset_connection_new();
Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
ajaxFieldonBlur
onAfterDelete
Onchange
onAfterDeleteAll
OnClick onBlur
onAfterInsert
OnFocus onChange
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onApplicationInit onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit
onFilterInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onFooter
onApplicationInit onFooter onClick onExecute
onExecute onScriptInit onFilterRefresh onBeforeDelete onExecute onHeader
onBeforeDelete onHeader onScriptInit onLoad
onFilterSave onBeforeDeleteAll onLoad onScriptInit
onBeforeInsert onScriptInit onLoadAll
onFilterValidate onBeforeInsert onRecord
onBeforeInsertAll
onCalendarApplicationInit onValidate
onBeforeUpdate
onCalendarScriptInit onValidateFailure
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onLoad
onScriptInit
onValidateSuccess
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onValidateSuccess
sc_reset_global([Global_Variable1], [Global_Variable2] ...)
This macro has the objective to delete global variables, stored in the PHP session.
Ex. 1:
sc_reset_global ([Login], [Pass]);
Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
OnFocus onAfterInsertAll
onBlur
onAfterDelete onAfterUpdate
onChange
onAfterInsert onAfterUpdateAll
onClick
onAfterUpdate onClick onApplicationInit
onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onApplicationInit
onFilterInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onBeforeDelete onFooter onGroupBy onBeforeDeleteAll onFooter
onExecute onFilterRefresh onClick onExecute onLoad
onBeforeInsert onHeader onHeader onBeforeInsert onHeader
onFilterSave onScriptInit onLoad
onBeforeUpdate onScriptInit onScriptInit onBeforeInsertAll onRecord
onFilterValidate onLoadAll
onCalendarApplicationInit onRecord onBeforeUpdate
onValidate
onScriptInit onBeforeUpdateAll
onValidateFailure
onLoad onClick
onValidateSuccess
onRefresh onScriptInit
onValidate onLoad
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
44
sc_reset_menu_delete
This macro its used to restore a menu item, deleted by the macro "sc_menu_delete".
Ex. 1:
sc_reset_menu_delete();
Macro Scope

onLoad onLoad
sc_reset_menu_disable
This macro have the objective to enable a menu item, disabled by the macro "sc_menu_disable".
Ex. 1:
sc_reset_menu_disable();
Macro Scope

onLoad onLoad
sc_rollback_trans("Connection")
This macro its used to cancel a transaction set in the database.
The "Connection" parameter is optional, use only if the command is executed in a different data
base from the specified to the application.
Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
ajaxFieldonBlur
onAfterDeleteAll
Onchange
onAfterInsert
OnClick
onAfterInsertAll
OnFocus onBlur
onAfterUpdate
onClick onAfterUpdateAll
onFooter onBeforeDelete
onAfterUpdate onFilterInit onFocus
onGroupBy onBeforeDeleteAll onApplicationInit
onBeforeDelete onHeader onFilterRefresh onClick onExecute onHeader
onExecute onHeader onBeforeInsert onExecute
onBeforeInsert onScriptInit onFilterSave onLoadAll onLoad onRecord
onScriptInit onBeforeInsertAll onLoad
onBeforeUpdate onFilterValidate onRefresh
onNavigate onBeforeUpdate
onRecord onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onScriptInit
onValidate
onLoad
onValidateFailure
onNavigate
onValidateSuccess
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_script_name
This macro is available to the MENU applications to access the application name that was selected in
the menu. It allows the user to make dacisions before executing the application if a pre-process is
required to that application.
Ex. 1: To clean global variables.

if ({sc_script_name} == "apl1")
{
sc_reset_global([global1], [global2]);
}
45
Macro Scope

onExecute onExecute
sc_select(dataset, "SQL Command", "Connection")
This macro executes the SQL commands passed as parameter and access the "dataset" in the
command.
Different from sc_lookup macro, this macro doesn't manipulate the dataset (the user is responsible
for all the manipulation).
If an error occurs in the sql command execution, the variable attributed to the database returns as
"false" and the error message is available in the "dataset_error" variable.
The connection parameter is optional, use only if the command is executed in a data base different
from the specified in the application.
Ex. 1:
sc_select(my_data, "select clientId, clientName, limitecred from costumers");
if ({my_data} === false)
{
echo "Access error. Message =". {my_data_erro};
}
else
{
while (!{my_data}->EOF)
{
{clientName} = {my_data}->fields[1];
{my_data}->MoveNext();
}
{my_data}->Close();
}
Ex. 2: The SQL command can passed as application fields (local variables) or of global
variables.
sc_select(dataset,"select price order from order where clientId = '{clientId}' and cod_Seller =
[var_glo_seller]");
Note: The command must always be finished with semicolon";".
Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterUpdate onFooter onBeforeDelete onFocus
onFilterInit
onBeforeDelete onFooter onGroupBy onBeforeDeleteAll onClick onApplicationInit onFooter
onFilterRefresh onExecute
onExecute onBeforeInsert onHeader onHeader onBeforeInsert onScriptInit onExecute onHeader
onFilterSave onLoad
onBeforeUpdate onScriptInit onScriptInit onBeforeInsertAll onLoadAll onLoad onRecord
onFilterValidate
onCalendarScriptInit onNavigate onBeforeUpdate onRefresh
onScriptInit onRecord onBeforeUpdateAll onValidate
onValidate onLoad
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_select_field({Field})
This macro modify dynamically the SELECT:

Is possible to modify dynamically the grid fields through the dynamic modification of the original
select.
Ex. 1:
A table with the columns year and the months from January to December is used to create a grid
using a parameter, displays the years and only a specific month. Passing the parameter as a global
variable named "show_month", in the application is found the following structure:
46
Select Clause: select year, pair_month from table
sc_select_field(pair_month) = [show_month];
sc_label(pair_month) = [show_month];
Modify the select, and the grip column label.
It is possible, during the grid execution time, modify the grid ORDER BY clause.
At least one ORDER BY is required in the original grid SQL command to allow the substitution
execution during the grid time.
Ex. 2: Select Clause: select code, name, value from table order by code. To change the order, from
code to name, use: sc_select_order("code") = "name";
Note: This command must be in the context of the event "onInit";
Macro Scope

sc_select_order("Field")
It is possible, during the grid execution time, modify the grid ORDER BY clause.
At least one ORDER BY is required in the original grid SQL command to allow the substitution during
the grid execution time.
Ex. 1: Select Clause: SELECT code, name, price FROM table ORDER BY code
To change the order from code to name, we will have:
sc_select_order("code") = "name";
Ex. 2: Select Clause: SELECT code, name, price, date FROM table ORDER BY code, name, price
To change the order from name to date, we will have:
sc_select_order("name") = "date";
Note: This command must be in the context of "process before the select".
Macro Scope

onHeader
onScriptInit
onScriptInit
sc_select_where(add)
Is possible, during grid execution time to add a field/condition to the search WHERE clause.
Ex. 1: It adds the contente between the quotes (") in the grids select.
if (empty({sc_where_current}))
{
sc_select_where(add) = "where campoX > [global]";
}
else
{
sc_select_where(add) = "AND campoX > [global_variable]";
}
Note: This command must be in the context of "process before the select".
Macro Scope

onHeader
onScriptInit
onScriptInit
sc_send_mail_api($arr_settings)
This macro allows dynamic sending of embedded emails with the Mandrill and Amazon SES APIs.
It is also possible to send e-mail using the SMTP protocol.
This macro uses the same mandrill parameters to send e-mail, regardless of the Gateway
(Changer, Amazon SES or SMTP) selected. click here and see the list of parameters that
can be used.
This macro contains a single parameter "$arr_settings", which receives an array with the email
sending information.
For more information on the parameters the mandirll click here

47
.
$arr_settings Array with information for use of APIs.
Array indices Description

Name of some API already configured in "Tools> API", as can be seen in Example
profile
1. When informing a profile, the settings index should not be informed.
E-mail sending server settings. The information must conform to the API used.
settings
Note: When informing the settings, the Profile index is disregarded.
message Message that will be sent by email. Subject, body, to, etc.
Example 1: Sending e-mail using a pre-configured Profile in "Tools> API".

if({api_type} == 'smtp' ){
'profile' => 'yahoo_example',
'message' => [
'html' => {email_body},
'text' => '',
'to' => $arr_merge,
'subject' => {subject}
]
);
}
sc_send_mail_api($var_config);
Example 2: Sending e-mail via SMTP

$smtp_server = "smtp.mail.yahoo.com";
$smtp_port = "465";
$smtp_user = "scriptcase.export";
$smtp_password = "scriptcase.export";
$from_email = "scriptcase.export@yahoo.com";
$from_name = "Scriptcase Export";
if ( {api_type} == 'smtp' ){
'profile' => '',
'settings' => [
'gateway' => 'smtp',
'smtp_server' => $smtp_server,
'smtp_port' => $smtp_port,
'smtp_user' => $smtp_user,
'smtp_password' => $smtp_password,
'from_email' => $from_email,
'from_name' => $from_name
],
'message' => [
'text' => '',
'to' => $arr_merge,
]
);
}
Example 3: Sending email using Mandrill API

if({api_type} == 'mandrill' ){
'settings' => [
'gateway' => 'mandrill',
'api_key' => {api_key},
'from_email' => {from_email},
'from_name' => {from_name}
],
'message' => [
'text' => '',
]
);
}
Example 4: Sending email using Amazon SES API

if({api_type} == 'ses' ){
'settings' => [
'gateway' => 'ses',
'region' => {ses_region},
'api_key' => {api_key},
'api_secret' => {ses_secret},
'from_email' => {from_email}
],
'message' => [
'text' => '',
]
);
}
Macro Scope

onAfterDelete
onAfterDeleteAll
48
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeInsert onClick onFooter
onFooter onFilterInit onBeforeInsertAll onLoadAll onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onBeforeUpdate onHeader onHeader
onExecute onHeader onFilterSave onBeforeUpdate onRefresh onExecute onExecute
onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit
onScriptInit onFilterValidate onBeforeUpdateAll onValidate onLoad onLoad
onLoad onRecord onRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_send_sms($arr_settings)
This macro receives an array as the configuration parameter that contains the message, recipient,
gateway, and API key.
Array with the information for use in the
$arr_settings
macro.
Array
Description
Index
to: SMS recipient
message: The content of the text message
API to be used (clickatell, plivo or
gateway:
twilio)
auth_token: API Authentication Token
Sample 1 - Basic sending Structure:

$arr_settings = array(
'message' =>
[
'to' => '+55999999999',
'message' => 'Scriptcase SMS'
],
'settings' =>
[
'gateway' => 'clickatell',
'auth_token' => '54Cik1-gQ4GqtuN70d4y4w=='
]);
sc_send_sms($arr_settings);
Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onApplicationInit onFooter onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onApplicationInit
onBeforeDelete onGroupBy onFilterInit onBeforeDeleteAll onClick onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onFooter
onFooter
onExecute onBeforeInsert onHeader onFilterRefresh onBeforeInsert onScriptInit onExecute onExecute onHeader
onHeader
onBeforeUpdate onScriptInit onFilterSave onBeforeInsertAll onLoadAll onLoad onLoad onScriptInit
onScriptInit
onCalendarApplicationInit onNavigate onFilterValidate onBeforeUpdate onRefresh onRecord
onCalendarScriptInit onRecord onBeforeUpdateAll onValidate
onScriptInit onClick onValidateFailure
onLoad onScriptInit onValidateSuccess
onRefresh onLoad
onValidate onNavigate
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_send_whatsapp($arr_settings)
This macro receives an array as a setting parameter that contains the API name setted in the
Scriptcase, the message and the destiny number.
49
The parameters that will be used are:
profile: Here will be informed the API name configured into the Scriptcase interface.
message: In this parameter is informed the message that will be sent through the macro.
to: Allows informing the destiny number of the message.
Exemplo de uso:
$arr_settings = array(
'profile' => 'ChatAPI',
'message' => 'Test whatsapp',
'to' => '558182499699'
);
sc_send_whatsapp($arr_settings);
Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
ajaxFieldonBlur
onAfterDelete
Onchange
onAfterDeleteAll
OnClick
onAfterInsert
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
onAfterInsert
onAfterUpdate
onBeforeDelete onFilterInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onFooter
onExecute onBeforeInsert onFilterRefresh onExecute onExecute onHeader
onBeforeUpdate onFilterSave onLoad onLoad onScriptInit
onCalendarApplicationInit onFilterValidate onRecord
onScriptInit
onLoad
onRefresh
onLoad
onValidate
onNavigate
onValidateFailure
onLoadRecord
onValidateSuccess
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_seq_register
This macro provide the record (being processed) grid sequential number. It can be used, only in
onRecord event.
Ex. 1:
if({sc_seq_register} == 10) {
// last line of the page
{total} = {sum_total};
}
Macro Scope
Grid application
onRecord
sc_set_fetchmode(parm);
This macro allows to change the type of return from the dataset of the select commands.
The macro will processed before running the SQL command. Informing the parameter, the dataset
will return the index or the name of the column.
parm = 0 : Returns an array with the index and the name of columns (Scriptcase's Default)
parm = 1 : Returns an array only with indexes of the columns
Example 1: Returning an array with the name of the columns.
sc_set_fetchmode(0);
sc_select(my_data, "SELECT customerid, stateid, birthdate, creditlimit FROM customers where
customerid = 'ALFKI'");
while (!$my_data->EOF){
$meus_dados->fields['customerid'];
$customer = $my_data->fields['stateid'];
$customer = $my_data->fields['birthdate'];
$my_data->MoveNext();
}
$my_data->Close();
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
50
Example 2: Returning an array with the index of the columns.
sc_set_fetchmode(1);
sc_select(my_data, "SELECT customerid, stateid, birthdate, creditlimit FROM customers where
customerid = 'ALFKI'");
while (!$my_data->EOF){
$my_data->fields[1];
$customer = $my_data->fields[2];
$customer = $my_data->fields[3];
$my_data->MoveNext();
}
$my_data->Close();
Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
ajaxFieldonBlur
onAfterDeleteAll
Onchange
onAfterInsert
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
onAfterInsert
onBeforeDelete onFilterRefresh onExecute onExecute onHeader
onExecute onHeader onHeader onBeforeInsert onScriptInit
onScriptInit
onLoad
onRefresh
onValidate
onLoad
onValidateFailure
onNavigate
onValidateSuccess
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_set_focus('Field')
This macro its used to set the focus to a form field.
Ex. 1:
sc_set_focus('name');
Macro Scope

OnClick OnClick onApplicationInit
onLoad onLoad onScriptInit
onRefresh onRefresh onLoadAll
onValidateSuccess onValidateSuccess onRefresh
sc_set_global($variable_01) or ({My_Field})
This macro its used to register global variables. Create a session variable with the same name and
content of the local variable.
NOTE: This macro will be discontinued soon. You should use the method of creating global variables
using brackets. Ex: [var_glo_user] = "test";
Ex. 1: Registering a users variable.

$my_var = "mary";
sc_set_global($my_var);
Creates a session variable with the name "my_var" with the "mary" content.
Ex. 2: For register a field value as a session variable.

sc_set_global({fieldname});
Note: This macro doesn't attribute values. Only register the session variables from PHP.
Macro Scope

51
ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnClick onAfterDeleteAll
OnFocus onAfterInsert onBlur
onAfterDelete onAfterInsertAll onChange
onAfterInsert onAfterUpdate onClick
onClick
onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onFocus
onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onFooter
onFooter onFilterInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onBeforeDelete onFooter onBeforeDelete onClick onHeader
onExecute onGroupBy onFilterRefresh onExecute onExecute
onBeforeInsert onHeader onBeforeDeleteAll onScriptInit onScriptInit
onHeader onFilterSave onLoad onLoad
onBeforeUpdate onScriptInit onBeforeInsert onLoadAll onRecord
onScriptInit onFilterValidate
onCalendarApplicationInit onBeforeInsertAll onRefresh
onRecord
onScriptInit onBeforeUpdate onValidate
onLoad onBeforeUpdateAll onValidateFailure
onRefresh onClick onValidateSuccess
onValidate onScriptInit
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_set_groupby_rule
This macro is used to select a GROUPBY rule in execution time in the onApplicationInit event.
Ex:
sc_set_groupby_rule = "rule id";
Macro Scope

sc_set_language('String Language')
This macro allows to define the application language dinamically.
Ex. 1: Changes the laguage to English.

sc_set_language('en_us');
Ex. 2: Changes the laguage to Spanish.

sc_set_language('es');
It still allows to define the language and regional settings of the applications using a delimiter ";"
between the parameters.
Ex. 1: Changing the language to English and regional settings to Canada.

sc_set_language('en_us;en_ca');
Ex. 2: Changing the language to Spanish and regional settings to Mexico.

sc_set_language('es;es_mx');
Ex. 3: Changing the language to Germanian and regional settings to Luxembourg.

sc_set_language('de;de_lu');
Ex. 4: Changing the language to Eslovak and regional settings to Slovak Republic.
sc_set_language('sk;sk_sk');
Macro Scope

onApplicationInit
onApplicationInit
onExecute onFilterInit
onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onValidate onLoad onLoad onScriptInit
onFilterValidate
onValidateSuccess
sc_set_pdf_name"sc_my_file_name.pdf"
52
The resulting files of the exported data (PDF, XLS, XML, CSV, WORD and RTF) are stored in
"temporary" directory specified in the Scriptcase's configuration in development and in production,
with the prefix "sc_" followed by a unique identification so the file of a user does not overwrite to
one another.
The prefix "sc_" makes Scriptcase delete the old files. To assign different names Scriptcase patterns,
can use the following macros:
- sc_set_csv_name
- sc_set_pdf_name
- sc_set_rtf_name
- sc_set_xml_name
- sc_set_xls_name
- sc_set_word_name
Ex1:
sc_set_xls_name = "my_file.xls";
Ex2: sc_set_csv_name = "sc_my_new_file.csv";
NOTE:
1) These macros should be used in the event "onApplicationInit."
2) Even using the macro, remained the prefix "sc_" (as Ex2), the Scriptcase will delete the file when
it reaches the configured timeout limit (see the setting "File Lifetime" in the production
environment).
Macro Scope

sc_set_regional('String Regional')
This macros allows to dynamically change the application regional settings.
Ex. 1:
sc_set_regional('en_us');
Macro Scope

onApplicationInit
onApplicationInit
onFilterValidate
onValidateSuccess
sc_set_theme('String Theme')
This macros allows to define the application theme dinamically.
Ex. 1:
sc_set_theme('Newyellow');
Macro Scope

onApplicationInit
onApplicationInit
onFilterValidate
onValidateSuccess
sc_site_ssl
This macro its used to verifie if a used site is a safe site. (https protocol)
Ex. 1: Using an affirmative.

if (sc_site_ssl)
{
53
echo "ok - Safe site";
}
Ex. 2: Using a negative.

if (!sc_site_ssl)
{
echo "Warning - Unsafe site";
}
Ex. 3: Redirecting if the site isn't safe.

if (!sc_site_ssl)
{
sc_redir("http://www.erro_page.com/") ;
}
Note: This macro works only to the web server llS.
Macro Scope

onAfterDelete
onAfterDeleteAll
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterDelete
onAfterUpdateAll
onAfterInsert
onApplicationInit
onAfterUpdate
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeDelete onClick
onBeforeInsert
onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onBeforeInsertAll onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onExecute onBeforeUpdate onScriptInit onLoadAll onLoad
onScriptInit onFilterInit onBeforeUpdate onLoad onScriptInit
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onScriptInit
onValidate
onLoad
onValidateFailure
onNavigate
onValidateSuccess
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_sql_injection({My_Field}) or ($My_Variable)
This macro its used to protect the field/variable against "sql injection".
Macro used for protection against "sql injection" in commands generated by the developer when
using the macros: sc_lookup, sc_select or sc_exec_sql.
Ex. 1: Protecting a local variable:

$field_protect = sc_sql_injection({my_field});
Ex. 2: Protecting an user variable:

$field_protect = sc_sql_injection($my_var);
Note: that all database accesses, generated for the Scriptcase, have protection against "sql
injection".
Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
OnClick onAfterInsertAll
OnFocus onAfterUpdate onBlur
onAfterDelete onAfterUpdateAll onChange
onClick
onAfterInsert onBeforeDelete onClick
onFooter
onAfterUpdate onFilterInit onBeforeDeleteAll onFocus onFooter
onFooter onGroupBy
onBeforeDelete onFilterRefresh onBeforeInsert onScriptInit onExecute onExecute onHeader
onExecute onHeader onHeader
onBeforeInsert onFilterSave onBeforeInsertAll onLoadAll onLoad onLoad onScriptInit
onBeforeUpdate onFilterValidate onBeforeUpdate onRefresh onRecord
onNavigate
onRecord
onValidate onLoad
onValidateSuccess
54
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_sql_protect(Value, "Type", "Connection")
This macro will protect the value passed as paramenter according with the used database, the
"Connection" parameter is optional, if not informed scriptcase will use the default connection.
The "Type" parameter so far can only use the "Date" value.
Ex 01: In this example we will protect the dates passed as parameter so this way it can
be correctly interpreted to the ACCESS database.
sc_select_where(add) = " AND news_noticias.noticia_data_pub

BETWEEN ".sc_sql_protect($data_inicial, "date")." AND ".sc_sql_protect($data_final, "date")."";
Macro Scope
Blank application calendar application Grid application Search application Form application Control Form ReportPDF application
onAfterDeleteAll
onClick
onAfterInsertAll
onFooter
onAfterUpdateAll
onGroupBy onLoadAll
onExecute onValidate onFilterValidate onBeforeDeleteAll onRecord
onBeforeInsertAll
onNavigate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onRecord
onValidate
sc_text_style({My_Field}, "Background-Color", "Size", "Color", "Family", "Weight")
This macro allows to modify the text style from the grid field dinamically.
Field Name
Background-Color (optional) Text cell background Color
Size (optional) Text font size
Color (optional) Text Color
Family (optional) Text family
Weight (optional) Text weight
Ex. 1:
sc_text_style({my_field}, '#33FF99', '15px', '#000000', 'Arial, sans-serif', 'bold');
Macro Scope
Grid application
onRecord
sc_time_diff({datetime_01}, "Date_01 Format", {datetime_02}, "Date_02 Format")
sc_time_diff({datetime_01}, "Date_01 Format", {datetime_02}, "Date_02 Format");
This macro calculates the difference between hour, minutes and seconds for two datetime/time values.
The result will be returned in an array, with the dimensions [0], [1] and [2] containing hours, minutes and seconds, respectively.
Parâmeter Description
datetime_01 Value or variable for datetime_01
Date_01 Format Value or variable to specify the format of datetime_01
datetime_02 Value or variable for datetime_02
Date_02 Format Value or variable to specify the format of datetime_02
Ex. 1: General Format

{differences} = sc_time_diff({datetime_01}, "Date_01 Format", {datetime_02}, "Date_02 Format");
{diff_hours} = {differences[0]};
{diff_minutes} = {differences[1]};
{diff_seconds} = {differences[2]};
Ex. 2: Returning positive values

{differences} = sc_time_diff("2012-07-25 05:33:45", "yyyy-mm-dd hh:ii:ss", "2012-07-21 15:22:57", "yyyy-mm-dd hh:ii:ss");
{differences[0]} would be equal to 86 (hours)

{differences[1]} would be equal to 10 (minutes)
{differences[2]} would be equal to 48 (seconds)
Ex. 3: Returning negative values

{differences} = sc_time_diff("2012-07-21 15:22:57", "yyyy-mm-dd hh:ii:ss", "2012-07-25 05:33:45", "yyyy-mm-dd hh:ii:ss");
{differences[0]} would be equal to -86 (hours)

{differences[1]} would be equal to -10 (minutes)
{differences[2]} would be equal to -48 (seconds)
55
Ex. 4: Considering only the hours format - Positive return
{differences} = sc_time_diff("18:14:55", "hh:ii:ss", "10:55:22", "hh:ii:ss");
{differences[0]} would be equal to 7 (hours)

{differences[1]} would be equal to 19 (minutes)
{differences[2]} would be equal to 33 (seconds).
Ex. 5: Considering only the hours format - Negative return

{differences} = sc_time_diff ("10:55:22", "hh:ii:ss", "18:14:55", "hh:ii:ss");
{differences[0]} would be equal to -7 (hours)

{differences[1]} would be equal to -19 (minutes)
{differences[2]} would be equal to -33 (seconds).
Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
ajaxFieldonBlur
onAfterDeleteAll
Onchange
onAfterInsert
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
onAfterInsert
onApplicationInit onFilterInit onApplicationInit onFooter
onExecute onBeforeDelete onFilterRefresh onExecute onLoad onHeader
onBeforeInsert onFilterSave onLoad onScriptInit
onScriptInit
onLoad
onRefresh
onValidate
onLoad
onValidateFailure
onNavigate
onValidateSuccess
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_trunc_num({My_Field}, Decimal_Number)
This macro is used to truncate numerical values which exceed the decimals amount specified.
Parâmetro Descrição
My_Field Variable with value to format (return in the same variable).
Decimal_Number Amount of decimals to display.
Ex. 1:
sc_trunc_num({my_value}, 2);
Input value = 1250.235

Output value = 1250.23
Input value = 1250.2

Input value = 1250

Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
OnClick onAfterInsertAll onBlur
OnFocus onAfterUpdate onChange
onAfterDelete onAfterUpdateAll onClick
onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onFooter
onFilterInit onBeforeDeleteAll onClick onApplicationInit onFooter
onBeforeDelete onFooter onGroupBy onExecute
onExecute onFilterRefresh onBeforeInsert onScriptInit onExecute onHeader
onBeforeInsert onHeader onHeader onLoad
onFilterSave onBeforeInsertAll onLoadAll onLoad onScriptInit
onBeforeUpdate onScriptInit onScriptInit
onFilterValidate onBeforeUpdate onRefresh onRecord
onScriptInit onNavigate
onRefresh
56
onValidate onScriptInit onValidateSuccess
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_url_exit(URL)
This macro modifies the application exit URL.
Ex. 1:
sc_url_exit(http://www.scriptcase.net);
Ex. 2:
sc_url_exit(aplx.php);
Macro Scope
calendar application chart application Grid application Search application Form application Control Form ReportPDF application
onAfterDelete
onAfterDeleteAll
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterDelete
onAfterUpdateAll
onAfterInsert
onApplicationInit
onAfterUpdate
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeDelete onClick
onBeforeInsert
onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate onScriptInit onLoadAll onRecord
onScriptInit onFilterInit onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onScriptInit
onValidate
onLoad
onValidateFailure
onNavigate
onValidateSuccess
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_url_library("Target", "Library Name", "File")
This macro will return the file path, inside a library, to be used on the scriptcase applications. It is
necessary to have a library created on Scriptcase to use this Macro. To create a library, go in the
"Tools > Library" Menu.
Paramenter Description
Target Tells you what the scope of the library. Can be "sys" for libraries ofPublic scope or
"prj" for libraries of Project scope.
Library Name Given name to the library at the time of creation.
File Absolute path within the library.
Ex. 1 - Importing CSS files from a library:

<*link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="<*?php echo sc_url_library('prj', 'bootstrap-3.3.2-dist',
'css/style1.css'); ?>" />
Ex. 2 - Importing a JS file from a library:

<*script type="text/javascript" src="<*?php echo sc_url_library('prj', 'bootstrap-3.3.2-dist',
'js/bootstrap,js'); ?>">
NOTE: Note that you need to remove the asterisk (*) form the examples above to use it.
Macro Scope
ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterInsert onAfterUpdateAll onClick
onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onFilterInit onBeforeDelete onApplicationInit
57
onExecute onBeforeDelete onFooter onScriptInit onFilterRefresh onBeforeDeleteAll onClick onApplicationInit onExecute
onBeforeInsert onHeader onFilterSave onBeforeInsert onScriptInit onExecute onLoad
onBeforeUpdate onScriptInit onFilterValidate onBeforeInsertAll onLoadAll onLoad
onCalendarApplicationInit onBeforeUpdate onRefresh
onValidate onLoad
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_user_logout('variable_name', 'variable_content', 'apl_redir.php', 'target')
This macro is used to log the user out to the system.
If the target is not informed, the default value is "_top".
Ex:
sc_user_logout('usr_login', 'admin', 'ctrl_login.php', '_self');
Macro Scope
Blank application calendar application chart application Grid application Form application Control Form ReportPDF application
onAfterDelete
onAfterDeleteAll
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onScriptInit
onHeader
onBeforeInsert onHeader onBeforeInsert onLoadAll
onExecute onScriptInit onScriptInit
onBeforeUpdate onScriptInit onBeforeInsertAll onValidate
onRecord
onScriptInit onBeforeUpdate onValidateSuccess
onLoad onBeforeUpdateAll
onValidate onScriptInit
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onValidate
onValidateSuccess
sc_warning'on' or 'off'
This macro dynamically activates or deactivates warning messages control.
Warning messages are generated when a reference is made to an inexistent variable, an item of an
inexistent array, etc.
Ex. 1: To deactivate the message (do not display).

sc_warning = 'off';
Macro Scope

ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
OnClick onAfterInsertAll onBlur
OnFocus onAfterUpdate onChange
onAfterDelete onAfterUpdateAll onClick
onAfterInsert onApplicationInit onFocus
onAfterUpdate onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onApplicationInit
onApplicationInit onFilterInit onBeforeDeleteAll onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onFooter
onFooter onClick
onExecute onBeforeDelete onScriptInit onFilterRefresh onBeforeInsert onExecute onExecute onHeader
onHeader onScriptInit
onBeforeInsert onFilterSave onBeforeInsertAll onLoad onLoad onScriptInit
onScriptInit onLoadAll
onBeforeUpdate onFilterValidate onBeforeUpdate onRecord
onRefresh
onScriptInit onBeforeUpdateAll
onValidate
onLoad onClick
onValidateFailure
onRefresh onScriptInit
onValidateSuccess
onValidate onLoad
58
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_webservice("Method", "URL", "Port", "Send Method", "Parameters Array", "Setting's Array", "Timeout", "Return")
This macro is used to communicate with a web service.
Informs what method will be used to access the web service. Ex:
Method
file_get_contents or curl.
URL URL used to access the web service.
Port Port used to access the web service.
Send Method Defines the request method of the web service. Can be GET ou POST.
Parameter's array used to access the web service, varying according to the
Parameters Array
accessed service.
Settings's
Parameter's array for configuration of access method used.
Array(optional)
Timeout(optional) Service's access timeout.
Web service's return method. When it is set as "True", the return from the web
Return(optional) service comes as an array, if it is set as "False" it will return as the original web
service format. Default: True
$parms = array(
'METHOD' => 'GetBalance',
'RETURNALLCURRENCIES' => 1,
'VERSION' => urlencode(51.0),
'USER' => urlencode({paypal_api_login}),
'PWD' => urlencode({paypal_api_password}),
'SIGNATURE' => urlencode({paypal_api_key})
);
$parms = http_build_query($parms);
Ex1 - Using the macro file_get_contents:

sc_webservice('file_get_contents', $webservice_url, $_SERVER["SERVER_PORT"], "POST", $parms,
array(), 30);
Ex2 - Using the macro with CURL:

$response = sc_webservice("curl", {paypal_type}, 80, "POST", $parms,
array(CURLOPT_RETURNTRANSFER => true, CURLOPT_SSL_VERIFYPEER=>false), 30);
Macro Scope
ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
ajaxFieldonBlur
onAfterDeleteAll
Onchange
onAfterInsert
OnClick
OnFocus
onAfterDelete
onAfterInsert
onApplicationInit onFilterInit onApplicationInit
onFooter onBeforeDeleteAll onClick onExecute
onExecute onBeforeDelete onScriptInit onFilterRefresh onExecute
onHeader onBeforeInsert onScriptInit onLoad
onBeforeInsert onFilterSave onLoad
onBeforeUpdate onFilterValidate
onScriptInit
onLoad
onRefresh
onValidate
onLoad
onValidateFailure
onNavigate
onValidateSuccess
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_where_current
Variable to reference the application where clause plus the filter selections(if any). Reflects the
where clause currently used.
Ex. 1:
$save_current_where = {sc_where_current};
Macro Scope
chart application Grid application ReportPDF application

59
onClick
onFooter
onFooter
onFooter onGroupBy
onHeader
onHeader onHeader
onScriptInit
onRecord
onNavigate
onRecord
sc_where_filter
This macro is used to retrieve the content generated by the "filter", according with its selections.
These are the data which will be added to the application original where clause after filter
submition.
Ex. 1:
$save_current_filter = {sc_where_filter};
Macro Scope

onClick
onFooter
onFooter
onFooter onGroupBy
onHeader
onHeader onHeader
onScriptInit
onRecord
onNavigate
onRecord
sc_where_orig
This macro saves the application original where clause. Can be used inside ScriptCase events, to
manipulate the data, or to display it anywhere in the grid.
Ex. 1:
$save_where = {sc_where_orig};
Macro Scope

onClick
onFooter
onFooter
onFooter onGroupBy
onHeader
onHeader onHeader
onScriptInit
onRecord
onNavigate
onRecord
sc_zip_file("File", "Zip")
This macro is used to generate ZIP files from a list of files and/or directories. The file parameter
must be one of the following:
- File name
- Directory name
- A variable containing array, which contains a files and/or directories list.
- A variable a file or a directory name.
- A variable containing array, which contains a files and/or directories list.
The zip parameter must contain the name of the zip file generated, or the path to the file.
Ex. 1: Single file compressing.

sc_zip_file("/test/sample.htm", "/tmp/test.zip");
Ex. 2: Single directory compressing.

sc_zip_file("/test", "/tmp/test.zip");
Ex. 3: Multiple files and directories in an array.

$prep = array();
$prep[] = "/test/sample.htm";
$prep[] = "/test";
sc_zip_file($prep, "/tmp/test.zip");
Macro Scope
60
onAfterDelete
onAfterDeleteAll
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterDelete
onAfterUpdateAll
onAfterInsert
onApplicationInit
onAfterUpdate
onApplicationInit
onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onBeforeInsert onScriptInit
onBeforeInsert onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onFooter
onFooter onFilterInit onBeforeInsertAll onLoadAll
onExecute onBeforeUpdate onScriptInit onExecute onExecute onHeader
onHeader onFilterSave onBeforeUpdate onRefresh
onScriptInit onLoad onLoad onScriptInit
onScriptInit onFilterValidate onBeforeUpdateAll onValidate
onLoad onRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onLoad
onValidateFailure
onNavigate
onValidateSuccess
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
Authentication Variables
These variables must be defined on applications with PDF export on environments with integrated
authentication.
Variables Description
[sc_pdf_usr] Authentication User.
[sc_pdf_pw] Authentication Password
Ex. 1:On a login application, it is possible to set these variables from the info given by the user:
[sc_pdf_usr] = {login_usr};
[sc_pdf_pw] = {senha_usr};
Macro Scope
Grid application Form application

onApplicationInit
onFooter
onScriptInit
onGroupBy
onScriptInit
Database Variables
Global variables containing database access values used by main connection.
sc_glo_server Server name.
sc_glo_db Database name.
sc_glo_db_type Database type (mssql, oracle, mysql, etc).
sc_glo_user Connected user name.
sc_glo_pass Database password access.
sc_glo_cript_pass Encrypted password (S/N).
sc_glo_decimal_db Used decimal separator (point or comma).
Ex. 1:
$my_database = [sc_glo_db];
These variables only reference the values without updating it (it is not possible to attribute/modify
the values). To define user and the password to connect to the database, use the following
variables:
sc_db_master_usr User login to be used.
sc_db_master_pass Password to be used.
sc_db_master_cript Encrypted password (S/N) (see sc_encode macro).
Important: These variables only take effect during next application execution remaining valid
during all the session (unless modified).
61
Ex. 2: An application type "control" with a form created with information "login" and encrypted
"password". These data must be used to connect to the database, during the system applications
execution.
$temp_pass = sc_encode({password});
[sc_db_master_usr] = {login};
[sc_db_master_pass] = $temp_pass;
[sc_db_master_cript] = "S";
Macro Scope

onBlur
onFooter onChange
ajaxFieldonBlur onGroupBy onFilterInit ajaxFieldonBlur onClick onFooter
onFooter onApplicationInit
Onchange onHeader onFilterRefresh Onchange onLoadAll onExecute onHeader
onExecute onHeader onExecute
OnClick onScriptInit onFilterSave OnClick onRefresh onLoad onScriptInit
onScriptInit onLoad
OnFocus onNavigate onFilterValidate OnFocus onValidate onRecord
onRecord onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
Totalling Variables
During group by and summary processing, Scriptcase generates total variables to eachgroup level.
The routines are defined in event “onGroupBy” determining the break levels and avalilable to each
record. Totals special variables are then referenced substituting the group name for the key word
“groupby”, as in:
{count_ger} Records total amount.
{sum_parcel} Will show the total sum for the
field "Parcel"
{sum_balance} Will show the total sum for the
field "Balance"
{count_groupby} Current Group records total.
{sum_groupby_parcel} Current Group level sum for
the field “Parcel”.
{sum_groupby_balance} Current Group level sum for
the field “Balance”.
Ex. 1: In an application with a group by state and city that totalizes a balance field, in the
group totals, is possible to display the average (avg) instead of the balance as follows.
{sum_groupby_balance} = {sum_groupby_balance} / {count_groupby};
Macro Scope

onFooter onFooter
onFooter
onGroupBy onHeader
onHeader
onRecord onRecord
Totalling Variables (group by)
During the group by processing, Scriptcase generates total variables to each group level. The
routines are defined in event “onGroupBy” determining the group levels. Totals special variables
are then referenced substituting the group name for the key word “quebra”, as in:
Variable Description
{count_ger} Records total amount.
{sum_parcel} Field “parcels” total.
{sum_balance} Field “Balance” total.
{count_quebra} Current group level records total.
{sum_quebra_parcel} Current group level field “parcels” total.
{sum_quebra_balance} Current group level field “Balance” total.
Ex. 1: In an application with a group by state and city and that totalizes a balance field, in
the group totals, is possible to display the average (avg) instead of the balance as
follows.
{sum_quebra_balance} = {sum_quebra_balance} / {count_quebra};
Macro Scope
Grid application
onFooter
onGroupBy
62
1
Macro x Applications x Events
HOME › MACROS › MACRO X APPLICATIONS X
EVENTS
ajaxFieldonBlur
Aplicação Calendário Aplicação Formulário Aplicação Controle
sc_ajax_javascript sc_ajax_javascript sc_ajax_javascript sc_ajax_message

sc_ajax_message sc_ajax_message sc_begin_trans
sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans sc_calc_dv
sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv sc_commit_trans
sc_commit_trans sc_commit_trans sc_concat
sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new sc_connection_new sc_connection_new
sc_date sc_date sc_date
sc_date_conv sc_date_conv sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif sc_date_dif sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty sc_date_empty sc_date_empty
sc_decode sc_decode sc_decode
sc_encode sc_encode sc_encode
sc_error_exit sc_error_exit sc_error_exit
sc_error_message sc_error_message sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql sc_exec_sql sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display sc_field_display sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly sc_field_readonly sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num sc_format_num sc_format_num
sc_get_language sc_format_num_region sc_format_num_region
sc_get_regional sc_get_language sc_get_language
sc_get_theme sc_get_regional sc_get_regional
sc_include sc_get_theme sc_get_theme
sc_include_library sc_include sc_include
sc_lookup sc_include_library sc_include_library
sc_reset_connection_edit sc_label sc_label
sc_reset_connection_new sc_lookup sc_lookup
sc_reset_global sc_reset_connection_edit sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_rollback_trans sc_reset_connection_new sc_reset_connection_new
sc_select sc_reset_global sc_reset_global
sc_set_fetchmode sc_rollback_trans sc_rollback_trans
sc_set_global sc_select sc_select
sc_sql_injection sc_set_fetchmode sc_set_fetchmode
sc_time_diff sc_set_global sc_set_global
sc_trunc_num sc_sql_injection sc_sql_injection
sc_url_library sc_time_diff sc_time_diff
sc_warning sc_trunc_num sc_trunc_num
sc_webservice sc_url_library sc_url_library
Variables - Database sc_warning sc_warning
sc_webservice sc_webservice
Variables - Databases Variables - Database
Onchange
sc_ajax_javascript sc_ajax_javascript sc_ajax_javascript

sc_ajax_message sc_ajax_message sc_ajax_message
sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans sc_commit_trans sc_commit_trans
sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit sc_concat
sc_connection_new sc_connection_new sc_connection_edit
sc_date_conv sc_date_conv sc_connection_new
sc_date_dif sc_date_dif sc_date
sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_conv
sc_date_empty sc_date_empty sc_date_dif
sc_decode sc_decode sc_date_dif_2
sc_encode sc_encode sc_date_empty
sc_error_exit sc_error_exit sc_decode
sc_error_message sc_error_message sc_encode
sc_exec_sql sc_exec_sql sc_error_exit
sc_field_display sc_field_display sc_error_message
sc_field_readonly sc_field_readonly sc_exec_sql
sc_format_num sc_format_num sc_field_display
sc_get_language sc_format_num_region sc_field_readonly
sc_get_regional sc_get_language sc_format_num
sc_get_theme sc_get_regional sc_format_num_region
sc_include sc_get_theme sc_get_language
sc_include_library sc_include sc_get_regional
sc_lookup sc_include_library sc_get_theme
sc_reset_connection_edit sc_label sc_include
sc_reset_connection_new sc_lookup sc_include_library
sc_reset_global sc_reset_connection_edit sc_label
sc_rollback_trans sc_reset_connection_new sc_lookup
sc_select sc_reset_global sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_set_fetchmode sc_rollback_trans sc_reset_connection_new
sc_set_global sc_select sc_reset_global
sc_sql_injection sc_set_fetchmode sc_rollback_trans
sc_time_diff sc_set_global sc_select
sc_trunc_num sc_sql_injection sc_set_fetchmode
sc_url_library sc_time_diff sc_set_global
sc_warning sc_trunc_num sc_sql_injection
sc_webservice sc_url_library sc_time_diff
Variables - Database sc_warning sc_trunc_num
sc_webservice sc_url_library
Variables - Database sc_warning
sc_webservice
Variables - Database
2
OnClick
Aplicação Calendário Aplicação Consulta Aplicação Formulário Aplicação Controle
sc_ajax_javascript sc_ajax_refresh sc_begin_trans sc_ajax_javascript sc_ajax_javascript

sc_ajax_message sc_calc_dv sc_ajax_message sc_ajax_message
sc_begin_trans sc_commit_trans sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv sc_concat sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans sc_date sc_commit_trans sc_commit_trans
sc_concat sc_date_conv sc_concat sc_concat
sc_connection_edit sc_date_dif sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new sc_date_dif_2 sc_connection_new sc_connection_new
sc_date sc_date_empty sc_date sc_date
sc_date_conv sc_decode sc_date_conv sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif sc_encode sc_date_dif sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2 sc_exec_sql sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty sc_format_num sc_date_empty sc_date_empty
sc_decode sc_format_num_region sc_decode sc_decode
sc_encode sc_label sc_encode sc_encode
sc_error_exit sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_error_exit sc_error_exit
sc_error_message sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_error_message sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_exec_sql sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_field_display sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly sc_lookup sc_field_readonly sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num sc_mail_send sc_format_num sc_format_num
sc_get_language sc_reset_global sc_format_num_region sc_format_num_region
sc_get_regional sc_rollback_trans sc_get_language sc_get_language
sc_get_theme sc_select sc_get_regional sc_get_regional
sc_include sc_set_fetchmode sc_get_theme sc_get_theme
sc_include_library sc_set_global sc_include sc_include
sc_lookup sc_sql_injection sc_include_library sc_include_library
sc_reset_connection_edit sc_sql_protect sc_label sc_label
sc_reset_connection_new sc_time_diff sc_lookup sc_lookup
sc_reset_global sc_trunc_num sc_reset_connection_edit sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_rollback_trans sc_vl_extenso sc_reset_connection_new sc_reset_connection_new
sc_select sc_where_current sc_reset_global sc_reset_global
sc_set_fetchmode sc_where_filter sc_rollback_trans sc_rollback_trans
sc_set_focus sc_where_orig sc_select sc_select
sc_set_global sc_set_fetchmode sc_set_fetchmode
sc_sql_injection sc_set_focus sc_set_global
sc_time_diff sc_set_global sc_sql_injection
sc_trunc_num sc_sql_injection sc_time_diff
sc_url_library sc_time_diff sc_trunc_num
sc_warning sc_trunc_num sc_url_library
sc_webservice sc_url_library sc_warning
Variables - Database sc_warning sc_webservice
sc_webservice Variables - Database
OnFocus

sc_ajax_message sc_ajax_message sc_ajax_message
sc_concat sc_concat sc_concat
sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new sc_connection_new sc_connection_new
sc_date_empty sc_date_empty sc_date_empty
sc_decode sc_decode sc_decode
sc_encode sc_encode sc_encode
sc_error_exit sc_error_exit sc_error_exit
sc_error_message sc_error_message sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql sc_exec_sql sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display sc_field_display sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly sc_field_readonly sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num sc_format_num sc_format_num
sc_get_language sc_format_num_region sc_format_num_region
sc_get_regional sc_get_language sc_get_language
sc_get_theme sc_get_regional sc_get_regional
sc_include sc_get_theme sc_get_theme
sc_lookup sc_include_library sc_include_library
sc_reset_connection_edit sc_label sc_label
sc_reset_connection_new sc_lookup sc_lookup
sc_reset_global sc_reset_connection_edit sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_rollback_trans sc_reset_connection_new sc_reset_connection_new
sc_select sc_reset_global sc_reset_global
sc_set_fetchmode sc_rollback_trans sc_rollback_trans
sc_set_global sc_select sc_select
sc_sql_injection sc_set_fetchmode sc_set_fetchmode
sc_time_diff sc_set_global sc_set_global
sc_trunc_num sc_sql_injection sc_sql_injection
sc_url_library sc_time_diff sc_time_diff
sc_warning sc_trunc_num sc_trunc_num
sc_webservice sc_url_library sc_url_library
Variables - Database sc_warning sc_warning
sc_webservice sc_webservice
3
onAfterDelete
Aplicação Calendário Aplicação Formulário
sc_ajax_javascript sc_ajax_javascript
sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans
sc_btn_display sc_btn_display
sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans sc_commit_trans
sc_concat sc_concat
sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new sc_connection_new
sc_date sc_date
sc_date_conv sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty sc_date_empty
sc_decode sc_decode
sc_encode sc_encode
sc_error_delete sc_error_delete
sc_error_exit sc_error_exit
sc_error_message sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num sc_format_num
sc_get_language sc_format_num_region
sc_get_regional sc_get_language
sc_get_theme sc_get_regional
sc_include sc_get_theme
sc_include_library sc_include
sc_lookup sc_include_library
sc_mail_send sc_lookup
sc_master_value sc_mail_send
sc_redir sc_master_value
sc_reset_connection_edit sc_redir
sc_reset_connection_new sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_reset_global sc_reset_connection_new
sc_rollback_trans sc_reset_global
sc_select sc_rollback_trans
sc_set_fetchmode sc_select
sc_set_global sc_set_fetchmode
sc_site_ssl sc_set_global
sc_sql_injection sc_site_ssl
sc_time_diff sc_sql_injection
sc_trunc_num sc_time_diff
sc_url_exit sc_trunc_num
sc_url_library sc_url_exit
sc_user_logout sc_url_library
sc_warning sc_user_logout
sc_webservice sc_warning
sc_zip_file sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onAfterDeleteAll
Aplicação Formulário
sc_ajax_javascript
sc_begin_trans
sc_block_display
sc_btn_display
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num
sc_format_num_region
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_master_value
sc_redir
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_sql_protect
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
4
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onAfterInsert
sc_block_display sc_block_display
sc_concat sc_concat
sc_date sc_date
sc_decode sc_decode
sc_encode sc_encode
sc_error_insert sc_error_insert
sc_zip_file
onAfterInsertAll
sc_ajax_javascript
sc_begin_trans
sc_block_display
sc_btn_display
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_master_value
sc_redir
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
5
sc_set_global
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_sql_protect
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onAfterUpdate
sc_block_display sc_block_display
sc_concat sc_concat
sc_date sc_date
sc_decode sc_decode
sc_encode sc_encode
sc_error_update sc_error_update
sc_zip_file
onAfterUpdateAll
sc_ajax_javascript
sc_begin_trans
sc_block_display
sc_btn_display
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_master_value
6
sc_redir
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_sql_protect
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onApplicationInit
Aplicação Calendário Aplicação Gráfico Aplicação Consulta Aplicação Filtro Aplicação Formulário Aplicação Controle Aplicação Menu Aplicação Menu árvore Aplicação Report PDF
sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf

sc_apl_status sc_apl_status sc_apl_status sc_apl_status sc_apl_status sc_apl_status sc_apl_status sc_apl_status sc_apl_status
sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv sc_appmenu_add_item sc_appmenu_add_item sc_calc_dv
sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit sc_change_connection sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit sc_appmenu_create sc_appmenu_create sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new sc_connection_new sc_date sc_connection_new sc_connection_new sc_connection_new sc_appmenu_exist_item sc_appmenu_exist_item sc_connection_new
sc_date sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date sc_date sc_date sc_appmenu_remove_item sc_appmenu_remove_item sc_date
sc_date_dif sc_date_dif sc_date_dif sc_date_dif sc_date_dif sc_date_dif sc_appmenu_reset sc_appmenu_reset sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2 sc_appmenu_update_item sc_appmenu_update_item sc_date_dif_2
sc_decode sc_decode sc_date_empty sc_decode sc_decode sc_decode sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans sc_decode
sc_encode sc_encode sc_decode sc_encode sc_encode sc_encode sc_btn_disable sc_commit_trans sc_encode
sc_format_num sc_field_display sc_encode sc_format_num sc_format_num sc_format_num sc_calc_dv sc_date sc_format_num
sc_get_language sc_format_num sc_field_init_off sc_format_num_region sc_format_num_region sc_format_num_region sc_commit_trans sc_date_dif sc_get_theme
sc_get_regional sc_get_language sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_language sc_get_language sc_concat sc_date_dif_2 sc_image
sc_get_theme sc_get_regional sc_format_num_region sc_get_regional sc_get_regional sc_get_regional sc_connection_edit sc_decode sc_include
sc_image sc_get_theme sc_redir sc_get_theme sc_get_theme sc_get_theme sc_connection_new sc_encode sc_language
sc_include sc_hide_groupby_rule sc_reset_apl_conf sc_include sc_image sc_image sc_date sc_exec_sql sc_redir
sc_include_library sc_image sc_reset_apl_status sc_include_library sc_include sc_include sc_date_dif sc_format_num_region sc_reset_apl_conf
sc_language sc_include sc_reset_change_connection sc_language sc_include_library sc_include_library sc_date_dif_2 sc_get_language sc_reset_apl_status
sc_ldap_login sc_include_library sc_reset_global sc_reset_apl_conf sc_language sc_language sc_decode sc_get_regional sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_ldap_logout sc_language sc_set_global sc_reset_apl_status sc_ldap_login sc_ldap_login sc_encode sc_get_theme sc_reset_connection_new
sc_ldap_search sc_redir sc_set_groupby_rule sc_reset_connection_edit sc_ldap_logout sc_ldap_logout sc_exec_sql sc_language sc_reset_global
sc_master_value sc_reset_apl_conf sc_set_language sc_reset_connection_new sc_ldap_search sc_ldap_search sc_format_num sc_lookup sc_set_language
sc_redir sc_reset_apl_status sc_set_pdf_name sc_reset_global sc_master_value sc_redir sc_format_num_region sc_mail_send sc_set_regional
sc_reset_apl_conf sc_reset_change_connection sc_set_regional sc_set_global sc_redir sc_reset_apl_conf sc_get_language sc_menu_delete sc_set_theme
sc_reset_apl_status sc_reset_connection_edit sc_set_theme sc_set_language sc_reset_apl_conf sc_reset_apl_status sc_get_regional sc_menu_disable sc_site_ssl
sc_reset_change_connectio sc_reset_connection_new sc_time_diff sc_set_regional sc_reset_apl_status sc_reset_change_connection sc_get_theme sc_menu_force_mobile sc_time_diff
n sc_reset_connection_edit sc_reset_global sc_trunc_num sc_set_theme sc_reset_change_connection sc_reset_connection_edit sc_image sc_menu_item sc_trunc_num
sc_reset_connection_new sc_set_global Variables - Authentication sc_site_ssl sc_reset_connection_edit sc_reset_connection_new sc_include sc_reset_apl_conf sc_warning
sc_reset_global sc_set_groupby_rule sc_time_diff sc_reset_connection_new sc_reset_global sc_include_library sc_reset_apl_status sc_zip_file
sc_set_global sc_set_language sc_trunc_num sc_reset_global sc_set_focus sc_language sc_reset_menu_delete
sc_set_language sc_set_pdf_name sc_url_exit sc_set_global sc_set_global sc_lookup sc_reset_menu_disable
sc_set_regional sc_set_regional sc_url_library sc_set_language sc_set_language sc_mail_send sc_set_global
sc_set_theme sc_set_theme sc_warning sc_set_regional sc_set_regional sc_menu_delete sc_set_language
sc_site_ssl sc_site_ssl sc_webservice sc_set_theme sc_set_theme sc_menu_disable sc_set_regional
sc_time_diff sc_time_diff sc_zip_file sc_site_ssl sc_site_ssl sc_redir sc_set_theme
sc_trunc_num sc_trunc_num sc_time_diff sc_time_diff sc_reset_apl_conf sc_warning
sc_url_exit sc_url_exit sc_trunc_num sc_trunc_num sc_reset_apl_status sc_zip_file
sc_url_library sc_url_library sc_url_exit sc_url_exit sc_reset_change_connection
sc_warning sc_warning sc_url_library sc_url_library sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_webservice sc_webservice sc_warning sc_warning sc_reset_connection_new
sc_zip_file sc_zip_file sc_webservice sc_webservice sc_reset_global
sc_zip_file sc_zip_file sc_reset_menu_delete
sc_reset_menu_disable
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_global
sc_set_language
sc_set_regional
sc_set_theme
sc_site_ssl
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_library
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onBeforeDelete
sc_concat sc_concat
sc_date sc_date
sc_decode sc_decode
sc_encode sc_encode
sc_error_continue sc_error_continue
7
sc_zip_file
onBeforeDeleteAll
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_redir
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_sql_protect
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onBeforeInsert
sc_concat sc_concat
sc_date sc_date
sc_decode sc_decode
sc_encode sc_encode
8
sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_include_library
sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao
sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_lin_cod_barra_banco
sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao
sc_lookup sc_lin_digitavel_banco
sc_zip_file
onBeforeInsertAll
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_redir
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_sql_protect
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onBeforeUpdate
sc_changed sc_changed
sc_concat sc_concat
sc_date sc_date
sc_decode sc_decode
sc_encode sc_encode
9
sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_include_library
sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao
sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_lin_cod_barra_banco
sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao
sc_lookup sc_lin_digitavel_banco
sc_zip_file
onBeforeUpdateAll
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_redir
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_sql_protect
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onExecute
Aplicação Blank Aplicação Menu Aplicação Menu árvore
sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf

sc_apl_status sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans
sc_begin_trans sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv
sc_calc_dv sc_commit_trans sc_commit_trans
sc_change_connection sc_concat sc_concat
sc_commit_trans sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit
sc_concat sc_connection_new sc_connection_new
sc_connection_edit sc_date sc_date
sc_connection_new sc_date_dif sc_date_dif
sc_date sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_conv sc_decode sc_decode
sc_date_dif sc_encode sc_encode
sc_date_dif_2 sc_exec_sql sc_exec_sql
sc_date_empty sc_format_num sc_format_num
sc_decode sc_format_num_region sc_format_num_region
sc_encode sc_get_language sc_get_language
10
sc_exec_sql sc_get_regional sc_get_regional
sc_format_num sc_get_theme sc_get_theme
sc_format_num_region sc_include sc_include
sc_get_language sc_include_library sc_include_library
sc_get_regional sc_lookup sc_lookup
sc_get_theme sc_mail_send sc_mail_send
sc_image sc_menu_item sc_menu_item
Aplicação Blank Aplicação Menu Aplicação Menu árvore
sc_include sc_redir sc_redir
sc_include_lib sc_reset_connection_edit sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_include_library sc_reset_connection_new sc_reset_connection_new
sc_language sc_reset_global sc_rollback_trans
sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_rollback_trans sc_script_name
sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_script_name sc_select
sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_select sc_set_fetchmode
sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_set_fetchmode sc_set_global
sc_log_add sc_set_global sc_sql_injection
sc_log_split sc_sql_injection sc_trunc_num
sc_lookup sc_time_diff sc_url_library
sc_mail_send sc_trunc_num sc_warning
sc_make_link sc_url_library sc_webservice
sc_redir sc_warning sc_zip_file
sc_reset_apl_conf sc_webservice Variables - Database
sc_reset_apl_status sc_zip_file
sc_reset_change_connection Variables - Database
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_set_language
sc_set_regional
sc_set_theme
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_sql_protect
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onFilterInit
Aplicação Filtro
sc_apl_conf
sc_apl_status
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_exec_sql
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_image
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_language
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_redir
sc_reset_apl_conf
sc_reset_apl_status
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_set_language
sc_set_regional
sc_set_theme
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_url_library
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
11
onFilterRefresh
Aplicação Filtro
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_exec_sql
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_lookup
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_sql_injection
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_library
sc_warning
sc_webservice
onFilterSave
Aplicação Filtro
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_exec_sql
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_sql_injection
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_library
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onFilterValidate
Aplicação Filtro
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
12
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_format_num
Aplicação Filtro
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_redir
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_set_language
sc_set_regional
sc_set_theme
sc_sql_injection
sc_sql_protect
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_library
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onFooter
Aplicação Gráfico Aplicação Consulta Aplicação ReportPDF

sc_concat sc_concat sc_concat
sc_connection_edit sc_date sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new sc_date_conv sc_connection_new
sc_date sc_date_dif sc_date
sc_date_conv sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif sc_date_empty sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2 sc_format_num sc_date_dif_2
sc_decode sc_format_num_region sc_decode
sc_encode sc_get_language sc_encode
sc_exec_sql sc_get_regional sc_exec_sql
sc_format_num sc_get_theme sc_format_num
sc_get_groupby_rule sc_image sc_get_language
sc_get_language sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_get_theme
sc_get_regional sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao
sc_get_theme sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_lin_cod_barra_banco
sc_include_library sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao
sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_lookup sc_lin_digitavel_banco
sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_rollback_trans sc_lookup
sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_select sc_mail_send
sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_set_fetchmode sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_lookup sc_set_global sc_reset_connection_new
sc_mail_send sc_sql_injection sc_reset_global
sc_make_link sc_sql_protect sc_select
sc_reset_connection_edit sc_time_diff sc_set_fetchmode
sc_reset_connection_new sc_trunc_num sc_set_global
sc_reset_global sc_vl_extenso sc_sql_injection
sc_select sc_where_current sc_time_diff
sc_set_fetchmode sc_where_filter sc_trunc_num
sc_set_global sc_where_orig sc_warning
sc_sql_injection Variables - Authentication sc_where_current
sc_time_diff Variables - Database sc_where_filter
sc_trunc_num Variables - Totalling sc_where_orig
sc_url_library Variables - Totalling (group by) sc_zip_file
sc_warning Variables - Database
sc_webservice Variables - Totalling
sc_where_current
sc_where_filter
sc_where_orig
sc_zip_file
Variables - Totalling
onGroupBy
Aplicação Consulta
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_exec_sql
sc_groupby_label
sc_lookup
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
13
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_sql_injection
sc_sql_protect
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
Aplicação Consulta
sc_where_current
sc_where_filter
sc_where_orig
Variables - Authentication
Variables - Totalling (group by)
onHeader
Aplicação Gráfico Aplicação Consulta Aplicação ReportPDF

sc_change_connection sc_commit_trans sc_change_connection
sc_commit_trans sc_concat sc_commit_trans
sc_concat sc_date sc_concat
sc_connection_edit sc_date_conv sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new sc_date_dif sc_connection_new
sc_date sc_date_dif_2 sc_date
sc_date_conv sc_date_empty sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif sc_decode sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2 sc_encode sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty sc_exec_sql sc_date_empty
sc_decode sc_format_num sc_decode
sc_encode sc_format_num_region sc_encode
sc_exec_sql sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_field_disabled
sc_format_num sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_format_num
sc_get_groupby_rule sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_get_language
sc_get_language sc_lookup sc_get_regional
sc_get_regional sc_mail_send sc_get_theme
sc_get_theme sc_reset_global sc_include
sc_include sc_rollback_trans sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao
sc_include_library sc_select sc_lin_cod_barra_banco
sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_select_order sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao
sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_select_where sc_lin_digitavel_banco
sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_set_fetchmode sc_lookup
sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_set_global sc_mail_send
sc_lookup sc_sql_injection sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_mail_send sc_time_diff sc_reset_connection_new
sc_make_link sc_trunc_num sc_reset_global
sc_reset_connection_edit sc_vl_extenso sc_rollback_trans
sc_reset_connection_new sc_where_current sc_select
sc_reset_global sc_where_filter sc_set_fetchmode
sc_rollback_trans sc_where_orig sc_set_global
sc_select Variables - Database sc_sql_injection
sc_set_fetchmode sc_time_diff
sc_set_global sc_trunc_num
sc_sql_injection sc_user_logout
sc_time_diff sc_warning
sc_trunc_num sc_where_current
sc_url_library sc_where_filter
sc_user_logout sc_where_orig
sc_warning sc_zip_file
sc_webservice Variables - Database
sc_where_current Variables - Totalling
sc_where_filter
sc_where_orig
sc_zip_file
onScriptInit
Aplicação Calendário Aplicação Gráfico Aplicação Consulta Aplicação Formulário Aplicação Controle Aplicação ReportPDF
sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf

sc_apl_status sc_apl_status sc_apl_status sc_apl_status sc_apl_status sc_apl_status
sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans
sc_block_display sc_block_display sc_block_display sc_block_display sc_block_display sc_calc_dv
sc_btn_copy sc_btn_display sc_btn_display sc_btn_copy sc_btn_display sc_change_connection
sc_btn_display sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv sc_btn_display sc_calc_dv sc_commit_trans
sc_calc_dv sc_change_connection sc_change_connection sc_calc_dv sc_change_connection sc_concat
sc_change_connection sc_commit_trans sc_commit_trans sc_change_connection sc_commit_trans sc_connection_edit
sc_commit_trans sc_concat sc_concat sc_commit_trans sc_concat sc_connection_new
sc_concat sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit sc_concat sc_connection_edit sc_date
sc_connection_edit sc_connection_new sc_connection_new sc_connection_edit sc_connection_new sc_date_conv
sc_connection_new sc_date sc_date sc_connection_new sc_date sc_date_dif
sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_conv sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_decode
sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_encode
sc_date_dif_2 sc_decode sc_date_empty sc_date_dif_2 sc_decode sc_exec_sql
sc_date_empty sc_encode sc_decode sc_date_empty sc_encode sc_field_color
sc_decode sc_exec_sql sc_encode sc_decode sc_error_continue sc_field_display
sc_encode sc_field_display sc_exec_sql sc_encode sc_error_exit sc_format_num
sc_exec_sql sc_format_num sc_field_color sc_exec_sql sc_error_message sc_get_theme
sc_exit sc_get_groupby_rule sc_field_display sc_exit sc_exec_sql sc_image
sc_field_display sc_get_language sc_format_num sc_field_display sc_exit sc_include
sc_field_readonly sc_get_regional sc_format_num_region sc_field_readonly sc_field_display sc_label
sc_format_num sc_get_theme sc_get_groupby_rule sc_format_num sc_field_readonly sc_language
sc_form_show sc_image sc_get_language sc_format_num_region sc_format_num sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao
sc_get_language sc_include sc_get_regional sc_form_show sc_format_num_region sc_lin_cod_barra_banco
sc_get_regional sc_include_library sc_get_theme sc_get_language sc_form_show sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao
sc_get_theme sc_label sc_hide_groupby_rule sc_get_regional sc_get_language sc_lin_digitavel_banco
sc_image sc_language sc_image sc_get_theme sc_get_regional sc_lookup
sc_include sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_include sc_image sc_get_theme sc_mail_send
sc_include_library sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_include_lib sc_include sc_image sc_reset_apl_conf
sc_label sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_include_library sc_include_library sc_include sc_reset_apl_status
14
sc_language sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_label sc_label sc_include_library sc_reset_change_connection
sc_lookup sc_lookup sc_language sc_language sc_label sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_mail_send sc_mail_send sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_lookup sc_language sc_reset_connection_new
sc_master_value sc_make_link sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_mail_send sc_lookup sc_set_fetchmode
sc_redir sc_redir sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_master_value sc_mail_send sc_set_global
sc_reset_apl_conf sc_reset_apl_conf sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_redir sc_master_value sc_set_language
sc_reset_apl_status sc_reset_apl_status sc_log_add sc_reset_apl_conf sc_redir sc_set_regional
Aplicação Calendário Aplicação Gráfico Aplicação Consulta Aplicação Formulário Aplicação Controle Aplicação ReportPDF
sc_reset_change_connection sc_reset_change_connection sc_log_split sc_reset_apl_status sc_reset_apl_conf sc_set_theme
sc_reset_connection_edit sc_reset_connection_edit sc_lookup sc_reset_change_connection sc_reset_apl_status sc_site_ssl
sc_reset_connection_new sc_reset_connection_new sc_mail_send sc_reset_connection_edit sc_reset_change_connection sc_sql_injection
sc_reset_global sc_reset_global sc_make_link sc_reset_connection_new sc_reset_connection_edit sc_time_diff
sc_rollback_trans sc_rollback_trans sc_redir sc_reset_global sc_reset_connection_new sc_trunc_num
sc_select sc_select sc_reset_apl_conf sc_rollback_trans sc_reset_global sc_user_logout
sc_set_fetchmode sc_select_field sc_reset_apl_status sc_select sc_select sc_warning
sc_set_global sc_select_order sc_reset_change_connection sc_set_fetchmode sc_set_fetchmode sc_where_current
sc_set_language sc_select_where sc_reset_connection_edit sc_set_global sc_set_focus sc_where_filter
sc_set_regional sc_set_fetchmode sc_reset_connection_new sc_set_language sc_set_global sc_where_orig
sc_set_theme sc_set_global sc_reset_global sc_set_regional sc_set_language sc_zip_file
sc_site_ssl sc_set_language sc_rollback_trans sc_set_theme sc_set_regional Variables - Database
sc_sql_injection sc_set_regional sc_select sc_site_ssl sc_set_theme
sc_time_diff sc_set_theme sc_select_field sc_sql_injection sc_site_ssl
sc_trunc_num sc_site_ssl sc_select_order sc_time_diff sc_sql_injection
sc_url_exit sc_sql_injection sc_select_where sc_trunc_num sc_time_diff
sc_url_library sc_time_diff sc_set_fetchmode sc_url_exit sc_trunc_num
sc_user_logout sc_trunc_num sc_set_global sc_url_library sc_url_exit
sc_warning sc_url_exit sc_set_language sc_user_logout sc_url_library
sc_webservice sc_url_library sc_set_regional sc_warning sc_user_logout
sc_zip_file sc_user_logout sc_set_theme sc_webservice sc_warning
sc_warning sc_site_ssl sc_zip_file sc_webservice
sc_webservice sc_sql_injection Variables - Authentication sc_zip_file
sc_where_current sc_sql_protect
sc_where_filter sc_time_diff
sc_where_orig sc_trunc_num
sc_zip_file sc_url_exit
Variables - Database sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_where_current
sc_where_filter
sc_where_orig
sc_zip_file
Variables - Authentication
onLoad
Aplicação Calendário Aplicação Formulário Aplicação Controle Aplicação Menu Aplicação Menu árvore
sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans sc_alert sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf

sc_block_display sc_block_display sc_begin_trans sc_apl_status sc_apl_status
sc_btn_copy sc_btn_copy sc_block_display sc_appmenu_add_item sc_appmenu_add_item
sc_btn_display sc_btn_display sc_btn_display sc_appmenu_create sc_appmenu_create
sc_btn_new sc_btn_new sc_calc_dv sc_appmenu_exist_item sc_appmenu_exist_item
sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv sc_change_connection sc_appmenu_remove_item sc_appmenu_remove_item
sc_change_connection sc_change_connection sc_commit_trans sc_appmenu_reset sc_appmenu_reset
sc_commit_trans sc_commit_trans sc_concat sc_appmenu_update_item sc_appmenu_update_item
sc_concat sc_concat sc_connection_edit sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans
sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit sc_connection_new sc_btn_disable sc_btn_disable
sc_connection_new sc_connection_new sc_date sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv
sc_date sc_date sc_date_conv sc_commit_trans sc_commit_trans
sc_date_conv sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_concat sc_concat
sc_date_dif sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit
sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_empty sc_connection_new sc_connection_new
sc_date_empty sc_date_empty sc_decode sc_date sc_date
sc_decode sc_decode sc_encode sc_date_dif sc_date_dif
sc_encode sc_encode sc_error_exit sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2
sc_exec_sql sc_exec_sql sc_error_message sc_decode sc_decode
sc_field_disabled sc_field_disabled sc_exec_sql sc_encode sc_encode
sc_field_display sc_field_display sc_field_disabled sc_exec_sql sc_exec_sql
sc_field_readonly sc_field_readonly sc_field_display sc_format_num sc_format_num
sc_format_num sc_format_num sc_field_readonly sc_format_num_region sc_format_num_region
sc_form_show sc_format_num_region sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_language
sc_get_language sc_form_show sc_format_num_region sc_get_regional sc_get_regional
sc_get_regional sc_get_language sc_form_show sc_get_theme sc_get_theme
sc_get_theme sc_get_regional sc_get_language sc_image sc_image
sc_image sc_get_theme sc_get_regional sc_include sc_include
sc_include sc_image sc_get_theme sc_include_library sc_include_library
sc_include_library sc_include sc_image sc_language sc_language
sc_label sc_include_library sc_include_library sc_lookup sc_lookup
sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_label sc_label sc_mail_send sc_mail_send
sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_lookup sc_menu_delete sc_menu_delete
sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_mail_send sc_menu_disable sc_menu_disable
sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_master_value sc_menu_force_mobile sc_menu_force_mobile
sc_log_split sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_redir sc_redir sc_redir
sc_lookup sc_log_split sc_reset_connection_edit sc_reset_apl_conf sc_reset_apl_conf
sc_mail_send sc_lookup sc_reset_connection_new sc_reset_apl_status sc_reset_apl_status
sc_master_value sc_mail_send sc_reset_global sc_reset_change_connection sc_reset_change_connection
sc_redir sc_master_value sc_rollback_trans sc_reset_connection_edit sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_reset_connection_edit sc_redir sc_select sc_reset_connection_new sc_reset_connection_new
sc_reset_connection_new sc_reset_connection_edit sc_set_fetchmode sc_reset_global sc_reset_global
sc_reset_global sc_reset_connection_new sc_set_focus sc_reset_menu_delete sc_reset_menu_delete
sc_rollback_trans sc_reset_global sc_set_global sc_reset_menu_disable sc_reset_menu_disable
sc_select sc_rollback_trans sc_site_ssl sc_rollback_trans sc_rollback_trans
sc_set_fetchmode sc_select sc_sql_injection sc_select sc_select
sc_set_focus sc_set_fetchmode sc_sql_protect sc_set_fetchmode sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global sc_set_focus sc_time_diff sc_set_global sc_set_global
sc_site_ssl sc_set_global sc_trunc_num sc_set_language sc_set_language
sc_sql_injection sc_site_ssl sc_url_exit sc_set_regional sc_set_regional
sc_time_diff sc_sql_injection sc_url_library sc_set_theme sc_set_theme
sc_trunc_num sc_time_diff sc_user_logout sc_site_ssl sc_site_ssl
sc_url_exit sc_trunc_num sc_warning sc_sql_injection sc_sql_injection
sc_url_library sc_url_exit sc_webservice sc_time_diff sc_time_diff
sc_user_logout sc_url_library sc_zip_file sc_trunc_num sc_trunc_num
sc_warning sc_user_logout Variables - Database sc_url_library sc_url_library
sc_webservice sc_warning sc_warning sc_warning
sc_zip_file sc_webservice sc_webservice sc_webservice
sc_zip_file sc_zip_file sc_zip_file
15
Variables - Database Variables - Database
onNavigate
Aplicação Calendário Aplicação Formulário Aplicação Controle Aplicação Menu Aplicação Menu árvore
Aplicação Consulta Aplicação Formulário
sc_calc_dv sc_block_display
sc_commit_trans sc_btn_display
sc_concat sc_calc_dv
sc_date sc_commit_trans
sc_date_conv sc_concat
sc_date_dif sc_connection_edit
sc_date_dif_2 sc_connection_new
sc_date_empty sc_date
sc_decode sc_date_conv
sc_encode sc_date_dif
sc_exec_sql sc_date_dif_2
sc_format_num sc_date_empty
sc_format_num_region sc_decode
sc_get_groupby_rule sc_encode
sc_get_language sc_error_exit
sc_get_regional sc_error_message
sc_get_theme sc_exec_sql
sc_include sc_field_disabled
sc_label sc_field_display
sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_field_readonly
sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_format_num
sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_format_num_region
sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_get_language
sc_lookup sc_get_regional
sc_make_link sc_get_theme
sc_rollback_trans sc_include
sc_select sc_include_library
sc_set_fetchmode sc_label
sc_sql_injection sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao
sc_sql_protect sc_lin_cod_barra_banco
sc_time_diff sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao
sc_trunc_num sc_lin_digitavel_banco
sc_vl_extenso sc_lookup
sc_where_current sc_mail_send
sc_where_filter sc_master_value
sc_where_orig sc_reset_connection_edit
Variables - Database sc_reset_connection_new
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onRecord
Aplicação Consulta Aplicação Formulário Aplicação ReportPDF

sc_calc_dv sc_block_display sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans sc_btn_display sc_change_connection
sc_concat sc_calc_dv sc_commit_trans
sc_date sc_change_connection sc_concat
sc_date_conv sc_commit_trans sc_connection_edit
sc_date_dif sc_concat sc_connection_new
sc_date_dif_2 sc_connection_edit sc_date
sc_date_empty sc_connection_new sc_date_conv
sc_decode sc_date sc_date_dif
sc_encode sc_date_conv sc_date_dif_2
sc_exec_sql sc_date_dif sc_date_empty
sc_field_color sc_date_dif_2 sc_decode
sc_field_style sc_date_empty sc_encode
sc_format_num sc_decode sc_exec_sql
sc_format_num_region sc_encode sc_field_color
sc_get_groupby_rule sc_exec_sql sc_get_language
sc_get_language sc_field_disabled_record sc_get_regional
sc_get_regional sc_field_display sc_get_theme
sc_get_theme sc_field_readonly sc_include
sc_include sc_format_num sc_link
sc_include_library sc_format_num_region sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao
sc_link sc_get_language sc_lin_cod_barra_banco
sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_get_regional sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao
sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_get_theme sc_lin_digitavel_banco
sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_image sc_lookup
sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_include sc_mail_send
sc_lookup sc_include_library sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_mail_send sc_label sc_reset_connection_new
sc_make_link sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_reset_global
sc_reset_global sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_rollback_trans
sc_rollback_trans sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_select
sc_select sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_set_fetchmode
sc_seq_register sc_lookup sc_set_global
sc_set_fetchmode sc_mail_send sc_sql_injection
sc_set_global sc_master_value sc_sql_protect
sc_sql_injection sc_reset_connection_edit sc_time_diff
sc_sql_protect sc_reset_connection_new sc_trunc_num
sc_text_style sc_reset_global sc_url_exit
sc_time_diff sc_rollback_trans sc_user_logout
16
sc_trunc_num sc_select sc_warning
sc_vl_extenso sc_set_fetchmode sc_where_current
sc_where_current sc_set_global sc_where_filter
sc_where_filter sc_site_ssl sc_where_orig
sc_where_orig sc_sql_injection sc_zip_file
Variables - Database sc_time_diff Variables - Database
Variables - Totalling sc_trunc_num Variables - Totalling
Aplicação Consulta Aplicação Formulário Aplicação ReportPDF
sc_url_exit
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onRefresh

sc_block_display sc_block_display sc_block_display
sc_btn_display sc_btn_display sc_btn_display
sc_commit_trans sc_commit_trans sc_changed
sc_concat sc_concat sc_commit_trans
sc_date sc_date sc_concat
sc_date_conv sc_date_conv sc_connection_edit
sc_date_dif sc_date_dif sc_connection_new
sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2 sc_date
sc_date_empty sc_date_empty sc_date_conv
sc_decode sc_decode sc_date_dif
sc_encode sc_encode sc_date_dif_2
sc_exec_sql sc_exec_sql sc_date_empty
sc_field_display sc_field_display sc_decode
sc_field_readonly sc_field_readonly sc_encode
sc_format_num sc_format_num sc_error_exit
sc_get_language sc_format_num_region sc_error_message
sc_get_regional sc_get_language sc_exec_sql
sc_get_theme sc_get_regional sc_field_display
sc_include sc_get_theme sc_field_readonly
sc_include_library sc_include sc_format_num
sc_label sc_include_library sc_format_num_region
sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_label sc_get_language
sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_get_regional
sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_get_theme
sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_include
sc_lookup sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_include_library
sc_mail_send sc_lookup sc_lookup
sc_master_value sc_mail_send sc_mail_send
sc_reset_global sc_master_value sc_master_value
sc_rollback_trans sc_reset_global sc_redir
sc_select sc_rollback_trans sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_set_fetchmode sc_select sc_reset_connection_new
sc_set_focus sc_set_fetchmode sc_rollback_trans
sc_set_global sc_set_focus sc_select
sc_site_ssl sc_set_global sc_set_fetchmode
sc_sql_injection sc_site_ssl sc_set_focus
sc_time_diff sc_sql_injection sc_set_global
sc_trunc_num sc_time_diff sc_sql_injection
sc_url_exit sc_trunc_num sc_time_diff
sc_url_library sc_url_exit sc_trunc_num
sc_warning sc_url_library sc_url_library
sc_webservice sc_warning sc_warning
sc_zip_file sc_webservice sc_webservice
sc_zip_file sc_zip_file
onValidate
sc_ajax_javascript sc_ajax_javascript sc_alert

sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans sc_apl_conf
sc_block_display sc_block_display sc_apl_status
sc_btn_delete sc_btn_delete sc_begin_trans
sc_btn_insert sc_btn_insert sc_calc_dv
sc_btn_update sc_btn_update sc_commit_trans
sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv sc_concat
sc_changed sc_changed sc_connection_edit
sc_commit_trans sc_commit_trans sc_connection_new
sc_concat sc_concat sc_date
sc_date sc_date sc_date_conv
sc_date_conv sc_date_conv sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2 sc_decode
sc_date_empty sc_date_empty sc_encode
sc_decode sc_decode sc_error_exit
sc_encode sc_encode sc_error_message
sc_error_exit sc_error_exit sc_exec_sql
sc_error_message sc_error_message sc_field_display
sc_exec_sql sc_exec_sql sc_field_readonly
sc_field_display sc_field_display sc_format_num_region
sc_field_readonly sc_field_readonly sc_get_theme
sc_format_num sc_format_num sc_include
sc_form_show sc_format_num_region sc_include_library
sc_get_language sc_form_show sc_language
sc_get_regional sc_get_language sc_ldap_login
sc_get_theme sc_get_regional sc_ldap_logout
sc_image sc_get_theme sc_ldap_search
sc_include sc_image sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao
sc_include_library sc_include sc_lin_cod_barra_banco
sc_ldap_login sc_include_library sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao
sc_ldap_logout sc_ldap_login sc_lin_digitavel_banco
17
sc_ldap_search sc_ldap_logout sc_lookup
sc_log_add sc_ldap_search sc_mail_send
sc_lookup sc_log_add sc_make_link
sc_mail_send sc_lookup sc_redir
sc_master_value sc_mail_send sc_reset_apl_conf
sc_redir sc_master_value sc_reset_apl_status
sc_reset_global sc_redir sc_reset_change_connection
sc_rollback_trans sc_reset_global sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_select sc_rollback_trans sc_reset_connection_new
sc_set_fetchmode sc_select sc_reset_global
sc_set_global sc_set_fetchmode sc_rollback_trans
sc_site_ssl sc_set_global sc_select
sc_sql_injection sc_site_ssl sc_set_fetchmode
sc_sql_protect sc_sql_injection sc_set_global
sc_time_diff sc_sql_protect sc_set_language
sc_trunc_num sc_time_diff sc_set_regional
sc_url_exit sc_trunc_num sc_set_theme
sc_url_library sc_url_exit sc_site_ssl
sc_user_logout sc_url_library sc_sql_injection
sc_warning sc_user_logout sc_sql_protect
sc_webservice sc_warning sc_time_diff
sc_zip_file sc_webservice sc_trunc_num
sc_zip_file sc_url_exit
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onValidateFailure

sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans sc_apl_conf
sc_block_display sc_block_display sc_apl_status
sc_btn_delete sc_btn_delete sc_begin_trans
sc_btn_insert sc_btn_insert sc_calc_dv
sc_btn_update sc_btn_update sc_commit_trans
sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv sc_concat
sc_changed sc_changed sc_connection_edit
sc_commit_trans sc_commit_trans sc_connection_new
sc_date_empty sc_date_empty sc_decode
sc_decode sc_decode sc_encode
sc_encode sc_encode sc_error_exit
sc_error_exit sc_error_exit sc_error_message
sc_error_message sc_error_message sc_exec_sql
sc_exec_sql sc_exec_sql sc_field_display
sc_field_display sc_field_display sc_field_readonly
sc_field_readonly sc_field_readonly sc_format_num
sc_format_num sc_format_num sc_format_num_region
sc_get_language sc_format_num_region sc_get_language
sc_get_regional sc_get_language sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme sc_get_regional sc_get_theme
sc_include sc_get_theme sc_image
sc_mail_send sc_include_library sc_include_library
sc_master_value sc_mail_send sc_lookup
sc_reset_global sc_master_value sc_mail_send
sc_rollback_trans sc_reset_global sc_redir
sc_select sc_rollback_trans sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_set_fetchmode sc_select sc_reset_connection_new
sc_set_global sc_set_fetchmode sc_reset_global
sc_site_ssl sc_set_global sc_rollback_trans
sc_sql_injection sc_site_ssl sc_select
sc_time_diff sc_sql_injection sc_set_fetchmode
sc_trunc_num sc_time_diff sc_set_global
sc_url_exit sc_trunc_num sc_site_ssl
sc_url_library sc_url_exit sc_sql_injection
sc_warning sc_url_library sc_time_diff
sc_webservice sc_warning sc_trunc_num
sc_zip_file sc_webservice sc_url_exit
sc_zip_file sc_url_library
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onValidateSuccess
sc_ajax_javascript sc_ajax_javascript sc_apl_conf

sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans sc_apl_status
sc_block_display sc_block_display sc_begin_trans
sc_btn_delete sc_btn_delete sc_calc_dv
sc_btn_display sc_btn_display sc_commit_trans
sc_btn_insert sc_btn_insert sc_concat
sc_btn_update sc_btn_update sc_connection_edit
sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv sc_connection_new
sc_changed sc_changed sc_date
sc_commit_trans sc_commit_trans sc_date_conv
sc_concat sc_concat sc_date_dif
sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit sc_date_dif_2
sc_connection_new sc_connection_new sc_decode
sc_date sc_date sc_encode
sc_date_conv sc_date_conv sc_error_exit
18
sc_date_dif sc_date_dif sc_error_message
sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2 sc_exec_sql
sc_date_empty sc_date_empty sc_format_num
sc_decode sc_decode sc_format_num_region
sc_encode sc_encode sc_get_language
sc_error_exit sc_error_exit sc_get_regional
sc_error_message sc_error_message sc_get_theme
sc_exec_sql sc_exec_sql sc_image
sc_field_display sc_field_display sc_include
sc_field_readonly sc_field_readonly sc_include_library
sc_format_num sc_format_num sc_language
sc_get_language sc_format_num_region sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao
sc_get_regional sc_get_language sc_lin_cod_barra_banco
sc_get_theme sc_get_regional sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao
sc_include sc_get_theme sc_lin_digitavel_banco
sc_include_library sc_include sc_lookup
sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_include_library sc_mail_send
sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_make_link
sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_redir
sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_reset_apl_conf
sc_lookup sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_reset_apl_status
sc_mail_send sc_lookup sc_reset_change_connection
sc_redir sc_mail_send sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_reset_connection_edit sc_redir sc_reset_connection_new
sc_reset_connection_new sc_reset_connection_edit sc_reset_global
sc_reset_global sc_reset_connection_new sc_rollback_trans
sc_rollback_trans sc_reset_global sc_select
sc_select sc_rollback_trans sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_fetchmode sc_select sc_set_global
sc_set_focus sc_set_fetchmode sc_set_language
sc_set_global sc_set_focus sc_set_regional
sc_site_ssl sc_set_global sc_set_theme
sc_sql_injection sc_site_ssl sc_site_ssl
sc_time_diff sc_sql_injection sc_sql_injection
sc_trunc_num sc_time_diff sc_time_diff
sc_url_exit sc_trunc_num sc_trunc_num
sc_url_library sc_url_exit sc_url_exit
sc_user_logout sc_url_library sc_url_library
sc_warning sc_user_logout sc_user_logout
sc_webservice sc_warning sc_warning
sc_zip_file sc_webservice sc_webservice
sc_zip_file sc_zip_file

Manual Scriptcase9 En-Us PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Scriptcase9 En-Us PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1

How does ScriptCase work?

Which source code is generated?

For your first access, the username and password is admin .

The installation process will be described according to the Operating System.

Supported Operational Systems:

For Windows 7, it is required to have the modules below installed:

Microsoft Redistributable Visual C++ Packages (2008, 2012, 2013, 2015).

That is what will be installed automatically on your Operating System:

Apache Web Server 2.4.15

PHP 7.0 with the extensions mbstring, zip and gd enabled.

Source Guardian 11.0.6

This manual describes the ScriptCase installation in 2 steps:

1: Select the installer configurations.

Selecting the configurations on the installer

This window displays the installer “Welcome” message.

Click on Next to continue.

Click on Next to continue.

Installation Directory : Define the installation path for ScriptCase.

: This button allows you to select a directory or create a new folder.

Click on Next to continue.

PHP Timezone: Select your Timezone.

Click on Next to continue.

Click on Next to install ScriptCase.

Progress Bar : Displays the overall progress of installation.

7 - Allow the Apache to run in a private and public network (Firewall)

8 - Completing the Installation.

Open Scriptcase 9.0 : When clicking on finish, ScriptCase will start.

Click on “Finish” to complete the process.

That is what will be installed automatically on your Operating System:

Apache Web Server 2.4

PHP 7.0 with the extensions mbstring, zip and gd enabled.

This manual describes the ScriptCase installation in 3 steps:

1: Execute the ScriptCase Installer.

2: Select the installer configurations.

Executing the ScriptCase Installer

Ex: user@computer:~$ cd /folder/of/download

Ex: user@computer:~/folder/of/download$ sudo su

3 - Give permissions to run the installation file.

Ex: user@computer:~/folder/of/downloads$ chmod 777 scriptcase_linux_installer_x86_64_en_us_v9.0.000.run

4 - Execute the installation file.

Ex: user@computer:~/folder/of/downloads$ ./scriptcase_linux_installer_x86_64_en_us_v9.0.000.run

Selecting the configurations on the installer

This window displays the installer “Welcome” message.

Click on Next to continue.

Click on Next to continue.

Installation Directory : Define the installation path for ScriptCase.

: This button allows you to select a directory or create a new folder.

Click on Next to continue.

PHP Timezone: Select your Timezone.

Click on Next to continue.

Click on Next to install ScriptCase.

Progress Bar : Displays the overall installation progress.

7 - Completing the Installation.

Open Scriptcase 9.0 : When clicking on finish, ScriptCase will start.

Click on “Finish” to complete the process.

That is what will be installed automatically on your Operating System:

Apache Web Server 2.4.15

PHP 7.0 with the extensions mbstring, zip and gd enabled.

Source Guardian 11.0.6

This manual describes the installation of ScriptCase in 2 steps:

1: Select the installer configurations.

Selecting the configurations on the installer